Seat Ateca 2018 User Manual

Owner’s manual

SEAT Ateca

575012720BH

Inglés

575012720BH (11.18)

SEAT Ateca Inglés (11.18)

SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to understand,

that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no

right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.

All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or

omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.

Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.

SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act.

All rights on changes are reserved.

❀

This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.

Vehicle identiﬁcation data

Model:

Vehicle Registration:

Vehicle identification

number:

Date of vehicle registration

or vehicle delivery:

SEAT Official Service:

Service advisor:

Telephone:

Conﬁrmation of receipt of documentation

and vehicle keys

The following items were delivered

with the vehicle:

YES NO

On-board documentation

First key

Second key

Correct working order of all keys was

checked

Location:

Date:

Signature of owner:

Introduction

Thank you f

or your trust choosing a SEAT v

hicl

With your new SEAT, you will be able to enjoy

a vehicle with state-of-the-art technology

and top quality features.

We recommend reading this Instruction Man-

ual carefully to learn more about your vehicle

so you can enjoy all its benefits in your daily

driving.

Information about handling is complemented

with instructions regarding the operation and

maintenance of the vehicle in order to ensure

its safety and maintain its value. Moreover, we

want to give you valuable advice and tips to

drive your vehicle efficiently and respecting

the environment.

We wish you safe and enjoyable motoring.

SEAT, S.A.

WARNING

Read and always observe safety infor-

mation concerning the passenger's

front airbag

›

››

page 81, Important in-

formation regarding the front passeng-

er's airbag.

About this manual

This manual describes the f

eat

es of the ve-

hicle at the time of drafting this text. Some of

the features described below will be intro-

duced in the future or will only be available in

certain markets.

Some of the features described here are

not included in all the types or variations

of the model and they can be varied or

modified based on technical or marketing

requirements without it being considered

misleading advertising.

Some details on the drawings may vary from

its vehicle and must be interpreted as a

standard representation.

The direction indicators (left, right, forwards,

backwards) in this manual refer to the travel

direction of the vehicle unless otherwise sta-

ted.

The audiovisual material is only meant to

help the users better understand some fea-

tures of the car. It is not a replacement for the

instruction manual. Access the instruction

manual to see the complete information and

warnings.

The features marked with an asterisk

are included by default only in certain

versions of the model, supplied as op-

tional only for certain versions or only of-

fered in certain countries.



Trademarks are marked with ®. The ab-

sence of this symbol does not guarantee

that the term is not a trademark.

It indicates that the section continues on

the next page.

Important warnings on the page.

Related video

Fig. 25 Vehicle interior

Depending on version/market.

The essentials

Front airbags

Fig. 26

Driver airbag located in steering

wheel

Fig. 27 Front passenger airbag located in

dash panel

The front airbag for the driver is located in the

eering wheel

›

Fig. 26 and the airbag for

the front passenger is located in the dash

panel

›››

Fig. 27. Airbags are identified by the

word “AIRBAG”.

When the driver and front passenger airbags

are deployed, the covers remain attached to

the steering wheel and dashboard, respec-

tively

›››

Fig. 26

›››

Fig. 27.

In conjunction with the seat belts, the front

airbag system gives the front occupants ad-

ditional protection for the head and chest in

the event of a severe frontal collision

›››

ont airbags on page 76

Their special design all

ows the controlled es-

cape of the propellant gas when an occu-

pant puts pressure on the bag. Thus, the

head and chest are protected by the airbag.

After the collision, the airbag deflates suffi-

ciently to allow visibility.



›››

page 76

The essentials

Deactivating the front passenger

ont airbag

Fig. 28

Front passenger front airbag switch.

Fig. 29 Dashboard: control lamp for deactiva-

ed fr

ont passenger airbag in centr

e console.

To deactivate the front passenger front

airbag:

●

Switch the ignition off.

●

Open the door on the front passenger side.

●

Insert the k

ey int

o the sl

ot of the switch for

deactivating the front passenger airbag

›››

Fig. 28. About 3/4 of the key should enter;

this is as far as it will go.

●

Turn the key gently to the  position. If you

have difficulty, ensure that you have inserted

the key as far as it will go.

●

Close the front passenger door.

●

Check, with the ignition switched on, that

the   control lamp remains lit where it

says      in the centre of the

dash panel

›››

Fig. 29.



›››

in Activation and deactivation

of front passenger airbag* on

page 79



›

››

page 78

Knee airbag*

Fig. 30

On the driver side: location of airbag

or knees.

Fig. 31 On the driver side: action radius of air-

bag f

or knees.

The knee airbag is located on the driver side

bel

w the dash panel

›

››

Fig. 30. Airbags are

identified by the word “AIRBAG”.

The area framed in red (deployment area)

›››

Fig. 31 is covered by the knee airbag when

The essentials

it is deployed. Objects should never be

aced or mount

ed in this ar

ea.



›››

page 7

Side airbags*

Fig. 32

Side airbag in driver's seat.

Fig. 33

Illustration of completely inflated side

airbags on the l

eft side of the v

ehicl

The side airbags are located in the driver's

seat and fr

ont passenger seat backr

ests

›

››

Fig. 32. The locations are identified by the

text “AIRBAG” in the upper region of the

backrests.

In conjunction with the seat belts, the side air-

bag system provides additional protection for

the upper body in the event of a severe side

collision

›››

in Side airbags* on

page 7

In a side collision, the side airbags r

educe the

risk of injury to passengers to the areas of the

body facing the impact. In addition to their

normal protection, the seat belts also hold

the passengers in the event of a side collision;

this is how these airbags provide maximum

protection.



›››

page 7

Head-protection airbags*

Fig. 34

Location of head-protection airbags.

The head-protection airbags are located on

both sides in the int

erior abo

e the doors

›››

Fig. 34 and are identified with the text

“AIRBAG”.

In conjunction with the seat belts, the head-

protection airbag system gives the vehicle

occupants additional protection for the head

and upper body in the event of a severe side

collision

›››

in Curtain airbags* on

page 7



›

››

in Curtain airbags* on

page 78

The essentials

Child seats

ed video

Fig. 35 Vehicle interior

Important information regarding

the fr

ont passenger

's airbag

Fig. 36 Airbag adhesives - version 1: on the

passenger

-side sun blind  and on the r

ear

ame of the front passenger's door .

Fig. 37

Airbag adhesives - version 2: on the

passenger

-side sun blind  and on the r

ear

ame of the front passenger's door .

A sticker with important information about the

passenger airbag is l

ocat

ed on the passeng-

's sun visor and/or on the passenger side

door frame.



›››

in Important information re-

garding the front passenger

's airbag

on page 81



›››

page 80

The essentials

Securing a child seat with the seat belt

Fig. 38 On rear seats: possible assemblies of chil-

dren seats.

Figure

›

Fig. 38

shows the basic child re-

str

aint syst

em mounting using l

ower retaining

rings and the upper retaining strap. Figure

›››

Fig. 38

shows the child restraint system

mounting using the v

ehicl

e seat belt.

The seat belt may be used t

o secure univer-

sal type child seats to the vehicle seats

marked with a U in the table below.

●

In the passenger seat without height regu-

lation: the passenger seat must be in its rear-

most position

●

In the passenger seat with height regula-

tion: the passenger seat must be in its rear-

most and highest position

To correctly use a child seat in the back, the

front backrest must be adjusted so that there

is no contact with the child seat in the back in

the case that it goes opposite to the direction

of the car. In the case of front facing restraint

systems, the front backrest must be adjusted

so that there is no contact with the child's

feet.

To adjust the passenger seat to accommo-

date a child's seat and get the seat belt in a

perfect position, adjust the passenger back-

rest as far forward as possible

If a semi-universal type chair is to be instal-

led, in which the method of attachment to the

car is through the seat belt and support

bracket, it should never be installed in the

central rear seat as the ground clearance is

lower than in other places and the support

bracket will not allow the seat to remain suffi-

ciently stable.

The systems include the child restraint

system mounting with an upper retaining

Compliance with current national legislation

and the manufactur

er's instructions is required

when using or installing child seats.

The essentials

strap (Top Tether) and lower anchoring

points on the seat.

Weight group

Seating position

Front passenger seat

Rear side seat Rear central seat

airbag on airbag off

Group 0 to 10 kg X U

U U

Group 0+ to 13 kg X U

U U

Group I 9 to 18 kg X U

U U

Group II 15 to 25 kg X UF

UF UF

Group III 22 to 36 kg X UF

UF UF

X: It is not compatible to install chairs in this configuration.

U: Suit

able f

or universal restraint systems for use in this weight group.

UF: Acceptable for front-facing universal-category child restraint systems approved for this mass group.

Compliance with current national legislation and the manufacturer's instructions is required when using or installing child seats.

For semi-universal chairs where the securing system is the car safety belt and the support bracket, do not use them in the centre rear seat.

Seats without height adjustment shoul

d be pl

aced in their r

earmost position. Seats with height adjustment should be placed in their rearmost and highest position.



›››

in Safety instructions on

page 82

The essentials

Securing a child seat with the ISOFIX/i-Size and Top Tether system*

Fig. 39 ISOFIX/i-Size securing rings.

Fig. 40 Position of the Top Tether rings on the

back of the rear seat.

Child seats can be secured quickly, easily

and saf

ely on the r

ear out

er seats with the

“ISOFIX” and Top Tether* system.

Two “ISOFIX” retaining rings are fitted on each

rear side seat. In some vehicles, the rings are

secured to the seat frame and, in others, they

are secured to the rear floor. The “ISOFIX”

rings are located between the rear seat

backrest and the seat cushioning

›››

Fig. 39.

The Top Tether* rings are located on the rear

part of the backrests of the rear side seats

(behind the seat backrest or in the boot)

›››

Fig. 40.

To understand the compatibility of the “ISO-

FIX” systems in the vehicle, check the table

below.

The body weight permitted and information

regarding sizes A to F is indicated on the label

on child seats with “universal” or “semi-uni-

versal” certification.

Weight group Size class

Electrical

equipment

Vehicle Isofix positions

Front passenger seat

Rear side seat Rear central seat

airbag on airbag off

Baby carrier

F ISO/L1 X X X X

G ISO/L2 X X X X

Group 0 to 10 kg E ISO/R1 X X IL X

The essentials

Weight group Size class

Electrical

equipment

Vehicle Isofix positions

Front passenger seat

Rear side seat Rear central seat

airbag on airbag off

Group 0+ to 13 kg

E ISO/R1 X X IL X

D ISO/R2 X X IL X

C ISO/R3 X X IL X

Group I 9 to 18 kg

D ISO/R2 X X IL X

C ISO/R3 X X IL X

B ISO/F2 X X IUF/IL X

B1 ISO/F2X X X IUF/IL X

A ISO/F3 X X IUF/IL X

Group II 15 to 25 kg --- --- --- ---

Group III 22 to 36 kg --- --- --- ---

IUF: Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX universal child restraint systems approved for use in this mass group.

IL: Suitabl

e for certain ISOFIX child restraint systems (CRSs) listed in the attached list. This relates to ISOFIX CRSs that can be for the specific vehicle, restricted or semi-

universal categories.

X: ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems for this weight group or size class.

The essentials

Securing the child seat with the “ISOFIX/i-

Siz

e syst

em”

ou are obliged to follow the seat manufac-

turer's instructions.

●

Press the child seat onto the “ISOFIX” re-

taining rings

›››

Fig. 39 until the child seat is

heard to engage securely. If the child seat is

equipped with Top Tether* anchor points, se-

cure it to the corresponding ring

›››

page 31. Observe the manufacturer's in-

structions.

●

Pull on both sides of the child seat to ensure

that it is properly anchored.

Child seats with the “ISOFIX” and Top Tether*

attachment system are available from Tech-

nical Services.

Vehicle i-Size positions

Front passenger seat

Rear side seat Rear central seat

airbag on airbag off

Child restraint system approved under ECE R129 X X i-U X

i-U: Valid position for front-facing and rear-facing child restraint systems approved under ECE R129.

: Invalid position f

or child restraint systems approved under ECE R129.



›››

in Safety instructions on

page 82

The essentials

Securing a child seat with the Top

ether* r

aining straps

Fig. 41 Retainer strap: adjustment and assem-

bly accor

ding t

o the T

op Tether belt.

Fig. 42 Rear part of the rear seats: securing

rings for the Top T

ether strap.

Child seats with the Top Tether system come

with a str

ap f

or securing the seat t

o the vehi-

cle anchor point, located at the back of the

rear seat backrest and provide greater re-

straint.

The objective of this strap is to reduce for-

ward movements of the child seat in a crash,

to reduce the risk of injuries to the head from

hitting the inside of the vehicle.

Using the Top Tether in rear-facing moun-

ted seats

Currently, there are very few rear-facing child

safety seats that have Top Tether. Please

carefully read and follow the seat manufac-

turer instructions to learn the proper way to

install the Top Tether strap.

Securing the retaining strap

●

Follow the manufacturer's instructions to

deploy the child seat Top Tether retaining

strap.

●

Place the belt under the head restraint of

the back seat

›››

Fig. 41 (depending on the in-

structions of the chair itself, lift or remove the

head restraint if necessary).

●

Slide the strap and secure it properly with

the anchorage of the backrest

›››

Fig. 42.

●

Firmly tighten the strap following the manu-

facturer's instructions.

Releasing the retaining strap

●

Loosen the strap following the manufactur-

er's instructions.

●

Push the lock and release it from the an-

choring support.



›››

in Safety instructions on

page 82

The essentials

Starting the vehicle

Ignition l

ock

Fig. 43

Ignition key positions.

Turn on the ignition: place the key in the igni-

tion and st

art the engine

ocking and unlocking the steering wheel

●

Lock the steering wheel: remove the key

from the ignition and turn the wheel until it

locks. Depending on the country, in vehicles

with automatic transmission, in order to re-

move the key, move the gear shift to the P po-

sition. If necessary, press the gear shift block-

ing key and release it.

●

Unlock the steering wheel: put the key into

the ignition and turn it at the same time as the

steering wheel in the direction indicated by

the arrow. If it is not possible to turn the steer-

ing wheel, it may be because it is locked.

Turning on/switching off the ignition, glow

plugs reheating

●

Turn on the ignition: turn the key to the

position.

●

Turn off the ignition: turn the key to the

position.

●

Diesel vehicles : the gl

w plugs r

eheat

when the ignition is switched on.

Starting the engine

●

Manual transmission: press the clutch ped-

al all the way down and move the gearbox

lever into neutral.

●

Automatic transmission: press the brake

pedal and move the selector lever to the P

position or into N.

●

Turn the key to the

position. The key au-

omatically r

urns to the

position. Do not

ess the accel

ator.

Start-Stop system*

When you stop and release the clutch pedal,

the Start-Stop system* turns off the engine.

The ignition remains switched on.



›››

in Switching the ignition on and

starting the engine with the k

ey on

page 240



›››

page 239

Lights and visibility

ed video

Fig. 44 Lights and visibil-

Light switch

Fig. 45

Instrument console: light panel.

●

Turn the switch to the required position

›

Fig. 45.

The essentials

Sym-

bol

Ignition switch-

ed off

Ignition is

switched on



og lights, dipped

beam and side

lights off.

Daylight running

lights switched on.





The “Coming

home”, “Leaving

home” and Wel

come lights may be

switched on.

Automatic control

of dipped beam

and daytime run-

ning light.



Side light on.

Daylight running

lights switched on.



Dipped beam head-

light off

Dipped beam

switched on.

 Fog lights: mo

ve the switch to the first po-

sition, from positions ,  or .

 Rear fog light: move the switch complete-

ly from positions ,  or .

●

Turn on fog lights: push the switch or turn it

to the  position.



››

›

in Side light and dipped beam

headlight on page 148



›››

page 14

Turn signal and main beam lever

Fig. 46

Turn signal and main beam lever.

More the lever to the required position:

Right t

urn light: right

-hand parking light

(ignition s

witched off).

Left turn light: left-hand parking light (ig-

nition switched off).

Main beam on: control lamp  lit up on

the instrument panel.

Light flash: on with the lever pushed. Con-

trol lamp  lit up.

Lever all the way down to switch it off.



›››

in Turn signal and main beam

lever on page 149



›››

page 14

Hazard warning lights

Fig. 47

Dashboard: switch for hazard warning

lights.

Switched on, for example:

●

When approaching a traffic jam

●

In an emergency

●

The vehicle has broken down

●

When towing or being towed



›››

in Hazard warning lights  on

page 153



›››

page 152

The essentials

Interior lights

Fig. 48

Detail of headliner: front interior light-

ing.

Knob Function



Switches interior lights off.



Switches interior lights on.

Central po-

sition



Door contact switch-on.

The int

erior lights come on automati-

cally when the v

ehicle is unlocked, a

door is opened or the key is removed

from the ignition.

The light goes off a few seconds af-

ter all the doors are closed, the vehi-

cle is locked or the ignition is switch-

ed on.



Turning the reading light on and off

Depending on version.

Ambient light*: light guide on door panel.

Lighting can be sel

ect

ed fr

om 8 possible col-

ours via the 

menu and the SETTINGS

function butt

on.



›

page 155

Windscreen wipers and window

wiper blade

Fig. 49

Operating the windscreen wiper and

ear wiper

More the lever to the required position:



Windscreen wipers off.

More the lever to the required position:



Windscreen wipers interval wipe.

Using the control

››

›

Fig. 49

adjust

the interval (vehicles without rain sen-

sor), or the sensitivity of the rain sensor.



Slow wipe.



Continuous wipe.



Short wipe. Brief press, short clean.

Hold the lever down for more time to in-

crease the wipe frequency.



Automatic wipe. The windscreen wash-

er function is activated by pushing the

ever forwards, and simultaneously the

windscreen wipers start.



Interval wipe for rear window. The wip-

er will wipe the window appro

ximately

every six seconds.



The rear window wash function is acti-

vated by pr

essing the lever, and the

rear wiper starts simultaneously.



›››

page 156



›››

page 61

The essentials

Easy Connect

Vehicle menu settings

Fig. 50 Easy Connect: Main menu. Fig. 51 Easy Connect: Vehicle Menu.

The actual number of menus available and

the name of the v

arious options will depend

on the v

ehicl

e’s electronics and equipment.

●

Switch the ignition on.

●

If the Infotainment System is off, switch it on.

●

Press the Infotainment button 

and

then the Vehicle function butt

›

Fig. 50.

●

OR: Press the infotainment button 

open the Vehicle menu

›

Fig. 51.

●

Press the SETTINGS function button to open

the Vehicle settings menu.

●

To select a function in the menu, press the

desired button.

When the function button check box is activa-

ted , the function is active.

Pressing the menu button  will always take

you to the last menu used.

Any changes made using the settings menus

are automatically saved on closing those

menus.

Menu Submenu Possible setting Description

ESC system –

Activation and deactivation of the traction control system (ASR) and the elec-

tronic stabilit

y control (ESC) system, selecting the Sport / Off-road* mode of the

electronic stability control (ESC Sport)

›››

page 248

The essentials

Menu Submenu Possible setting Description

Tyres

Tyre pressure monitoring Tyre pressure storing (Calibration)

›››

page 361

Winter tyres

Activation and deactivation of the speed warning, adjusting the speed warning

value

›››

page 365

Lights

Light assist

Dynamic Light Assist, Light Assist, motorway function, turning-on time, headlamp

range adjustment, automatic lights when r

aining, one-touch signalling, travel

mode.

›››

page 147

Vehicle interior lighting Brightness of instrument panel and control

›››

page 155

Coming Home/Leaving Home

function

Switch-on time of the “Coming home” and “Leaving home” functions

›››

page 151

›››

page 152

Driver assis-

tance

ACC (adaptive cruise control) Activation and deactivation: default distance level, driving profiles.

›››

page 283

Front Assist (emergency brak-

ing assistance system)

Activation and deactivation: Front Assist, advance warning, distance warning dis-

›

page 279

Lane Assist (system warning

you if you leave the lane)

Activation and deactivation of lane departure warning, adaptive lane guidance

›››

page 292

Detection of traffic signs

Display on the instrument panel, activation and deactivation of the speed warn-

ing

›››

page 114

Trailer

Trailer recognition (display of traffic signs for vehicles with trailer), use to calcu-

late the route, maximum speed for trailer

›››

page 329

Fatigue detection Activation and deactivation

›››

page 112

The essentials

Menu Submenu Possible setting Description

Parking and ma-

noeuvring

ParkPilot

Automatic activation, front volume, front sound treble, rear volume, rear sound

treble

, adjust Infotainment volume

›››

page 315,

›››

page 319

Auto Hold Switching on and off when starting off

›››

page 272

Electric parking brake Swit

ching on and off automatically

›››

page 246

Braking while manoeuvring

function

Swit

ching on and off

›››

page 319

Displaying the parking space Switching on and off

Ambient lighting – Switching on and off, selecting brightness, colour, area or total

›››

page 155

Mirrors and

windscreen wip-

ers

Mirrors

Synchronised regulation, fold in after parking, rear-view mirror heating, dim in the

dark

›››

page 2

›

››

page 159

Windscreen wipers

Activate and deactivate automatic windscreen wipers in case of rain, wipe when

reversing

›››

page 34

Opening and

closing

Electric windows control

Convenience opening, automatic closure in case of rain, automatic closure with

central locking

›››

page 143

Central locking

Unlocking doors, automatic lock/unlock when driving, “Easy Open” audible con-

firmation, “Easy Entry” convenient entry function, automatic opening of the rear

lid, interior monitoring

›››

page 127

Instrument panel –

Current consumption, average consumption, convenience consumers, ECO Ad-

vice, travelling time, distance travelled, average speed, digital speed display,

speed warning, oil temperature, coolant temperature, reset data “when setting

off”, reset data for “total calculation”, traffic signal detection

›››

page 110

Date and time – Time sour

ce, time, select time zone, time format, date, date format –

Units –

Distance, speed, temperature, volume, fuel consumption, GNC consumption,

electric consumption, pressur

–

Service –

Chassis number, date of next SEAT service inspection, date of next oil change

service

›››

page 119

The essentials

Menu Submenu Possible setting Description

Factory settings

All Restore all settings –

Individual

Lights, driver assistance, parking and manoeuvring, background lighting, rear

view mirrors and windscreen wipers, opening and closing, instrument panel

–

WARNING

Any distraction may lead to an accident,

with the risk of injury. Operating the Easy

Connect system whil

e driving could dis-

tract you from traffic.

The essentials

Warning lamps

Contr

ol and w

arning l

amps

Fig. 52 Related video

Red warning lamps



Notification central lamp: additional infor-

mation on the instrument panel display



Parking br

ake on

›››

page 245.



Fault in the brake system

›

page 245.



Fault in the steering system

›

page 261.



Driver or passenger has not fastened seat

belt

›››

page 69.



Press the foot brake

›››

page 284.

Yellow warning lamps



Notification central lamp: additional infor-

mation on the instrument panel display



Front br

ake pads worn

›››

page 245.



Fault in ESC or disconnection caused by

the system; OR

ESC or ASR in operation

›››

page 248.



ASR manually deactivated; OR ESC in

Sport mode

›››

page 248.



Fault in the ABS

›››

page 248.



Rear fog light switched on

›››

page 147.



Fault in the emission control system

›››

page 265.



Pre-heating of the diesel engine; OR fault

in the management of the diesel engine

››

›

page 265.



Fault in the petrol engine management

›››

page 265.



Particulate filter blocked

›

page 265.



Fault in the steering system

›››

page 261.



Tyre monitor system

›››

page 362.



Fuel tank almost empty

›››

page 117.



Fault in airbag system and seat belt ten-

sioners

›››

page 79.





Front passenger front airbag is disa-

bled

›››

page 79.





The front passenger front airbag is activa-

ted

›››

page 79.



Lane assist warning (Lane Assist)

›››

page 292.



Fault in the lighting of the vehicle

›››

page 147.



Low engine oil level

›››

page 350.



Fault in the gearbox

›››

page 259.



Windscreen cleaning fluid too low

›››

page 156.

Other warning lamps



Turn lights or emergency lights on

›››

page 147.



Trailer turn signals

›››

page 147.



Auto Hold activated

›

page 272.



Press the foot brake

›

page 252.



Speed regulator

›››

page 274; OR speed

limiter

›››

page 275; OR Adaptive Cruise

Control (ACC)

›››

page 284.



Lane assist warning (Lane Assist)

›››

page 292.



Main beam on or flasher on

›

page 147.



Door(s), rear lid or bonnet open or not

properly closed

›

››

page 108.



Engine cooling fluid

›››

page 118.



Engine oil pressure

›››

page 350.



Fault in the battery

›››

page 355.



Main beam assist (Light Assist)

›››

page 147.



Hill descent control (HDC)

›››

page 271.

The essentials



Electronic immobiliser active

›››

page 135.



Service interval display

›››

page 119.



Mobile telephone is connected via Blue-

tooth

››

›

page 230.



Mobile telephone battery charge status

›››

page 230.



Risk of freezing

›››

page 108.



Start-Stop system activated

›

page 269.



Start-Stop system unavailable

›

page 269.



Low consumption driving status

›››

page 109.



›››

in Control and warning lamps

on page 123



›››

page 122

Cruise control

ed video

Fig. 53 Dash panel

Operating the cruise control sys-

em (CCS)*

Fig. 54

Left of the steering column: CCS

wit

ch and contr

ols.

●

Switching on the CCS: Move switch

›

Fig. 54

to 

. The syst

em is on. If no

speed has been pr

ogrammed, the system will

not control it.

●

Activate the CCS: Press button

›››

Fig. 54

in the  ar

ea. The curr

ent speed is

memorised and contr

olled.

●

Temporarily switching off the CCS: Move

switch

›››

Fig. 54

to 

 or push the

e. The cruise control system is switched

off temporarily.

●

Reactivating the CCS: Press button

›››

Fig. 54

in . The memorised speed is

sav

ed and contr

oll

ed again.

●

Increasing stored speed during CCS regu-

lation: press button

in 



. The vehicle

accel

erates until the new stored speed.

●

Reducing stored speed during CCS regula-

tion: press button

in  t

o lower the

speed by 1 km/h (

1 mph). Speed is r

educed

until reaching the new stored speed.

●

Switching off the CCS: Move switch

›››

Fig. 54

to 



. The system is disconnec-

ed and the memorised speed is deleted.

The essentials

Gearbox lever

Manual gearbo

Fig. 55

Gear shift pattern of a 5 or 6-speed

manual gearbo

The position of the gears is indicated on the

gearbo

x l

ver

›››

Fig. 55.

●

Press the clutch pedal and keep your foot

right down.

●

Move the gearbox lever to the required po-

sition.

●

Release the clutch.

Selecting reverse gear

●

Press the clutch pedal and keep your foot

right down.

●

With the gearbox lever in neutral, push it

downwards, move it to the left as far as it will

go and then forwards to select reverse

›››

Fig. 55

●

Release the clutch.



›››

in Changing gear on page 251



›››

page 251

Automatic gearbox*

Fig. 56

Automatic transmission: selector lever

positions.

Parking lock

erse gear

Neutral (idling)

Drive (forward)

Tiptronic mode: pull the lever forwards

(+) to go up a gear or backwards (–) to

go down a gear.

D/S

+/–



›››

in Selector lever positions on

page 253



›››

page 252



›››

page 41

Manual release of the selector lev-

Fig. 57

Selector lever: manual release from

position P

Should the power supply be interrupted,

ther

e is a manual unl

ocking de

vice located

under the console of the selector lever, on the

right. Releasing the selector lever requires a

certain degree of practical skill.

●

Unlock: use the flat part of a screwdriver

blade.

The essentials

Removing the cover from the selector lev-

●

Apply the electronic parking brake 

›

to ensure that the car does not move.

●

Carefully pull the corners of the selector

er boot and twist it upwards above the lev-

er handle.

Releasing the selector lever

●

Using a screwdriver, press and hold the yel-

low unlocking tab sideways

›››

Fig. 57.

●

Press the interlock button on the selector

lever and move the selector lever to posi-

tion N.

●

After carrying out the manual release, at-

tach the selector lever boot on the gearbox

console again.

If the power supply should ever fail (e.g. dis-

charged battery) and the vehicle has to be

pushed or towed, the selector lever must first

be moved to position N, after operating the

manual release mechanism.

WARNING

The selector lever must only be moved out

of position P when the electronic parking

ake is applied. If this does not work, se-

cure the vehicle with the brake pedal. On a

slope the vehicle could otherwise start to

move inadvertently after shifting the selec-

tor lever out of position P - accident risk!

Air conditioning

ed video

Fig. 58 Air conditioning

The essentials

How does Climatronic* work?

Fig. 59 In the centre console: Climatronic control

panel.

To switch a specific function on, press the ap-

opriat

e butt

on. Press the button again to

switch off the function.

The LED on each control lights up to indicate

that the respective function of a control has

been switched on.

Temperature

1 The left and right sides can be adjusted separately: turn the control to adjust the temperature

Fan

2 The power of the fan is automatically adjusted. The fan is also adjusted manually by turning the control.

Air distribution

The airflow adjusts automatically for comfort. You can also switch it on manually using the buttons

4 Indications on the temperature display screen selected for the right and left sides.





Defrost function

The air dr

awn in from outside the vehicle is directed at the windscreen and air recirculation is automatically switched off. To defrost the

windscreen more quickly, the air is dehumidified at t

emperatures over approximately +3°C (+38°F) and the fan runs at maximum output.



The air is directed at the chest of driver and passengers by the dash panel air vents.



Air distribution towards the footwell.

The essentials



Upward air distribution.



Heated rear window: this only works when the engine is running and switches off automatically after a maximum of 10 minutes.



Air recirculation

 

Seat heating buttons



Press the button to switch on or off the cooling system.







Press the butt

on to make maximum cooling capacity available. The recirculation of air and the cooling system turn on automatically and

air distribution adjusts automatically to the position

.



When the warning light for button lights up 



 , the settings on the driver side also apply to the passenger side, press the button or the

temperature control on the passenger side



Automatic adjustment of temperature, fan, and air distribution. Press key: the lamp in button  will lit up



Press the  key: the air conditioning operation menu will be displayed on the Easy Connect system screen.

Switching off

Turn the blower control to the  position or press the  button.



›››

in Introduction on page 176



›››

page 1

The essentials

How does the manual air conditioning* and the heating and fresh air system work?

Fig. 60

In the centre console:  contr

s f

or the manual air conditioning;  heating and fresh air system controls.

To switch a specific function on, press the ap-

opriat

e butt

on. Press the button again to

switch off the function.

The LED on each control lights up to indicate

that the respective function of a control has

been switched on.

Temperature

Turn the control to adjust the temperature

Heating and ventilation syst

em: The temperature cannot be lower than that of the exterior air temperature, as this system cannot cool

or dehumidify the air

Fan

Level 0: blower and manual air conditioning/heating and fresh air system off

Lev

el 6: maximum fan level.

The essentials

Air distribution



: Defr

ost function. The airfl

w is directed at the windscreen.

Manual air conditioning: Air recirculation is automatically switched off or is not switched on. Increase the fan power to clear the wind-

screen of condensation as soon as possible. To dehumidify the air, the cooling system will automatically switch on.



: The air is directed at the chest of driv

er and passengers by the dash panel air vents.



: Distribution of air tow

ards the chest and the footwell area.



: Air distribution towards the footwell.



: Air distribution tow

ards the windscreen and the footwell.



Heated rear window: this only works when the engine is running and switches off automatically after a maximum of 10 minutes.



Air recirculation



Manual air conditioning: Pr

ess the button t

o switch on or off the cooling system.





Manual air conditioning: Maximum cooling power

. The recirculation of air and the cooling system turn on automatically and air distribu-

tion adjusts automatically to the position .

 

Manual air conditioning: Seat heating butt

ons



›››

in Introduction on page 176



›››

page 1

The essentials

Fluid level control

Filling capacities

Tank level

Petrol and die-

sel engines

Front-wheel drive vehicles:

50 l

, of which appro

x.7 l reserve

Four-wheel drive vehicles:

55 l, of which appro

x. 8.5 l re-

serve

Capacity of the windscreen washer fluid con-

ainer

Versions with-

out headlight

washer system

appr

ox. 3 litres

Versions with

headlight

washer system

appr

ox. 5 litres

Fuel

Fig. 61

Fuel tank flap with tank cap attached.

The flap that covers the tank cap is unlocked

and l

ock

ed aut

omatically using the central

locking.

Opening the fuel tank cap

●

Open the fuel tank flap by pressing on the

left side.

●

Unscrew the cap by turning it to the left.

●

Place it in the space on the hinge of the

open flap

›››

Fig. 61.

Closing the fuel tank cap

●

Unscrew the cap by turning it to the right as

far as it will go.

●

Close the lid.



›››

in Refuelling on page 341



›››

page 341

Oil

Fig. 62

Engine oil dipstick.

Fig. 63

In the engine compartment: Engine oil

fill

er cap

The essentials

The level is measured using the dipstick loca-

ed in the engine compartment

›



page 349.

The oil indicator must be between zones

and

. It can never go above zone

●

Zone

: do not add oil.

●

Zone

: you can add oil but keep the level

in that z

one

●

one

: add oil until zone

opping up engine oil

●

Unscr

w cap from oil filler opening.

●

Add oil slowly.

●

At the same time, check the level to ensure

you do not add too much.

●

When the oil level reaches at least zone

unscr

w the engine oil fill

er cap carefully.

Engine oil additives

No type of additive should be mixed with the

engine oil. The deterioration caused by these

additives is not covered by the warranty.

Engine oil specifications

Diesel engines

Engine type

Type of

Service

Specifica-

tion

With particulate

filter (DPF)

Set Service

and Flexibl

Service Inter-

vals

VW 507 00

Without particu-

late filt

er (DPF)

Set Service

Intervals

VW 505 01

VW 506 01

Only use recommended oils, otherwise you may

damage the engine

If the qualit

y of the fuel av

ailable in the country

does not fulfil the EN 590 (for diesel) standard.

If the engine oil level is too low

You can get information about the correct en-

gine oil for your vehicle in your specialised

shop. If you have to change your engine oil,

use this oil.

If the recommended engine oil is not availa-

ble, in the event of an emergency you can

change the oil once with a maximum of 0.5 L

of the next oil until the next oil change:

Petrol engines: standard VW 504 00,

VW 502 00, VW 508 00, ACEA C3 or

API SN.

Diesel engines: standard VW 507 00,

VW 505 01, ACEA C3 or API CK-4.

–

Have the oil changed by a specialised work-

shop.

Using engine oil that is compliant with the VW

504 00 standard instead of VW 508 00

could increase consumption and the vehicle’s

emissions.



Recommended by SEAT

SEAT recommends using original SEAT oil to

guarantee high SEAT engine performance.



›››

in Changing engine oil on

page 352



›››

page 349

The essentials

Coolant

Fig. 64

Engine compartment: coolant expan-

sion t

ank cap

The coolant tank is located in the engine

compartment

›



page 349.

When the engine is cold, replace the coolant

when the level is below .

Coolant specifications

The engine cooling system is supplied from

the factory with a specially treated mixture of

water and at least 40 % of the additive G13

(TL-VW 774 J), purple. This mixture gives the

necessary frost protection down to -25°C

(-13°F) and protects the light alloy parts of

the engine cooling system against corrosion.

It also prevents scaling and considerably rai-

ses the boiling point of the coolant.

To protect the cooling system, the percent-

age of additive must always be at least 40 %,

even in warm climates where anti-freeze pro-

tection is not required.

If for weather reasons further protection is

necessary, the proportion of additive may be

increased, but only up to 60 %; otherwise an-

tifreeze protection will diminish and this will

worsen cooling.

When the coolant is topped up, use a mixture

of distilled water and at least 40 % of the

G13 or G12 plus-plus (TL-VW 774 G) additive

(both are purple) to obtain an optimum anti-

corrosion protection

›››

in Topping up

cool

ant on page 353

. The mixt

ure of G13

with G12 plus (TL-VW 774 F), G12 (red) or G11

(green-blue) engine coolants will significantly

reduce anti-corrosion protection and should

therefore be avoided

›››

in Topping up

cool

ant on page 353



›

››

in Topping up coolant on

page 353



›››

page 352

Brake fluid

Fig. 65

Engine compartment: brake fluid res-

erv

oir cap

The brake fluid reservoir is located in the en-

gine compartment

›



page 349.

The level should be between the  and 

marks. If it is below , please visit a Technical

Service.



›››

in Top up brake fluid on

page 353



›››

page 353

The essentials

Windscreen washer

Fig. 66

In the engine compartment: cap of the

windscr

een w

asher t

ank.

The windscreen washer reservoir is located in

the engine compartment

›



page 349.

To top up, mix water with a product recom-

mended by SEAT.

In cold temperatures, add anti-freeze.



›››

in Checking and topping up the

windscreen washer r

eservoir on

page 354



›››

page 354

Battery

The battery is located in the engine compart-

ment

›



page 349. It does not require

maintenance. It is checked as part of the In-

spection Service.



›››

in Important safety warnings

for handling a vehicl

e battery on

page 355



›››

page 354

The essentials

Emergencies

Fuses

Fuse l

ocation

Fig. 67  Left guide: fuse box co

ver on the

driver-side dash panel.  Right guide: fuse box

behind the glove compartment.

Fig. 68 In the engine compartment: lid of the

fuse box.

Underneath the instrument panel (left-

hand driv

The fuse bo

x is l

ocated behind the storage

compartment

›››

Fig. 67 .

Behind the glove compartment (right-

hand drive)

The fuse box is located behind the glove

compartment

›››

Fig. 67 . To be able to ac-

cess the fuse box

›››



page 93.

In the engine compartment

Press the locking tabs to release the fuse box

cover

›››

Fig. 68.

Identifying fuses situated below the dash

panel by colours

Colour Amp rating

Black 1

Colour Amp rating

Purple 3

Light brown 5

Brown 7.5

Red 10

Blue 15

Yellow 20

White or transparent 25

Green 30

Orange 40



›››

in Introduction on page 92



›››

page 92

The essentials

Replacing a blown fuse

Fig. 69

Image of a blown fuse.

Preparation

●

Switch off the ignition, lights and all electri-

cal equipment.

●

Open the corresponding fuse box

›



page 93.

Identifying a blown fuse

A fuse is blown if its metal strip is ruptured

›››

Fig. 69.

●

Point a lamp at the fuse to see if it has

blown.

To replace a fuse

●

Remove the fuse.

●

Replace the blown fuse by one with an

identical amperage rating (same colour and

markings) and identical size.

●

Replace the cover again or close the fuse

box lid.

Bulbs

Bulbs (12 V)

Note: Depending on the lev

el of equipment

fitted in the vehicle, LEDs may be used for

part or all of the interior and/or exterior light-

ing. LEDs have an estimated life that exceeds

that of the vehicle. If an LED light fails, go to

an authorised workshop for its replacement.

Light source used for each function

Halogen headlights. Type

Daytime running light/side

light

LED (it cannot be

replaced)

Dipped beam headlights

H7 LL

Main beam headlights H7 LL

Turn signal PY21W

Full-LED main headlights

No bulbs may be replaced. All functions are with

LEDs

Front fog light Type

Fog/cornering lights* H8

Rear lights Type

Brake light/tail light P21W LL

Side lights P21W LL

Turn signal PY21W LL

Retro fog light P21W LL

Reverse lights W16W

LED rear lights Type

Turn signal PY21W LL

Reverse lights W16W

The remaining functions work with LEDs



›››

page 96

The essentials

Action in the event of a punc-

elated video

Fig. 70 Wheels

What to do first

●

Park the vehicle on a horizontal surface and

in a saf

e pl

ace as f

ar away from traffic as

possible.

●

Apply the electronic parking brake.

●

Switch on the hazard warning lights.

●

Manual transmission: select the 1st gear.

●

Automatic transmission: Move the selector

lever to position P.

●

If you are towing a trailer, unhitch it from

your vehicle.

●

Have the vehicle tool kit

›››



page 85

and the spare wheel* ready

›››



page 364.

●

Observe the applicable legislation for each

country (reflective vest, warning triangles,

etc.).

●

All occupants should leave the vehicle and

wait in a safe place (for instance behind the

roadside crash barrier).

WARNING

●

Always observ

e the above steps and pro-

tect yourself and other road users.

●

If you change the wheel on a slope, block

the wheel on the opposite side of the car

with a stone or similar to prevent the vehi-

cle from moving.

Repairing a tyre with the anti-punc-

e kit

Fig. 71

Standard display: contents of the anti-

punct

e kit.

The anti-puncture kit is located under the

oor panel in the luggage compartment.

Sealing the t

●

Unscrew the tyre valve cap and insert. Use

the

›››

Fig. 71

tool to remove the insert.

ace it on a cl

ean surf

ace.

●

Shake the tyre sealant bottle vigorously

›››

Fig. 71

●

Screw the inflator tube

›

Fig. 71

into the

seal

ant bottl

. The bottle's seal will break au-

tomatically.

The essentials

●

emo

e the lid from the filling tube

›››

Fig. 71

and screw the open end of the

ube int

o the t

yre valve.

●

With the tyre sealant bottle upside down, fill

the tyre with the contents of the sealant bot-

tle.

●

Remove the bottle from the valve.

●

Place the insert back into the tyre valve us-

ing the tool

›››

Fig. 71

Infl

ating the t

●

Screw the compressor tyre inflator tube

›››

Fig. 71

into the tyre valve.

●

Check that the air bleed screw is closed

›

Fig. 71

●

Start the engine and leave it running.

●

Insert the connector

›

Fig. 71

into the

ehicl

e's 12-v

olt socket

›››



page 167.

●

Turn the air compressor on with the

ON/OFF switch

›››

Fig. 71

●

Keep the air compressor running until it rea-

ches 2.

0 t

o 2.5 bar (29-36 psi/200-250 kP

a).

A maximum of 8 minutes.

●

Disconnect the air compressor.

●

If it does not reach the pressure indicated,

unscrew the tyre inflator tube from the valve.

●

Move the vehicle 10m so that the sealant is

distributed throughout the tyre.

●

Screw the compressor tyre inflator into the

valve.

●

Repeat the inflation process.

●

If the indicated pressure still cannot be

reached, the tyre is too badly damaged. Stop

and request assistance from an authorised

technician.

●

Disconnect the air compressor. Unscrew

the tyre inflator tube from the tyre valve.

●

When the tyre pressure is between 2.5 and

2.0 bars, continue driving without exceeding

80 km/h (50 mph).

●

Attach the sticker

›››

Fig. 71

to the instru-

ment clust

, within the driv

er's visual field.

●

Check the pressure again after 10 minutes

›››



page 87.



›››

in TMS (Tyre Mobility System)*

on page 85



›››

page 85

Changing a wheel

ed video

Fig. 72 Wheels

Vehicle tool kit

Fig. 73

Underneath the floor panel of the lug-

gage compartment: on-boar

d t

ool

Adapter for the anti-theft wheel bolts*

wline anchor

age

Box spanner for wheel bolts*

Crank handle for jack

The essentials

Jack*

Hook f

or e

xtr

acting the central wheel

trims*

Clip for removing the wheel bolt caps.



›››

in What to do first on page 53



›››

page 85

Central wheel trim*

Fig. 74 Correct positioning of the central

wheel trim f

or st

eel rims.

The central trims must be removed for access

o the wheel bolts.

emo

ving

●

Attach the wire hook (vehicle tools) to one

of the chambers of the central wheel trim.

●

Insert the bo

x spanner thr

ough the hook

supporting it on the tyre and remove the

wheel trim.

Fitting

●

Fit the central wheel trim onto the rim. The

bottom of the “S” of the SEAT badge should

align with the inflation valve

›››

Fig. 74

●

Press the central trim firmly until it locks in

with an audibl

e click

Note

There is also a valve mark on the back of

the central wheel trim that indicates the

corr

ect alignment.

Wheel bolt caps*

Fig. 75

Wheel: wheel bolts with caps.

Removal

●

Fit the plastic clip (vehicle tools

›

Fig. 73

) over the cap until it clicks into

ace

›

Fig. 75.

●

Remove the cap with the plastic clip.

Anti-theft wheel bolts

Fig. 76

Anti-theft wheel bolt with cap and

adapt

●

Remove the wheel cover* or the cap*.

●

Insert the special adapter (vehicle tools)

ont

o the anti-theft wheel bolt and push it on

as f

ar as it will go

●

Insert the wheel brace (vehicle tools) onto

the adapter as far as it will go.

●

Remove the wheel bolt

›››

page 56.

Note

Make a note of the code number of the an-

ti-theft wheel bolt and keep it in a safe

ace, but not in your vehicle. If you need a

The essentials

new adapter, you can obtain it from the

SEAT Official Service, indicating the code

number.

Loosening the wheel bolts

Fig. 77 Wheel: loosen the wheel bolts.

●

Insert the box spanner (vehicle tools) onto

the wheel bolt as f

ar as it will go

. An adapt

is required to unscrew or tighten the anti-theft

wheel bolts

›››

page 55.

●

Turn the wheel bolt approximately one turn

to the left

›››

Fig. 77 (arrow). To apply the re-

quired torque, hold the wheel brace at the

end. If it is not possible to loosen a wheel bolt,

carefully apply pressure with one foot on the

end of the box spanner. Hold on to the vehicle

for support and take care not to slip.

WARNING

Slightly loosen the wheel bolts (one turn)

before r

aising the vehicle with the jack*. If

not, an accident may occur.

Raising the vehicle

Fig. 78

Crossbar: brands.

Fig. 79

Crossbar: mounting the jack on the ve-

hicl

●

ace the jack* (v

ehicl

e tools) on firm

ground. If necessary use a large, strong

board or similar support. If the surface is slip-

pery (for example tiles) place the jack on a

rubber mat or similar to prevent it from slip-

ping

›››

●

Find the support point on the strut (sunken

ea) cl

osest t

o the wheel to be changed

›››

Fig. 78.

●

Turn the jack* crank handle, located below

the strut support point, to raise it until the

tab

›

Fig. 79 is below the housing provi-

ded.

●

Align the jack* so that tab

“grips” onto

the housing pr

vided on the strut and the mo-

bil

e base

is resting on the ground. The

base pl

should fall vertically with re-

spect t

o the support point

●

Continue turning the jack* until the wheel is

slightly lift

ed off the gr

ound.

WARNING

●

Make sure that the jack* r

emains stable.

If the surface is slippery or soft, the jack*

could slip or sink, respectively, with the re-

sultant risk of injury.

●

Only raise the vehicle with the jack* sup-

plied by the manufacturer. Other jacks,

even those approved for other SEAT mod-

els could slip, with the consequent risk of

injury.

The essentials

●

Only mount the jack* on the support

points designed for this purpose on the

strut, and al

ways align the jack correctly. If

you do not, the jack* could slip as it does

not have an adequate grip on the vehicle:

risk of injury!

●

The height of the parked vehicle can

change as a result of variations in tempera-

ture and loading.

CAUTION

The vehicle must not be raised on the

ossbar. Only pl

ace the jack* on the

points designed for this purpose on the

strut. Otherwise, the vehicle may be dam-

aged.

Removing and fitting a wheel

Change the wheel after loosening the wheel

bolts and r

aising the v

ehicl

e with the jack.

Taking off the wheel

●

Unscrew the wheel bolts using the box

spanner and place them on a clean surface.

●

Take off the wheel.

Putting on the spare wheel

When fitting tyres with a compulsory rotation

direction, observe the instructions in

›››

page 57.

●

Mount the wheel.

●

Screw on the wheel bolts in position and

tighten them loosely with a box spanner.

●

Carefully lower the vehicle using the jack*.

●

Tighten the wheel bolts in diagonal pairs

using the wheel brace.

The wheel bolts should be clean and turn

easily. Before fitting the spare wheel, inspect

the wheel condition and hub mounting surfa-

ces. These surfaces must be clean before fit-

ting the wheel.

Tyres with compulsory direction of

rotation

A directional tread pattern can be identified

by the arr

ws on the side

wall that point in the

direction of rotation. Always observe the di-

rection of rotation indicated when fitting the

wheel to guarantee optimum properties of

this type of tyres with regard to grip, noises,

wear and aquaplaning.

If it is absolutely necessary to fit the spare

tyre* against the direction of rotation, drive

with care as this means the tyre does not of-

fer optimum driving properties. This is of par-

ticular importance when the road surface is

wet.

To return to directional tread tires, replace the

punctured tyre as soon as possible and re-

store the obligatory direction of rotation of all

tyres.

Subsequent work

●

Alloy wheels: replace the wheel bolt caps.

●

ate wheels: replace the wheel hubcap

›››

page 55.

●

Return all tools to their proper storing loca-

tion.

●

If the replaced wheel does not fit in the

spare wheel housing, stor

e it safely in the lug-

gage compartment

›››



page 168.

●

Check the tyre pressure of the newly moun-

ted tyre as soon as possible.

●

In vehicles fitted with a tyre pressure indica-

tor, adjust the pressure and store the reading

in the radio/Easy Connect system*

›››



page 361.

●

Have the tightening torque of the wheel

bolts checked as soon as possible with a tor-

que wrench (it should be 140 Nm). Meanwhile,

drive carefully.

●

Have the flat tyre replaced as quickly as

possible.

The essentials

Snow chains

Use

Snow chains should only be used on the front

wheels.

Check that they are corr

ectly seated after

driving for a few yards; correct the position if

necessary, in accordance with the manufac-

turer's fitting instructions. Keep your speed

below 50 km/h (30 mph).

If there is a danger of being trapped despite

having mounted the chains, it is best to disa-

ble the driving wheels (ASR) in the ESC

›››



page 250, Switching on/off the ESC

and ASR.

Snow chains will improve braking ability as

well as traction in winter conditions.

For technical reasons snow chains may only

be used with the following wheel rim/tyre

combination.

215/60 R16 Chains with links of maximum 15 mm

215/55 R17 Chains with links of maximum 15 mm

215/50 R18 Chains with links of maximum 15 mm

Other dimensions do not allow chains

Remove any central wheel trims and the rim

ring bef

e fitting sno

w chains.

Remove the chains when roads are free of

snow. Driving characteristics worsen, and the

wheels become damaged quickly and may

even be rendered unusable.

Emergency towing of the ve-

hicle

Towing

Fig. 80 Right side of the front bumper: towline

anchor

age scr

wed in.

Fig. 81 Right side of the rear bumper: towline

anchorage scre

wed in.

Towline anchorages

Att

ach the bar or r

ope t

o the towline ancho-

rages.

The towline anchorages are located under

the floor panel in the luggage compartment,

next to the vehicle tools

›››



page 85.

Screw the towline anchorage into the screw

connection

›››

Fig. 80 or

›››

Fig. 81 and tight-

en it with the wheel brace.

Tow rope or tow bar

The tow bar offers increased safety and a

lower risk of damage.

The tow rope is recommended when there is

no tow bar. It must be elastic so that it does

not damage the vehicle.

The essentials

Notes for the driver of the towing vehicle

●

The tow rope must be taut before you drive

off

●

ease the clutch very carefully when

starting the vehicle (manual gearbox), or ac-

celerate gently (automatic gearbox).

Driving style

Towing requires some experience, especially

when using a tow rope. Both drivers should

realise how difficult it is to tow a vehicle. Inex-

perienced drivers should not attempt to tow.

Do not pull too hard with the towing vehicle

and take care to avoid jerking the tow rope.

When towing on an unpaved road, there is al-

ways a risk of overloading and damaging the

anchorage points.

Switch on the ignition so that the turn signals,

windscreen wipers and windscreen washer

can work. Ensure that the steering wheel is

unlocked and moves freely.

Place the gear lever in neutral on vehicles

with a manual gearbox. With an automatic

gearbox, place the lever in N.

To brake, press the brake pedal firmly. The

brake servo does not work when the engine is

switched off.

The power steering only works when the igni-

tion is switched on and the vehicle is moving,

provided that the battery is sufficiently

charged. Otherwise, it will need more force.

Ensure that the tow rope remains taut at all

times.



›››

in Introduction on page 88



›››

page 88

Tow-starting

If the engine will not start, first try starting it

using the batt

ery of another v

ehicl

›››

page 59. You should only attempt to

tow-start a vehicle if charging the battery

does not work. This is done by leveraging

wheel movement.

When tow-starting a vehicle with a petrol en-

gine, do not tow it more than a short dis-

tance, otherwise unburned fuel can enter the

catalytic converter.

●

Engage 2nd or 3rd gear before moving off.

●

Press the clutch and hold the pedal down.

●

Switch the ignition on.

●

Once both vehicles are moving, release the

clutch.

●

As soon as the engine has started, press the

clutch and move the gear lever to neutral.

How to jump start

Jump leads

The jump lead must have a sufficient wire

cross section.

If the engine fail

s to start because of a dis-

charged battery, the battery can be connec-

ted to the battery of another vehicle to start

the engine.

Jump leads must comply with standard DIN

72553 (see cable manufacturer's instruc-

tions). The wire cross section must be at least

25 mm

for petrol engines and at least

35 mm

for diesel engines.

Note

●

The vehicles must not t

ouch each other,

otherwise electricity could flow as soon as

the positive terminals are connected.

●

The discharged battery must be properly

connected to the on-board network.

The essentials

How to jump start: description

Fig. 82

Diagram of connections for vehicles

without St

art St

op syst

Fig. 83

Diagram of connections for vehicles

with St

art St

op syst

Jump lead terminal connections

wit

ch off the ignition of both v

ehicles

›››

Connect one end of the r

jump l

ead to

the positive

terminal of the vehicle

with the fl

at batt

ery

›

Fig. 82.

Connect the other end of the red jump

lead to the positive terminal

in the ve-

hicl

e pr

viding assistance

In v

ehicl

es without a St

art-Stop system:

connect one end of the black jump lead

to the negative terminal

–

of the vehicle

viding the curr

ent

›

Fig. 82.

In vehicles with a Start-stop system:

connect one end of the black jump lead

to a suitable ground terminal, to a sol-

id piece of met

al in the engine bl

ock

, or

to the engine block itself

›››

Fig. 83.

Connect the other end of the black jump

lead

to a solid metal component bol-

ed t

o the engine bl

ock or to the engine

block itself of the vehicle with the flat

battery. Do not connect it to a point near

the battery

osition the l

eads in such a w

ay that

they cannot come into contact with any

moving parts in the engine compart-

ment.

Starting

Start the engine of the vehicle with the

boosting battery and let it run at idling

speed.

4a.

4b.

Start the engine of the vehicle with the

flat battery and wait for 2 or 3 minutes

until the engine is running.

Removing the jump leads

Before you remove the jump leads,

switch off the dipped beam headlights if

they are switched on.

Turn on the heater blower and heated

rear window in the vehicle with the flat

battery. This helps minimise voltage

peaks which are generated when the

leads are disconnected.

When the engine is running, disconnect

the leads in reverse order to the details

given above.

Make sure the battery clamps have sufficient

metal-to-metal contact with the battery ter-

minals.

If the engine fails to start after about 10 sec-

onds, switch off the starter and try again after

about 1 minute.

WARNING

●

Please note the saf

ety warnings referring

to working in the engine compartment

›››



page 347.

●

The battery providing assistance must

have the same voltage as the flat battery

10.

11.

The essentials

(12V) and approximately the same capaci-

ty (see imprint on battery). F

ailure to com-

ply could result in an explosion.

●

Never use jump leads when one of the

batteries is frozen. Danger of explosion!

Even after the battery has thawed, battery

acid could leak and cause chemical burns.

If a battery freezes, it should be replaced.

●

Keep sparks, flames and lighted ciga-

rettes away from batteries, danger of ex-

plosion. Failure to comply could result in an

explosion.

●

Observe the instructions provided by the

manufacturer of the jump leads.

●

Do not connect the negative cable from

the other vehicle directly to the negative

terminal of the flat battery. The gas emit-

ted from the battery could be ignited by

sparks. Danger of explosion.

●

Never attach the negative cable to fuel

system components or the brake lines in

the other vehicle.

●

The non-insulated parts of the battery

clamps must not be allowed to touch. The

jump lead attached to the positive battery

terminal must not touch metal parts of the

vehicle, this can cause a short circuit.

●

Position the leads in such a way that they

cannot come into contact with any moving

parts in the engine compartment.

●

Do not lean on the batteries. This could

result in chemical burns.

Note

The vehicles must not touch each other,

otherwise electricity coul

d flow as soon as

the positive terminals are connected.

Changing the wiper blades

Windscreen wipers service posi-

tion

Fig. 84

Wipers in service position.

The wiper arms can be raised when the wip-

ers ar

e in service position

›

Fig. 84.

●

Close the bonnet

›››



page 347.

●

Switch the ignition on and off.

●

Press the windscreen wiper lever down-

wards briefly

›

page 34.

Before driving, always lower the wiper arms.

Using the windscreen wiper lever, the wind-

screen wiper arms return to their initial posi-

tion.



›››

page 88

The essentials

Changing the windscreen and rear

windo

w wiper bl

ades

Fig. 85

Changing the windscreen wiper

ades

Fig. 86

Changing the rear wiper blade

Raising and lowering windscreen wiper

arms

●

Place the windscreen wipers in the service

position

›

page 61.

●

Grip the wiper arms only by the blade's

fastening point.

Cleaning windscreen wiper blades

●

Raise the wiper arms.

●

Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt

from the windscreen wiper blades.

●

If the blades are very dirty, a sponge or

damp cloth may be used

›››

in Changing

the windscr

een and r

ear windo

w wiper

blades on page 88.

Changing the windscreen wiper blades

●

Lift and unfold the wiper arms.

●

Press and hold release button

›››

Fig. 85

and pull gently on the wiper blade in the di-

ection of the arr

●

Fit a new wiper blade of the same length

and design on to the wiper arm and hook it

into place.

●

Rest the wiper arms back onto the wind-

screen.

Changing the rear wiper blade

●

Lift and fold the wiper arm.

●

Turn the blade slightly

›››

Fig. 86 (arrow

●

Hold down the release button

while gen-

tly pulling the bl

ade in the dir

ection of arr

●

Insert a ne

w bl

ade of the

same length and

type in the rear wiper arm in the opposite di-

rection to the arrow

and hook into place

butt

●

Replace the wiper arm on the rear window.



›››

in Changing the windscreen

and rear window wiper bl

ades on

page 88



›››

page 88

Safe driving

Safety

Saf

e driving

Advice about driving

Saf

y first!

WARNING

●

This manual contains import

ant informa-

tion about the operation of the vehicle,

both for the driver and the passengers. The

other sections of the on-board documenta-

tion also contain further information that

you should be aware of for your own safety

and for the safety of your passengers.

●

Ensure that the on-board documentation

is kept in the vehicle at all times. This is es-

pecially important when lending or selling

the vehicle to another person.

Before setting off

For your own safety and the safety of your

passengers, al

ays not

e the following points

before every trip:

–

Make sure that the vehicle's lights and turn

signals are working properly.

–

Check tyre pressure.

–

Ensure that all windows provide a clear and

good view of the surroundings.

–

Make sure all luggage is secured

›››

page 168.

–

Make sure that no objects can interfere with

the pedals.

–

Adjust front seat, head restraint and mirrors

properly according to your size.

–

Ensure that the passengers in the rear seats

always have the head restraints in the in-

use position

›››

page 68.

–

Instruct passengers to adjust the head re-

straints according to their height.

–

Protect children with appropriate child

seats and properly applied seat belts

›››

page 80.

–

Assume the correct sitting position. Instruct

your passengers also to assume a proper

sitting position

›››

page 64.

–

Fasten your seat belt securely. Instruct your

passengers also to fasten their seat belts

properly

›››

page 69.

What affects driving safety?

As a driver, you are responsible for yourself

and your passengers. When your concentr

tion or driving saf

y is affected by any cir-

cumstance, you endanger yourself as well as

others on the road

›››

, for this reason:

–

Always pay attention to traffic and do not

get distr

act

ed by passengers or t

elephone

calls.

–

Never drive when your driving ability is im-

paired (e.g. by medication, alcohol, drugs).

–

Observe traffic laws and speed limits.

–

Always reduce your speed as appropriate

for road, traffic and weather conditions.

–

When travelling long distances, take breaks

regularly - at least every two hours.

–

If possible, avoid driving when you are tired

or stressed.

WARNING

When driving safety is impaired during a

trip, the risk of injury and accidents increa-

ses.

Safety equipment

Never put your safety or the safety of your

passengers in danger

. In the e

ent of an acci-

dent, the safety equipment may reduce the

Safety

risk of injury. The following points cover part

of the saf

y equipment in your SEAT

●

thr

ee-point seat belts,

●

belt tension limiters for the front and rear

side seats,

●

belt tensioners for the front and rear side

seats,

●

front airbags,

●

knee airbags,

●

side airbags in the front seat backrests,

●

head-protection airbags,

●

“ISOFIX” anchor points for child seats in the

rear side seats with the “ISOFIX” system,

●

height-adjustable front head restraints,

●

rear head restraints with in-use position and

non-use position,

●

adjustable steering column.

The safety equipment mentioned above

works together to provide you and your pas-

sengers with the best possible protection in

the event of an accident. However, these

safety systems can only be effective if you

and your passengers are sitting in a correct

position and use this equipment properly.

Safety is everyone's business!

Correct position of the vehi-

cle occupants

Correct sitting position for the driv-

Fig. 87

The proper distance between driver

and st

eering wheel

Fig. 88 Correct head restraint position for the

driver.

For your own safety and to reduce the risk of

injury in the e

ent of an accident, w

e recom-

mend the following adjustments for the driver:

–

Adjust the steering wheel so that there is a

distance of at least 25 cm between the

steering wheel and the centre of your chest

›››

Fig. 87.

–

Move the driver's seat forwards or back-

wards so that you are able to press the ac-

celerator, brake and clutch pedals to the

floor with your knees still slightly angled

›››

–

Ensure that you can reach the highest point

of the st

eering wheel.

–

Adjust the head r

estr

aint so that its upper

edge is at the same level as the top of your

Depending on the version/market.

Safe driving

head, or as close as possible to the same

el as the top of your head

›››

Fig. 88.

–

Move the seat backrest to an upright posi-

tion so that your back rests completely

against it.

–

Fasten your seat belt securely

›››

page 69.

–

Keep both feet in the footwell so that you

have the vehicle under control at all times.

Adjustment of the driver's seat

›››

page 160.

WARNING

●

An incorrect sitting position of the driver

can l

ead to severe injuries.

●

Adjust the driver's seat so that there is at

least 25 cm distance between the centre of

the chest and the centre of the steering

wheel

›››

Fig. 87. If you are sitting closer

than 25 cm, the airbag system cannot pro-

tect you properly.

●

If your physical constitution prevents you

from maintaining the minimum distance of

25 cm, contact a specialised workshop.

The workshop will help you decide if spe-

cial specific modifications are necessary.

●

When driving, always hold the steering

wheel with both hands on the outside of the

ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock posi-

tions. This reduces the risk of injury when

the driver airbag is triggered.

●

Never hol

d the steering wheel at the 12

o'clock position, or in any other manner

(e.g. in the centre of the steering wheel). In

such cases, if the airbag is triggered, you

may sustain injuries to the arms, hands and

head.

●

To reduce the risk of injury to the driver

during sudden braking manoeuvres or an

accident, never drive with the backrest til-

ted far back! The airbag system and seat

belts can only provide optimal protection

when the backrest is in an upright position

and the driver is wearing his or her seat belt

correctly.

●

Adjust the head restraint properly to ach-

ieve optimal protection.

Adjusting the steering wheel posi-

tion

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 21.

WARNING

●

Never adjust the position of the st

eering

wheel when the vehicle is moving, as this

could cause an accident.

●

Move the lever up firmly so the steering

wheel position does not accidentally

change during driving. risk of accident!

●

Make sure you ar

e capable of reaching

and firmly holding the upper part of the

steering wheel: risk of accident!

●

If you adjust the steering wheel so that it

points towards your face, the driver airbag

will not protect you properly in the event of

an accident. Make sure that the steering

wheel points towards your chest.

Correct position for the front pas-

senger

For your own safety and to reduce the risk of

injury in the e

ent of an accident, w

e recom-

mend the following adjustments for the front

passenger:

–

Move the front passenger seat back as far

as possible

›››

–

Move the seat backrest to an upright posi-

tion so that your back r

ests compl

ely

against it.

–

Adjust the head restraint so that its upper

edge is at the same level as the top of your

head, or as close as possible to the same

level as the top of your head

›››

page 67.

–

Always keep both feet in the footwell in

front of the front passenger seat.

–

Fasten your seat belt securely

›››

page 69.

Safety

It is possible to deactivate the front passen-

ger airbag in e

ceptional cir

cumstances

›››

page 78.

Adjusting the front passenger seat

›››

page 160.

WARNING

●

An incorrect sitting position of the front

passenger can l

ead to severe injuries.

●

Adjust the front passenger seat so that

there is at least 25 cm between your chest

and the dash panel. If you are sitting closer

than 25 cm, the airbag system cannot pro-

tect you properly.

●

If your physical constitution prevents you

from maintaining the minimum distance of

25 cm, contact a specialised workshop.

The workshop will help you decide if spe-

cial specific modifications are necessary.

●

Always keep your feet in the footwell

when the vehicle is moving; never rest them

on the dash panel, out the window or on the

seat. An incorrect sitting position exposes

you to an increased risk of injury in case of

a sudden braking or an accident. If the air-

bag is triggered, you could sustain severe

injuries due to an incorrect sitting position.

●

To reduce the risk of injury to the front

passenger in events such as sudden brak-

ing manoeuvres or an accident, never trav-

el with the backrest tilted far back! The air-

bag system and seat belts can only pro-

vide optimal protection when the backrest

is in an upright position and the front pas-

senger is wearing his or her seat belt prop-

erly. The fur

ther the seat backrests are til-

ted to the rear, the greater the risk of injury

due to incorrect positioning of the belt web

or to the incorrect sitting position!

●

Adjust the head restraint correctly in or-

der to achieve maximum protection.

Correct sitting position for rear

seat passengers

To reduce the risk of injury in the event of a

sudden br

aking manoeuvr

e or an accident,

passengers on the r

ear seat bench must con-

sider the following:

–

Sit up straight.

–

Adjust the head restraint to the correct po-

sition

›››

page 68.

–

Always keep both feet in the footwell in

front of the rear seat.

–

Fasten your seat belt securely

›››

page 69.

–

Use an appropriate child restraint system

when you take children in the vehicle

›››

page 80.

WARNING

●

If the passengers in the rear seats are not

sitting pr

operly, they could sustain severe

injuries.

●

Adjust the head restraint correctly in or-

der to achieve maximum protection.

●

Seat belts can only provide optimal pro-

tection when seat backrests are in an up-

right position and the vehicle occupants

are wearing their seat belts correctly. If

passengers In the rear seats are not sitting

in an upright position, the risk of injury due

to incorrect positioning of the seat belt in-

creases.

Examples of incorrect sitting posi-

tions

Seat belts can provide optimal protection on-

ly when the belt w

ebs ar

e pr

operly posi-

tioned. Incorrect sitting positions substantially

reduce the protective function of seat belts

and increase the risk of injury due to incorrect

seat belt position. As the driver, you are re-

sponsible for all passengers, especially chil-

dren.

–

Never allow anyone to assume an incorrect

sitting position in the vehicle while travelling

›››

The f

oll

wing list contains examples of sitting

positions that could be dangerous for all

Safe driving

vehicle occupants. The list is not complete,

but w

e w

oul

d like to make you aware of this

issue.

Therefore, whenever the vehicle is in mo-

tion:

●

Never stand in the vehicle.

●

Never stand on the seats.

●

Never kneel on the seats.

●

Never tilt your seat backrest far to the rear.

●

Never lean against the dash panel.

●

Never lie on the rear bench.

●

Never sit on the front edge of a seat.

●

Never sit sideways.

●

Never lean out of a window.

●

Never put your feet out of a window.

●

Never put your feet on the dash panel.

●

Never put your feet on the surface of a seat.

●

Do not allow anyone to travel in the foot-

well.

●

Never travel without wearing the seat belt.

●

Do not allow anyone to travel in the lug-

gage compartment.

WARNING

●

Any incorrect sitting position increases

the risk of se

vere injuries. Sitting in an in-

correct position exposes the vehicle occu-

pants to severe injuries if airbags are trig-

gered, by striking a vehicle occupant who

has assumed an incorrect sitting position.

●

Befor

e the vehicle moves, assume the

proper sitting position and maintain it

throughout the trip. Before every trip, in-

struct your passengers to sit properly and

to stay in this position during the trip

›››

page 64, Correct position of the vehicle

occupants.

Correct adjustment of front head

restraints

Fig. 89

Correctly adjusted head restraint as

vie

ed fr

om the front and the side.

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 20.

Properly adjusted head restraints are an im-

portant part of passenger protection and can

reduce the risk of injuries in most accident sit-

uations.

●

Adjust the head restraint so that its upper

edge is, as far as possible, at the same level

as the top of your head, or at the very least,

at eye level

›››

Fig. 89.

WARNING

●

Trav

elling with the head restraints re-

moved or improperly adjusted increases

the risk of severe injuries. An improper ad-

justment of the head restraints may cause

death in an accident and increase the risk

of suffering injuries during abrupt braking

actions or unexpected manoeuvres.

●

The head restraints must always be ad-

justed according to the height of the pas-

senger.

Safety

Correct adjustment of rear head

estr

aints

Fig. 90

Head restraints in the correct position.

Fig. 91 Head restraint position warning label.

Properly adjusted head restraints are an im-

port

ant part of the passenger pr

ection and

can reduce the risk of injuries in most acci-

dent situations

Rear head restraints

–

The rear head restraints have 2 positions:

use and non-use.

–

One position for use (head restraint raised)

›››

Fig. 90. In this position, the head re-

straints are used normally, protecting pas-

sengers along with the rear seat belts.

–

And one position for non-use (head re-

straint lowered).

–

To fit the head restraints in position for use,

pull on the edges with both hands in the di-

rection of the arrow.

WARNING

●

Under no circumstances shoul

d the rear

passengers travel while the head restraints

are in the non-use position. See the warn-

ing label located on the rear side fixed win-

dow

›››

Fig. 91.

●

Do not swap the centre rear head re-

straint with either of the outer seat rear

head restraints. Risk of injury in case of an

accident!

CAUTION

Note the instructions on the adjustment of

the head restraints

›

››

page 160.

Pedal area

edal

–

Ensure that you can always press the ac-

celerat

or, brake and clutch pedals unim-

paired to the floor.

–

Ensure that the pedals can return unim-

paired to their initial positions.

–

Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas-

tened during the trip and do not obstruct

the pedals

›››

Only use fl

oor mats which l

eav

e the pedals

clear and which are secured to prevent them

from slipping. You can obtain suitable floor

mats from a specialised dealership. Fasten-

ers* for floor mats are fitted in the footwells.

If a brake circuit fails, the brake pedal must be

pressed down thoroughly in order to stop the

vehicle.

Wear suitable footwear

Always wear shoes which support your feet

properly and give you a good feeling for the

pedals.

WARNING

●

Restricting pedal operation can l

ead to

critical situations while driving.

Seat belts

●

Never l

ay or fit floor mats or other floor

coverings over the original floor mats. This

would reduce the pedal area and could ob-

struct the pedals. Risk of accident.

●

Never place objects in the driver footwell.

An object could move into the pedal area

and impair pedal operation. In the event of

a sudden driving or braking manoeuvre,

you will not be able to operate the brake,

clutch or accelerator pedal. Risk of acci-

dent!

Seat belts

Why w

ear a seat belt

Number of seats

Your vehicle has five seats, tw

o in the front

and three in the rear. Each seat is equipped

with a three-point seat belt.

In some versions, your vehicle is approved

only for four seats. Two front seats and two

rear seats.

WARNING

●

Never tr

ansport more than the permitted

amount of people in your vehicle.

●

Every vehicle occupant must properly

fasten and wear the seat belt belonging to

his or her seat. Children must be protected

with an appropriate child restraint system.

Seat belt control lamp*

Fig. 92

Dashboard: right rear seat occupied

and corr

esponding seat belt f

ast

ened display.



It lights up red

Driver or passenger has not fastened seat belt.

The control lamp illuminates to remind the

driv

er t

o f

asten his seat belt.

Before starting the vehicle:

●

Fasten your seat belt securely.

●

Instruct your passengers to fasten their

seat belts properly before driving off.

●

Protect children by using a child seat ac-

cording to the child's height and weight.

When starting to drive, if the vehicle's speed

surpasses approx. 25 km/h (15 mph) and the

seat belts are not fastened or are unfastened

during the drive, a warning sound will be

Safety

heard for a few seconds. The warning light

will al

so fl

ash

.

The lamp  goes out when the driver and

passenger seat belts are fastened with the

ignition switched on.

Rear seat belts fastened display*

Depending on the model version, when the

ignition is switched on, the seat belt status

display

›››

Fig. 92 on the instrument panel in-

forms the driver whether the passengers in

the rear seats have fastened their seat belts.

The  symbol indicates that the passenger in

this seat has fastened “his or her” seat belt.

When a seat belt in the rear seats is fastened

or unfastened, the seat belt status is dis-

played for approximately 30 seconds. The in-

dication can be hidden by pressing the 

button on the dash panel.

The seat belt st

us fl

ashes for a maximum of

30 seconds when a seat belt in the rear seats

is unfastened while the vehicle is in motion. An

audible warning will also be heard if the vehi-

cle is travelling at over 25 km/h (15 mph).

The protective function of seat

belts

Fig. 93

Drivers with properly worn seat belts

will not be thr

wn f

orward in the event of sud-

den braking.

Properly worn seat belts hold the occupants

in the pr

oper position. They al

so help pr

event

uncontrolled movements that may result in

serious injury and reduce the risk of being

thrown out of the vehicle in case of an acci-

dent.

Vehicle occupants wearing their seat belts

correctly benefit greatly from the ability of

the belts to absorb kinetic energy. In addition,

the front part of your vehicle and other pas-

sive safety features (such as the airbag sys-

tem) are designed to absorb the kinetic ener-

gy released in a collision. Taken together, all

these features reduce the releasing kinetic

energy and consequently, the risk of injury.

This is why it is so important to fasten seat

belts before every trip, even when "just driving

around the corner".

Ensure that your passengers wear their seat

belts as well. Accident statistics have shown

that wearing seat belts is an effective means

of substantially reducing the risk of injury and

improving the chances of survival when in-

volved in a serious accident. Furthermore,

properly worn seat belts improve the protec-

tion provided by airbags in the event of an

accident. For this reason, wearing a seat belt

is required by law in most countries.

Although your vehicle is equipped with air-

bags, the seat belts must be fastened and

worn. The front airbags, for example, are only

triggered in some cases of head-on collision.

The front airbags will not be triggered during

minor frontal or side collisions, rear-end colli-

sions, overturns or accidents in which the air-

bag trigger threshold value in the control unit

is not exceeded.

Therefore, you should always wear your seat

belt and ensure that all vehicle occupants

have fastened their seat belts properly before

you drive off!

Important safety instructions for

the use of seat belts

–

Always wear the seat belt as described in

this section.

Seat belts

–

Ensur

e that the seat belts can be f

ast

ened

at all times and are not damaged.

WARNING

●

If seat belts are worn incorr

ectly or not at

all, the risk of severe injuries increases. The

optimal protection from seat belts can be

achieved only if you use them properly.

●

Fasten your seat belt before every trip -

even when driving in town. Other vehicle

occupants must also wear the seat belts at

all times, otherwise they run the risk of be-

ing injured.

●

The seat belt cannot offer its full protec-

tion if the seat belt is not positioned cor-

rectly.

●

Never allow two passengers (even chil-

dren) to share the same seat belt.

●

Always keep both feet in the footwell in

front of your seat as long as the vehicle is in

motion.

●

Never unbuckle a seat belt while the ve-

hicle is in motion. Risk of fatal injury.

●

The seat belt must never be twisted while

it is being worn.

●

The seat belt should never lie on hard or

fragile objects (such as glasses or pens,

etc.) because this can cause injuries.

●

Do not allow the seat belt to be damaged

or jammed, or to rub on any sharp edges.

●

Never wear the seat belt under the arm or

in any other incorrect position.

●

Bulky and unfast

ened clothing (such as

an overcoat over a sweater) impairs the

proper fit and function of the seat belts, re-

ducing their capacity to protect.

●

The slot in the seat belt buckle must not

be blocked with paper or other objects, as

this can prevent the latch plate from en-

gaging securely.

●

Never use seat belt clips, fastening rings

or similar items to alter the position of the

belt webbing.

●

Frayed or torn seat belts or damage to

the connections, belt retractors or parts of

the buckle could cause severe injuries in

the event of an accident. Therefore, you

must check the condition of all seat belts

at regular intervals.

●

Seat belts which have been worn in an

accident and have been stretched must be

replaced by a specialised workshop. Re-

newal may be necessary even if there is no

apparent damage. The belt anchorage

should also be checked.

●

Do not attempt to repair a damaged seat

belt yourself. The seat belts must not be re-

moved or modified in any way.

●

The belts must be kept clean, otherwise

the retractors may not work properly.

Head-on collisions and the laws of

physics

Fig. 94

A driver not wearing a seat belt is

thr

wn f

orward violently.

Fig. 95

The unbelted passenger in the rear

seat is thr

wn f

orward violently, hitting the driv-

er who is wearing a seat belt.

The effects of the laws of physics in the case

of a head-on collision ar

e easy t

o e

xplain: the

Safety

moment a vehicle starts moving, a type of en-

gy call

ed “kinetic ener

gy” starts acting on

both the vehicle and its passengers.

The amount of “kinetic energy” depends on

the speed of the vehicle and on the weight of

the vehicle and of its passengers. The higher

they are, the more energy there is to be “ab-

sorbed” in the event of an accident.

The most significant factor, however, is the

speed of the vehicle. If the speed doubles

from 25 km/h (15 mph) to 50 km/h (30 mph),

for example, the corresponding kinetic ener-

gy is multiplied by four.

Given that the passengers of the vehicle in

our example do not have their seat belts fas-

tened, in the event of a collision the entire

amount of the passengers' kinetic energy will

be only absorbed by the mentioned impact.

Even at speeds of 30 km/h (19 mph) to

50 km/h (30 mph), the forces acting on bod-

ies in a collision can easily exceed one tonne

(1000 kg). At greater speed these forces are

even higher.

Vehicle occupants not wearing seat belts are

not “attached” to the vehicle. In a head-on

collision, they will move forward at the same

speed their vehicle was travelling just before

the impact. This example applies not only to

head-on collisions, but to all accidents and

collisions.

Even at low speeds the forces acting on the

body in a collision are so great that it is not

possible to brace oneself with one's hands. In

a frontal collision, unbelted passengers are

thrown forward and will make violent contact

with the steering wheel, dash panel, wind-

screen or whatever else is in the way

›››

Fig. 94.

It is also important for rear passengers to

wear seat belts properly, as they could other-

wise be thrown forward violently through the

vehicle interior in an accident. Passengers in

the rear seats who do not use seat belts en-

danger not only themselves but also the front

occupants

›››

Fig. 95.

How to properly adjust your

seat belt

Fastening and unfastening your

seat belt

Fig. 96 Positioning and removing the seat belt

buckl

Seat belts

Fig. 97

Position of seat belt during pregnancy.

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 20.

Fasten your seat belt

The seat belt cannot offer its full protection if

the seat belt is not positioned correctly.

●

Adjust the seat and head restraint correct-

ly.

●

To fasten the belt, take hold of the latch

plate and pull it slowly across your chest and

lap.

●

Insert the latch plate into the buckle for the

appropriate seat and push it down until it is

securely locked with an audible click

›››

Fig. 96 A.

●

Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate is

securely engaged in the buckle.

The seat belts are equipped with an auto-

matic retractor on the shoulder strap. Full

freedom of movement is permitted when the

shoulder belt is pulled slowly. However, dur-

ing sudden braking, during travel in steep

areas or bends and during acceleration, the

automatic retractor on the shoulder belt is

locked.

The automatic belt retractors on the front

seats and side rear seats

are fitted with seat

belt tensioners

›››

page 73.

Releasing the seat belt

●

Press the red button on the belt buckle

›››

Fig. 96 B. The latch plate is released and

springs out

›››

●

Guide the belt back by hand so that it rolls

up easily and the trim is not damaged.

ositioning seat belts

Seat belts off

er their maximum pr

otection on-

ly when they are properly positioned.

WARNING

●

The seat belts offer best prot

ection only

when the backrests are in an upright posi-

tion and the seat belts have been fastened

properly.

●

Nev

er put the latch plate in the buckle of

another seat. If you do this, the seat belt

will not protect you properly and the risk of

injury is increased.

●

Never unbuckle a seat belt while the ve-

hicle is in motion. If you do, you increase

the risk of sustaining severe or fatal injuries.

●

An incorrectly worn seat belt can cause

severe injuries in the event of an accident.

●

For pregnant women, the lap part of the

seat belt must lie as low as possible over

the pelvis, never across the stomach, and

always lie flat so that no pressure is exer-

ted on the abdomen

›››

Fig. 97.

●

Always engage the retractor lock when

you are securing a child seat in group 0, 0+

or 1

›››

page 80.

●

Read and observe the warnings

›››

page 70.

Seat belt tensioners

w the seat belt t

ensioner w

orks

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 21.

Depending on version/market.

Safety

The seat belts for the front seats and the side

ear seats

e equipped with belt t

ension-

ers. The belt tensioners are activated by sen-

sors, although only in severe head-on, lateral

and rear-end collisions. This retracts and

tightens the seat belts, reducing the forward

motion of the occupants.

The belt tensioners will not be triggered in the

event of minor collisions, if the vehicle over-

turns, or in accidents where no major forces

act on the vehicle.

Note

●

If the seat belt tensioners are trigger

ed, a

fine dust is produced. This is normal and it

is not an indication of fire in the vehicle.

●

The relevant safety requirements must be

observed when the vehicle or components

of the system are scrapped. Specialised

workshops are familiar with these regula-

tions, which are also available to you.

Maintenance and disposal of belt

ensioners

The belt tensioners are components of the

seat belts that ar

e inst

all

ed in the seats of

your vehicle. If you work on the belt tension-

ers or remove and install parts of the system

when performing other repair work, the seat

belt may be damaged. The consequence

may be that, in the event of an accident, the

belt tensioners function incorrectly or may

not function at all.

So that the effectiveness of the seat belt ten-

sioner is not reduced and that removed parts

do not cause any injuries or environmental

pollution, regulations, which are known to the

specialised workshops, must be observed.

WARNING

●

Improper use or repairs not carried out by

qualified mechanics incr

ease the risk of se-

vere or fatal injuries. The belt tensioners

may fail to trigger or may trigger in the

wrong circumstances.

●

Never attempt to repair, adjust, remove or

install parts of the belt tensioners or seat

belts.

●

The seat belt tensioner, seat belt and au-

tomatic retractor cannot be repaired.

●

Any work on the belt tensioners and seat

belts, including the removal and refitting of

system parts in conjunction with other re-

pair work, must be performed by a special-

ised workshop only.

●

The belt tensioners will only provide pro-

tection for one accident and must be

changed if they have been activated.

Airbag system

Brief intr

oduction

Why is it so impor

ant to wear a

seat belt and to sit correctly?

For the inflating airbags to achieve the best

protection, the seat belt must al

ways be worn

properly and the correct sitting position must

be assumed.

The airbag system is not a substitute for seat

belts, but it is an integral part of the vehicle's

overall passive safety system. Please bear in

mind that the airbag system can only work

effectively when the vehicle occupants are

wearing their seat belts correctly and have

adjusted the head restraints properly. There-

fore, it is most important to properly wear the

seat belts at all times, not only because this is

required by law in most countries, but also for

your safety

›››

page 69, Why wear a seat

belt.

The airbag inflates in a matter of seconds, so

if you are not properly seated when the air-

bag is triggered, you may sustain fatal inju-

ries. Therefore, it is essential that all vehicle

occupants assume a correct sitting position

while travelling.

Depending on version/market.

Airbag system

Sharp braking before an accident may cause

a passenger not w

earing a seat belt t

o be

thr

own forward into the area of the deploying

airbag. In this case, the inflating airbag may

inflict critical or fatal injuries on the occupant.

This also applies to children.

Always maintain the greatest possible dis-

tance between yourself and the front airbag.

This way, the front airbags can completely

deploy when triggered, providing their maxi-

mum protection.

The most important factors for triggering the

airbag are the type of accident, the angle of

impact and the vehicle speed.

Whether or not the airbags are triggered de-

pends primarily on the vehicle deceleration

rate resulting from the collision and detected

by the control unit. If the vehicle deceleration

occurring during the collision and measured

by the control unit remains below the speci-

fied reference values, the front, side and/or

curtain airbags will not be triggered. Take into

account that the visible damage in a vehicle

involved in an accident, no matter how seri-

ous, is not a determining factor for the air-

bags to have been triggered.

WARNING

●

Wearing the seat belt incorrectly or as-

suming an incorr

ect sitting position can

lead to critical or fatal injuries.

●

All vehicle occupants, including chil

dren,

who are not properly belted can sustain

critical or fatal injuries if the airbag is trig-

gered. Children up to 12 years old should

always travel on the rear seat. Never trans-

port children in the vehicle if they are not

restrained or the restraint system is not ap-

propriate for their age, size or weight.

●

If you are not wearing a seat belt, or if

you lean forward or to the side while travel-

ling or assume an incorrect sitting position,

there is a substantially increased risk of in-

jury. This increased risk of injury will be fur-

ther increased if you are struck by an inflat-

ing airbag.

●

To reduce the risk of injury from an inflat-

ing airbag, always wear the seat belt prop-

erly

›››

page 69.

●

Always adjust the front seats properly.

Description of airbag system

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 21.

The airbag system is not a substitute for the

seat belts. The airbag system offers addition-

al protection for the driver and passenger in

combination with the seat belts.

The airbag system comprises the follow-

ing modules (as per vehicle equipment):

●

Electronic control unit

●

Front airbags for driver and passenger

●

Knee airbag for the driver

●

Side airbags

●

Head airbag

●

Airbag control lamp  on the instrument

panel

›››

page 79

●

Key-operated switch for front passenger

airbag

●

Control lamp for disabled/enabled status

of the front passenger airbag.

The airbag system operation is monitored

electronically. The airbag control lamp will il-

luminate for a few seconds every time the ig-

nition is switched on (self-diagnosis).

There is a fault in the system if the control

lamp :

●

does not light up when the ignition is

switched on

›››

page 79,

●

turns off after 4 seconds after the ignition is

switched on,

●

turns off and then lights up again after the

ignition is switched on,

●

illuminates or flashes while the vehicle is

moving.

The airbag system is not triggered if:

●

the ignition is switched off

●

there is a minor frontal collision

Safety

●

ther

e is a minor side collision

●

ther

e is a r

ear-end collision

●

the vehicle turns over.

WARNING

●

The seat belts and airbags can only pro-

vide maximum prot

ection if the occupants

are seated correctly

›››

page 64, Correct

position of the vehicle occupants.

●

If a fault has occurred in the airbag sys-

tem, have the system checked immediately

by a specialised workshop. Otherwise

there is a danger that during a collision, the

system may fail to trigger, or not trigger

correctly.

Airbag activation

The airbags deploy extremely rapidly, within

thousandths of a second, t

o pr

vide addition-

al protection in the event of an accident. A

fine dust may develop when the airbag de-

ploys. This is normal and it is not an indication

of fire in the vehicle.

The airbag system is only ready to function

when the ignition is on.

In special accidents instances, several air-

bags may activate at the same time.

In the event of minor head-on and side colli-

sions, rear-end collisions, overturning or roll-

over of the vehicle, airbags do not activate.

Activation factors

The conditions that lead to the airbag system

activating in each situation cannot be gener-

alised. Some factors play an important role,

such as the properties of the object the vehi-

cle hits (hard/soft), angle of impact, vehicle

speed, etc.

Deceleration trajectory is key for airbag acti-

vation.

The control unit analyses the collision trajec-

tory and activates the respective restraint

system.

If the deceleration rate is below the prede-

fined reference value in the control unit the

airbags will not be triggered, even though the

accident may cause extensive damage to the

car.

The following airbags are triggered in seri-

ous head-on collisions:

●

Driver airbag.

●

Front passenger front airbag

●

Knee airbag for the driver.

The following airbags are triggered in seri-

ous side-on collisions:

●

Front side airbag on the side of the acci-

dent.

●

Curtain (head) airbag on the side of the ac-

cident.

In an accident with airbag activation:

●

the interior lights switch on (if the interior

light switch is in the courtesy light position);

●

the hazard warning lights switch on;

●

all doors are unlocked;

●

the fuel supply to the engine is cut.

Airbag safety instructions

Front airbags

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 22.

WARNING

●

The deployment space between the fr

ont

passengers and the airbags must not in

any case be occupied by other passenger,

pets and objects.

●

The airbags provide protection for just

one accident; replace them once they have

deployed.

●

It is also important not to attach any ob-

jects such as cup holders or telephone

mountings to the surfaces covering the air-

bag units.

●

Do not attempt to modify components of

the airbag system in any way.

Airbag system

Knee airbag*

Read the additional information carefully

›››



page 23.

WARNING

●

The knee airbag is deployed in front of

the driv

er's knees. Always keep the deploy-

ment areas of the knee airbags free.

●

Never not fix objects to the cover or in the

deployment area of the knee airbag.

●

Adjust the driver's seat so that there is a

distance of at least 10 cm (4 inches) be-

tween your knees and the location of the

this airbag. If your physical constitution

prevents you from meeting these require-

ments, make sure you contact a special-

ised workshop.

Side airbags*

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 24.

WARNING

●

If you do not wear a seat belt, if you lean

orward, or are not seated correctly while

the vehicle is in motion, you are at a greater

risk of injury if the side airbag system is

triggered in an accident.

●

In order for the side airbags to provide

their maximum protection, the prescribed

sitting position must always be maintained

with seat belts fastened whil

e travelling.

●

In a side-on collision the side airbags will

not work if the sensors do not correctly

measure the pressure increase on the inte-

rior of the doors, due to air escaping

through the areas with holes or openings in

the door panel.

●

Never drive if the interior door panels

have been removed or if the panels have

not been correctly fitted.

●

Never drive the vehicle if the loudspeak-

ers in the door panels have been removed,

unless the holes left by the loudspeakers

have been closed properly.

●

Always check that the openings are

closed or covered if loudspeakers or other

equipment are fitted inside the door pan-

els.

●

Occupants of the outer seats must never

carry any objects or pets in the deploy-

ment space between them and the airbags,

or allow children or other passengers to

travel in this position. It is also important

not to attach any accessories (such as cup

holders) to the doors. This would impair the

protection offered by the side airbags.

●

The built-in coat hooks should be used

only for lightweight clothing. Do not leave

any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the

pockets.

●

Great forces, such as hard blows or kicks,

must not be exerted upon the backrest bol-

ster because the system may be damaged.

In this case, the side airbags woul

d not be

triggered.

●

Under no circumstances should protec-

tive covers be fitted over seats with side

airbags unless the covers have been ap-

proved for use in your vehicle. Because the

airbag deploys from the side of the back-

rest, the use of conventional seat covers

would obstruct the side airbag, seriously

reducing the airbag's effectiveness.

●

Any damage to the original seat uphols-

tery or around the seams of the side airbag

units must be repaired immediately by a

specialised workshop.

●

The airbags provide protection for just

one accident; replace them once they have

deployed.

●

Any work on the side airbag system or re-

moval and installation of the airbag com-

ponents for other repairs (such as removal

of the front seat) should only be performed

by a specialised workshop. Otherwise,

faults may occur during the airbag system

operation.

●

Do not attempt to modify components of

the airbag system in any way.

Curtain airbags*

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 24.

Safety

WARNING

●

In order for the head-pr

otection airbags

to provide their maximum protection, the

prescribed sitting position must always be

maintained with seat belts fastened while

travelling.

●

For safety reasons, the curtain airbag

must be disabled in those vehicles fitted

with a screen dividing the interior of the ve-

hicle. See your technical service to make

this adjustment.

●

There must be no other persons, animals

or objects between the occupants of the

outer seats and the deployment space of

the head-protection airbags so that the

head-protection airbag can deploy com-

pletely without restriction and provide the

greatest possible protection. Therefore,

sun blinds which have not been expressly

approved for use in your vehicle may not be

attached to the side windows

●

The built-in coat hooks should be used

only for lightweight clothing. Do not leave

any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the

pockets. Please, do not hang the clothes on

coat hangers.

●

The airbags provide protection for just

one accident; replace them once they have

deployed.

●

Any work on the head-protection airbag

system or removal and installation of the

airbag components for other repairs (such

as removal of the roof lining) should only

be performed by a specialised workshop.

Otherwise, faults may occur during the air-

bag system operation.

●

Do not att

empt to modify components of

the airbag system in any way.

●

The side and head airbags are managed

through sensors located in the interior of

the front doors. To ensure the correct oper-

ation of the side and curtain airbags nei-

ther the doors nor the door panels should

be modified in any way (e.g. fitting loud-

speakers). If the front door is damaged, the

airbag system may not work correctly. All

work carried out on the front door must be

done in a specialised workshop.

Deactivating airbags

Activ

ation and deactiv

ation of fr

ont

passenger airbag*

Fig. 98 Switch for activating and deactivating

the fr

ont passenger airbag.

Fig. 99

Dashboard: control lamp for deactiva-

ed fr

ont passenger airbag in centr

e console.

Airbag system

Deactivate the front passenger front airbag

only if you hav

e t

o use a r

ear-facing child

seat in the front passenger seat.

SEAT recommends fitting the child seat in the

rear seat to avoid having to deactivate the

front passenger airbag.

Front passenger front airbag switch

When the front passenger airbag is deacti-

vated, this means that only the front passen-

ger front airbag is deactivated. All the other

airbags in the vehicle remain activated.

Disconnect the front passenger front air-

bag

●

Switch the ignition off.

●

Open the door on the front passenger side.

●

Insert the key into the slot of the switch for

deactivating the front passenger airbag

›››

Fig. 98. About 3/4 of the key should enter;

this is as far as it will go.

●

Turn the key gently to the  position. If you

have difficulty, ensure that you have inserted

the key as far as it will go.

●

Close the front passenger door.

●

Check, with the ignition switched on, that

the   control lamp remains lit where it

says      in the centre of the

dash panel

›››

Fig. 99.

Connect the front passenger front airbag

●

Switch the ignition off.

●

Open the front passenger door.

●

Insert the key into the slot of the switch for

deactivating the front passenger airbag

›››

Fig. 98. About 3/4 of the key should enter,

as far as it will go.

●

Turn the key gently to the  position. If you

have difficulty, ensure that you have inserted

the key as far as it will go.

●

Close the front passenger door.

●

Check, with the ignition switched on, that

the   control lamp is not lit where it says

     in the centre of the dash

panel

›››

Fig. 99. The   control lamp lights

up for 60 seconds and then goes off.

WARNING

●

The driver of the vehicl

e is responsible for

disabling or switching on the airbag.

●

Always switch off the ignition before dis-

abling the front passenger airbag! Failure

to do so could result in a fault in the airbag

deactivation system.

●

Never leave the key in the airbag disa-

bling switch as it could get damaged or en-

able or disable the airbag during driving.

●

If for any reason an airbag is deactivated,

reactivate it as soon as possible so that it

can fulfil its protective function.

Airbag system control lamps



It lights up on the combi-instru-

ment

Fault in airbag system and seat belt tensioners.

Have the system checked immediately by a special-

ised workshop.

 

It lights up on the dash panel

Front passenger front airbag disabled.

Check whether the airbag should remain disabl

 

It lights up on the dash panel

Front passenger airbag enabled.

The control lamp switches off automatically 60 sec-

onds after the ignition is switched on

Several warning and control lamps light up

or a f

w seconds when the ignition is switch-

ed on, signalling that the function is being

verified. They will switch off after a few sec-

onds.

If the airbag and seat belt tensioner system

control lamp  remains on or flashes, it indi-

cates a malfunction in the airbag and seat

belt tensioner system

›››

. Have the system

check

ed immediat

ely by a specialised w

ork-

shop.

If the front passenger airbag is deactivated,

the warning lamp      re-

mains lit on the dash panel to remind you that

Safety

the airbag is deactivated. If, with the front

passenger airbag deactiv

ed, this l

amp

does not remain lit or if it is lit together with

the control lamp  on the dash panel, there

is a fault in the airbag system

›››

. If the con-

ol l

amp is fl

ashing, there is a fault in the dis-

abling of the airbag system

›››

. Have the

syst

em check

ed immediat

ely by a special-

ised workshop.

WARNING

In the event of a fault in the airbag and seat

belt tensioner system, the airbags and seat

belts may not trigger corr

ectly, may fail to

trigger or may even trigger unexpectedly.

●

The vehicle occupants run the risk of sus-

taining severe or fatal injuries. Have the

system checked immediately by a special-

ised workshop.

●

Do not mount a child seat in the front

passenger seat or remove the mounted

child seat! The front passenger front airbag

may deploy during an accident in spite of

the fault.

CAUTION

Always pay attention to any lit control

lamps and to the corr

esponding descrip-

tions and instructions to avoid damage to

the vehicle or harm to the occupants.

Transporting children

saf

ely

Saf

y for children

Introduction

For safety reasons, as we have learned from

accident statistics, we r

ecommend that chil-

dren under 12 years of age travel in the rear

seats. Depending on their age, height and

weight, children travelling in rear seats must

use a child seat or a seat belt. For safety rea-

sons, the child seat should be installed in the

rear seat, behind the front passenger seat or

in the centre back seat.

The physical laws involved and the forces

acting in a collision apply also to children

›››

page 71. But unlike adults, children do not

have fully developed muscle and bone struc-

tures. This means that children are subject to

a greater risk of injury.

To reduce the risk of injuries, children must al-

ways use special child restraint systems

when travelling in the vehicle.

We recommend the use of child safety prod-

ucts from the SEAT Original Accessories Pro-

gramme, which includes systems for all ages

made by “Peke” (not for all countries) (see

www.seat.com).

These systems have been especially de-

signed and approv

ed, complying with the

ECE-R44. regulation.

SEAT recommends securing the child seats

shown on the website as described below:

●

Child seats in the opposite direction of trav-

el (group 0+): ISOFIX and support bracket

(Peke G0 Plus + ISOFIX Base (RWF)).

●

Child seats in the direction of travel (group

1): ISOFIX and Top Tether (Peke G1 ISOFIX

DUO Plus).

Transporting children safely

●

Chil

d seats dir

ect

ed towards the front of

the vehicle for group 2: safety belt and ISOFIX

(Peke G3 KIDFIX)

●

Child seats directed towards the front of

the vehicle for group 3: safety belt and ISOFIX

(Peke G3 KIDFIX)

Follow the manufacturer's instructions and

observe any statutory requirements when in-

stalling and using child seats. Always read

and note

›››

page 81.

We recommend you always carry the manu-

facturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual to-

gether with the on-board documentation.

Important information regarding

the front passenger's airbag

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 25.

Read and always observe the safety informa-

tion included in the following chapters:

●

Safety distance with respect to the passen-

ger airbag

›››

page 74.

●

Objects between the passenger and the

passenger side airbag

›››

in Front airbags

on page 76.

The passenger side fr

ont airbag, when ena-

ed, is a serious risk f

or a child that is facing

backward since the airbag can strike the seat

with such force that it can cause serious or

fatal injuries. Children up to 12 years old

should always travel on the rear seat.

Therefore we strongly recommend you to

transport children on the rear seats. This is

the safest location in the vehicle. Alternative-

ly, the front passenger airbag can be disa-

bled with a key-operated switch

›››

page 78.

When transporting children, use a child seat

suitable for the age and size of each child

›››

page 82.

WARNING

●

If a child seat is secured t

o the front pas-

senger seat, the risk to the child of sustain-

ing critical or fatal injuries in the event of an

accident increases.

●

An inflating front passenger airbag can

strike the rear-facing child seat and project

it with great force against the door, the roof

or the backrest.

●

Never inst

all a child seat facing back-

wards on the front passenger seat unless

the front passenger front airbag has been

disabled. Risk of potentially fatal injuries to

the child! However, if it is necessary, in ex-

ceptional cases, to transport a child in the

front passenger seat, the front passenger

front airbag must always be disabled

›››

page 78. If the passenger seat has a

height adjustment option, move it to the

highest, most upright position. If you have a

fixed seat, do not install any child restraint

system in this location.

●

For those vehicles that do not include a

key lock switch to deactivate the airbag,

the vehicle must be taken to a technical

service. Do not forget to reconnect the air-

bag when an adult wants to sit in the front

passenger seat.

●

All vehicle occupants, especially chil-

dren, must assume the proper sitting posi-

tion and be properly belted in while travel-

ling.

●

Never hold children or babies on your lap,

this can result in potentially fatal injuries to

the child!

●

Never allow a child to be transported in a

vehicle without being properly secured, or

Temporarily, the child seat recommended by

the Accessories Programme f

or groups 2 and 3

will be ROMER KIDFIX XP

instead of Peke G3

KIDFIX. It is available on the SEAT website.

Safety

to stand up or kneel on a seat while travel-

ling. In an accident, the child could be flung

thr

ough the vehicle, causing possibly fatal

injuries to themselves and to the other vehi-

cle occupants.

●

If children assume an improper sitting po-

sition when the vehicle is moving, they ex-

pose themselves to greater risk of injury in

the event of a sudden braking manoeuvre

or in an accident. This is particularly impor-

tant if the child is travelling on the front

passenger seat and the airbag system is

triggered in an accident; as this could

cause serious injury or even death.

●

A suitable child seat can protect your

child!

●

Never leave a child alone in the child seat

or inside the vehicle because depending on

the season, very high temperatures may be

reached inside a parked vehicle, which

could be fatal.

●

Children who are less than 1.5 metres tall

must not wear a normal seat belt without a

child seat, as this could cause injuries to

the abdominal and neck areas during a

sudden braking manoeuvre or in an acci-

dent.

●

Do not allow the seat belt to become

twisted and the seat belt should be proper-

ly in place

›››

page 69.

●

Only one child may occupy a child seat

›››

page 82, Child seats.

●

When a child seat is mounted in the r

ear

seats, the door child-proof lock should be

activated

›››

page 136.

Child seats

Safety instructions

Read the additional information carefully

›››



page 25.

WARNING

When travelling, children must be secured

in the vehicle with a r

estraint system suita-

ble for age, weight and size.

●

Read and always observe information

and warnings concerning the use of child

seats

›››

page 81.

WARNING

The retaining rings are designed only for

use with “ISOFIX” and Top Tether* syst

child seats.

●

Never secure other child seats that do

not have the “ISOFIX” or Top Tether* sys-

tem, or retaining belts or objects to the fas-

tening rings - this can result in potentially

fatal injuries to the child.

●

Ensure that the child seat is secured cor-

rectly using the “ISOFIX” and Top Tether*

securing rings.

WARNING

An undue installation of the safety seat will

increase the risk of injury in the ev

ent of a

crash.

●

Never tie the retainer strap to a hook in

the luggage compartment.

●

Never secure or tie luggage or other

items to the lower anchorages (ISOFIX) or

the upper ones (Top Tether).

Categorisation of child seats into

oups

Use only child seats that are officially ap-

ed and suitable for the child.

Child seats are subject to the regulation ECE-

R 44 or ECE-R 129. ECE-R stands for: Eco-

nomic Commission for Europe Regulation.

The child seats are grouped into 5 catego-

ries:

Group 0 Up to 10 kg (up to around 9

months)

Group 0+ Up to 13 kg (up to around 18

months)

Group 1 from 9 to 18 kg (up to approx. 4

years old)

Group 2 from 15 to 25 kg (up to approx. 7

years old)

Transporting children safely

Group 3 fr

om 22 to 36 kg (up to approx. 7

years ol

Chil

d seats that have been tested and ap-

proved under the ECE-R 44 or ECE-R 129

standard bear the test mark ECE-R 44 or

ECE-R 129 on the seat (the letter E in a circle

with the test number below it).

Follow the manufacturer's instructions and

observe any statutory requirements when in-

stalling and using child seats.

We recommend you to always include the

manufacturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual

together with the on-board documentation.

SEAT recommends you use child seats from

the Original Accessories Catalogue. These

child seats have been designed and tested

for use in SEAT vehicles. You can find the right

child seat for your model and age group at

SEAT dealers.

Child seats by approval category

Child seats may have the approval category

of universal, semi-universal, vehicle specific

(all according to the ECE-R 44 standard) or i-

Size (according to the ECE-R 129 standard).

●

Universal: child seats with universal appro-

val can be installed in all vehicles. There is no

need to consult any list of models. In the case

of universal approval for ISOFIX, the child

seat is additionally provided with a Top Tether

belt.

●

Semi-universal: semi-universal approval,

in addition to the standard requirements of

universal approval, requires safety devices to

lock the child seat, which require additional

testing. Child seats with semi-universal ap-

proval include a list of vehicle models for

which they can be installed.

●

Vehicle-specific: vehicle-specific approval

requires a dynamic test of the child seat for

each vehicle model separately. Child seats

with vehicle-specific approval also include a

list of vehicle models for which they can be

installed.

●

i-Size: child seats with i-Size approval must

meet the requirements prescribed in the ECE-

R 129 standard in relation to installation and

safety. Child seat manufacturers can tell you

which seats have i-Size approval for this vehi-

cle.

Attachment systems

Depending on the country, different attach-

ment syst

ems ar

e used f

or safely installing

child seats.

Attachment systems overview

●

ISOFIX: ISOFIX is a standardised attach-

ment system allowing quick and safe attach-

ment of child seats in the vehicle. ISOFIX at-

tachment establishes a rigid connection be-

tween the child seat and the car body.

The child seat has two rigid attachment clips,

called connectors. These connectors are fit-

ted into the ISOFIX attachment rings found

between the seat cushion and the backrest

of the vehicle's back seat (on the sides). ISO-

FIX attachment systems are used mainly in

Europe

›››



page 28. If necessary, ISOFIX

attachment may have to be supplemented

with a Top Tether belt or a support bracket.

●

Automatic three-point seat belt. When-

ever possible, it is preferable to attach the

child seats with the ISOFIX system rather than

attaching them with an automatic three-point

seat belt

›››



page 26.

Additional attachment:

●

Top Tether: the Top Tether belt is guided

over the back of the rear seat and attached

to an anchor point with a hook. Anchor points

are located at the back of the rear seat back-

rest on the boot side

›››



page 31. The

rings for retaining the Top Tether belt are

marked with an anchor symbol.

●

Support bracket: some child seats rest on

the floor of the vehicle with a support bracket.

The support bracket prevents the child seat

from tipping forward in the event of impact.

Child seats fitted with a support bracket

should only be used in the passenger seat

and side rear seats

›››

. For the assembly of

this t

ype of seat you shoul

d al

so consult the

list of approved vehicles for this assembly,

Safety

available in the instructions for child restraint

syst

ems.

ecommended syst

ems for attaching

child seats

SEAT recommends attaching child seats as

follows:

●

Baby carriers or child seats in the oppo-

site direction of travel: ISOFIX and support

bracket or i-Size.

●

Child seats in the direction of travel: ISO-

FIX and Top Tether.

WARNING

Incorrect use of the support bracket can

cause serious or fatal injury.

●

Mak

e sure the support bracket is correct-

ly and safely installed.

Self-help

Emergencies

Self

-help

Emer

gency equipment

ehicle tool kit, anti-puncture kit*

The tools and anti-puncture kit* are stored

under the floor panel in the luggage com-

partment.

To access the v

ehicle tools:

–

Lift up the floor surface by the plastic han-

dle until it is fast

ened to the tabs on both

sides.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the an-

ti-puncture kit* is located under the floor

panel in the luggage compartment.

The tool kit includes:

●

Jack*

●

Wire hook for pulling off the wheel cov-

er*/wheel bolt cap clip.

●

Box spanner for wheel bolts*

●

Towline anchorage

●

Adapter for the anti-theft wheel bolts*

●

Towing bracket device

Some of the items listed are only provided in

certain model versions, or are optional extras.

Note

The jack does not generally require any

maintenance. If r

equired, it should be

greased using universal type grease.

Tyre repair

TMS (Tyr

e Mobility System)*

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 53

The Anti-puncture kit* (Tyre Mobility System)

will reliably seal punctures caused by the

penetration of a foreign body of up to about

4 mm in diameter. Do not remove foreign

objects, e.g. screws or nails, from the tyre.

After inserting the sealant residue in the tyre,

you must again check the tyre pressure

about 10 minutes after starting the engine.

You should only use the tyre mobility set if the

vehicle is parked in a safe place, you are fa-

miliar with the procedure and you have the

necessary tyre mobility set! Otherwise, you

should seek professional assistance.

Do not use the tyre sealant in the following

cases:

●

If the wheel rim has been damaged.

●

In outside temperatures below -20°C

(-4°F).

●

In the event of cuts or perforations in the

tyre greater than 4 mm.

●

If you have been driving with very low pres-

sure or a completely flat tyre.

●

If the sealant bottle has passed its use by

date.

WARNING

Using the tyre mobility system can be dan-

gerous, especially when filling the tyr

e at

the roadside. Please observe the following

rules to minimise the risk of injury:

●

Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possi-

ble. Park it at a safe distance from sur-

rounding traffic to fill the tyre.

●

Ensure the ground on which you park is

flat and solid.

●

All passengers and particularly children

must keep a safe distance from the work

area.

●

Turn on the hazard warning lights to warn

other road users.

●

Use the tyre mobility system only if you

are familiar with the necessary procedures.

Otherwise, you should seek professional

assistance.

Emergencies

●

The tyre mobilit

y set is intended for tem-

porary emergency use only until you can

reach the nearest specialised workshop.

●

Replace the repaired tyre with the tyre

mobility set as soon as possible.

●

The sealant is a health hazard and must

be cleaned immediately if it comes into

contact with the skin.

●

Always keep the tyre mobility set out of

the reach of small children.

●

Always stop the engine, apply the elec-

tronic parking brake and put it in gear when

using a manual gearbox, in order to reduce

the risk of involuntary movement of the ve-

hicle.

WARNING

A tyre filled with sealant does not have the

same performance proper

ties as a conven-

tional tyre.

●

Never drive faster than 80 km/h

(50 mph).

●

Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking

and fast cornering.

●

Drive for only 10 minutes at a maximum

speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) and then check

the tyre.

For the sake of the environment

Dispose of used or expired sealant observ-

ing any legal requir

ements.

Note

A new bottle of sealant can be purchased

at SEAT dealerships.

Note

Take into account the separate instruction

manual of the tyre mobilit

y set* manufac-

turer.

Contents of the tyre mobility sys-

tem*

Fig. 100

Standard display: contents of the an-

ti-punct

e kit.

The anti-puncture kit is located underneath

the fl

oor co

ering in the luggage compart-

ment. It includes the following components

›››

Fig. 100:

Tyre valve remover

A sticker to be adhered to the instrument

cluster, within the driver's visual field, to

remind that the maximum advisable

speed “max. 80 km/h” or “max. 50 mph”

Filler tube with cap

Air compressor

Tube for inflating tyres

Warning provided by tyre pressure moni-

toring system (it can also be integrated in

the compressor).

Air bleed screw (in its place, the compres-

sor may have a button).

ON/OFF switch

12 volt connector

Bottle of sealant

Spare tyre valve

The valve insert remover

has a gap at

the l

er end for a valve insert. The valve in-

sert can only be screwed or unscrewed in this

way. This also applies to its replacement part

WARNING

When inflating the wheel, the air compres-

sor and the inflator t

ube may become hot.

●

Protect hands and skin from hot parts.

●

Do not place the hot flexible inflator tube

or hot air compressor on flammable mate-

rial.

Self-help

●

Allow them t

o cool before storing the de-

vice.

●

If it is not possible to inflate the tyre to at

least 2.0 bars (29 psi / 200 kPa), the tyre is

too badly damaged. The sealant is not in a

good condition to seal the tyre. Do not con-

tinue driving. Seek specialist assistance.

CAUTION

Switch off the air compressor after a maxi-

mum of 8 oper

ational minutes t

o avoid

overheating! Before switching on the air

compressor again, let it cool for several mi-

nutes.

Check after 10 minutes of driving

Screw the inflator tube

›

Fig. 100

again

and check the pr

essur

e on the gauge

1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kP

a) and l

wer:

●

Stop the vehicle! The tyre cannot be

sealed sufficiently with the tyre mobility set.

●

You should obtain professional assistance

›››

1.4 bar (20 psi / 140 kP

a) and higher:

●

Set the t

e pressure to the correct value

again.

●

Carefully resume your journey until you

reach the nearest specialised workshop with-

out exceeding 80 km/h (50 mph).

●

Have the damaged tyre replaced.

WARNING

Driving with an unsealed tyre is dangerous

and can cause accidents and serious in-

jury.

●

Do not continue driving if the tyre pres-

sure is 1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and l

ower.

●

Seek specialist assistance.

Manual unlocking/locking

Intr

oduction

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 16,

›››



page 17.

The doors, rear lid and panoramic tilting sun-

roof can be locked manually and partially

opened, for example if the key or the central

locking is damaged.

WARNING

Opening and closing doors carelessly can

cause serious injury.

●

If the vehicle is locked from outside, the

doors and windows cannot be opened from

the inside

●

Never l

eave children or disabled people

alone in the car. They could be trapped in

the car in an emergency and will not be

able to get themselves to safety.

●

Depending on the time of the year, tem-

peratures inside a locked and closed vehi-

cle can be extremely high or extremely low

resulting in serious injuries and illness or

even death, particularly for young children.

WARNING

Getting in the way of the doors and the rear

lid is danger

ous and can lead t

o serious in-

jury.

●

Open and close the doors and the rear lid

only when there is nobody in the way.

CAUTION

When opening and closing in an emergen-

cy, carefully disassemble components and

then r

eassemble them carefully to avoid

damage to the vehicle.

Emergencies

Changing the windscreen

wiper bl

ades

Changing the windscr

een and r

ear

window wiper blades

Read the additional information carefully

›››



page 62.

The windscreen wiper blades are supplied as

standard with a layer of graphite. This layer is

responsible for ensuring that the wipe is silent.

If the graphite layer is damaged, the noise of

the water as it is wiped across the windscreen

will be louder.

Check the condition of the wiper blades reg-

ularly. If the wipers scrape across the

glass, they should be changed if they are

damaged, or cleaned if they are dirty

›››

Damaged windscr

een wiper bl

ades shoul

be replaced immediately. These are availa-

ble from qualified workshops.

WARNING

Worn or dirty windscreen wiper blades re-

duce visibility and increase the risk of acci-

dent and serious injury.

●

ways replace damaged or worn wind-

screen wiper blades or blades that no lon-

ger clean the windscreen properly.

CAUTION

●

Damaged or dirty windscr

een wipers

could scratch the glass.

●

If products containing solvents, rough

sponges or sharp objects are used to clean

the blades, the graphite layer will be dam-

aged.

●

Never use fuel, nail varnish remover, paint

thinner or similar products to clean the win-

dows.

●

In icy conditions, always check that the

wiper blades are not frozen to the glass be-

fore using the wipers. In cold weather, it

may help to leave the vehicle parked with

the wipers in service position

›››



page 61.

CAUTION

●

To pre

vent damage to the bonnet and the

wiper arms, only leave them in the service

position.

●

Before driving, always lower the wiper

arms.

Tow-starting and towing

Intr

oduction

Tow-starting means st

arting the engine of

the v

ehicl

e while another pulls it.

Towing means one vehicle pulling another

that is not roadworthy.

Always consider the legal provisions relating

to tow-starting and towing.

For technical reasons, towing a vehicle

with a discharged battery is not allowed.

The jump start should be used instead

›››



page 59.

If the vehicle comes with the Keyless Access

system, towing is only allowed with the igni-

tion on!

The vehicle battery drains if the vehicle is

towed with the engine switched off and the

ignition connected. Depending on the battery

charge status, the drop in voltage may be so

large, even after just a few minutes, that no

electrical device in the vehicle may work e.g.

the hazard warning lights. In vehicles with the

Keyless Access system, the steering wheel

could lock

›››

WARNING

A vehicle with no power should never be

tow

ed.

●

During towing, never switch off the igni-

tion with the starter button. Otherwise, the

electronic lock of the steering column

could suddenly get blocked and it would be

impossible to steer the vehicle. This could

cause an accident, serious injury and loss

of control of the vehicle.

Self-help

●

If during towing the v

ehicle runs out of

power, stop towing immediately and re-

quest the assistance of specialist person-

nel.

WARNING

Vehicle handling and braking capacity

change consider

ably during to

wing. Please

observe the following instructions to mini-

mise the risk of serious accidents and in-

jury:

●

As the driver of the vehicle being towed:

–

You should depress the brake much

harder as the brake servo does not op-

erate. Pay the utmost attention to avoid

crashing into the towing vehicle.

–

More strength is required at the steer-

ing wheel as the power steering does

not operate when the engine is switch-

ed off.

●

As the driver of the towing vehicle:

–

Accelerate with particular care and

caution.

–

Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.

–

Brake earlier than usual and more

smoothly.

CAUTION

●

To avoid damaging the v

ehicle, for exam-

ple the paint, remove and replace the lid

and towing eye carefully.

●

Unburnt fuel could enter the cat

alytic

converter and damage it during towing.

Indications for tow-starting

Vehicle's should not generally be tow-

start

ed. The jump start should be used in-

stead

›››



page 59.

For technical reasons, towing the following

vehicles is not allowed:

●

Vehicles with an automatic gearbox.

●

If the vehicle battery is discharged, be-

cause in vehicles with the K

eyless Access

locking and ignition system the steering re-

mains locked and the electronic parking

brake cannot be deactivated nor can the

electronic lock of the steering column be re-

leased if they are activated.

●

If the battery is flat, it is possible that the

engine control units may not operate correct-

ly.

However, if the vehicle must absolutely be

tow-started (in the case of manual gear-

boxes):

●

Engage the 2nd or 3rd gear.

●

Keep the clutch pressed down.

●

Switch on the ignition and the hazard warn-

ing lights.

●

Once both vehicles are moving, release the

clutch.

●

Once the engine starts, press the clutch

and disengage the gear to avoid colliding

with the towing vehicle.

CAUTION

When tow-starting, unburnt fuel could en-

ter the catalytic conv

erter and damage it.

Note

The vehicle can only be tow-started if the

electronic parking br

ake and, if appropri-

ate, the electronic lock of the steering col-

umn are deactivated. If the vehicle has no

power supply or there is an electric system

fault, the engine must be tow-started to de-

activate the electronic parking brake and

the electronic lock of the steering column.

Indications for towing

Tow rope or tow bar

It is saf

er f

or the v

ehicle to be towed using a

tow bar, avoiding damage to the vehicle. A

tow rope should only be used if a tow bar is

not available.

A tow rope should be slightly elastic to avoid

damage to both vehicles. It is advisable to

use a tow rope made of synthetic fibre or sim-

ilarly elastic material.

Emergencies

Only attach the tow rope or the tow bar to

the t

wing eyes pr

ovided or a towing bracket.

If the vehicle is factory-equipped with a

towing bracket, it is only allowed to tow with

a tow bar if this has been specially designed

to be installed with a tow hitch

›››

page 332.

When the vehicle needs to be towed:

Check whether the vehicle may be towed

›››

page 90, Cases where towing a vehi-

cle is not allowed.

●

Switch the ignition on.

●

Put the gearbox lever in neutral or the se-

lector lever in the N

›››

page 251 position.

●

Do not allow the vehicle to be towed at

speeds of over 50 km/h (30 mph).

●

The vehicle must not be towed further than

50 km (30 miles).

●

If a breakdown lorry is used, vehicles with

automatic transmission are only allowed to

be towed with the front wheels suspended.

Towing vehicles with four-wheel drive

(4Drive)

Four-wheel drive vehicles (4Drive) can be

towed using a tow bar or tow rope. If the vehi-

cle is towed with the front or rear axle sus-

pended, the engine must be switched off,

otherwise the transmission may be damaged.

Cases where towing a vehicle is not al-

lowed

●

If, due to a fault, the gearbox is out of lubri-

cant.

●

If the vehicle battery is discharged, be-

cause the steering remains locked and, if ap-

propriate, the electronic parking brake can-

not be deactivated or the electronic lock of

the steering column released.

●

If a distance above 50 km needs to be trav-

elled.

●

When, for example, after an accident, the

smooth rotation of the wheels or the steering

operation cannot be guaranteed.

When the vehicle is to tow another vehicle:

●

Observe legal requirements.

●

Keep in mind the instructions in the manual

on towing vehicles.

Note

The vehicle can only be towed if the elec-

tronic parking brak

e and the electronic

lock of the steering column are deactiva-

ted. If the vehicle has no power supply or

there is an electric system fault, the engine

must be tow-started

›››



page 59 to de-

activate the electronic parking brake and

the electronic lock of the steering column.

Fitting the front towing eye

Fig. 101

Front bumper on right: remove the lid.

Fig. 102

Right side of the front bumper: towline

anchor

age scr

wed in.

The housing of the screw towing eye is on the

right side of the fr

ont bumper behind a lid

›

Fig. 101.

The towing eye should always be kept in the

vehicle.

Self-help

Bear in mind the instructions for towing

›

page 89.

Fitting the towline anchorage

●

Remove the towing eye from the vehicle

tool kit in the luggage compartment

›››

page 85.

●

Extract the lid for the towing eye using the

vehicle key blade (if you do not have the spe-

cific tool), pressing on the side and levering

gently from left to right.

●

Remove the lid and let it hang from the ve-

hicle.

●

Screw the towing eye in the housing by

turning it to the maximum anticlock-

wise

›››

. Use a suitable object that can

compl

ely and secur

ely tighten the towing

eye in its housing.

●

After towing, unscrew the towing eye

clockwise with a suitable object.

●

Insert the side tab of the lid into the opening

of the bumper and press until the tab is prop-

erly clipped into the bumper.

●

Clean the towing eye if necessary and then

store it in the luggage compartment along

with the other vehicle tools.

CAUTION

The towing eye must always be completely

and firmly tightened. Otherwise, it coul

d be

released while towing and tow-starting.

Fitting the rear towing eye

Fig. 103

Rear bumper on right: remove the lid.

Fig. 104

Right side of the rear bumper: towline

anchor

age scr

wed in.

The housing of the screw towing eye is on the

right side of the r

ear bumper behind a lid

›

Fig. 103. Vehicles equipped as standard

with a towing bracket do not have any hous-

ing for the screw towing eye behind the lid. In

this case, the tow hitch needs to be extracted

or installed and used for towing

›››

page 329,

›››

Bear in mind the instructions f

or t

wing

›››

page 89.

Assemble the rear towing eye (cars with-

out a factory-equipped towing bracket)

●

Remove the towing eye from the vehicle

tool kit in the luggage compartment

›››

page 85.

●

Press the upper side of the lid

›››

Fig. 103 to

unclip it.

●

Remove the lid and let it hang from the ve-

hicle.

●

Screw the towing eye in the housing by

turning it to the maximum anticlockwise

›››

Fig. 104

›››

. Use a suitable object that

can compl

ely and secur

ely tighten the tow-

ing eye in its housing.

●

After towing, unscrew the towing eye

clockwise with a suitable object.

●

Insert the upper flange of the lid into the

opening of the bumper and press the lower

side of the lid until the upper flange is inserted

into the bumper.

●

Clean the towing eye if necessary and then

store it in the luggage compartment along

with the other vehicle tools.

Emergencies

CAUTION

●

The towing eye must al

ways be com-

pletely and firmly tightened. Otherwise, it

could be released while towing and tow-

starting.

●

If the vehicle is factory-equipped with a

towing bracket, it is only allowed to tow

with a tow bar if this has been specially de-

signed to be installed with a tow hitch. If an

unsuitable tow bar is used, both the tow

hitch and the vehicle may be damaged. In-

stead, a tow rope should be used.

Driving tips for towing

Towing requires some expertise and experi-

ence

, especially when using a t

w rope. Both

drivers should be familiar with the difficulties

involved in towing. For this reason, inexper-

ienced drivers should abstain from towing.

During towing, it should be ensured that no

impermissible tractive forces or shocks are

generated. When towing on an unpaved

road, there is always a risk of overloading and

damaging the anchorage points.

During towing, the towing vehicle can signal

the change of direction even with the hazard

warning lights turned on. To do so, at the

same time, the turn signal lever must be oper-

ated with ignition switched on. Meanwhile, the

hazard warning lights will go off. When the

turn signal lever is returned to the rest posi-

tion, the hazard warning lights will be auto-

matically reactivated.

Notes for the driver of the towed vehicle

●

Leave the ignition on, so that the steering is

not blocked, and the electronic parking brake

may be deactivated and the turn signals and

wash/wipe operated.

●

More strength is required at the steering

wheel as the power steering does not oper-

ate when the engine is switched off.

●

You should depress the brake much harder

as the brake servo does not operate. Avoid

hitting the towing vehicle.

●

Bear in mind the information and instruc-

tions in the manual of the vehicle to be towed.

Notes for the driver of the towing vehicle

●

Accelerate with particular care and cau-

tion. Avoid sharp manoeuvres.

●

Brake earlier than usual and smoothly.

●

Bear in mind the information and instruc-

tions in the manual of the towed vehicle.

Fuses and bulbs

Fuses

Intr

oduction

In general, a fuse can be assigned to various

electrical components. Like

wise, an electrical

component can be protected by several

fuses.

Only replace fuses when the cause of the

problem has been solved. If a newly inserted

fuse blows after a short time, you must have

the electrical system checked by a special-

ised workshop as soon as possible.

WARNING

The high voltages in the electrical system

can give serious electrical shocks, causing

burns and e

ven death!

●

Never touch the electrical wiring of the

ignition system.

●

Take care not to cause short circuits in

the electrical system.

WARNING

Using unsuitable fuses, repairing fuses or

bridging a current circuit without fuses can

cause a fir

e and serious injury.

●

Never use a fuse with a higher value. Only

replace fuses with a fuse of the same

Fuses and bulbs

amperage (same colour and markings) and

size.

●

ver repair a fuse.

●

Never replace a fuse by a metal strip, sta-

ple or similar.

CAUTION

●

o pre

vent damage to the vehicle's elec-

tric system, before replacing a fuse always

turn off the ignition, the lights and all elec-

trical elements and remove the key from

the ignition.

●

If you replace a fuse with higher-rating

fuse, you could cause damage to another

part of the electrical system.

●

Protect the fuse boxes when open to pre-

vent the entry of dust or humidity as they

can damage the electrical system.

Note

●

One component may have more than one

fuse

●

Several components may run on a single

fuse.

Vehicle interior fuses

Fig. 105

On the dashboard on the driver side

eft guide): lid of the fuse bo

Fig. 106

Glove compartment (left guide): Ac-

cess t

o the fuse bo

Opening and closing the fuse box situated

bel

w the dash panel (l

eft-hand drive)

●

Open: fold the cover down

›››

Fig. 105.

●

Close: push back the cover it in until it clicks

into place.

Fuses behind the glove compartment

(right-hand drive)

To be able to access the fuse box:

Emergencies

●

Undo the opening limit

›

Fig. 106

o st

eps: first, unl

ock the limiter by pulling

back on it (arrow

) and then move it gently

o the right (arr

). Remove the guide

when the co

er is in the normal opening posi-

tion (30°).

●

ee the side pivots

to release the cover

o its second opening position (60°).

oll

ow the same procedure in reverse order

to return the glove compartment to its normal

position.

CAUTION

●

Always car

efully remove the fuse box

covers and refit them correctly to avoid

problems with your vehicle.

●

Protect the fuse boxes when open to

avoid the entry of dust or humidity. Dirt and

humidity inside fuse boxes can cause dam-

age to the electrical system.

Engine compartment fuses

Fig. 107

In the engine compartment: lid of the

fuse bo

To open the engine compartment fuse box

●

Open the bonnet 

›

page 347.

●

Press the locking tabs to release the fuse

box cover

›››

Fig. 107.

●

Then lift the cover out.

●

To fit the cover, place it on the fuse box.

Push the locking tabs down until they click

audibly into place.

Fuse placement

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 51

Only replace fuses with a fuse of the same

amperage (same colour and markings) and

size.

Fuses in the vehicle interior

No. Consumers/Amps

1 Adblue (SCR) 20

4 Alarm horn 7.5

5 Gateway 7.5

6 Automatic gearbox lever 7.5

Air conditioning and heating

control panel, back windo

heating, auxiliary heating.

Diagnosis, electronic parking

brake s

witch, light switch, re-

verse light, interior lighting, driv-

ing mode, lit-up door sill

7.5

9 Steering column 7.5

10 Radio display 7.5

11 Left lights 40

12 Radio 20

14 Air conditioner fan 40

15 Steering column release 10

16 Connectivity Box 7.5

17 Instrument panel, OCU 7.5

18 Rear camera 7.5

19 Kessy 7.5

20 SCR, engine relay, 1.5 10/15

Fuses and bulbs

No. Consumers/Amps

21 4x4 Haldex Control Unit 15

22 Trailer 15

23 Electric sunroof 20

24 Right lights 40

25 Left door 30

26 Heated seats 30

27 Interior light 30

28 Trailer 25

Control unit for parking aid,

ont camera and r

adar

7.5/10

33 Airbag 7.5

Reverse switch, climate sensor,

electrochromic mirror, rear

power sockets (USB)

7.5

Diagnosis, headlight control

unit, headlight adjuster

7.5

36 Right LED headlight 7.5

37 Left LED headlight 7.5

38 Trailer 25

39 Right door 30

40 12V socket 20

42 Central locking 40

43 Beats Audio CAN and MOST. 30

No. Consumers/Amps

44 Trailer 15

45 Electric driver's seat 15

47 Rear window wiper 15

49 Starter motor; clutch sensor 7.5

50 Electric rear lid 40

52 Driving mode. 15

53 Heated rear window 30

In-line fuse Amperes

Rear power sockets 7.5

Fuse arrangement in engine compartment

No. Consumers/Amps

1 ESP control unit 25

2 ESP control unit 40

Engine control unit (diesel/pet-

rol)

30/15

4 Engine sensors 7.5

Engine sensors 7.5

6 Brake light sensor 7.5

7 Engine power supply 7.5/10

8 Lambda probe 10/15

9 Engine 5/10/20

No. Consumers/Amps

10 Fuel pump control unit 15/20

11 PTC 40

12 PTC 40

13 Gearbox pump 30

14 Heated windscreen 40

15 Horn 15

16 Petrol pump 7.5/15/20

17 Engine control unit 7.5

Terminal 30 (positive refer-

ence)

7.5

19 Front windscreen washer 30

21 Automatic gearbox control unit 15/30

22 Engine control unit 7.5

23 Starter motor 30

24 PTC 40

31 Pressure pump 15

37 Parking heating 20

Note

●

In the vehicle

, there are more fuses than

those indicated in this chapter. These

should only be changed by a specialised

workshop.

Emergencies

●

Positions not containing a fuse do not ap-

pear in the f

ollowing tables.

●

Some of the equipment listed in the ta-

bles below pertain only to certain versions

of the model or are optional extras.

●

Please note that the above lists, while

correct at the time of printing, are subject

to change.

Changing a bulb

Topic introduction

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 52.

Changing bulbs requires a certain degree of

practical skill.

If you choose to change the engine compart-

ment lamps yourself, remember that it is a

dangerous area

›››

in Working in the en-

gine compar

tment on page 347

ways use identical bulbs with the same

designation. The name can be found on the

base of the bulb holder.

Depending on how equipped the vehicle is,

there are different sets of headlights and tail

lights:

●

Halogen headlights.

●

Full-LED main headlights*

●

Rear bulb light

●

LED rear light*

Full-LED headlight system*

Full-LED headlights handle all light functions

(daylight, side light, turn signal, dipped beam

and route light) with light emitting diodes

(LEDs) as a light source.

Full-LED headlights are designed to last the

lifetime of the car and light bulbs cannot be

replaced. In case of headlight failure, go to an

authorised workshop to have it replaced.

WARNING

●

Take par

ticular care when working on

components in the engine compartment if

the engine is warm. Risk of burns.

●

Bulbs are highly sensitive to pressure. The

glass can break when you touch the bulb,

causing injury.

●

When changing bulbs, please take care

not to injure yourself on sharp edges, in

particular on the headlight housing.

CAUTION

●

Remov

e the ignition key before working

on the electric system. Otherwise, a short

circuit could occur.

●

Switch off the lights and the parking light

before changing a bulb.

●

Take good car

e to avoid damaging any

components.

For the sake of the environment

Please ask your specialist retailer how to

dispose of used bulbs in the pr

oper manner.

Note

●

Please check at regul

ar intervals that all

lighting (especially the exterior lighting) on

your vehicle is functioning properly. This is

not only in the interest of your own safety,

but also that of all other road users.

●

Before changing a bulb, make sure you

have the correct new bulb.

●

Do not touch the glass part of the bulb

with your bare hands, use a cloth or paper

towel instead, since the fingerprints left on

the glass will vaporise as a result of the

heat generated by the bulb, they will be

deposited on the reflector and will impair

its surface.

●

Depending on the level of equipment fit-

ted in the vehicle, LEDs may be used for

part or all of the interior and/or exterior

lighting. LEDs have an estimated life that

exceeds than that of the car. If an LED light

fails, go to an authorised workshop for its

replacement.

Fuses and bulbs

Change the front bulbs

Dipped beam headlight

Fig. 108

In the engine compartment: remove

the lid.

Fig. 109

In the engine compartment: dipped

beam l

amp

Follow the steps indicated:

aise the bonnet.1.

e the loops

›››

Fig. 108

in the di-

ection of the arr

w and remove the cov-

er.

Remove connector

›››

Fig. 109

from

the bulb

Unclip the r

ainer spring

›››

Fig. 109

pressing clockwise and inwards.

Extr

act the bulb and fit the r

epl

acement

so that the lug on the base fits into the

recess on the reflector.

Installation involves all of the above

steps in reverse sequence.

Main beam headlight bulb and turn

signal bulb

Fig. 110

In the engine compartment: remove

the lid.

Fig. 111

In the engine compartment: main

beam headlight bulb

and turn signal bulb

Follow the steps indicated:

Main beam headlight bulb

aise the bonnet.

e the loop

›››

Fig. 110

in the direc-

tion of the arr

w and r

emove the cover.

Slide connector

›››

Fig. 111

to the left

or right and pull.

emo

e the bulb by disconnecting the

connector.

Installation involves all of the above

steps in reverse sequence.

Emergencies

Turn signal bulb

aise the bonnet.

e the loop

›››

Fig. 110

in the direc-

tion of the arr

w and r

emove the cover.

Turn the bulb holder

›››

Fig. 111

anti-

ockwise and pull.

emo

ve the bulb by pressing on the bulb

holder and turning it anticlockwise at the

same time.

Installation involves all of the above

steps in reverse sequence.

Front fog light bulb*

Fig. 112

Fog light: remove the grille

Fig. 113 Fog light: detach the bulb holder

Follow the steps indicated:

emo

e the screw

›››

Fig. 112

 fr

the f

og light grill

e using a screwdriver

and extract the grille.

Remove the 3 screws

›››

Fig. 112

.

emo

e the metal clip situated on the

upper part of the fog light by pulling

away from the vehicle

 and e

xtract

the f

og light.

emove connector

›››

Fig. 113

from

the bulb

urn the bulb hol

der

›››

Fig. 113

anti-

ockwise and pull.

emo

ve the bulb by pressing on the bulb

holder and turning it anticlockwise at the

same time.

Installation involves all of the above

steps in reverse sequence.

Check that the bulb works properly.

Fuses and bulbs

Note

Due to the difficulty of accessing fog light

bulbs, have them repl

aced at a Technical

Service or specialised workshop.

Change the rear bulbs

Overview of t

ail lights

Tail lights on side panel

Turn signal PY21W NA LL

Side light and brake light P21W LL

Tail lights on the rear lid

Left side

Side lights P21W LL

Fog light/side light P21W LL

Reverse light W16W

Right side

Side lights 2x P21W LL

Reverse light W16W

The table corresponds to a right-hand traffic

ehicl

. The position of lights may vary ac-

cording to the country.

Rear bulbs (in the side panel)

Fig. 114

Boot: access to the bolt securing the

ail light unit.

Fig. 115 Retaining tabs on reverse side of tail

light.

Follow the steps indicated:

Check which of the bulbs is def

ectiv

Open the rear lid.

Remove the lid, levering it with the flat

side of a screwdriver into the recess

›››

Fig. 114

emo

e the bulb connector.

Unscrew the light securing bolt by hand

or using a screwdriver

›››

Fig. 114

emo

e the light from the body, gently

pulling it toward you, and place on a

clean, smooth surface.

Disassemble the bulb holder unlocking

the securing tabs

›››

Fig. 115

Change the damaged bulb

o r

efit follow the steps in reverse order,

taking special care when fitting the bulb

holder. The securing tabs must click into

place.

CAUTION

Take care when removing the rear light unit

to make sur

e there is no damage to the

paintwork or any of its components.

Note

●

Make sure you hav

e a soft cloth ready to

place under the glass on the rear light unit,

to avoid any scratches.

●

In the case of LED lights, change only the

turn signal bulb.

Emergencies

Rear lights (in the rear lid)

Fig. 116

Rear lid open: remove the lid.

Fig. 117

Remove the bulb holder.

The rear lid must be open to change the

bulbs.

oll

w the steps indicated:

Remove the rear lid cover in the direction

indicated

›››

Fig. 116.

Unlock the securing tabs from the bulb

holder

›››

Fig. 117

or turn the bulb

hol

der t

o the l

eft

and

emo

e the bulb holder from its location.

Lightly press the defective bulb into the

bulb holder, then turn it to the left and re-

move it.

Fit the new bulb, pressing it into the bulb

holder and turn it to the right as far as it

will go.

Use a cloth to remove any fingerprints

from the glass part of the bulb.

Check that the new bulb works properly.

Carry out the same actions in reverse or-

der for assembly and pay special atten-

tion to placing the bulb holder, ensuring

that the tabs are properly secured.

Note

For LED pilots, you can only change the re-

verse bulb.

Changing number plate light bulbs

Fig. 118

In the rear bumper: number plate

light.

Fig. 119 Number plate light: detach the bulb

hol

der

Follow the steps indicated:

ess the number pl

e light in the direc-

tion of the arrow

›››

Fig. 118.

Remove the number plate light.

100

Fuses and bulbs

Turn the connector lock

›

Fig. 119 in the

direction of arrow

and pull on the

connect

otate the bulb holder in the direction of

arrow

and extract it with the bulb.

epl

ace the def

ective bulb with a new

bulb with the same features.

Insert the bulb holder in the number

plate light and turn in the opposite direc-

tion of arrow

until it stops.

Plug the connect

or int

o the bulb hol

der.

Note

Depending on how equipped the vehicle is,

the number plate lights may be LEDs. LEDs

hav

e an estimated life that exceeds than

that of the car. If a light with LEDs fails, go

to an authorised workshop for replace-

ment.

Side turn signals

Fig. 120

Turn signal integrated in the rear view

mirr

The side turn signals are LEDS and are inte-

ed in the e

xterior mirrors.

In case of failure, go to an authorised work-

shop to have them replaced.

101

Operation

Fig. 121

Instruments and controls.

102

Controls and displays

Operation

Contr

s and displ

ays

General instrument panel

Door release lever

Central locking s

witch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Control for the electric adjustment

of the exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Air vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Control lever for:

–

Turn signals and main beam

headlights

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

–

Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

–

Main beam assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

–

Cruise control system (CCS) . . . . . 274

Depending on equipment fitted:

–

Lever for cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

Steering wheel with horn and

–

Driver airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

–

On-board computer controls . . . . . 120

–

Controls for radio, telephone,

navigation and speech dialogue

system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

–

Paddle levers for tiptronic gear-

shift (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . . 255

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Control lever for:

–

Windscr

een wipers and w

asher

. . . 156

–

Wipe and wash system . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

–

On-board computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

According to features: radio or dis-

play for Easy Connect (navigation,

radio, TV/video) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Depending on the equipment, but-

tons for:

–

Start-Stop system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

–

Park assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

–

Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

–

Tyre pressure switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

–

Airbag off display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Depending on the equipment, glove

compartment with: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

–

CD player* and/or SD card* . . . . . 209

Front passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Front passenger airbag switch . . . . . . 78

Front passenger seat heating con-

trol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Depending on the equipment, con-

trols for:

–

Heating and ventilation system or

manual air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

–

Automatic air conditioner . . . . . . . . . 42

Depending on the equipment:

–

USB/AUX-IN input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

–

Light

er/po

er socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

–

Connectivity Box/Wireless Charg-

er* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

–

Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Gear lever for:

–

Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

–

Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

Rotating control(Driving Experience

button) for driving modes . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

Auto Hold switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

Electronic parking brake switch . . . . . 244

Start-up push button (Keyless Ac-

cess closing and start-up sys-

tem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

Driver's seat heating control . . . . . . . . 161

Ignition lock (vehicles without Key-

less Access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Steering column adjustment lev-

er . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Knee airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Bonnet lock release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

Headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Headlight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Note

●

Some of the equipment listed in this sec-

tion is only fitted on cer

tain models or are

optional extras.

103

Operation

●

The arrangement of swit

ches and con-

trols on right-hand drive models* may be

slightly different from the layout shown in

›››

page 102. However, the symbols used to

identify the controls are the same.

Instruments and warn-

ing/contr

ol l

amps

Dashboar

Introduction

Fig. 122 Related video:

Dash panel

The vehicle can be fitted with a instrument

panel digit

al l

ap timer or one Digit

al (SEAT

Cockpit).

After switching the engine on with a 12-volt

battery that is heavily discharged or newly

changed some system settings (such as the

time, the date, the personalised comfort set-

tings and the programming) might be altered

or deleted. Check and correct these settings

once the battery is sufficiently charged.

WARNING

Any distraction may lead to an accident,

with the risk of injury.

●

Do not operate the instrument panel con-

trols when driving.

●

o reduce the risk of accident and injury,

only make adjustments to the instructions

on the screen of the instrument panel and

to the instructions on the screen of the Info-

tainment system when the vehicle is sta-

tionary.

104

Instruments and warning/control lamps

Analogue instrument panel

Fig. 123

Instrument panel, on dash panel.

Details of the instruments

›

Fig. 123:

Revolution counter (with the engine run-

ning, in hundreds of revolutions per mi-

nute)

›››

page 117.

Engine coolant temperature display

›

page 118

Displays on the screen

›››

page 108.

Adjuster button and display.

Speedometer.

Fuel gauge

›

page 117.

105

Operation

Digital instrument panel (SEAT Digital Cockpit)

Fig. 124 SEAT Digital Cockpit on the instrument

panel (classic view).

Details of the instruments:

Engine cool

ant t

emper

ature display

›››

page 118

Revolution counter. Revolutions per mi-

nute the engine is running

›››

page 117.

Gear engaged or position of the selec-

tor lever currently selected

Screen display

›››

page 108

Speedometer

Digital speed display

Fuel gauge

›››

page 117.

Information Profile

›››

page 106.

The Digital SEAT Cockpit is an instrument

panel digit

al with monochr

ome scr

een in col-

our high resolution. It has a 3 views accessi-

ble using the button 

of the multifunction

eering wheel. By sel

ecting diff

erent infor-

mation profiles, indications other than the

classic circular instruments can be displayed,

such as navigation data, multimedia informa-

tion or travel data.

The 3 views are:

Classic View

Digital maps (no information profiles)

Semicircular watches

–

All views will display information on the

screen about audio, phone, travel data, vehi-

cle status, navigation

and driving aids

In Classic View and Semicircular watches it is

possible to customise the information dis-

played under Information Profiles

›››

Fig. 124

Inf

ormation pr

ofil

With the option INSTRUMENT PANEL (Infotain-

ment button 

> Vehicle function but-

ton > View > Instrument cluster) you

Depending on the version.

106

Instruments and warning/control lamps

can choose between the different display op-

tions of the inf

ormation that appears in the

Digit

al SEAT Cockpit.

assic View

The revolutions per minute and speedometer

needles appear along the entire length

›››

Fig. 124.

View 1, 2, 3 or AUTOMATIC*

Personalisation of the information that ap-

pears in the Digital SEAT Cockpit. Only 2 of

these items of information can be displayed

at the same time, but the user chooses which

to display, and in what order, by moving the

finger vertically over the dials.

Depending on the version, the Views can be

memorised by exiting the menu or keeping

the View button pressed.

●

Consumption. Graphic representation of

the current consumption and digital display

of the average consumption.

●

Audio. Digital display of the current audio

playback.

●

Altitude. Digital display of the current alti-

tude above sea level.

●

Compass. Digital display of the compass.

●

Information about the final destination.

Digital display of the remaining travelling

time, distance to the destination and the esti-

mated time of arrival.

●

Operating range. Digital display of the re-

maining range.

●

Travel time.

●

Route guidance.

●

Journey. Digital display of the distance

travelled.

●

Assistance systems. Graphic representa-

tion of different assistance systems.

●

Traffic signs. Display of traffic signs detec-

ted.

●

Navigation. Graphical representation of

the navigation with arrows.

It may vary based on the features, the num-

ber and the contents of the selectable infor-

mation profiles..

Navigation system in the SEAT

Digital Cockpit*

Fig. 125

Infotainment system: map transfer

butt

Depending on the features, the SEAT Digital

Cockpit can displ

ay a det

ail

ed map. To do

this, select the Navigation option in the

menu menu on the instrument panel

›››

page 110.

Depending on the features or the navigation

map, it can be shown in the Digital SEAT

Cockpit or on the Infotainment system or on

both at the same time. If it is displayed only in

the Infotainment system, the SEAT Digital

Cockpit will only display the arrows for ma-

noeuvres.

Pre-set information depending on the “Driving

mode” selected.

107

Operation

Transfer of navigation map

Using the map tr

ansf

er k

›››

Fig. 125, the

map is transferred from the Infotainment sys-

tem to the Digital SEAT Cockpit and vice ver-

sa.

Using the right thumbwheel of the multifunc-

tion steering wheel, in the Navigation menu,

you can transfer the map back to the Info-

tainment System.

Display indications

Possible indications on the instrument

panel displ

Diff

ent pieces of information can be dis-

played on the screen of the instrument panel,

depending on the features of the vehicle.

●

Doors, bonnet and rear lid open

●

Warning and information messages

●

Odometer

●

Time

›››

page 116

●

Indications of the radio and navigation sys-

tem

●

Indications of the phone

●

Outside temperature

●

Indications of the compass

●

Selector lever positions

●

Gear-change recommendation

›››

page 260

●

Display of travel data (multifunction dis-

play) and menus for different settings

›››

page 110

●

Service interval display

›››

page 119

●

Speed warning

›››

page 110

●

Speed warning for winter tyres

●

Start-Stop system status display

›››

page 269

●

Signs detected by the traffic signal detec-

tion system

›››

page 114

●

Indication of the status of active cylinder

management (ACT

)

›››

page 262

●

Low consumption driving 

●

Identifying letters on engine (LDM)

●

Driver assistance system display

›››

page 269

●

Doors, bonnet and rear lid open

When the vehicle is unlocked and while driv-

ing, the instrument panel display shows if any

of the doors, the bonnet or rear lid are

opened and, in some cases, it is also indica-

ted by an audible warning. The display may

vary according to the type of instrument pan-

el fitted.

Selector lever positions (dual-clutch

DSG

)

The current position of the selector lever is

shown on the side of the lever and on the in-

strument panel display. When the lever is in

the D/S position or in the Tiptronic position, in

some cases, the gear engaged in each case

is shown on the instrument panel display.

Outside temperature display

If the outside temperature is lower than ap-

proximately +4°C (+39°F), the “ice crystal

symbol”  on the outside temperature dis-

play also lights up. This symbol remains lit un-

til the outside temperature exceeds +6°C

(+43°F)

›››

When the v

ehicl

e is st

ationary, when the aux-

iliary heater is switched on or when driving at

very low speeds, the outside temperature in-

dicated may be higher than the actual tem-

perature due to the heat produced by the en-

gine.

The margin of measurement ranges from

-45°C (-49°F) to +76°C (+169°F).

Driving recommendation

While driving, the instrument panel of certain

vehicles may indicate a gear recommenda-

tion for saving fuel

›››

page 260.

108

Instruments and warning/control lamps

Odometer

The od

omet

registers the total distance

travelled by the car.

The partial odometer (trip) shows the dis-

tance travelled since the last time it was reset

to zero.

Vehicles with analogue instrument panel:

●

Briefly press the button 

›

Fig. 123

to reset the trip recorder to 0.

●

Keep the button 

pressed for

about 3 seconds and the pr

vious v

alue will

be displayed.

Vehicles with digital instrument panel:

●

Set the odometer to zero via the Infotain-

ment system or the multifunction steering

wheel

›››

page 110.

Speed warning for winter tyres

If the maximum speed set is exceeded, this is

displayed on the instrument panel

›››

page 110.

The speed warning can be adjusted on the

Infotainment system: using button 

> SET-

TINGS > Driver Assistance

›



page 35 button.

Compass indication

Depending on the equipment, when the igni-

tion is on, the instrument panel display indi-

cates the direction in which you are driving

with a symbol, e.g. NW for Northwest.

When the Infotainment system is on and there

is no route guidance active, the graphic rep-

resentation of a compass is also shown.

Low consumption driving*

Depending on the equipment, when driving,

the  display appears on the instrument

panel when the vehicle is in low consumption

status due to active cylinder management

(ACT

›››

page 262.

Identifying letters on engine (LDM)

Vehicles with analogue instrument panel:

●

Switch the ignition on, but do not start the

engine.

●

Hold the button 

›

Fig. 123

down

or mor

e than 15 seconds t

o display the iden-

tifying letters of the vehicle engine (MKB).

Legal text about the property rights and

copyrights of the instrument cluster.

WARNING

Even when the outside temperature is high-

er than freezing t

emperature, some roads

and bridges could be frozen.

●

The “ice crystal symbol” indicates that

there may be a risk of freezing.

●

At outside temperat

ures above +4°C

(+39°F), there may be ice even when the

“ice crystal symbol” is not on.

●

The outside temperature sensor takes a

guideline measurement.

Note

●

Ther

e are diff

erent instrument panels and

therefore the versions and instructions on

the display may vary. In the case of dis-

plays without warning or information texts,

faults are indicated exclusively by the con-

trol warning lamps.

●

Some indications on the instrument panel

screen may be concealed by a sudden

event, e.g. an incoming call.

●

Depending on the equipment, some set-

tings and instructions can be carried out or

displayed on the infotainment system as

well.

●

If there are several warnings at the same

time, the symbols will be displayed one af-

ter the other for a few seconds. The sym-

bols will stay on until you remove the

cause.

●

If when switching on the ignition warnings

are shown about existing faults, it might not

be possible to change the settings or show

the information as described. In this case,

go to a specialised workshop and request a

repair.

109

Operation

Instrument panel menus

The number of menus and information items

availabl

e will depend on the vehicle’s elec-

tronics and features.

A specialised workshop can programme or

modify additional functions, according to the

vehicle equipment. SEAT recommends visiting

a SEAT dealership for this.

Some menu options can only be read when

the vehicle is stationary.

■

Driving data

›››

page 110

■

Assistance systems.

■

Lane Assist On/Off

›››

page 292

■

Front Assist On/Off

›››

page 279

■

Blind spot detector On/Off

›››

page 298

■

ACC (only display)

›››

page 283

■

Navigation.

■

Audio.

■

Telephone.

■

Vehicle status

›››

page 112

Service Menu

3 Applies to vehicl

es with Active Info Display

(Digital SEAT Cockpit)

In the Service menu various settings can be

adjusted depending on the features.

Open the Service menu

To open up the Service menu, sel

ect the

Driving range information profile while in

the Travel data menu, and keep the 

key

essed on the multifunction st

eering wheel

or approximately 4 seconds. When it is re-

leased, the Service menu will be displayed.

Now you can browse through the menu using

the keys on the multifunction steering wheel

as usual.

Restart the service interval display

Select the Service menu and follow the in-

structions on the screen of the instrument

panel.

Restart the oil service

Select the Restore Oil service menu and

follow the instructions on the instrument pan-

el display.

Restart journey data

Select the Reset trip menu and follow the

instructions on the instrument panel display

to reset the value.

Identifying letters on engine (LDM)

Select the menu Engine code. The identify-

ing letters of the engine will be shown on the

instrument cluster display at the bottom left.

Setting the clock

Select the Time menu and set the correct

time by turning the right thumbwheel of the

multifunction steering wheel.

Journey data display (multifunc-

tion display)

The display of the travel data (multifunction

display) shows diff

erent values about the

journey and the consumption.

Change from one display to another

Vehicles without multifunction steering wheel:

●

press the rocker switch 

on the wind-

scr

een wiper l

ver

›››

page 121.

Vehicles with multifunction steering wheel:

●

Turn the right thumbwheel of the multifunc-

tion steering wheel

›››

page 121.

Changing memory (vehicles with ana-

logue instrument cluster)

Press the 

button on the windscreen

wiper l

er or the 

button of the multifunc-

tion st

eering wheel.

Changing memory (v

ehicl

es with digital

instrument cluster)

While in Travel data > General infor-

mation press 

on the multi-function

110

Instruments and warning/control lamps

steering wheel to switch between the 3 mem-

ories

The memory is del

ed if the

journey is int

errupted for more than 2

hours.

Display and storage of

the journey data and the consumption

values collected. When refuelling, the

memory is deleted.

This memory contains travel data

up to a maximum of 19 hours and 59 mi-

nutes or 99 hours and 59 minutes, or up

to a maximum of 1999.9 km or

9999.9 km. When one of these values is

exceeded (varies depending on the ver-

sion of the instrument panel), the memo-

ry is deleted.

Delete journey data presets

●

Select the memory that you wish to erase.

●

Hold the 

button of the multifunction

eering wheel or the  button of the multi-

function wheel pr

essed do

wn f

or about 2

seconds.

Since start

Since refuelling

Long-term

Select the instructions

In the Infotainment system, in the menu Vehi-

cle settings, you can display different travel

data

›››



page 35.

The current

fuel consumption display operates

throughout the journey, in litres/100 km;

and with the engine running and the ve-

hicle stopped, in litres/hour.

The average

fuel consumption is displayed after driv-

ing for approximately 300 metres.

This indicates the hours

(h) and minutes (min) since the ignition

was switched on.

Approximate distance in

km that can still be travelled if the same

driving style is maintained.

Approxi-

mate distance in km that can still be

travelled with the current level of the

AdBlue

tank with the same driving style.

The indication appears from a range of

less than 2,400 km and cannot be de-

activated.

Current fuel consumption

Average fuel consumption

Travelling time

Operating range

Adblue Autonomy or Autonomy 

Distance covered in

km (m) after switching on the ignition.

The average speed will be

shown after driving for approximately

100 metres.

Current speed displayed in

digital format.

Displays a list of

the connected comfort systems that in-

crease energy consumption, e.g. air

conditioning.

Set a speed warning

●

Select the display Speed warning at

--- km/h or Speed warning at --- mph.

●

Press the button 

on the windscreen

wiper l

er or the button 

on the multifunc-

tion st

eering wheel t

o st

ore the current speed

and activate the warning.

●

Activate: adjust to the desired speed within

5 seconds using the rocker switch 

on the

windscr

een wiper l

ver or by turning the

thumbwheel on the multifunction steering

wheel. Next, press the button 

or 

again or wait several seconds. The speed is

ed and the w

arning activated.

Distance travelled

Average speed

Digital speed

Convenience consumers

This will show all data on the display at the

same time: distance trav

elled, average con-

sumption, average speed and autonomy.

Not available in all countries.

111

Operation

●

Deactiv

press button 

or button

 . The stored speed is deleted.

The w

arning can be adjust

ed f

or speeds be-

tween 30 km/h (18 mph) and 250 km/h

(155 mph).

Display Oil temperature

The engine reaches its operating tempera-

ture when, under normal driving conditions,

the oil temperature is between 80°C and

120°C. If the engine is under a lot of stress

and the outside temperature is high, the en-

gine oil temperature can increase. This does

not present any problem as long as the warn-

ing lamps  or 

›››

page 350 do not ap-

pear on the display.

Warning and information messages

(Vehicle status)

The system runs a check on certain compo-

nents and functions when the ignition is

wit

ched on and whil

e the vehicle is moving.

Faults displayed on the instrument panel as

red and yellow warning symbols accompa-

nied with messages and

›››



page 39, de-

pending on the case, even an audible warn-

ing. The representation of the messages and

symbols may vary depending on the version

of the instrument panel.

Existing faults can also be checked manually.

To do so, open the menu Vehicle status or

Vehicle

›››

page 110.

The symbol lights

up or flashes (in part accompanied by

audible warnings).  Stop driving! Dan-

ger! Check the fault and eliminate the

cause. If necessary, seek professional

assistance.

The symbol

lights up or flashes (in part accompa-

nied by audible warnings). Operating

faults or the lack of operating fluids can

cause damage to the vehicle or a fault.

Check the faulty function as soon as

possible. If necessary, seek professional

assistance.

It provides informa-

tion about processes in the vehicle.

Note

●

Depending on the equipment, some set-

tings and instructions can be carried out or

displayed on the inf

otainment system as

well.

●

If there are several warnings at the same

time, the symbols will be displayed one af-

ter the other for a few seconds. The sym-

bols will stay on until you remove the

cause.

●

If when switching on the ignition warnings

are shown about existing faults, it might not

Priority 1 warning (red).

Priority 2 warning (yellow).

Information message.

be possible to change the settings or show

the information as described. In this case,

go t

o a specialised workshop and request a

repair.

Fatigue detection (break recom-

mendation)*

Fig. 126

On the screen of the instrument pan-

: f

atigue det

ection.

The Fatigue detection informs the driver when

their driving behaviour sho

ws signs of f

atigue

Function and operation

Fatigue detection determines the driving be-

haviour of the driver when starting a journey,

making a calculation of tiredness. This is con-

stantly compared with the current driving be-

haviour. If the system detects that the driver is

tired, an audible warning is given with a

sound and an optic warning is shown with a

112

Instruments and warning/control lamps

symbol and complementary message on the

instrument panel displ

›

Fig. 126. The

message on the instrument panel display is

shown for approximately 5 seconds, and de-

pending on the case, is repeated. The system

stores the last message displayed.

The message on the instrument panel display

can be switched off by pressing the 

button on the windscreen wiper lever or the

butt

on 

on the multi function steering

wheel

›

page 120.

The message can be recalled to the instru-

ment panel display using the multifunction

display

›››

page 110.

Conditions of operation

Driving behaviour is only calculated on

speeds above about 65 km/h (40 mph) up to

around 200 km/h (125 mph).

Switching on and off

Fatigue detection can be activated or deacti-

vated in the Easy Connect system with the



/ button and the SETTINGS function but-

›



page 35. A mark indicates that the

adjustment has been activated.

System limitations

The Fatigue detection has certain limitations

inherent to the system. The following condi-

tions can limit the Fatigue detection or pre-

vent it from functioning.

●

At speeds below 65 km/h (40 mph)

●

At speeds above 200 km/h (125 mph)

●

When cornering

●

On roads in poor condition

●

In unfavourable weather conditions

●

When a sporty driving style is employed

●

In the event of a serious distraction to the

driver

Fatigue detection will be restored when the

vehicle is stopped for more than 15 minutes,

when the ignition is switched off or when the

driver has unbuckled their seat belt and

opened the door.

In the event of slow driving during a long peri-

od of time (below 65 km/h, 40 mph) the sys-

tem automatically re-establishes the tired-

ness calculation. When driving at a faster

speed the driving behaviour will be recalcula-

ted.

WARNING

Do not let the comfort afforded by the Fati-

gue detection system t

empt you into taking

any risks when driving. Take regular breaks,

sufficient in length when making long jour-

neys.

●

The driver always assumes the responsi-

bility of driving to their full capacity.

●

Never drive if you are tired.

●

The system does not detect the tiredness

of the driver in all circumstances. Consult

the information in the section

›››

page 113,

System limitations.

●

In some situations, the system may incor-

rectly interpret an intended driving ma-

noeuvre as driver tiredness.

●

No warning is given in the event of the ef-

fect called microsleep!

●

Please observe the indications on the in-

strument panel and act as is necessary.

Note

●

Fatigue detection has been de

veloped

for driving on motorways and well paved

roads only.

●

If there is a fault in the system, have it

checked by a specialised workshop.

113

Operation

Traffic sign detection system*

Fig. 127

On the instrument panel display: ex-

ampl

es of speed limits or o

ertaking prohibi-

tions with their respective additional signs.

The traffic sign detection system records the

andar

d tr

affic signs in front of the vehicle

with a camera located on the base of the in-

terior mirror and provides information about

speed limits and overtaking prohibitions.

Within its limitations, the system also displays

additional signals, such as time-specific pro-

hibitions, signs for vehicles towing trailers

›››

page 329 or limitations that only apply in

the event of rain. Even on journeys without

signs, the system may display any applicable

speed limits.

The traffic sign detection system does not

work in all countries. Keep this in mind when

travelling abroad.

Indication on the display

In Germany, on motorways and vehicle

roads, besides speed limits and overtaking

provisions the system also displays the end of

prohibition signs. The valid speed limit at the

time in other countries is always shown.

The traffic signs detected by the system are

displayed on the dash panel display

›››

Fig. 127 and, depending on the navigation

system fitted in the vehicle, on the infotain-

ment system as well

›››



page 35.

Traffic sign detection system messages

Message Cause and solution

There are no

traffic signs

available

The system is starting up.

OR: the camera has not rec-

ognised any obligation or pr

hibition signs.

Message Cause and solution

Error: Detec-

tion of traf-

fic signs

There is a fault in the system.

Have the system check

ed by a

specialised workshop.

Speed warning

currently un-

available.

The speed warning function of

the traffic sign detection sys-

em is faulty.

Have the system checked by a

specialised workshop.

Detection of

traffic

signs: Clean

the wind-

screen!

The windscreen is dirty in the

camera area.

ean the windscreen.

Detection of

traffic

signs: Limi-

ted at the

moment

No data transfer by the navi-

gation system.

Check whether the navigation

system has curr

ent maps.

OR: the vehicle is currently in a

region that is not included in

the navigation system's map.

No data

available

The traffic sign detection sys-

tem does not work in the cur-

rent country.

Activating and deactivating traffic sign

displ

ay on the instrument panel

The permanent displ

ay of tr

affic signs on the

instrument panel can be activated or deacti-

vated in the infotainment system using the

System available depending on the country.

114

Instruments and warning/control lamps

 > SETTINGS > Driver Assistance

function butt

ons.

Displ

ay of tr

affic signs

When the traffic sign detection system is con-

nected, a camera located on the base of the

interior rear-view mirror records the traffic

signs in front of the vehicle. After checking

and evaluating the information from the cam-

era, the navigation system and the current

vehicle data, up to three valid traffic signs are

displayed

›››

Fig. 127 B in conjunction with

their corresponding additional signs.

The sign that is currently valid for the

driver is shown in the left side of the

screen For example, a maximum speed

limit of 130 km/h (100 mph)

›››

Fig. 127 A.

A sign valid only in certain circum-

stances, e.g. 100 km/h (60 mph) is shown

second, together with the additional rain

sign.

If the windscreen wiper is

working while you are driving, the signal

with the additional rain sign will be

shown first, on the left, as it is the one

that is applicable at the time.

A sign valid only with restrictions, e.g.

No overtaking at certain times, will be

displayed third

›››

Fig. 127 C.

First:

Second:

Additional sign:

Third:

Speed warning

If the system detects that the permitted

speed is exceeded, it may warn the driver

with a “gong” and visually with a message on

the dash panel display.

The speed warning can be adjusted or deac-

tivated completely in the infotainment system

using the 

> SETTINGS > Driver As-

sistance function butt

ons

›



page 35.

The speed is adjusted in steps of 5 km/h

(3 mph) within a range of between 0 km/h

(mph) and 20 km/h (12 mph) above the maxi-

mum speed permitted.

Trailer mode

In vehicles equipped with a towing bracket

device from the factory and a trailer that is

electrically connected to the vehicle, it is

possible to activate or deactivate the display

of specific traffic signs for vehicles with trailer,

such as speed limits or overtaking prohibi-

tions. Activation or deactivation is performed

on the infotainment system using the 

SETTINGS > Driver Assistance function

butt

ons

›



page 35.

For trailer mode, the display of speed limits

applicable to the type of trailer or to the legal

provisions can be adjusted. The speed is ad-

justed in steps of 10 km/h (5 mph) within a

range of between 60 km/h (40 mph) and

130 km/h (80 mph). If it is adjusted to a speed

greater than that which is permitted in the

country in question for driving with a trailer,

the system automatically displays the usual

speed limits, e.g. in Germany 80 km/h

(50 mph).

If the speed warning for the trailer is deacti-

vated, the system displays the speed limits as

if there were no trailer hitched.

Limited operation

The traffic sign detection system has certain

limitations. The following cases may lead the

system to operate with limitations or not at

all:

●

In the case of poor visibility, e.g. in snow,

rain, fog or intense mist.

●

In cases of dazzling, e.g. caused by head-

on traffic or by the sun.

●

When driving at high speeds.

●

If the camera is covered or dirty.

●

If the traffic signs are out of the camera's

field of vision.

●

If the traffic signs are partially or totally

covered, e.g. by trees, snow, dirt or other vehi-

cles.

●

In the case of traffic signs that do not fulfil

the regulations.

●

In the case of damaged or bent traffic

signs.

115

Operation

●

In the case of v

ariabl

e messages on o

ver-

head or gantry signs (LED-based variable

traffic signs or other lighting units).

●

If the maps on the navigation system are

not up-to-date.

●

In the case of adhesives affixed to vehicles

that depict traffic signs, e.g. speed limits on

lorries.

WARNING

The technology in the traffic sign detection

system cannot change the limits imposed

by the laws of physics and only w

orks with-

in the system's limits. Do not let the extra

convenience afforded by the traffic sign

detection system tempt you into taking any

risks when driving. The system is not a re-

placement for driver awareness.

●

Adapt your speed and driving style to suit

visibility, weather, road and traffic condi-

tions.

●

Poor visibility, darkness, snow, rain and

fog may lead to the system failing to dis-

play traffic signs or not displaying them

correctly.

●

If the camera's field of vision is dirty, cov-

ered or damaged, system operation may

be impaired.

WARNING

The driving recommendations and traffic

indications shown on the traffic sign det

ec-

tion system may differ from the actual cur-

rent traffic sit

uation.

●

The system may not detect or correctly

show all the traffic signs.

●

Traffic signs and traffic regulations have

priority over the recommendations and dis-

plays provided by the system.

WARNING

If messages are ignored, the vehicle may

all in traffic and cause accidents and se-

ere injuries.

●

Never ignore the messages displayed.

●

Stop the vehicle at the next opportunity

and in a safe place.

Note

In order not to compromise the system's

operation, please t

ake the following points

into account:

●

Regularly clean the area of vision of the

camera and keep it in a clean state, without

snow or ice.

●

Do not cover the field of vision of the

camera.

●

Always replace damaged or worn blades

when required to avoid lines on the cam-

era's field of vision.

●

Check that the windscreen is not dam-

aged in the area of the camera's field of vi-

sion.

●

The use of outdated maps on the naviga-

tion syst

em may cause the system to show

traffic signs incorrectly.

●

In the waypoints mode of the navigation

system, the traffic sign detection system is

only partly available.

●

Failure to heed the control lamps and

corresponding text messages when they

light up may result in damage to the vehi-

cle.

Time

Setting the time on the infotainment sys-

●

ess the inf

otainment 

button.

●

Press the SETTINGS function butt

on.

●

Sel

ect the menu option

Date and time to

set the time

›››



page 35.

Setting the time on analogue the instru-

ment panel

●

To set the time (for all vehicle clocks), press

and hold the button 

on the instrument

panel until the Time is displ

ayed.

●

ease the button 

. The time is dis-

ayed on the instrument panel displ

ay and

the hours fiel

d is highlighted.

●

Afterwards, press the button 

until the

desir

ed time is displ

ayed. T

o scroll quickly,

hold the button 

116

Instruments and warning/control lamps

●

When they hav

e finished setting the hour

ait until the minute field is marked on the in-

strument panel display.

●

Afterwards, press the button 

until the

desir

ed time is displ

ayed. T

o scroll quickly,

hold the button 

●

Release the button  in order to finish

setting the time

Adjusting the time in the SEAT Digit

Cockpit

●

Whil

e on the Driving data menu select

Range (Infotainment button 

> View >

Driving data > Range).

●

Press the button  on the multifunction

eering wheel until the Service menu is dis-

ayed on the instrument panel displ

›››

page 110.

●

Select the menu Time.

●

Adjust the correct time by turning the right

thumbwheel of the multifunction steering

wheel.

Revolution counter

The rev counter indicates the number of en-

gine r

olutions per minute.

Together with the gear-change indicator, the

rev counter offers you the possibility of using

the engine of your vehicle at a suitable

speed.

The beginning of the red zone of the rev

counter indicates the maximum speed in any

gear after running-in and with the engine hot.

However, it is advisable to change up a gear

or move the selector lever to D (or lift your

foot off the accelerator) before the needle

reaches the red zone

›››

e r

ecommend that you av

oid high revs and

that you follow the recommendations on the

gear-change indicator. Consult the addition-

al information in

›››

page 260, Choosing the

ideal gear.

CAUTION

●

To pre

vent damage to the engine, the rev

counter needle should only remain in the

red zone for a short period of time.

●

When the engine is cold, avoid high revs

and heavy acceleration and do not make

the engine work hard.

For the sake of the environment

Changing up a gear early will help you to

save fuel and minimise emissions and en-

gine noise.

Fuel level indicator

Fig. 128

Analogue instrument panel: fuel

gauge

Fig. 129 Digital instrument panel: fuel gauge.

117

Operation

Control lamps



It lights up, and in addition, the

low

er diode lights up in red

Fuel tank almost empty. The fuel reserve level has

been reached

››

›

. Refuel as soon as possible.

When the fuel level is very low, the lower diode flash-

es in red.



It lights up yellow

Presence of water in the diesel.

Switch off the engine and r

equest the assistance of

specialised personnel.

The display only works when the ignition is

wit

ched on.

The fuel r

ange is displayed on the instrument

panel.

You can consult the tank capacity of your ve-

hicle in the

›››



page 47 section.

WARNING

When driving with low fuel, the vehicle may

stall in traffic and cause accidents and se-

ere injuries.

●

If the fuel tank level is too low, fuel could

reach the engine irregularly, particularly

when driving up or down slopes.

●

The steering system and the driver assis-

tance systems and brakes do not work

when the engine is running irregularly or

switches off due to lack of fuel or an irregu-

lar supply thereof

●

Always refuel when there is only one

quarter of fuel in tank to prevent the vehicle

to stop due to lack of fuel.

CAUTION

Never run the fuel tank completely dry. An

irr

egular fuel supply can cause misfiring

and unburnt fuel coul

d enter the exhaust

system. The catalytic converter or the par-

ticulate filter may get damaged!

Note

The small arrow on the fuel gauge next to

the fuel pump symbol points out tow

ards

the side of the vehicle with the fuel tank

flap.

Engine coolant temperature dis-

Fig. 130

Analogue instrument panel: engine

cool

ant t

emper

ature display.

Fig. 131

Digital instrument panel: engine cool-

ant t

emper

ure display.

›››

Fig. 130,

›

››

Fig. 131

Instruments and warning/control lamps

Cool zone. The engine has not r

eached

oper

ating t

emperature yet. Avoid high en-

gine speeds and stressing the engine if it

has not reached operating temperature.

Normal zone. At high outside tempera-

tures and when making the engine work

hard, the diodes may continue lighting up

and reach the upper zone. This is no

cause for concern, provided the control

lamp does not light up 

Warning area. When the engine is work-

ing hard, especially at high outside tem-

peratures, the diodes may light up in the

warning area.

The coolant temperature gauge only works

when the ignition is switched on.

Control and warning lamp



It lights up red

 Do not keep driving!

Engine coolant l

evel too low, coolant temperature too

high



Flashes red

Fault in the engine coolant system.

●

Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine and

et it cool do

wn.

●

Check the engine cool

ant level

›››

page 352.

●

If the w

arning l

amp does not s

witch off even

if the coolant level is correct, request assis-

tance from specialised personnel.

CAUTION

●

To ensure a l

ong useful life for the engine,

avoid high revs, driving at high speed and

making the engine work hard for approxi-

mately the first 15 minutes when the engine

is cold. The phase until the engine is warm

also depends on the outside temperature. If

necessary, use the engine oil temperature*

›››

page 112 as a guide.

●

Additional lights and other accessories in

front of the air inlet reduce the cooling ef-

fect of the coolant. At high outside temper-

atures and high engine loads, there is a risk

of the engine overheating.

●

The front spoiler also ensures proper dis-

tribution of the cooling air when the vehicle

is moving. If the spoiler is damaged this can

reduce the cooling effect, which could

cause the engine to overheat. Seek spe-

cialist assistance.

Service intervals

The service interval indication appears on the

instrument panel displ

ay and the Inf

ain-

ment system.

There are different versions of instrument

panels and infotainment systems, so the ver-

sions and instructions on the screens may

vary.

SEAT distinguishes between services with en-

gine oil change (e.g. Oil change service) and

services without engine oil change (e.g. In-

spection).

In vehicles with Services established by

time or mileage, the service intervals are al-

ready pre-defined.

In vehicles with LongLife Service, the inter-

vals are determined individually. Thanks to

technological progress, maintenance work

has been greatly reduced. Because of the

technology used by SEAT, with this service

you only need to change the oil when the ve-

hicle so requires. To calculate this variation

(max. 2 years), the vehicle's conditions of use

and individual driving styles are considered.

The advance warning first appears 20 days

before the date established for the corre-

sponding service. The kilometres (miles) re-

maining until the next service are always

rounded up to the nearest 100 km (miles) and

the time is given in complete days. The cur-

rent service message cannot be viewed until

500 km after the last service. Prior to this, on-

ly lines are visible on the display.

Inspection reminder

If a service or an inspection has to be carried

out soon, a service reminder will be dis-

played when the ignition is switched on.

119

Operation

The figure displayed are the kilometres that

can still be tr

ell

ed or the time until the next

service.

Service due

When the time for a service or an inspec-

tion comes, an audible warning will be emit-

ted when the ignition is switched on and the

fixed key symbol  may appear on the in-

strument panel for a few seconds, along with

one of the following messages:

●

Service now!

●

Request an inspection.

●

Oil service required!

●

Oil service and inspection re-

quired!

Check a service warning

With the ignition switched on, the engine off

and the vehicle at a standstill, the current

service notification can be read:

Check the date of the current service on the

infotainment system

●

Press the infotainment 

button.

●

Press the SETTINGS function butt

›



page 35.

●

Select the Service menu option to display

information about the services.

Vehicles with analogue instrument panel

●

Press and hold the button 

›››

Fig. 123

for more than 5 seconds to

consult the service message

ehicl

es with digit

al instrument panel

●

The date of the service can only be read

through the Service menu

›››

page 110.

Resetting service interval display

If the service was not carried out by a SEAT

dealership, the display can be reset as fol-

lows:

Vehicles with analogue instrument panel

●

Switch off the ignition, press and hold but-

ton 

›

Fig. 123

●

Switch ignition back on.

●

Release the  button and press it

again f

or the ne

xt 20 seconds.

ehicles with digital instrument panel

●

The service interval display can only be re-

set through the Service menu

›››

page 110.

Do not restart the indicator between the

service intervals, otherwise the information

displayed will be incorrect.

If the oil change service is reset manually, the

service interval display changes to a fixed

service interval, also in vehicles with Flexible

oil change service.

Note

●

The service message disappears after a

w seconds, when the engine is started or

when OK/RESET

is pressed on the wind-

screen wiper le

ver, or OK

on the multifunc-

tion steering wheel.

●

In vehicl

es with the LongLife system in

which the battery has been disconnected

for a long period of time, it is not possible to

calculate the date of the next service.

Therefore the service interval display may

not be correct. In this case, bear in mind the

maximum service intervals permitted

›››

page 367.

●

If you reset the display manually, the next

service interval will be indicated as in vehi-

cles with fixed service intervals. For this

reason we recommend that the service in-

terval display be reset by a SEAT author-

ised Dealer.

Using the instrument panel

Intr

oduction

With the ignition switched on, it is possible to

ead the diff

ent functions of the display by

scrolling through the menus.

In vehicles with multifunction steering wheel,

the multifunction display can only be operat-

ed with the steering wheel buttons.

120

Instruments and warning/control lamps

Some menu options can only be read when

the v

ehicl

e is at a st

andstill.

WARNING

Distracting the driver in any way can lead

to an accident and cause injuries.

●

Nev

er use the menus on the instrument

panel display while the vehicle is in motion.

Note

After loading or changing the 12-volt bat-

tery, check the system settings. If the po

er supply is interrupted, the system settings

might be incorrect or deleted.

Operation with the windscreen wip-

er l

Fig. 132

Windscreen wipers lever: control but-

ons.

As long as a priority 1

›

page 112 warning is

active, it will not be possible to access any

menu. Some warnings can be confirmed and

hidden with the button

›››

Fig. 132

Sel

ect a menu or an inf

ormativ

e display

●

Switch the ignition on.

●

If a message or vehicle symbol is displayed,

press button

; if necessary, several times.

●

To display the menus

›

page 110 or to re-

turn to the selection of menus from a menu or

from an informative display, hold down the

rocker button

●

To change from one menu to another, press

the upper or l

er part of the rocker switch.

●

To open the menu or the informative display

shown, press button

or wait a few seconds

until the menu or the inf

ormativ

e displ

opens automatically.

Changing menu settings

●

In the menu displayed, press the upper or

lower part of the rocker switch

until the re-

quir

ed menu option is check

ed. The option

appears fr

amed.

●

Press button

to make the required modi-

fications. A mark indicat

es that the syst

em or

function is activ

ated.

Back to menu selection

Select Back on the corresponding menu to

exit.

Note

If when switching on the ignition warnings

are shown about e

xisting faults, it might not

be possible to change the settings or show

the information as described. In this case,

go to a specialised workshop and request a

repair.

Using the multifunction steering

wheel

Fig. 133

Right side of multifunction steering

wheel

: butt

ons t

o the menus and informative in-

dications on the instrument panel.

As long as a priority 1

›

page 112 warning is

active, it will not be possible to access any

menu. Some warnings can be confirmed and

121

Operation

hidden with the button  of the multifunction

eering wheel

›

Fig. 133.

Select a menu or an informative display

●

Switch the ignition on.

●

If a message or vehicle symbol is displayed,

press the button 

›

Fig. 133; if necessary,

several times.

●

To change menus, use buttons  

or  

›

Fig. 133.

●

To open the menu or the information dis-

played, press the button 

›

Fig. 133 or

wait a few seconds until the menu or the in-

formative display opens automatically.

Changing menu settings

●

In the menu displayed, turn the right thumb-

wheel of the multifunction steering wheel

›››

Fig. 133 until the desired option of the

menu is highlighted. The option appears

framed.

●

Press the button 

›

Fig. 133 to make the

required modifications. A mark indicates that

the system or function is activated.

Back to menu selection

Press the button 

or 

›

Fig. 133.

Note

If when switching on the ignition warnings

are shown about e

xisting faults, it might not

be possible to change the settings or show

the information as described. In this case,

go t

o a specialised workshop and request a

repair.

Key for the driving assistance sys-

tems*

Fig. 134

On the turn light and main beam lev-

er: k

ey f

or driv

er assistance systems (depend-

ing on the version).

With the turn signal and main beam headlight

er button, you can activate or deactivate

the driver assistance systems displayed in the

Assistance systems menu.

Activate or deactivate a driver assistance

system

●

Press

›››

Fig. 134

briefly to open

the Driving aids menu.

●

Select the driver assistance system and ac-

tiv

e or deactiv

ate it

›››

page 120. A mark in-

dicates that driver assistance system is

switched on.

●

Afterwards, mark or confirm the selection

with button 

on the windscreen wiper

er or button 

on the multifunction steer-

ing wheel.

The driv

er assist

ance syst

ems can also be

switched on and off in the infotainment sys-

tem, in the menu Vehicle settings

›››



page 35.

Control lamps

Control and warning lamps

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 39.

The control and warning lamps are indicators

of warnings,

›››

, faults

›

or certain func-

tions. Some contr

ol and w

arning l

amps come

on when the ignition is switched on, and

switch off when the engine starts running, or

while driving.

122

Instruments and warning/control lamps

Depending on the model, additional text

messages may be vie

ed on the instrument

panel displ

ay. These may be purely informa-

tive or they may be advising of the need for

action

›››

page 104, Dashboard.

Depending upon the equipment fitted in the

vehicle, instead of a warning lamp, some-

times a symbol may be displayed on the in-

strument panel.

When certain control and warning lamps are

lit, an audible warning is also heard.

WARNING

If the warning lamps and messages are ig-

nored, the vehicl

e may stall in traffic, or

may cause accidents and severe injuries.

●

Never ignore the warning lamps or text

messages.

●

Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possi-

ble.

●

Park the vehicle away from traffic and

ensure that there are no highly flammable

materials under the vehicle that could

come into contact with the exhaust system

(e.g. dry grass, fuel).

●

A faulty v

ehicle represents a risk of acci-

dent for the driver and for other road users.

If necessary, switch on the hazard warning

lamps and put out the warning triangle to

advise other drivers.

●

Before opening the bonnet, switch off the

engine and allow it to cool.

●

In any vehicle, the engine compartment is

a hazardous area and could cause severe

injuries

›››

page 347.

CAUTION

Failure to heed the control lamps and text

messages when they appear may r

esult in

faults in the v

ehicle.

Multifunction steering wheel*

Oper

ating the audio

, t

elephone and navigation system with voice control

Fig. 135 Controls on the steering wheel.

123

Operation

The steering wheel includes a multifunction

modul

e fr

om wher

e it is possible to control

the audio, telephone and radio/navigation

functions without needing to distract the driv-

er.

Applies to vehicles with analogue instrument panel

Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephone* Navigation*

Turn

Turn volume up/down. You

do not need to be in audio

mode (radio).

Turn volume up/down. You

do not need to be in audio

mode (media).

Turn volume up/down. You

do not need to be in audio

mode (media).

Turn volume up/down. You

do not need to be in tele-

phone mode.

Turn announcement volume

up/down. You do not need t

o be in

navigation mode but there has to

be an announcement active when

you adjust the volume.

Press

Mute volume. Mute volume. Mute volume. Mute incoming call.

Mute the current navigation an-

nouncement.

Enable/disable voice control.

This function can be used from any mode, in the case of an activ

e call.

Search for the previous/next

station

Short press:

Switch t

o the

previous/next song.

Hold down: Fast rewind/for-

ward

No function

– No active call: Radio/Me-

dia functions (except AUX)

– Active call: no function

No function for the other modes

(navigation, assistants, vehicle

status, travel data).

Change instrument panel menu.

This function can be used from any mode (audio, media, navigation, assist

ants, vehicle status, travel data).

Coloured instrument panel: change to the pre

vious menu.

Monochrome Instrument panel: switch to the previous function.

Turn

Coloured instrument panel:

List of stations avail

able

(only if the instrument panel

is in audio menu).

Coloured instrument panel:

next track (only if the instru-

ment panel is in audio

menu).

No function

– There is no active call: Re-

cent calls list.

– Activ

e call: go to the call

options list (call in standby,

hang up, mute microphone,

private number, etc.).

– Active route: access the view to

halt guidance t

o destination.

– No active route: list of most re-

cent destinations.

124

Instruments and warning/control lamps

Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephone* Navigation*

Press

Acts on the instrument panel or confirms the instrument panel menu option depending on the menu option.

According to the vehicle's equipment package.

This function can be used from any mode (audio, media, navigation, vehicle status, travel data).

This action can be performed when you are listening to the radio; there is no need to be in audio-radio mode.

These actions can be performed when you are listening to media; there is no need to be in audio-radio mode.

Applies to vehicl

es with Active Info Display (Digital SEAT Cockpit)

Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephone* Navigation*

Turn

Turn volume up/down. You

do not need to be in audio

mode (radio).

urn volume up/down. You

do not need to be in audio

mode (media).

Turn volume up/down. You

do not need to be in audio

mode (media).

Turn volume up/down. You

do not need to be in tele-

phone mode.

Turn announcement volume

up/down. You do not need t

o be in

navigation mode but there has to

be an announcement active

when you adjust the volume.

Press

Mute volume. Mute volume. Mute volume. Mute incoming call.

Mute the current navigation an-

nouncement.

Enable/disable voice control

This function can be used from any mode, e

xcept with an active call.

Search for the previous/next

ation

Short pr

ess:

Switch t

o the

previous/next song.

Hold down: Fast rewind/for-

ward

No function

– No active call: Radio/Me-

dia functions (except AUX)

– Active call: no function

No function for the other modes

(navigation, assistants, vehicle

status, travel data).

Change menu on instrument panel.

Short press

: change views Classic Info / Digital Maps / Semi-circular clocks

Long press

: access settings of “Individual Profiles”.

125

Operation

Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephone* Navigation*

Turn

List of sources available

(audio/media).

List of sources available

(audio/media).

No function

– There is no active call: Re-

cent calls list.

– Active call: go to the call

options list (call in standby,

hang up, mute microphone,

private number, etc.).

– Navi System Plus: Zoom in/out

(with and without active r

oute).

– Navi System: If there is a map on

the Digital Scorecard: Zoom in-

out (with and without active

route). If there is no map on the

Digital Scorecard: the map is

transferred from the Infotainment

System display to the Digital

Scorecard (with and without ac-

tive route).

Press

No function No function No function No function

Auto/Manual Zoom Zoom if the

map on the DigitScorecard.

According to the vehicle's equipment package.

This function can be used from any mode (audio, media, navigation, vehicle status, travel data).

This action can be performed when you are listening to the radio; there is no need to be in audio-radio mode.

These actions can be performed when you are listening to media; there is no need to be in audio-radio mode.

126

Opening and closing

Centr

al l

ocking

Description

Read the additional information carefully

›››



page 15

The vehicle can be locked and unlocked via

the central locking system. There are several

methods, depending on the vehicle equip-

ment:

●

key with remote control

›››

page 129,

●

lock on driver door (emergency opening

›››



page 15) or

●

interior central locking switch

›››

page 130.

Unlocking one side of the vehicle only

When you lock the vehicle with the key, the

doors and the rear lid are locked. When you

open the door, you can either unlock only the

driver door, or all the vehicle doors. To select

the required option, use Easy Connect*

›››

page 130.

Auto Lock*

The Auto Lock function locks the doors and

the rear lid when the vehicle exceeds a speed

of about 15 km/h (9 mph).

The vehicle is unlocked again when the igni-

tion key is removed. Alternatively, the vehicle

can also be unlocked via the central locking

switch or by pulling one of the inside door

handles. The Auto Lock function can be

switched on and off on the sound system or

on the Easy Connect* system

›››

page 130.

In the event of an accident in which the air-

bags inflate, the doors will be automatically

unlocked to facilitate access and assistance.

Anti-theft alarm system*

If the anti-theft alarm system senses interfer-

ence with the vehicle it triggers an audible

and visible alarm.

The anti-theft alarm system is automatically

switched on when locking the vehicle. It

switches off when the vehicle is unlocked

from a distance.

When the driver door is unlocked with the key,

you should switch on the ignition within 15

seconds. Otherwise the alarm will be trig-

gered. On some export versions, the alarm is

triggered immediately when you open a door.

To deactivate the alarm, press the  button

on the remote control key, or switch on the ig-

nition. After a certain time, the alarm will au-

tomatically switch off.

Switch off the vehicle interior monitoring and

tow-away protection if you wish to prevent

the alarm from being triggered accidentally

›››

page 139.

Turn signals

The turn signals will flash twice when the ve-

hicle is unlocked and once when the vehicle

is locked.

If it does not flash, this indicates that one of

the doors, the rear lid or the bonnet is not

closed correctly.

Accidental lock-out

The central locking system prevents you from

being locked out of the vehicle in the follow-

ing situations:

●

If the driver door is open, the vehicle cannot

be locked with the central locking switch

›››

page 130.

Lock the vehicle with the remote control key,

when all the doors and the rear lid have been

closed. This prevents the accidental locking

of the vehicle.

WARNING

Do not leave anyone (especially children)

in the vehicle if it is l

ocked from the outside

and the anti-theft security system* is ena-

bled, as the doors and windows cannot

then be opened from the inside. Locked

doors could delay assistance in an emer-

gency, potentially putting lives at risk.

127

Operation

Note

●

Never l

eave any valuable items in the ve-

hicle unattended. Even a locked vehicle is

not a safe.

●

If the diode on the driver door sill lights

up for about 30 seconds when the vehicle

is locked, the central locking system or an-

ti-theft alarm* is not working properly. You

should have the fault repaired at a SEAT

Official Service or specialised workshop.

●

The vehicle interior monitoring of the an-

ti-theft alarm* system will only function as

intended if the windows and the sunroof*

are closed.

Car key

Fig. 136 Vehicle key

Fig. 137 Vehicle key with alarm button.

Vehicle key

With the v

ehicl

e k

ey the vehicle may be

locked or unlocked remotely

›››

page 127.

The vehicle key includes an emitter and bat-

tery. The receiver is in the interior of the vehi-

cle. The range of the vehicle key with remote

control and new battery is several metres

around the vehicle.

If it is not possible to open or close the vehicle

using the remote control key, this should be

re-synchronised

›››

page 136 or the battery

changed

›››

page 135.

Different keys belonging to the vehicle may

be used.

Control lamp on the vehicle key

When a button on the vehicle key is pressed,

the control lamp flashes

›››

Fig. 136 (arrow)

once briefly, but if the button is held down for

a longer period the control lamp flashes sev-

eral times, such as in convenience opening.

If the vehicle key control lamp does not light

up when the button is pressed, replace the

key's battery

›››

page 135.

Unfolding and folding the key shaft

Press button

›

Fig. 136 or

›››

Fig. 137 to

unlock and unfold the key shaft.

To fold the shaft away, press button

and

d the k

ey shaft in until it locks in place.

Alarm button*

Only press alarm button

in the event of an

emer

gency! When the al

arm butt

on is press-

ed, the vehicle horn is heard and the turn sig-

nals are switched on for a short time. When

the alarm button is pressed again, the alarm

is switched off.

Spare key

To obtain a spare key and other vehicle keys,

the vehicle chassis number is required.

Each new key contains a microchip which

must be coded with the data from the vehicle

electronic immobiliser. A vehicle key will not

work if it does not contain a microchip or the

microchip has not been encoded. This is also

true for keys which are specially cut for the

vehicle.

128

Opening and closing

The vehicle keys or new spare keys can be

obt

ained fr

om a SEAT Official Service

, a spe-

cialised workshop or an approved key service

qualified to create this kind of key.

New keys or spare keys must be synchronised

before use

›››

page 136.

CAUTION

All of the vehicle keys contain electronic

components. Protect them fr

om damage,

impacts and humidity.

Note

●

Only use the key button when you r

equire

the corresponding function. Pushing the

button unnecessarily could accidentally

unlock the vehicle or trigger the alarm. It is

also possible even when you are outside

the radius of action.

●

Key operation can be greatly influenced

by overlapping radio signals close to the

vehicle working in the same range of fre-

quencies, for example, radio transmitters or

mobile telephones.

●

Obstacles between the remote control

and the vehicle, bad weather conditions

and discharged batteries can considerably

reduce the range of the remote control.

●

If the buttons of the vehicle key are

pressed

›››

Fig. 136 or

›››

Fig. 137 or one of

the central locking buttons

›››

page 130 is

pressed repeatedly in short succession, the

central locking briefly disconnects as pro-

tection against overloading. The vehicle is

then unlocked. L

ock it if necessary.

Unlocking/Locking by remote con-

trol

Read the additional information carefully

›››



page 15

The vehicle will be locked again automatical-

ly if you do not open one of the doors or the

rear lid within 30 seconds after unlocking the

car. This function prevents the vehicle from

remaining unlocked if the unlocking button is

pressed by mistake. This does not apply if you

press the  button for at least one second.

In vehicles with a security central locking

feature (selective unlocking of side doors)

›››

page 129, when the  button is pressed

once, only the driver door and the fuel tank

flap are unlocked. When the button is pressed

a second time, all the vehicle doors are un-

locked.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings

›››

in De-

scription on page 127.

Note

●

Do not use the remote contr

ol key until

the vehicle is visible.

●

Other functions of the remote contr

ol key

›››

page 143, Convenience opening and

closing.

Selective unlocking system

The selective unlocking system allows you to

only unlock the driver door and the fuel t

ank

flap. All other doors and the rear lid remain

locked.

Unlocking the driver door and tank flap

–

Press (once) the  button on the remot

control key or turn the key once in the

opening direction.

Unlocking all the doors, the rear lid and

the tank flap simultaneously.

–

Within 5 seconds, press (twice) the  but-

ton on the remote control key, or turn the

key twice within 5 seconds in the opening

direction.

The anti-theft security system* and the anti-

theft alarm* are immediately disabled if you

unlock only the driver door, without unlocking

the other doors.

In vehicles with Easy Connect*, you can pro-

gramme the security central locking system

directly

›››

page 130.

129

Operation

Adjusting the central locking

You can use Easy Connect* to select which

doors are unlock

ed with the central locking

system. Using the radio or the Easy Connect*

system, you can select whether the vehicle

automatically closes with the “Auto Lock”

programme at speeds of more than 15 km/h

(9 mph).

Programming the unlocking of the doors

(vehicles with Easy Connect)

–

Select the 

button > SETTINGS function

butt

on >

Opening and closing >

Central

locking > Unlocking doors.

Programming the Auto Lock (vehicles with

radio)

–

Select: SETUP

button > control button 

Central locking > Locking while

driving.

ogr

amming the Aut

o Lock (vehicles with

Easy Connect)

–

Select: 

button > SETTINGS function

butt

on >

Opening and closing >

Central

locking > Locking while driving.

Unlocking doors

You can choose to unlock all the doors or

only the driver door when you unlock the

vehicle. In all the options, the fuel tank flap is

also unlocked.

With the Driver setting, when you press the

 button on the remote control key once, only

the driver door is unlocked. If that button is

pressed twice, the rest of the doors and the

rear lid will be unlocked.

In vehicles with a conventional key, turn the

key in the door lock, in the direction of open-

ing, twice within 2 seconds.

If the  button is pressed, all the vehicle

doors are locked. At the same time, a confir-

mation signal* is heard.

Auto Lock while driving

If you select on, all the vehicle doors are

locked at speeds above 15 km/h (9 mph).

Central locking switch

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 15

Please note the following when using the

central locking switch to lock your vehicle:

●

It is not possible to open the doors or the

rear lid from the outside (for safety reasons,

e.g. when stopped at traffic lights).

●

The LED in the central locking switch lights

up when all the doors are closed and locked.

●

You can open the doors individually from

the inside by pulling the inside door handle.

●

In the event of an accident in which the air-

bags inflate, doors locked from the inside will

be automatically unlocked to facilitate ac-

cess and assistance.

WARNING

●

The central locking s

witch also operates

when the ignition is switched off and auto-

matically locks all the vehicle doors when

the  button is pressed.

●

The central locking switch does not oper-

ate if the vehicle is locked from the outside

and the anti-theft security system is

switched on.

●

Locked doors could delay assistance in

an emergency, potentially putting lives at

risk. Do not leave anyone, especially chil-

dren, in the vehicle.

Note

Your vehicle will lock automatically when it

reaches a speed of about 15 km/h (9 mph)

(Auto L

ock)

›››

page 127. You can unlock the

vehicle again using the  button on the

central locking switch.

130

Opening and closing

Related video Keyless Access

Fig. 138 Handsfree

Unlocking and locking the vehicle

with K

eyl

ess Access*

Fig. 139 Keyless Access locking and ignition

syst

em:



In the pr

ximity of the car.



Open-

ing the rear lid with sensor-controlled opening

(Easy Open)

Fig. 140 Locking and ignition system without

Keyless Access: sensor surf

ace

for unlock-

ing inside the door handle and sensor surface

for locking on the exterior of the handle.

Depending on the equipment, the vehicle

may hav

e the K

eyl

ess Access system.

Keyless Access is a key-free locking and igni-

tion system to unlock and lock the vehicle

without actively using its key. To do this, all

that is required is to have a valid vehicle key in

the detection area where you are attempting

to access the vehicle

›››

Fig. 139  and to

touch one of the sensor surfaces on the door

handles

›››

Fig. 140 or operate the soft-

touch/handle on the rear lid

›››

page 139

›››

The v

ehicl

e can be unl

ocked and locked via

the front doors only. When doing so, the re-

mote control key must be no further than ap-

prox. 1.5 m away from the door handle.

131

Operation

It does not matter where you carry the key,

or inst

ance whether it is in your jack

et pocket

or in a briefcase.

Once the doors have been locked, they can-

not be opened again immediately. This will

enable you to check that the doors are prop-

erly closed.

If you wish, when unlocking, you can unlock

only the corresponding door or the entire ve-

hicle. The necessary adjustments can be per-

formed in vehicles with a driver information

system

›››



page 35.

General information

If a valid key is in the proximity of the car,

›››

Fig. 139  the Keyless Access locking and

starting system gives the key entry as soon as

one of the sensor surfaces on the door han-

dles is touched or the softtouch/handle on

the rear lid is operated. The following features

are then available without having to use the

vehicle key actively:

●

Keyless Entry: unlocking the vehicle using

the handles of the front doors or the soft-

touch/handle on the rear lid.

●

Keyless Exit: locking the vehicle using the

sensor of the driver or passenger door han-

dle.

●

Easy Open: opening the rear lid moving one

foot below the rear bumper.

●

Press & Drive: keyless starting of the engine

with the starter button

›››

page 239.

The central locking and locking systems op-

erate in the same way as a normal locking

and unlocking system. Only the controls

change.

Unlocking the vehicle is confirmed with a

double flash of the indicator lights; locking by

a single flash.

If the vehicle is locked and then all doors and

the rear lid are closed leaving the last key

used inside the vehicle and none outside, the

vehicle will not lock immediately. All the ve-

hicle's indicator lights will flash four times.

The vehicle will lock after a few seconds if

you do not open any door or the rear lid.

The vehicle will lock again after a few sec-

onds if you unlock the vehicle but fail to open

any door or boot hatch.

Unlocking and opening the doors (Key-

less-Entry)

●

Grip one of the front door handles. In doing

this, the sensor surface

›››

Fig. 140

(arrow)

on the handl

e is t

ouched and the v

ehicle un-

locks.

●

Open the door.

On vehicles with selective opening or info-

tainment system configuration, pulling the

door handle twice will unlock all doors.

In vehicles without safety system

“Safelock”: closing and locking the doors

(Keyless-Exit)

●

Switch the ignition off.

●

Close the driver's door.

●

Touch (once) the locking sensor surface

(arrow) on one of the front door handles. The

door that is used must be cl

osed.

In v

ehicl

es with a safety system

“Safelock”: closing and locking the doors

(Keyless-Exit)

●

Switch the ignition off.

●

Close the driver's door.

●

Touch (once) the sensor surface

(arrow)

on one of the fr

ont door handl

es. The v

ehicle

locks with the “Safelock” security system

›››

page 135. The door that is used must be

closed.

●

Touch (twice) the sensor surface

(arrow)

of one of the fr

ont door handl

es t

o lock the

vehicle without activating the “Safelock” se-

curity system

›››

page 135.

Unlocking and locking the boot hatch

When the vehicle is locked, the rear lid auto-

matically unlocks on opening if there is a val-

id vehicle key in the proximity

›››

Fig. 139 .

Open or close the rear lid normally.

132

Opening and closing

After closing, the hatch locks automatically. If

the compl

e v

ehicle is unlocked, the rear lid

will not lock automatically after closing it.

Rear lid with sensor-controlled open-

ing/closing (Easy Open)

If there is a valid vehicle key in the proximity

›››

Fig. 139  of the rear lid, it is possible to

unlock and open or close it moving one foot

in the area of the sensors

›››

Fig. 139  loca-

ted under the rear bumper.

●

Switch the ignition off.

●

Stand in front of the rear bumper, in the

middle.

●

With a brisk movement, bring your foot and

lower leg as close as you can to the bumper.

The lower part of the leg needs to be close to

the upper sensor area and your foot to the

lower sensor area

›››

Fig. 139 

●

Quickly remove your foot and lower leg

om the sensor ar

eas

›

››

Fig. 139 

. The

ear lid will be aut

omatically opened.

●

If the r

ear lid fails to open, repeat the pro-

cedure after a few seconds.

The third brake light flashes once to show the

boot has opened with the Easy Open func-

tion.

The rear lid can be closed with another foot

movement similar to the opening one (provi-

ded a valid vehicle key is in the proximity of

the rear lid).

When closed, the rear lid automatically locks

if the vehicle has been locked beforehand

and there is no valid key inside.

While the rear lid is in motion (either opening

or closing), it can be stopped with another

foot movement similar to the opening one

(provided a valid vehicle key is in the proximi-

ty of the rear lid).

The Easy Open feature is not available or on-

ly has limited availability in the following sit-

uations (examples):

●

If the rear bumper is very dirty.

●

If the rear bumper is wet with salt water, e.g.

after having driven on gritted roads.

●

If the electrical unlocking tow hitch is not

covered.

●

If the vehicle has been equipped at a later

time with a tow bracket.

In the event of heavy rain, the Easy Open fea-

ture may take a little longer to open the boot

or may deactivate automatically, to avoid the

boot opening by accident, e.g. because of

the running water.

The Easy Open function can be connected

and disconnected permanently in the info-

tainment system by pressing the 

button

and the SETTINGS > Opening and clos-

ing function butt

ons

›



page 35.

What happens when locking the vehicle

with a second key

If there is a vehicle key inside the vehicle and

it is locked from the outside with a second ve-

hicle key, the key inside the vehicle is blocked

for engine ignition

›››

page 239. In order to

enable engine ignition, press the  button on

the key inside the vehicle.

Automatically disabling sensors

If the vehicle is not locked or unlocked for a

long period of time, the proximity sensors on

the passenger doors are automatically disa-

bled.

If one of the sensor surfaces on the door han-

dles is often activated in an unusual manner

with the vehicle locked (e.g. by the branches

of a bush rubbing against it), all proximity

sensors are disabled for a certain period of

time.

Sensors will again be enabled:

●

After a time.

●

OR: if the vehicle is unlocked with the but-

ton  on the key.

●

OR: if the boot is opened.

●

OR: if the vehicle is unlocked manually with

the key.

133

Operation

Keyless Access temporary disconnection

function*

ou can deactiv

e the vehicle's Keyless Ac-

cess unlocking for a locking and unlocking

cycle.

●

Move the gear lever to position P (if the ve-

hicle has automatic gearbox), since other-

wise the vehicle cannot be locked.

●

Close the door.

●

Push the central locking button  on the re-

mote control and touch the locking sensor

surface of the driver door handle

›››

Fig. 140

within the following 5 seconds.

Do not gr

asp the door handl

e; otherwise the

ehicle will not unlock. Deactivation is also

possible if the vehicle is locked through the

driver’s door lock.

●

To check that the function has been deacti-

vated, wait at least 10 seconds, grip and pull

on the door handle. The door should not

open.

The next time the door can only be unlocked

via the remote control or the lock cylinder.

The next time the door is locked/unlocked,

Keyless Access will be active again.

Convenience functions

To close all the electric windows using the

convenience function, keep a finger on the

locking sensor surface

(arrow) of the door

handle for a few seconds until the windows

hav

e cl

osed.

The

doors opened by touching the sensor

surface of the door handle depend on the

settings that have been activated in the info-

tainment system with the 

> SETTINGS >

Opening and closing function butt

ons.

WARNING

If there is a valid key in the proximity of the

rear lid, in some cases the Easy Open func-

tion may be accidentally activ

ated and the

rear lid will open, for example, when

sweeping under the rear bumper, when di-

recting a water jet or high pressure steam

to the area or when carrying out mainte-

nance work or repairs in that area. If acci-

dentally opened, the rear lid could injure

somebody situated in its area of operation

or cause material damage.

●

Therefore, always make sure that there is

no unsupervised valid key in the area near

the rear lid.

●

Before carrying out any maintenance or

repair work on the vehicle, always disable

the Easy Open feature via the infotainment

system.

●

Before washing the vehicle, always disa-

ble the Easy Open feature via the infotain-

ment system.

●

Before attaching a bicycle rack or a trail-

er,

›››

page 329, always disable the Easy

Open feature via the infotainment system.

CAUTION

The sensor surfaces on the door handles

could engage if hit with a wat

er jet or high

pressure steam if there is a valid vehicle

key in the proximity. If at least one of the

electric windows is open and the sensor

surface

(arrow) on one of the handles is

activated continuously, all windo

ws will

close.

Note

●

If the vehicle batt

ery has little or no

charge, or the vehicle key battery is almost

or entirely out of charge, you will probably

not be able to lock or unlock the vehicle

with the Keyless Access system. The vehi-

cle can be unlocked or locked manually

›››

page 87.

●

To control the proper locking of the vehi-

cle, the release function is disabled for ap-

prox. 2 seconds.

●

If the message Keyless access system

faulty is displayed on the screen of the

dash panel, abnormalities may occur in the

operation of the Keyless Access system.

Contact a specialised workshop. SEAT rec-

ommends visiting a SEAT dealership for

this.

●

Depending on the function set on the in-

fotainment system for the mirrors, the exte-

rior mirrors will unfold and the surround

lighting will come on when unlocking the

vehicle using the sensor surface on the

134

Opening and closing

driver and passenger door handles

›››

page 158.

●

If there is no valid key inside the vehicle

or the system fails to detect one, a warning

will display on the dash panel screen. This

could happen if any other radio frequency

signal interferes with the key signal (e.g.

from a mobile device accessory) or if the

key is covered by another object (e.g. an

aluminium case).

●

If the sensors are very dirty, e.g. have a

layer of salt, the correct functioning of the

sensors on the door handles may be affec-

ted. In this case, clean the vehicle.

●

If the vehicle is equipped with an auto-

matic gearbox, it may only be locked in the

gear stick is in position P.

●

To improve the safety of your vehicle, the

remote control of the system is equipped

with a position sensor. If this remote control

does not detect movement for a certain

length of time, the system will conclude

that the vehicle cannot be opened (e.g. on

a night table) so it will be disabled.

Anti-theft security system (Safe-

ock)*

The following message is displayed on the in-

strument panel t

o r

emind the driv

er that when

the vehicle is closed from the outside, the an-

ti-theft security system is switched on.  Do

not forget the Safelock. Please see

Instruction Manual. The vehicle cannot

be opened from inside. This makes it more dif-

ficult for unauthorised persons to break into

the vehicle

›››

in Description on page 127.

The anti-theft securit

y syst

em can be s

witch-

ed off each time the vehicle is locked:

●

Turn the key a second time to the lock posi-

tion, in the door lock, within two seconds. If

necessary, remove the protective cover on

the driver door handle

›››



page 15 or

●

Press the  button on the remote control

key for a second time within 2 seconds.

The flashing frequency of the diode in the

door sill immediately confirms the process.

Initially, the diode flashes in a fast sequence

for a brief period, then it stops for approxi-

mately 30 seconds and, lastly continues

flashing slowly.

Replacing the battery

Fig. 141

Vehicle key: opening the battery com-

partment.

Fig. 142 Vehicle key: removing the battery.

SEAT recommends you ask a specialised

orkshop t

o r

eplace the battery.

The battery is located to the rear of the vehi-

cle key, under a cover.

135

Operation

Changing the battery

●

Unfold the vehicle key blade

›

page 128.

●

Remove the cover from the back of the ve-

hicle key

›››

Fig. 141 in the direction of the ar-

row

›››

●

Extract the battery from the compartment

using a suit

abl

e thin ob

ject

›››

Fig. 142.

●

Place the new battery in the compartment

as shown

›››

Fig. 142, pressing in the opposite

direction to that shown by the arrow

›››

●

Fit the cover as shown

›

Fig. 141, pressing

it onto the vehicle key casing in the opposite

direction to that shown by the arrow until it

clicks into place.

CAUTION

●

If the battery is not changed correctly,

the v

ehicle key may be damaged.

●

Use of unsuitable batteries may damage

the vehicle key. For this reason, always re-

place the dead battery with another of the

same voltage, size and specifications.

●

When fitting the battery, check that the

polarity is correct.

For the sake of the environment

Please dispose of your used batteries cor-

rectly and with respect f

or the environ-

ment.

Synchronising the vehicle key

If the  button is pressed fr

equently outside

of the vehicle range, it is possible that the ve-

hicle can no longer be locked or unlocked us-

ing the key. In this case, the key must be re-

synchronised as described below:

●

Unfold the vehicle key blade

›››

page 128.

●

If necessary, remove the cover from the

driver door lever

›››



page 15.

●

Press the  button on the vehicle key. For

this, it must remain with the vehicle.

●

Open the vehicle within one minute using

the key blade

. The key has been synchron-

ised.

●

If necessary, fit the cap.

Childproof lock

Fig. 143

Childproof lock on the left hand side

door

The childproof lock prevents the rear doors

om being opened fr

om the inside

. This sys-

tem prevents minors from opening a door ac-

cidentally while the vehicle is running.

This function is independent of the vehicle

electronic opening and locking systems. It

only affects rear doors. It can only be activa-

ted and deactivated manually, as described

below:

Activating the childproof lock

–

Unlock the vehicle and open the door in

which you wish to activate the childproof

lock.

–

With the door open, rotate the groove in the

door using the ignition key, clockwise for

the left hand side doors

›››

Fig. 143 and an-

ti-clockwise for the right hand side doors.

136

Opening and closing

Deactivating the childproof lock

–

Unlock the vehicle and open the door

whose chil

dpr

oof l

ock you want to deacti-

vate.

–

With the door open, rotate the groove in the

door using the ignition key, anti-clockwise

for the left hand side doors

›››

Fig. 143 and

clockwise for the right hand side doors.

Once the childproof lock is activated, the

door can only be opened from the outside.

The childproof lock can be activated or de-

activated by inserting the key in the groove

when the door is open, as described above.

Anti-theft alarm system*

Description

The anti-theft alarm makes it more difficult to

eak int

o the v

ehicle or steal it.

The anti-theft alarm is automatically turned

on when the vehicle is locked with the key.

●

The turn signal light will flash twice on

opening and deactivating the alarm.

●

The turn signal light will flash once on clos-

ing and activating the alarm.

When does the system trigger an alarm?

The anti-theft alarm siren will be triggered for

about 30 seconds accompanied by sound

and optical (flashing) warning signals and

will be repeated about ten times when the

vehicle is locked and the following unauthor-

ised actions are attempted:

●

Opening a door that is mechanically un-

locked using the vehicle key without switching

on the ignition in the next 15 seconds (in cer-

tain markets, such as the Netherlands, there is

no 15 second waiting time and the alarm is

activated immediately on opening the door).

●

A door is opened.

●

The bonnet is opened.

●

The rear lid is opened.

●

When the ignition is switched on with a non-

authorised key.

●

When the vehicle battery is disconnected.

●

Movement inside the vehicle (in vehicles

with interior monitoring

›››

page 139).

●

When the vehicle is towed (in vehicles with

anti-tow system

›››

page 139).

●

When the vehicle is raised (in vehicles with

anti-tow system

›››

page 139).

●

When the vehicle is transported on a ferry

or by rail (vehicles with an anti-tow system or

vehicle interior monitoring

›››

page 139).

●

When a trailer connected to the anti-theft

alarm system is disconnected.

How to turn OFF the alarm

Unlock the vehicle with the unlocking button

on the key or turn on the ignition with a valid

key.

Note

●

After 28 days, the indicator light will be

witched off to prevent the battery from ex-

hausting if the vehicle has been left parked

for a long period of time. The alarm system

remains activated.

●

If, after the audible warning goes off, an-

other monitored area is accessed (e.g. the

rear lid is opened after a door has been

opened), the alarm is triggered again.

●

The anti-theft alarm is not activated

when the vehicle is locked from within using

the central locking button .

●

If the driver door is unlocked mechanical-

ly with the key, only the driver door is un-

locked, the rest of the doors remain locked.

Only when the ignition has been turned on

will the other doors be available - but not

unlocked - and the central locking button

will be activated.

●

If the vehicle battery is run down or flat

then the anti-theft alarm will not operate

correctly.

●

Vehicle monitoring remains active even if

the battery is disconnected or not working

for any reason.

137

Operation

●

The alarm is triggered immediat

ely if one

of the battery cables is disconnected while

the alarm system is active.

Vehicle interior monitoring and an-

ti-tow syst

em*

It is a monitoring or control function incorpo-

rated in the anti-theft al

arm* which detects

unauthorised vehicle entry by means of ultra-

sound.

Activation

–

It is automatically switched on when the

anti-theft alarm is activat

ed.

Deactivation

–

Open the vehicle with the key, either me-

chanically or by pressing the  button on

the remote control. The time period from

when the door is opened until the key is in-

serted in the contact should not exceed 15

seconds, otherwise the alarm will be trig-

gered.

–

Press the  button on the remote control

twice. The volumetric sensor and tilt sen-

sors will be deactivated. The alarm system

remains activated.

The vehicle interior monitoring and the anti-

tow system are automatically switched on

again next time the vehicle is locked.

The vehicle interior monitoring and anti-tow

sensor (tilt sensor) are automatically switch-

ed on when the anti-theft alarm is switched

on. In order to activate it, all the doors and

the rear lid must be closed.

If you wish to switch off the vehicle interior

monitoring and the anti-tow system, it must

be done each time that the vehicle is locked;

if not, they will be automatically switched on.

The vehicle interior monitoring and the anti-

tow system should be switched off if animals

are left inside the locked vehicle (otherwise,

their movements will trigger the alarm) or

when, for example, the vehicle is transported

or has to be towed with only one axle on the

ground.

False alarms

Interior monitoring will only operate correctly

if the vehicle is completely closed. Please ob-

serve related legal requirements.

The following cases may cause a false

alarm:

●

Open windows (partially or fully).

●

Panoramic/tilting sunroof open (partially or

completely).

●

Movement of objects inside the vehicle,

such as loose papers, items hanging from the

rear vision mirror (air fresheners), etc.

Note

●

If the vehicle is r

elocked and the alarm is

activated without the volumetric sensor

function, relocking will activate the alarm

with all its functions, except the volumetric

sensor. This function is reactivated when

the alarm is switched on again, unless it is

deliberately switched off.

●

If the alarm has been triggered by the

volumetric sensor, this will be indicated by

a flashing of the warning lamp on the driver

door when the vehicle is opened. The flash

is different to the flash indicating the alarm

is activated.

●

The vibration of a mobile phone left in-

side the vehicle may cause the vehicle in-

terior monitoring alarm to trigger, as both

sensors react to movements and shakes in-

side the vehicle.

●

If on activating the alarm, any door or the

rear lid is open, only the alarm will be acti-

vated. The vehicle interior monitoring and

the anti-tow system will only be activated

once all the doors are closed (including the

rear lid).

138

Opening and closing

Deactivating the vehicle interior

monit

oring and anti-t

w system*

When the vehicle is locked, the alarm will be

triggered if mov

ements are detected in the in-

terior (e.g. by animals) or if the vehicle's incli-

nation is changed (e.g. during transport). You

can prevent the alarm from being triggered

accidentally by switching off the vehicle inte-

rior monitoring and/or tow-away protection.

●

To disconnect vehicle interior monitoring

and anti-tow protection, switch off the igni-

tion and use the infotainment system to se-

lect the following: 

button > function but-

SETTINGS > Open and close > Cen-

tral locking > Vehicle interior mon-

itoring.

●

When the v

ehicle is locked now, the vehicle

interior monitoring and the tow-away protec-

tion are switched off until the next time the

door is opened.

If the anti-theft security system (Safelock)*

›››

page 135 is switched off, the vehicle interi-

or monitoring and the tow-away protection

are automatically switched off.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings

›››

in De-

scription on page 127.

Rear lid (luggage compart-

ment)

ed video

Fig. 144 Handsfree

Rear lid with electric opening and

osing*

Fig. 145 Rear lid open: button to close rear lid

immediat

ely.

Fig. 146 Centre console: button to open and

close rear lid.

Opening the rear lid

●

Unlock the vehicle

›

page 127 and briefly

press the handle of the rear lid. On vehicles

with Keyless Access you can directly press

the handle of the rear lid. The rear lid is un-

locked if an authorised key is recognised in

the proximity of the vehicle.

●

OR: press the button on the centre console

for at least one second

›››

Fig. 146. The but-

ton also works when the ignition is switched

off.

●

OR: press and hold the  button of the ve-

hicle key for approx. 1 second. If the vehicle is

locked, only the rear lid is unlocked (the doors

remain locked).

●

OR: on vehicles with Keyless Access and

sensor-controlled opening you can open the

rear lid by moving one foot in the area of the

sensors located below the rear bumper (Easy

139

Operation

Open). The rear lid will be automatically

opened.

osing the r

ear lid

●

Briefly pr

ess the  button on the rear lid

›››

Fig. 145

›››

●

OR: pr

ess the  button located on the

centr

e consol

e until the rear lid is closed

›››

Fig. 146.

●

OR: on vehicles with Keyless Access, press

and hold the  vehicle key button until the

rear lid is closed or move one foot in the area

of the sensors located below the rear bumper

(Easy Open)

›››

page 131. The key of the vehi-

cle must not be further away than 1.5 m from

the boot or inside the vehicle.

●

OR: manually move the rear lid in the direc-

tion of closing until it closes automatically.

●

The rear lid goes down automatically to the

final position and also closes automatically

›››

Int

errupting opening or cl

osing

Aft

er beginning to open or close the rear lid,

the action can be halted by pressing one of

the  buttons.

Continue opening or closing the rear lid by

hand. To do this, some force will have to be

used.

If you press one of the  buttons again, the

rear lid will move again in the original direc-

tion.

If the rear lid is met with resistance or an ob-

stacle during the automatic opening or clos-

ing, opening or closing will be interrupted im-

mediately. For the closing process, the rear

lid opens again slightly.

●

Check why it has not been possible to open

or close the rear lid.

●

Try to open or close the rear lid again.

●

If necessary, the rear lid can be opened or

closed by hand using reasonable force.

Special feature for pulling a trailer

If the factory-fitted towing bracket is electri-

cally connected to a trailer

›››

page 329, the

electric rear lid can only be opened or closed

with the buttons on the rear lid itself.

Acoustic warnings

Throughout the process of opening or closing

the rear lid, acoustic warnings can be heard.

Exception: when the rear lid is opened man-

ually using the handle or the Easy Open func-

tion with the movement of the foot or closed

using the button on the rear lid itself

›››

Fig. 145.

Modifying and memorising the opening

angle

If the space behind or above the vehicle is

less than the travel area of the rear lid, you

can change the opening angle of the rear lid.

To memorise a new opening angle, the rear

lid must be open at least halfway.

●

Interrupt the opening process in the desired

position.

●

Press the  button

›››

Fig. 145 on the rear

lid for at least 3 seconds.

The opening angle is memorised. Memorisa-

tion is indicated by blinking of the hazard

warning lights and an audible warning.

Resetting and memorising the opening an-

gle

For the rear lid to reopen completely, the

opening angle must be reset and memorised

again.

●

Release the rear lid and open it to the

memorised height.

●

Lift the rear lid by hand as far as it goes. To

do this, some force will have to be used.

●

Press the  button

›››

Fig. 145 on the rear

lid for at least 3 seconds.

●

This resets and memorises the factory-set

opening angle. Memorisation is indicated by

140

Opening and closing

blinking of the hazard warning lights and an

audibl

e w

arning.

Aut

omatic protection against overheating

If the system is operated repeatedly in a short

space of time, it automatically switches off to

prevent overheating.

Once the system is cool again, the function

can be reused. Until then, the rear lid can only

be opened and closed by hand using reason-

able force.

If with the rear lid open the vehicle battery is

disconnected

›››

page 354 or the corre-

sponding fuse burns out

›››

page 92, the sys-

tem will have to be reset. This requires closing

the rear lid completely once.

Emergency unlocking

›››



page 17

WARNING

If a lot of snow builds up on the rear lid or it

is heavily loaded, the rear lid may not open

, after opening, it may lower by itself due

to the extra weight and cause serious in-

jury.

●

Do not open the rear lid when there is a

lot of snow on it or when carrying a load

(e.g. on a rack).

●

Before opening the rear lid, remove the

snow or the load.

WARNING

If the rear lid is closed incorrectly or with-

out due care, it coul

d result in serious in-

jury.

●

Never leave the vehicle unattended or al-

low children to play inside or next to it, es-

pecially if the rear lid is open. Children

could enter the luggage compartment,

close the rear lid and become trapped. A

locked vehicle can reach extremely high

and low temperatures, depending on the

time of year, thus causing serious injuries,

illness or even death.

CAUTION

Before opening or closing the rear lid, make

sure that there is enough space t

o open or

close it, e.g. when pulling a trailer or in a

garage.

Rear lid automatic locking

Where the vehicle has been locked by press-

ing the  butt

on on the r

emot

e control with

the rear lid open, the rear lid will lock auto-

matically when closed.

The automatic rear lid locking time extension

function can be activated. Where this func-

tion is activated and once the rear lid has

been unlocked by pressing the  button on

the remote control key

›››

page 129, the rear

lid can be re-opened for a certain length of

time.

Where required, the automatic tailgate lock-

ing time extension function can be activated

or deactivated at an Authorised SEAT Serv-

ice, which will provide all the necessary infor-

mation.

Before the vehicle locks automatically, there

is a risk of intruders getting into the vehicle.

Therefore, we recommend you always lock

the vehicle by pressing the  button on the

remote control or by using the central locking

button.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings

›››

in Intro-

duction on page 87.

●

Always close the rear lid properly. Risk of

accident or injury.

●

The rear lid must not be opened when the

rev

erse or rear fog lights are lit. This may

damage the tail lights.

●

Do not close the rear lid by pushing it

down with your hand on the rear window.

The glass could smash. Risk of injury!

●

Ensure the rear lid is locked after closing

it. If not, it may open unexpectedly while

driving.

●

Closing the rear lid without observing

and ensuring it is clear could cause serious

injury to you and to third parties. Make sure

that no one is in the path of the rear lid.

141

Operation

●

Never driv

e with the rear lid open or half-

closed, exhaust gases may penetrate into

the interior of the vehicle. Danger of poi-

soning!

●

If you only open the rear lid, do not leave

the key inside. The vehicle cannot be

opened if the key is left inside.

Controls for the windows

Opening and closing the electric

windo

Fig. 147 Detail of the driver door: controls for

the windo

ws.

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 18

The front and rear electric windows can be

operated by using the controls on the driver

door. The other doors each have a switch for

their own window.

Always close the windows fully if you park the

vehicle or leave it unattended

›››

ou can use the el

ectric windo

ws for approx.

10 minutes after switching off the ignition if

neither the driver door nor the front passen-

ger door has been opened and the key has

not been removed from the ignition.

Safety switch *

The safety switch

›››

Fig. 147

on the driver

door can be used t

o disabl

e the el

ectric win-

dow buttons on the rear doors.

Safety switch not pressed: buttons on rear

doors are activated.

Safety switch pressed: buttons on rear doors

are deactivated.

The safety control symbol  lights up in yel-

low if the buttons on the rear doors are

switched off.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings

›››

in Intro-

duction on page 87.

●

Incorrect use of the electric windows can

result in injury.

●

Never cl

ose the rear lid without observing

and ensuring it is clear, to do otherwise

could cause serious injury to you and third

parties. Make sure that no one is in the path

of a window.

●

If the ignition is switched on, the electric

equipment could be activated with risk of

injury, for example, in the electric windows.

●

The doors can be locked using the re-

mote control key. This could become an

obstacle for assistance in an emergency

situation.

●

Therefore always take the key with you

when you leave the vehicle.

●

The electric windows will work until the

ignition has been switched off and one of

the front doors has been opened.

●

If necessary, use the safety switch to dis-

able the rear electric windows. Make sure

that they have been disabled.

Note

If the window is not able to close because it

is stiff or because of an obstruction, the

window will automatically open again

›

››

page 143. If this happens, check why the

window could not be closed before at-

tempting to close it again.

142

Opening and closing

Roll-back function

The roll-back function reduces the risk of in-

jury when the electric windows cl

ose.

●

If a window is obstructed when closing au-

tomatically, the window stops at this point

and lowers immediately

›››

●

Next, check why the window does not close

before att

empting it again.

●

If you try within the following 10 seconds

and the window closes again with difficulty or

there is an obstruction, the automatic closing

will stop working for 10 seconds.

●

If the window is still obstructed, the window

will stop at this point.

●

If there is no ob

vious reason why the win-

dow cannot be closed, try to close it again by

pulling the tab within ten seconds. The win-

dow closes with maximum force. The roll-

back function is now deactivated.

●

If more than 10 seconds pass, the window

will open fully when you operate one of the

buttons. One-touch closing is reactivated.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings

›››

in Open-

ing and closing the electric windo

ws on

page 142.

●

The roll-back function does not prevent

fingers or other parts of the body getting

pinched against the window frame. Risk of

accident.

Convenience opening and closing

Use the convenience opening/closing func-

tion to easily open/close all the windo

from the outside.

Convenience open function

–

Press and hold the  button on the remot

control key until all the windows and the

sunroof* have reached the desired position,

–

First unlock the vehicle using the  button

on the remote control key and then keep

the key in the driver door lock until all the

windows and the sunroof* have reached

the required position.

Convenience close function

–

Press and hold button  on the remote

control key until all the windows and the

sunroof* are closed

›››

, or

–

Keep the key in the driver door in the "lock"

position until all the windo

ws and the sun-

oof* ar

e closed.

Programming convenience opening in the

Easy Connect*

–

Select: 

button > SETTINGS function

button > Opening and closing >

Opening the window by holding down

button or > Front window on/off.

WARNING

●

Never cl

ose the windows without due

care or proper control. There is a risk of suf-

fering injury.

●

For safety reasons, you should only use

the remote control open and close func-

tions within about 2 metres of the vehicle.

To avoid injuries, always keep an eye on the

windows when pressing the button to close

them. The windows stop moving as soon as

the button is released.

One-touch opening and closing

One-touch opening and closing means you

do not hav

e t

o hol

d down the button.

Buttons

›››

Fig. 147

and

have

o positions f

or opening windo

ws and two

for closing them. This makes it easier to open

and close windows to the desired position.

One-touch closing

–

Pull up the window button briefly up to the

second position. The window closes fully.

143

Operation

One-touch opening

–

Push down the window button briefly up to

the second position. The windo

w opens

fully.

esetting one-t

ouch opening and closing

The automatic open and close function will

not work if the battery has been temporarily

disconnected. The function can be restored

as follows:

–

Close the window as far as it will go by lift-

ing and holding the electric window switch.

–

Release the switch and then lift it again for 1

second. This will re-enable the automatic

function.

If you push (or pull) a button to the first stage,

the window will open (or close) until you re-

lease the button. If you push or lift the button

briefly to the second stage, the window will

open (one-touch opening) or close (one-

touch closing) automatically. If you operate

the button while the window is opening or

closing, it stops at this position.

Sunroof*

Introduction

The sunroof consists of two glass parts. The

rear part is fixed and cannot be opened. It al

so has a sun blind.

WARNING

If the sunroof is used negligently or without

paying due attention, it can cause serious

injury.

●

Open or close the sunr

oof and the sun

blind only when no one is in their path of

movement.

●

Never leave any key inside the vehicle

when exiting.

●

Never leave a child or any other person

who may need help in the vehicle, espe-

cially if they have access to the vehicle

key. If using they key unattended, they

could lock the vehicle, start the engine,

switch on the ignition and activate the sun-

roof.

●

After switching off, it is still possible to

open or close the sunroof during a short

space of time provided that neither the

driver nor passenger door is opened.

CAUTION

●

To pre

vent damage, during winter tem-

peratures remove any ice or snow that

might be on the car roof before opening the

sunroof or adjusting the tilt position.

●

Befor

e leaving the vehicle or in case of

rainfall, always close the sunroof. With the

sunroof open or in a tilted position, water

can enter the interior and can cause con-

siderable damage to the electrical system.

As a result, other damage can occur in the

vehicle.

Note

●

eaves and other l

oose objects that ac-

cumulate on the sunroof rails should be

regularly cleaned away either by hand or

with a vacuum.

●

If the sunroof does not work correctly, the

anti-trap function will not work either. Con-

tact a specialised workshop.

144

Opening and closing

Opening and closing the sunroof

Fig. 148

On the interior roof lining: sunroof

butt

on.

The sunroof only works when the ignition is

wit

ched on. Once the ignition has been

witched off, you can still open or close the

sunroof for a few minutes provided the driver

door and the front passenger door are not

opened.

The sun blind automatically opens along with

the sunroof if completely closed or if in front

of the sunroof. The sun blind remains in the

previous position and does not automatically

close with the sunroof. The sun blind can only

be closed completely once the sunroof has

been closed.

The  button

›››

Fig. 148 has two levels. The

first level switches the sunroof to the tilted po-

sition, opening or closing it fully or partially.

On the second level, the sunroof automati-

cally moves to the corresponding final posi-

tion after briefly pressing the button. Activat-

ing the button again stops the automatic

function.

Adjusting the tilt position of the sunroof

●

Press the rear part of the button

to the

first l

el.

●

Automatic function: briefly press the rear

part of button

to the second level.

osing the sunr

oof fr

om a tilted position

●

Press the front part of the button

to the

first l

el.

●

Automatic function: briefly press the front

part of the button

to the second level.

opping the aut

omatic oper

ation by ad-

justing the tilted position of the sunroof or

by closing the sunroof

●

Press button

again.

Opening the sunr

oof

●

ess butt

backwards to the first level.

●

Automatic function to the comfort position:

briefly pr

ess butt

backwards to the sec-

ond l

el.

Closing the sunroof

●

Press button

forwards to the first level.

●

Aut

omatic function: briefly pr

ess butt

forwards to the second level.

opping the aut

omatic oper

ation during

the opening or closing

●

Press button

again.

Opening and closing the sun blind

Fig. 149

On the interior roof lining: switches for

the sun blind.

The electrical sun blind works when the igni-

tion is s

wit

ched on.

When the sunr

oof is in its most tilted position,

the sun blind automatically goes into a venti-

lation position. The sun blind remains in this

position also with the sunroof closed.

Buttons

›››

Fig. 149

and

have two lev-

s. The first l

vel opens or closes the sun

blind fully or partially.

145

Operation

By briefly pressing the button to the second

el, the sun blind automatically moves to

the corresponding final position. Activating

the button again stops the automatic func-

tion.

Once the ignition has been switched off, you

can still open or close the sun blind for a few

minutes provided the driver door and the

front passenger door are not opened.

Opening the sun blind

●

Press button

to the first level.

●

Automatic function: briefly press button

to the second level.

osing the sun blind

●

ess butt

to the first level.

●

Automatic function: briefly press button

to the second level.

opping the aut

omatic oper

ation during

the opening or closing

●

Press button

again.

Note

When the sunroof is open, the electric sun

blind can only be closed to the fr

ont edge

of the sunroof.

Convenience function to open or

ose the sunr

oof*

Fig. 150

Driver door lever: sensor surfaces.

The sunroof can be opened and closed with

the conv

enience function, just lik

e the win-

ws.

Using the door lock*

●

Hold the key in the door lock of the driver

door in either the unlocking or locking posi-

tion to open or close the roof in the tilted po-

sition. Release the key to interrupt this func-

tion.

Using the remote control

●

Keep the locking/unlocking button pressed

to open/close the roof. If you release the but-

ton is the opening/closing will stop.

Using the Keyless Access* system (only

closing)

●

Press and hold the locking sensor surface

›››

Fig. 150

on the door handle to close the

sunr

oof

. If you r

elease the sensor surface, the

closing movement stops.

WARNING

If the sunroof is used negligently or without

paying due attention, it can cause serious

injury.

Anti-trap function of the panoramic

sliding sunr

oof and the sun blind

The anti-trap function can reduce the risk of

injury when cl

osing the sunr

oof and the sun

blind

›

››

. If the sunroof or sun blind encoun-

er r

esist

ance or an obstacle when closing,

they reopen immediately.

●

Check why the sunroof or sun blind do not

close.

●

Try to close the sunroof or sun blind again.

●

If the sunroof or sun blind cannot be closed

due to an obstacle or some resistance, it

stops at the corresponding position and then

opens. For automatic closing, a new closing

attempt might take place.

●

If the sunroof or sun blind is still unable to

close, close it without the anti-trap function.

146

Lights and visibility

Closing the sunroof or sun blind without

the anti-tr

ap function

●

Sunr

oof:

within approximately 5 seconds of

having activated the roll-back function, press

the  button

›››

Fig. 148 to the second level

in the direction of arrow

›››

Fig. 148

until

the sunr

oof cl

oses compl

etely.

●

Sun blind: within approximately 5 seconds

of having activated the anti-trap function,

press button

›››

Fig. 149

until the sun blind

oses compl

ely.

●

The sunroof or sun blind close without

the anti-trap function intervening!

●

If the sunroof or sun blind will still not close,

visit a specialised workshop.

WARNING

Closing the sunroof or sun blind without the

anti-trap function can cause serious inju-

ries.

●

Alw

ays be careful when closing the sun-

roof and sun blind.

●

No person should ever remain in the way

of the sunroof or sun blind, especially when

closing without the anti-trap function.

●

The anti-trap function does not prevent

fingers or other parts of the body from be-

coming trapped against the roof frame and

injuries occurring.

Lights and visibility

Lights

ed video

Fig. 151 Vehicle lights

Control lamps



It lights up

Driving light totally or partially faulty.

Fault in the cornering light system.



It lights up

Rear fog light switched on

›››

page 151.



It lights up

Left or right turn signal.

The control lamp fl

ashes twice as fast when a turn

signal is faulty.

Hazard warning lights on

›››

page 152.



It lights up

Trailer turn signals



It lights up

Main beam on or flasher on

›››

page 148.



It lights up

The Light Assist system is on

›››

page 150.

Several warning and control lamps light up

for a fe

w seconds when the ignition is switch-

ed on, signalling that the function is being

verified. They will switch off after a few sec-

onds.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings

›››

in Con-

trol and warning l

amps on page 123.

Side light and dipped beam head-

light

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 32

The driver is personally responsible for the

correct use and adjustment of the lights in all

situations.

147

Operation

Audible warnings to advise the driver that

the lights hav

e not been s

wit

ched off

If the key is not in the ignition and the driver

door is open, an audible warning signal is

heard in the following cases: this will remind

you to turn the light off.

●

When the parking light is on

›››

page 148.

●

When the light switch is in position  or .

WARNING

The side lights or daytime running lights

are not bright enough to illuminat

e the road

ahead and to ensure that other road users

are able to see you.

●

Always use your dipped beam head

lights if it is raining or if visibility is poor.

WARNING

If the headlights are set too high and not

used correctly, there is a risk of dazzling or

distr

acting other road users. This could re-

sult in a serious accident.

●

Always make sure that the headlights are

correctly adjusted.

Note

The legal requirements regarding the use

of vehicle lights in each country must be

observ

ed.

Daytime running lights

The daytime running lights consist of individu-

al lights, integrat

ed in the front headlights. By

connecting the daytime running lights, these

lights are switched on

›››

The daytime running lights s

wit

ch on e

very

time the ignition is switched on, if the switch is

in positions  or , according to the level of

exterior lighting.

When the light switch is in position , a light

sensor automatically switches dipped beam

on and off (including the control and instru-

ment lighting) or the daytime running lights

depending on the level of exterior lighting.

WARNING

●

Never driv

e with daytime lights if the road

is not well lit due to weather or lighting

conditions. Daytime lights do not provide

enough light to illuminate the road properly

or be seen by other road users.

●

On vehicles with r

ear lights with bulbs,

when activating the daytime running light

the rear lights are not switched on. A vehi-

cle which does not have the rear lights on

may not be visible to other drivers in the

darkness, in the case of heavy rain or in

conditions of poor visibility.

Turn signal and main beam lever

Read the additional information carefully

›››



page 33

Push the lever all the way down to turn off the

corresponding function.

Convenience turn signals

For the one-touch signalling, when the igni-

tion is switched on, move the lever as far as

possible upwards or downwards and release

the lever. The turn signal will flash three times.

One-touch signalling is activated and deacti-

vated in the Easy Connect system via the 

button and the function button SETTINGS >

Lights > One-touch signalling

›



page 35.

On vehicles equipped with rear LED lights, the

rear side light is swit

ched on as well.

148

Lights and visibility

In vehicles that do not have the correspond-

ing menu, this function can be deactiv

ed in

a specialised w

orkshop.

WARNING

Improper or lack of use of the turn signals,

or forgetting t

o deactivate them can con-

fuse other road users. This could result in a

serious accident.

●

Always give warning when you are going

to change lane, overtake or when turning,

activating the turn signal in good time.

●

As soon as you have finished changing

lane, overtaking or turning, switch the turn

signal off.

WARNING

Incorrect use of the headlights may cause

accidents and serious injury, as the main

beam may distract or dazzle other driv

ers.

Note

●

If the convenience turn signal

s are oper-

ating (three flashes) and the other conven-

ience turn signals are switched on, the ac-

tive part stops flashing and only flashes

once in the new part selected.

●

The turn signal only works when the igni-

tion is switched on. The hazard warning

lights also work when the ignition is switch-

ed off.

●

If a trailer t

urn signal malfunctions, the

control lamp will stop flashing (trailer turn

signals) and the vehicle turn signal will

flash at double speed.

●

The main beam headlights can only be

switched on if the dipped beam headlights

are already on.

●

In cold or damp weather conditions, the

headlights, tail lights and turn signals may

mist up inside temporarily. This is normal

and in no way effects the useful life of the

vehicle lighting system.

Automatic dipped beam control





The automatic dipped beam control is merely

int

ended as an aid and is not abl

e t

o recog-

nise all driving situations.

When the light switch is in position , the

vehicle lights and the instrument panel and

switch lighting switch on and off automatical-

ly in the following situations

›››

in Daytime

running lights on page 14

Automatic switch-

ing on

Automatic switch-

ing off

The photo sensor de-

tects darkness

, for exam-

ple, when driving through

a tunnel.

When adequate lighting

is detected.

Automatic switch-

ing on

Automatic switch-

ing off

The rain sensor detects

rain and activat

es the

windscreen wipers.

When the windscreen

wipers have been inac-

tive for a few minutes.

WARNING

If the road is not well lit and other road

users cannot see the vehicle w

ell enough

or at all, accidents may occur.

●

The automatic dipped beam control

() only switches on the dipped beam

when there are no changes in brightness,

and not, for example when it is foggy.

Main beam assist (Light Assist)*

The main beam assist acts within the limits of

the syst

em and depending on envir

onment

and traffic conditions. Once switched on, the

system is activated as of a speed of about 60

km/h (37 mph) and is deactivated below

about 30 km/h (18 mph)

›››

When the syst

em is activ

ed and the cam-

era detects other vehicles that may be daz-

zled, the main beam is automatically switch-

ed off. Otherwise, the main beam is automati-

cally switched on.

The main beam assist generally detects illu-

minated areas and deactivates the main

149

Operation

beam when passing through a town, for ex-

ampl

witching the main beam assist on and off

Func-

tion

Use

Activate:



– Switch the ignition on and turn the light

switch t

o position .

– From the base position, move the main

beam and turn signal lever forwards

›››

page 148. When the warning lamp 

is displayed on the instrument panel dis-

play, the main beam assist is switched

on.

Deacti-

vate:

– T

urn the light switch to a different posi-

tion to 

››

›

page 147.

– OR: with main beam on, move the turn

signal and main beam lever backwards.

– OR: move the turn signal and main

beam lever forward to manually enable

the main beam. The main beam assist

will then be deactivated.

Malfunctions

The f

oll

wing conditions may prevent the

main beam headlight control from turning off

the headlights in time or from turning off alto-

gether:

●

In poorly lit towns with highly reflective

signs.

●

Other insufficiently lit road users (such as

pedestrians or cyclists).

●

On tight bends and steep slopes (bumps)

and when oncoming vehicles are partially

obscured.

●

When the drivers of other oncoming vehi-

cles (such as a truck) can see over a guard

rail in the centre of the road.

●

If the camera is damaged or the power

supply is cut off.

●

In fog, snow and heavy rain.

●

With dust and sand turbulence.

●

With loose gravel in the field of vision of the

camera.

●

When the field of vision of the camera is

misted up, dirty or covered by stickers, snow,

ice, etc.

WARNING

The convenience features of the main

beam assist should not encourage the t

ak-

ing of risks. The system is not a replace-

ment for driver concentration.

●

You are always in control of the main

beam and adapting it to the light, visibility

and traffic conditions.

●

It is possible that the main beam head-

light control does not recognise all driving

situations and is limited under certain cir-

cumstances.

●

When the field of vision of the camera is

dirty, covered or damaged, operation of

the main beam control may be affected.

This also applies when changes are made

to the vehicle lighting system, for example,

if additional headlights are install

ed.

CAUTION

To avoid affecting the operation of the sys-

em, tak

e the following points into consid-

eration:

●

Clean the field of vision of the camera

regularly and make sure it is free of snow

and ice.

●

Do not cover the field of vision of the

camera.

●

Check that the windscreen is not dam-

aged in the area of the field of vision of the

camera.

Note

Main beam and headlight flasher can be

turned on and off manually at any time with

the turn signal and main beam l

ever

›››

page 148.

150

Lights and visibility

Fog lights

Fig. 152

Instrument console: light panel.

The warning lamps  or  al

so sho

, on the

light switch or instrument panel, when the fog

lights are on.

●

Turn on the fog lights* ; pull the light

switch to the first point

›››

Fig. 152

, from

positions ,  or 

.

●

urn on the r

ear fog light : completely pull

the light switch

from position ,  or



.

●

o s

witch off the fog lights, press the light

switch or turn it to position .

Note

The rear fog light can dazzle drivers behind

you. You should use the r

ear fog light only

when visibility is very poor.

Fog lights with cornering light func-

tion*

The cornering light function is an additional

function to the dipped beam headlights to

impr

ove lighting of the side of the road when

taking a sharp turn at low speed.

The cornering light function works when the

dipped beam headlights are already on and

it is enabled when driving at speeds below

approximately 40 km/h (25 mph).

Forward gear

●

If the steering wheel is turned to the right or

the right-hand turn signal s

witched on, the

right-hand fog lamp is gradually switched on.

●

If the steering wheel is turned to the left or

the left-hand turn signal switched on, the left-

hand fog lamp is gradually switched on.

●

After the turn, the cornering light function is

gradually switched off.

Reverse gear

●

When engaging the reverse gear, both fog

lights turn on.

“Coming home” function

This function may be connected/disconnec-

ed thr

ough the r

adio menu. The “Coming

Home” and/or “Leaving Home” delay time

may also be set (default: 30 sec).

Vehicle with halogen headlights

In the “Coming Home” function, the daytime

running lights (DRL), the rear side lights and

the licence plate lights are turned on.

Vehicle with full-LED headlights

In the “Coming Home” function, the dipped

beams, the daytime running lights (DRL), the

rear side lights, the number plate lights and

the courtesy lights in the rear view mirror

(Welcome Light) switch on.

Automatic* activation of “Coming Home”

For vehicles with a light and rain sensor (rota-

ry light switch in position ).

●

Switch off the engine and remove the key

from the ignition with the rotary light switch in

position 

›››



page 32.

●

The automatic “Coming Home” function is

only active when the light sensor detects

darkness.

●

When the car door is opened, the “Coming

Home” lighting comes on.

Manual “Coming Home” activation

For vehicles with a light and rain sensor (rota-

ry light switch without position ).

151

Operation

●

wit

ch off the engine and r

emove the key

from the ignition.

●

Activate the headlight flashers for approxi-

mately 1 second.

●

Activated for any position of the rotary light

switch.

●

When the car door is opened, the “Coming

Home” lighting comes on. The headlights are

turned off 60 seconds after the vehicle door

is opened.

Deactivation

●

If no door has been closed, they go out au-

tomatically after 60 seconds.

●

After the last door has been closed, the

headlights will be switched off after the

“Coming Home” delay (as established in the

radio menu) has elapsed.

●

On turning the light switch to position 

›››



page 32.

●

When the ignition is switched on (when

starting the engine).

Function “Leaving Home”

The “Leaving Home” function is only available

or v

ehicl

es with a light and rain sensor (rota-

ry light switch in position ).

This function may be connected/disconnec-

ted through the radio menu. The “Leaving

Home” function switch-off delay may also be

set (default: 30 sec).

Vehicle with halogen headlights

In the “Leaving Home” function, the daytime

running lights (DRL), the rear side lights and

the licence plate lights are switched on.

Vehicle with full-LED headlights

In the “Leaving Home” function, the dipped

beams, the daytime running lights (DRL), the

rear side lights, the number plate lights and

the courtesy lights in the rear view mirror

(“Welcome Light”) switch on.

Activation

●

When the vehicle is unlocked using the re-

mote control.

●

The “Leaving Home” function is only activa-

ted when the rotary light switch is in position

 and the light sensor detects darkness.

Deactivation

●

When the “Leaving Home” delay period

ends (default: 30 sec).

●

When the vehicle is locked using the remote

control.

●

When the light control is switched into a po-

sition other than .

●

With the ignition is switched on.

Welcome light*

3 Valid for vehicles with a light and rain sensor

and Full LED headlights.

The Wel

come light is a light located on the

exterior mirrors facing the ground which is

switched on or off if the lights control is in the

 position and the “Coming Home” /

“Leaving Home” function is switched on or off.

Hazard warning lights 

Fig. 153

Dashboard: switch for hazard warning

lights.

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 33

The hazard warning lights are used to draw

the attention of other road users to your vehi-

cle in emergencies.

If your vehicle breaks down:

152

Lights and visibility

1. Park your vehicle at a safe distance from

ving tr

affic.

Press the button to switch on the hazard

warning lights

›››

3. Switch the ignition off.

4. Apply the electronic parking brake.

5. For a manual gearbox, engage 1st gear;

or an aut

omatic gearbo

x, move the gear

lever to P.

6. Use the warning triangle to draw the at-

tention of other road users to your vehicle.

7. Always take the vehicle key with you when

you leave the vehicle.

All turn signals flash simultaneously when the

hazard warning lights are switched on. The

two turn signal turn signal lamps   and the

turn signal lamp in the switch  will flash at

the same time. The simultaneous hazard

warning lights also work when the ignition is

switched off.

Emergency braking warning

If the vehicle brakes suddenly and continu-

ously at a speed of more than 80 km/h (50

mph), the brake light flashes several times per

second to warn the vehicles driving behind. If

you continue braking, the hazard warning

lights will come on automatically when the

vehicle comes to a standstill. They switch off

automatically when the vehicle starts to

move again.

WARNING

●

The risk of an accident increases if your

vehicl

e breaks down. Always use the haz-

ard warning lights and a warning triangle to

draw the attention of other road users to

your stationary vehicle.

●

Due to the high temperatures that the

catalytic converter can reach, never park

in an area where the catalytic converter

could come into contact with highly inflam-

mable materials, for example dry grass or

spilt petrol. This could start a fire.

Note

●

The battery will run down if the haz

ard

warning lights are left on for a long time,

even if the ignition is switched off.

●

The use of the hazard warning lights de-

scribed here is subject to the relevant stat-

utory requirements.

Parking lights 

When the parking light is switched on, (right

or l

eft t

urn signal), the fr

ont side light and the

rear light on the corresponding side of the ve-

hicle stay lit. The parking lights can only be

activated with the ignition switched off and

the turn signal and main beam lever in the

central position, before being triggered.

Parking light on both sides

With the ignition switched off and the light

switch in position

, when locking the vehicle

from the outside, the parking lights on both

sides of the vehicle light up. In doing so, only

the side lights of both headlights light up, and

additionally the tail lights will do so partially.

Motorway light*

The motorway light is available on vehicles

equipped with full

-LED lights.

The function is connect

ed/disconnect

ed via

the corresponding Easy Connect system

menu.

●

Activation: when going above 110 km/h

(68 mph) for more than 30 seconds, the dip-

ped beam raises slightly to increase the driv-

er's visibility distance.

●

Deactivation: when reducing the speed of

the car below 100 km/h (62 mph), the dipped

beam returns to its normal position.

153

Operation

Driving abroad

The light beam of the dipped beam lights is

asymmetric: the side of the road on which

you are driving is lit mor

e intensely.

When a car that is manufactured in a country

that drives on the right travels to a country

that drives on the left (or vice versa), it is nor-

mally necessary to cover part of the head-

light bulbs with stickers or to change the ad-

justment of the headlights to avoid dazzling

other drivers.

In such cases, the regulations specify certain

light values that must be complied with for

designated points of the light distribution. This

is known as “Tourist light”.

The light distribution of the halogen and full-

LED headlights allows the specific “tourist

light” values to be met without the need for

stickers or changes in the settings.

Note

“Tourist light” is only allowed temporarily. If

you are planning a l

ong stay in a country

that drives on the other side, you should

take the vehicle to an Authorised Technical

Service to change the headlights.

Headlight range control

Fig. 154

Next to the steering wheel: regulator

headlight r

ange contr

The headlight range control

›

Fig. 154 is

modified according to the value of the head-

light beam and the vehicle load status. This

offers the driver optimum visibility and the

headlights do not dazzle oncoming drivers

›››

The headlights can only be adjust

ed when

the dipped beam is s

wit

ched on.

To reset, turn switch

›››

Fig. 154:

Value Vehicle load status



Two front occupants, luggage compart-

ment empty



All seats occupied, luggage compart-

ment empty

Value Vehicle load status



All seats occupied, luggage compart-

ment full. With trail

er and minimum

drawbar load.



Driver only, luggage compartment full

With trailer and maximum dr

awbar load.

If the vehicle load does not correspond to those

shown in the tabl

e, it is possible to select intermediary

positions.

OR:

Using the Easy Connect system, by means of

the 

button and the function button SET-

TINGS > Lights > Headlight height

adjustment

›



page 35).

Setting 0

Two front occupants, luggage com-

partment empty

Setting 1

All seats occupied, luggage compart-

ment empty

Setting 2

All seats occupied, luggage compart-

ment full. With trailer and minimum

drawbar load.

Setting 3

Driver only, luggage compartment full

Driving with trailer and minimum

awbar load.

154

Lights and visibility

Dynamic headlight range control

The contr

ol is not mount

ed in v

ehicles with

dynamic headlight range control. The head-

light range is automatically adjusted accord-

ing to the vehicle load status when they are

switched on.

WARNING

Heavy objects in the vehicle may mean

that the headlights dazzle and distract oth-

er driv

ers. This could result in a serious ac-

cident.

●

Adjust the light beam to the vehicle load

status so that it does not blind other driv-

ers.

Lighting of the instrument panel,

scr

eens and contr

Depending on the model, the lighting of the

instrument panel and contr

s can be adjus-

ed in the Easy Connect system, using the



button and the SETTINGS function butt

›



page 35.

With the ignition on and without light activa-

tion, the analogue instrument panel lighting

remains activated in daytime light conditions.

The lighting is reduced as the exterior light di-

minishes. In some cases, e.g. when driving

through a tunnel without the  function ac-

tive, the instrument panel lighting may even

switch off. The objective of this function is to

provide the driver with a visual indication that

he or she should activate the dipped beam.

If your vehicle is equipped with a digital in-

strument panel (Digital SEAT Cockpit), the

following message will appear Turn on the

lights on the instrument panel.

Interior and reading lights

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 34

Glove compartment and luggage com-

partment lighting*

When opening and closing the glove com-

partment on the front passenger side and the

rear lid, the respective light will automatically

switch on and off.

Footwell lighting*

The lights in the footwell area below the dash

(driver and front passenger sides) will switch

on when the doors are opened and will de-

crease in intensity while driving. The intensity

of these lights can be adjusted using the ra-

dio menu (see Easy Connect > Light

Settings > Interior lighting

›››



page 35).

Ambient light*

The ambient light lights up the area of the

centre console, the footwell area and, de-

pending on the version, the front door panels.

The ambient lighting in the door panels may

change colour. The brightness and colour of

these lights can be adjusted using the radio

menu (see Easy Connect > Light Set-

tings > Interior lighting

›››



page 35).

Note

The reading lights switch off when the vehi-

cle is lock

ed using a key or after several mi-

nutes if the key is removed from the ignition.

This prevents the battery from discharging.

Depending on the features fitted in the vehicle,

LEDs can be used for the foll

owing interior lights:

front vanity mirror light, rear vanity mirror light,

footwell light, sun blind and glove compartment

light.

155

Operation

Visibility

Sun visors

Fig. 155

Sun visor

Options for adjusting driver and front pas-

senger sun visors:

●

Lower the sun visor towards the wind-

scr

een.

●

The sun visor can be pull

ed out of its

mounting and t

urned towards the door

›››

Fig. 155

●

Swing the sun visor towards the door, longi-

udinally backw

ds.

Vanity mirror light

There may be a vanity mirror, with a cover, on

the rear of the sun visor. When the cover is

opened

a light comes on.

The lamp goes out when the vanity mirror

er is cl

osed or the sun visor is pushed

back up.

WARNING

Folded sun blinds can reduce visibility.

●

Always store sun blinds and visors in their

housing when not in use.

Note

The light above the sun visor automatically

switches off aft

er a few minutes in certain

conditions. This prevents the battery from

discharging.

Windscreen wiper and win-

w wiper syst

ems

Windo

w wiper lever

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 34

CAUTION

If the ignition is switched off with the wind-

screen wipers active

, they complete their

wipe before returning to the rest position.

When switching the ignition back on, the

windscreen wiper will continue to operate

at the same wiping level. Ice, snow and oth-

er obstacles on the windscreen may dam-

age the wiper and the windscreen wiper

motor

●

If necessary, remove snow and ice from

the windscreen wipers before starting your

journey.

●

Carefully lift the frozen windscreen wip-

ers from the glass. SEAT recommends a de-

icer spray for this operation.

●

Do not switch on the windscreen wipers if

the windscreen is dry. Cleaning with the

windscreen wipers while dry can cause

damage.

●

In icy conditions, always check that the

wiper blades are not frozen to the glass be-

fore using the wipers. In cold weather, it

may help to leave the vehicle parked with

the wipers in service position

›››



page 61.

Note

●

The windscreen and window wipers only

function when the ignition is s

witched on

and the bonnet or rear lid, respectively, are

closed.

●

The interval wipe speed varies according

to the vehicle speed. The faster the vehicle

is moving, the more often the windscreen is

cleaned.

●

The rear wiper is automatically switched

on when the windscreen wiper is on and the

car is in reverse gear.

156

Lights and visibility

Windscreen wiper functions

Windscreen wipers performance in differ-

ent situations

If the vehicl

e is at a

standstill

The activat

ed position provi-

sionally changes to the previ-

ous position.

During automatic

wipe

The air conditioner comes on

for appro

ximately 30 seconds

in air recirculation mode to pre-

vent the smell of the wind-

screen washer fluid entering

the inside the vehicle.

For the interval

wipe

Intervals between wipes de-

pend on the vehicle

's speed.

The higher the vehicle speed

the shorter the intervals.

Heated windscreen washer jets*

The heating only thaws the fr

en jets, it does

not thaw the water in the washer hoses.

When the ignition is switched on the heated

windscreen washer jets automatically adjust

the heat depending on the ambient tempera-

ture.

Headlight wash/wipe system*

The headlight washers/wipers clean the

headlight lenses.

After the ignition is switched on, the first and

every fifth time the windscreen washer is

switched on, the headlights are also washed.

Therefore, the windscreen wiper lever should

be pulled towards the steering wheel when

the dipped beam or main beam are on. Any

encrusted dirt (such as insects) should be

cleaned regularly (e.g. when refuelling).

To ensure the headlight washers work cor-

rectly in winter, any snow which has got into

the bumper jet supports should be cleaned

away. If necessary, remove snow with an an-

ti-icing spray.

Note

The wiper will try to wipe away any obsta-

cles that are on the windscr

een. The wiper

will stop moving if the obstacle blocks its

path. Remove the obstacle and switch the

wiper back on again.

Rain sensor*

Fig. 156

Windscreen wipers lever: adjust the

ain sensor

Fig. 157 Rain sensor sensitive surface

The rain sensor controls the frequency of the

windscr

een wiper int

erv

als, depending on the

amount of rain

›››

. The sensitivity of the rain

sensor can be adjust

ed manually. Manual

wipe

›

page 156.

Move the lever to the required position

›››

Fig. 156:

Rain sensor off.

Rain sensor on; automatic wipe if neces-

sary.

Setting sensitivity level of rain sensor

–

Set control to the right: high sensitivity.

–

Set control to the left: low sensitivity.

When the ignition is switched off and then

back on, the rain sensor stays on and starts

operating again when the windscreen wipers

are in position

and the vehicle is travelling

at mor

e than 16 km/h (

10 mph).

157

Operation

Rain sensor modified behaviour

ossibl

e causes of f

aults and mistaken read-

ings on the sensitive surface

›››

Fig. 157 of the

rain sensor include:

●

Damaged wipers: a film of water on the

damaged blades may lengthen the activa-

tion time, reduce the washing intervals or re-

sult in a fast and continuous wipe.

●

Insects: insects on the sensor may trigger

the windscreen wiper.

●

Salt on the road: in winter, salt spread on

the roads may cause an extra long wipe

when the windscreen is almost dry.

●

Dirt: dry dust, wax, coating on glass (Lotus

effect) or traces of detergent (car wash) may

reduce the effectiveness of the rain sensor or

make it react more slowly, later or not at all.

●

Windscreen crack: the impact of a stone

will trigger a single wipe cycle with the rain

sensor on. Next the rain sensor detects the re-

duction in the sensitive surface area and

adapts accordingly. The behaviour of the

sensor will vary with the size of the damage

caused by the stone.

WARNING

The rain sensor may not detect enough rain

to swit

ch on the wipers.

●

If necessary, switch on the wipers man-

ually when water on the windscreen ob-

structs visibility.

Note

●

Clean the sensitive surf

ace of the rain

sensor regularly and check the blades for

damage

›››

Fig. 157 (arrow).

●

To remove wax and coatings, we recom-

mend a window cleaner containing alco-

hol.

Mirror

Anti-dazzle rear vie

w mirror

It is dangerous to drive if you cannot see

early thr

ough the r

ear window.

Rear view mirror with automatic anti-daz-

zle function*

The anti-dazzle function is activated every

time the ignition is switched on.

When the anti-dazzle function is enabled, the

interior rear vision mirror will darken auto-

matically according to the amount of light it

receives. The anti-dazzle function is cancel-

led if reverse gear is engaged.

WARNING

In the event that an automatic anti-dazzle

rear vision mirror br

eaks, an electrolyte flu-

id may leak. This could cause irritation to

the skin, eyes and respiratory organs. If you

come into contact with this liquid, it must

be rinsed with large quantities of w

ater. If

necessary, get medial help.

CAUTION

In the event that an automatic anti-dazzle

ear vision mirror br

eaks, an electrolyte flu-

id may leak. This liquid attacks plastic sur-

faces. Clean it with a wet sponge as soon

as possible.

Note

●

If the light incident in the interior rear vi-

sion mirr

or is obstructed (e.g. with the sun

blind*), the anti-dazzle rear vision mirror

with automatic setting will not operate per-

fectly.

●

When the interior lights are on or reverse

gear engaged, the mirrors do not darken

with automatic adjustment for anti-dazzle

position.

158

Lights and visibility

Adjusting the exterior rear-view

mirr

ors

Fig. 158

Driver door: control for the exterior

mirr

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 21

Synchronized regulation of the exterior

mirrors

●

In the Settings - Convenience menu,

select whether or not the exterior mirrors

should move in synchronisation.

●

Turn the knob to position L

●

Adjust the left-hand exterior mirror. The

right exterior mirror will be adjusted at the

same time (synchronised).

●

If necessary, correct the right-hand rear-

view mirror: rotate the control to position R

●

In the Easy Connect system the exterior

mirrors can be adjusted using the 

button

and the SETTINGS function butt

on.

d the rearview mirrors when locking the

vehicle*

The Easy Connect system, the 

> SET-

TINGS > Mirrors and windscreen wip-

ers can be used t

o hav

e the e

xterior mirrors

fold in when the vehicle is parked and locked

›››



page 35.

When the vehicle is locked with the remote

control, the exterior mirrors are retracted au-

tomatically. When the vehicle is opened with

the remote control, the exterior mirrors are

deployed automatically.

WARNING

Convex or wide-angle* exterior mirrors

give a lar

ger field of vision. However, they

make objects look smaller and further

away than they really are. If you use these

mirrors to estimate the distance to vehicles

behind you when changing lane, you could

misjudge the distance. Risk of accident!

CAUTION

●

If one of the mirror housings is knocked

out of position (e

.g. when parking), the mir-

rors must first be fully retracted with the

electric control. Do not readjust the mirror

housing by hand, as this will interfere with

the mirror adjuster function.

●

Before washing the vehicle in an auto-

matic car wash, please make sure to re-

tract the exterior mirrors to prevent them

from being damaged. Electrically retracta-

ble exterior mirrors must not be folded in or

out by hand. Always use the electrical

power control.

Note

If the electrical adjustment should fail to

operate

, both of the mirrors can be adjus-

ted by hand by lightly pressing the edge of

the mirror glass.

Regulation in right-hand drive vehicles is sym-

metrical.

159

Operation

Seats and head restraints

Adjusting the seats and

headr

ests

Manual adjustment of the seats

Read the additional information carefully

›››



page 19

WARNING

The safe driving chapter contains impor-

tant information, tips, suggestions and

arnings that you should read and observe

for your own safety and the safety of your

passengers

›››

page 63.

WARNING

●

Adjust the front seats only when the vehi-

e is stationary. Failure to follow this in-

struction could result in an accident.

●

Be careful when adjusting the seat

height. Careless or uncontrolled adjust-

ment can cause injuries.

●

The front seat backrests must not be re-

clined for driving. Otherwise, seat belts and

the airbag system might not protect as

they should, with the subsequent danger of

injury.

Electric driver's seat adjustment*

Read the additional information carefully

›››



page 19

WARNING

●

If the electric front seats ar

e used negli-

gently or without paying due attention, it

can cause serious injury.

●

The front seats can also be electrically

adjusted when the ignition is switched off.

Never leave a child or any other person

who may need help in the vehicle.

●

In the event of an emergency, electrical

adjustment can be stopped by pressing

any control.

CAUTION

To avoid damaging the electrical compo-

nents of the front seats, please r

efrain from

kneeling on the seat or applying sharp

pressure at a single point to the seat cush-

ion and backrest.

Note

●

It may not be possible to el

ectrically ad-

just the seat if the vehicle battery is very

low.

●

If the engine is started while the seats are

being electrically adjusted, the adjustment

will stop.

Adjusting the front head restraints

Read the additional information carefully

›››



page 20

Adjust the head restraint

›››



page 20 so

that as far as possible the top of the head re-

straint is level with the top of your head. When

this is not possible, try to get as close as pos-

sible to this position.

Adjustment of the rear head re-

straints

Fig. 159

Rear centre head restraint: release

point.

When transporting people in the back seat,

ace the head r

estr

aints of the occupied

seats at a minimum of the next socket up

›››

160

Seats and head restraints

Adjusting the head restraints

–

To set the head restraint higher, grasp the

sides with both hands and mo

e it up

wards,

until you see it engage.

–

To set the head restraint lower down, press

the

›

Fig. 159 button and move it

downwards.

Removing the head restraint

To remove the head restraint, the corre-

sponding backrest must be partially folded

forward.

–

Unlock the backrest

›››

page 163.

–

Move the head restraint upwards until it ar-

rives to the top.

–

Press button

›

Fig. 159, while simulta-

neously pressing on the security hole

›››

Fig. 159 with a fl

at scr

wdriver a maxi-

mum of 5 mm wide, and remove the head

restraint.

–

Move the backrest until it engages properly

›››

Fitting the head r

estr

aint

o mount the external head restraints, the

corresponding backrest must be partially fol-

ded forward.

–

Unlock the backrest

›››

page 163.

–

Insert the head restraint bars into the

guides until they perceptibly engage. It

should not be possible to remove the head

restraint from the backrest.

–

Move the backrest until it engages properly

›››

WARNING

●

Please observe the gener

al notes

›››

page 68.

●

Remove the rear head restraints only

when it is necessary for the placement of a

child seat

›››

page 80. After removing a

child seat, remount the head restraint im-

mediately. Travelling with the head re-

straints removed or improperly adjusted in-

creases the risk of severe injuries.

Seat functions

Intr

oduction

WARNING

Inappropriate use of the seat functions can

cause sever

e injuries.

●

Assume the proper sitting position before

your trip and remain in it throughout. This

also applies to the other occupants.

●

Always keep hands, fingers, feet and oth-

er parts of the body away from the operat-

ing radius and the adjustment of seats.

Seat heating

Fig. 160 On the centre console: front seats

heating switch

The seat cushions can be heated electrically

when the ignition is s

wit

ched on. The backr

est

is also heated in some versions.

The seat heating should not be engaged in

any of the following conditions:

●

The seat is unoccupied.

●

The seat has a covering.

●

There is a child seat installed in the seat.

●

The seat cushion is wet or damp.

●

The indoor or outdoor temperature is great-

er than 25°C (77°F).

Activate

Press the button





. Seat heating is

switched on fully.

161

Operation

Adjusting the heating output

ess the butt

 or  repeatedly until the

desired temperature is reached.

Deactivating

Press the button  or  until all the warning

lamps switch off.

WARNING

Children and people who cannot perceive

pain or temperat

ure because of medica-

tions, paralysis or chronic diseases (e.g.

diabetes) or have a limited perception of

these, may suffer burns to the back, but-

tocks or legs when using seat heating, an

occurrence that may entail a very lengthy

recovery period or from which it may not be

possible to recover fully. Seek medical ad-

vice if you have doubts regarding your

health.

●

People with limited pain and temperature

thresholds must never use seat heating.

●

If an abnormality in the device's temper-

ature control is detected, have it checked

by a specialist workshop.

WARNING

If the fabric of the cushion is wet, this can

adversely affect the oper

ation of the seat

heating, increasing the risk of burns.

●

Make sure the seat cushion is dry prior to

using the seat heater.

●

Do not sit on the seat with clothing that is

wet or damp

●

Do not leave clothing that is wet or damp

on the seat.

●

Do not spill liquid on the seat.

CAUTION

●

o avoid damaging the heating el

ements

of the seat heaters, please do not kneel on

the seat or apply sharp pressure to a single

point on the seat cushion or backrest.

●

Liquids, sharps objects and insulating

materials (e.g. covers or child seats) can

damage the seat heating.

●

In the event of smells, switch off the seat

heating immediately and have it inspected

by a specialised workshop.

For the sake of the environment

The seat heating should remain on only

when needed. Otherwise, it is an unneces-

sary fuel wast

Front centre armrest

The centre armrest can be adjusted to vari-

ous l

els.

Adjusting the centre armrest

–

To adjust the tilt, lift the armrest from the

starting position so that it is engaged.

–

To return the armrest to the starting posi-

tion, remove the armrest from the upper

fixed position and lower it.

The armrest can be moved backwards and

forwards.

162

Seats and head restraints

Folding down and lifting the rear

seat backr

est

Fig. 161

On the rear seat backrest: release

butt

; red mark

Fig. 162

In the trunk: levers for remote release

of the l

eft part

and right part

of the rear

seat backr

est.

The rear seat backrest is split and each part

be l

ered separately to extend the luggage

compartment.

When the rear seat backrest is lowered no-

body else can travel in the corresponding

seats (not even a child).

Lowering the rear seat backrest with the

unlock button

●

Lower the head restraint properly.

●

Push the unlock button

›››

Fig. 161

for-

ds and at the same time lift the backr

est.

●

The rear seat backrest is not engaged

when the red marking of the button

is visi-

owering the rear seat backrest with the

remote release lever

●

Lower the head restraint properly.

●

Open the rear lid.

●

Pull the remote release lever of the left part

›››

Fig. 162

or right part

of the backrest

in the dir

ection of the arr

w. The released

part of the rear seat backrest is folded auto-

matically down and forwards.

●

If this occurs, close the rear lid.

The rear seat backrest is not engaged when

the red marking of the button

›››

Fig. 161

visibl

olding up the rear seat backrest

●

Lift the backrest and press it firmly into the

lock until it engages

›››

●

It shoul

d not be possibl

e t

o see the red

mark of the unlock button

●

The backrest must be properly engaged.

WARNING

Serious injuries can be caused if the rear

seat backrest is lo

wered or lifted without

due care and attention.

●

Never lower or lift the rear seat backrest

while driving.

●

Do no trap or damage the seat belt when

raising the rear seat backrest.

●

When lowering or lifting the rear seat

backrest, keep your hands, fingers, feet

and other body parts out of its path.

●

For the rear seat belts to offer the neces-

sary protection all the parts of the rear

backrest must be properly engaged. This is

particularly important in the case of the

centre rear seat. If someone is seated in a

seat whose backrest is not properly engag-

ed they will fly forward, along with the

backrest, during an accident or a sudden

driving or braking manoeuvre.

●

A red signal on button

warns that the

backrest is not engaged. Alw

ays check

that the red marking is not visible when the

backrest is in the upright position.

●

When the rear seat backrest is lowered or

is not properly engaged nobody else can

travel in the corresponding seats (not even

a child).

163

Operation

CAUTION

Serious damage can be caused to the vehi-

cle and other objects if the r

ear seat back-

rest is lowered or lifted without due care

and attention.

●

Before lowering the rear seat backrest,

always adjust the front seats so that nei-

ther the head restraints nor the cushions of

the rear backrest can hit them.

Transport and practical

equipment

age compar

tments

Storage areas under the front

seats*

Fig. 163

Storage compartment under the front

seats.

There is a storage compartment with a cover

under each fr

ont seat.

The dr

er* is opened by pulling on the han-

dle of the cover

›››

Fig. 163.

To close the drawer, press the cover until it

locks into position.

WARNING

●

The drawers will hol

d a maximum weight

of 1.5 kg.

●

Do not drive with the drawer cover open.

There is an injury risk for passengers if the

cargo is released in case of sudden braking

or an accident.

164

Transport and practical equipment

Folding table*

Fig. 164

Left-hand front seat: folding table.

Fig. 165

Left-hand front seat: folding table

with drinks hol

der

Depending on the model version, at the rear

of the fr

ont seats, ther

e may be “pl

ane-style”

folding tables for passengers in the rear

seats.

Folding the table

●

Push the table downwards, as much as you

can.

Folding the table or adjusting its inclina-

tion

The foldable table can be used at different

inclinations.

●

Press the unlocking lever under the table

›››

Fig. 165

and keep it that way.

●

Adjust: Adjust the inclination of the t

abl

e by

essing the lever.

●

Fold: Push the table downwards while

pressing the lever.

Drink holder

A drink holder is built into the folding table

With the f

dabl

e table extended, remove the

drink holder

following the direction of the

arr

. To store the drink holder, insert it into

the table against the direction of the arrow.

WARNING

The table must always be closed while

driving to decrease the risk of injuries.

Drink holders

Fig. 166

Centre console: drinks holder.

Front drink holders

–

Place drinks in the holder

›

Fig. 166.

Placement of two drinks is possible. There is

also the possibility of placing larger plastic

bottles in the trims of the doors.

WARNING

●

Do not place any hot drinks in the drink

holder whil

e the vehicle is moving. Hot

drinks could spill and cause burns, which

may cause an accident.

●

Do not use hard china cups or glasses.

These could cause injury in the event of an

accident.

CAUTION

You should avoid putting open drinks con-

tainers in the drink holders. The drinks

165

Operation

could otherwise spill over and cause dam-

age to e.g. the el

ectrical equipment or the

seat covers.

Glove compartment

Fig. 167 Glove compartment

Opening/closing

–

To open the glove compartment, pull the

handl

e in the dir

ection of the arr

ow.

–

To close the glove compartment, move the

cover upwards until it engages.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the CD

player is located in the glove compartment.

Separate operating instructions are enclosed

for this equipment in the corresponding In-

struction Manual.

WARNING

The cover of the glove compartment should

always be cl

osed while driving. Failure to

follow this instruction could result in an ac-

cident.

Other storage compartments

You will find more object holders, compart-

ments and supports in other parts of the vehi-

cle:

●

In the t

op of the glove compartment in vehi-

cles that do not have a CD r

eader. The load

of the compartment should not exceed 1.2 kg.

●

In the centre console under the centre arm-

rest*.

●

Coat hooks in the door frames

›››

●

Other storage compartments are found in

the r

ear seat, t

o the l

eft and the right of the

seats.

WARNING

●

Please make sur

e that any items of cloth-

ing hanging from the coat hooks do not ob-

struct your view to the rear.

●

The coat hooks should only be used for

lightweight clothing. Do not leave any

heavy or sharp objects in the pockets.

●

Do not use clothes hangers to hang up

the cl

othing, as this could interfere with the

function of the head-protection airbags.

166

Transport and practical equipment

Power sockets

Fig. 168 

Centre console: fr

ont 12 volt power

socket.



Rear of the centre console: USB

sockets.

Fig. 169 Detailed view of the side trim in the

boot: 12-volt pow

er socket.

In the centre console

–

Remove the cap located on the centre con-

sol

e of the sock

›

››

Fig. 168. .

–

Insert the plug of the electrical appliance

into the power socket.

In the luggage compartment*

–

Lift the power socket cover

›››

Fig. 169.

–

Insert the plug of the electrical appliance

into the power socket.

Electrical equipment can be connected to

the 12 volt power socket. The appliances con-

nected to each power socket must not ex-

ceed a power rating of 120 Watt.

USB power sockets

Depending on the equipment and the coun-

try, the vehicle may also have USB connec-

tions exclusively for charging or as a power

socket.

These USB ports are located at the rear of

the console, between the front seats

›››

Fig. 168 . These connectors can work at

a maximum power of up to 10.5 W per port.

They are not intended for file playback.

WARNING

The power socket works only when the igni-

tion is on. Improper use may cause serious

injury or ev

en fire. Children should there-

fore not be left in the vehicle unattended if

the button is also left behind. Otherwise

there is a possibility that they may be in-

jured.

CAUTION

Always use the correct type of plugs to

avoid damaging the sockets.

Note

●

The use of electrical appliances with the

engine swit

ched off will cause a battery

discharge.

●

Should the connected appliance over-

heat, immediately switch it off and discon-

nect it from the socket.

●

Before switching the ignition on or off, un-

plug the appliances from the USB ports to

167

Operation

protect them from any damage caused by

fluctuations in volt

age.

Storing objects

Loading the luggage compartment

All luggage and other loose objects must be

safely secured in the luggage compartment.

Unsecur

ed objects which shift back and forth

could impair the driving safety or driving

characteristics of the vehicle by shifting the

centre of gravity.

–

Distribute the load evenly in the luggage

compartment.

–

Place heavy objects as far forward as pos-

sible in the luggage compartment.

–

Place the heavy ob

jects first.

–

Secure heavy objects to the fitted fastening

rings

›››

page 170.

WARNING

●

Loose luggage and other objects in the

luggage compar

tment could cause serious

injuries.

●

Always stow objects in the luggage com-

partment and secure them on the fastening

rings.

●

Use suitable str

aps to secure heavy ob-

jects.

●

During sudden manoeuvres or accidents,

loose objects can be thrown forward, injur-

ing vehicle occupants or passers-by. This

increased risk of injury will be further in-

creased if a loose object is struck by an in-

flating airbag. If this happens, objects may

shoot outward like a missile. Risk of fatal in-

jury.

●

Please note that the centre of gravity

may shift when transporting heavy objects;

this may affect vehicle handling and lead

to an accident. Therefore, it is essential to

adjust your speed and driving style ac-

cordingly, to avoid accidents.

●

Never exceed the allowed axle weights or

allowed maximum weight. If said weights

are exceeded, the driving characteristics of

the vehicle may change, leading to acci-

dents, injuries and damage to the vehicle.

●

Never leave your vehicle unattended, es-

pecially when the rear lid is open. Children

could climb into the luggage compartment,

closing the door behind them; they will be

trapped and run the risk of death.

●

Never allow children to play in or around

the vehicle. Close and lock all the doors

and the rear lid when you leave the vehicle.

Before you lock the vehicle, make sure that

there are no adults or children in the vehi-

cle.

Note

●

Air circulation in the v

ehicle helps reduce

fogging of the windows. Used air escapes

through ventilation slits in the side trim of

the luggage compartment. Ensure that the

ventilation slots are never covered.

●

Straps for securing the load to the fas-

tening rings are commercially available

from accessory shops.

168

Transport and practical equipment

Luggage compartment shelf

Fig. 170

In the boot: removing and installing

the shelf

Fig. 171 In the boot: removing and installing

the shelf

The luggage compartment cover blocks the

vie

w int

o the luggage compartment.

emoving

●

Detach the cord loops

›››

Fig. 170

from

their hooks

●

Remove the rear shelf from the side sup-

ports

›

Fig. 171 by pulling it upwards and

then take it out.

If necessary, the rear shelf can be stored un-

der the luggage compartment double floor

›››

page 169.

Fitting

●

Insert the cover horizontally so that the “re-

cess” fits onto the axis of the supports

›››

Fig. 171 and press down until it engages.

●

Hook the loops

›››

Fig. 170

to the rear lid.

WARNING

●

The luggage compartment cov

er must

always be fixed properly (risk of accident).

●

The luggage compartment cover should

not be used as a storage shelf. Articles

placed on this cover could cause injury to

vehicle occupants in an accident or if the

brakes are applied suddenly.

Storing the rear shelf

Fig. 172

In the boot: covers for storing the rear

shelf

Fig. 173 In the boot: fitting the rear shelf.

The rear shelf can be stored under the lug-

gage compartment v

ariabl

e fl

oor.

●

Remove the left and right covers

›››

Fig. 172.

●

Press the rear shelf until it engages in its

housing

›››

Fig. 173.

169

Operation

●

Put the l

eft and right co

ers in their original

position.

Tailboard for transporting long

items*

Fig. 174

On the rear seat backrest: opening

the t

ailboar

Fig. 175

In the boot: opening the tailboard.

On the rear seat, behind the central armrest,

ther

e is a t

ailboar

d for transporting long items

in the interior, such as skis.

To avoid soiling the interior, dirty objects

should be wrapped (e.g. in a blanket) before

they are inserted through the tailboard.

When the armrest is down, nobody may trav-

el in the centre rear seat.

Opening the tailboard

●

Lower the centre armrest.

●

Pull the release lever in the direction of the

arrow and push the tailboard cover

›››

Fig. 174

down and forwards.

●

Open the rear lid.

●

Insert the long objects through the gap

om the luggage compartment.

●

Secur

e the ob

jects with the seat belt.

●

Close the rear lid.

Closing the tailboard

●

Lift the tailboard cover until it engages. The

red mark on the luggage compartment side

should never be visible.

●

Close the rear lid.

●

Lift the centre armrest if necessary.

Note

The tailboard can also be opened from the

luggage compartment. To do so

, press the

release lever down, in the direction of the

arrow

, and the cover upwards

›››

Fig. 175.

Fastening rings*

Fig. 176

In the boot: fastening rings.

In the front and rear part of the luggage com-

partment ther

e ar

e f

astening rings to secure

the luggage

›››

Fig. 176.

In order to use the fastening rings, they must

be lifted beforehand.

WARNING

If unsuitable or damaged belts or retaining

straps are used, they coul

d break in the

event of braking or an accident. Objects

could then be launched across the passen-

ger compartment and cause serious or fa-

tal injuries.

170

Transport and practical equipment

●

Always use belts or r

etaining straps that

are suitable and in a good condition.

●

Belts and retaining straps should be se-

curely fastened to the fastening rings.

●

Objects in the luggage compartment

that are unsecured could move suddenly

and modify the handling of the vehicle.

●

Secure all objects, little and large.

●

Never exceed the maximum tensile load

of the fastening ring when securing objects.

●

Never secure a child seat to the fastening

rings.

Note

●

The maximum tensile l

oad that the fas-

tening rings can support is 3.5 kN.

●

Belts and securing systems for the ap-

propriate load can be obtained from speci-

alised dealerships. SEAT recommends visit-

ing a SEAT dealership for this.

●

The fastening rings are rendered unusa-

ble for versions with a spare wheel.

Retaining hooks

Fig. 177

In the boot: retaining hooks.

At the rear of the luggage compartment, on

the l

eft and right, ther

e ar

e fixed retaining

hooks

›››

Fig. 177.

The retaining hooks have been designed to

secure light shopping bags.

WARNING

Never use the retaining hooks as fastening

rings. In case of sudden braking or an acci-

dent, the hooks could br

eak.

CAUTION

Each hook is designed for a maximum load

of 2.5 kg.

Net bag*

Fig. 178

In the boot: net bag hooked up at floor

el.

Fig. 179 In the boot: rings

and hooks

for

att

aching the net bag.

The luggage compartment prevents light

luggage fr

om mo

ving. The net bag has a zip

and can be used t

o store small objects.

The net bag can be hooked up to the lug-

gage compartment in different ways.

171

Operation

Hooking the net bag into the luggage

compar

tment fl

oor

●

As applicabl

e, lift the front fastening rings

›››

Fig. 178

●

Secure the net hooks to the fastening rings

›

. The bag zip should be facing up-

ds.

●

Secur

e the net hooks to the fastening rings

Hook the net bag ne

xt t

o the l

oad thresh-

old

●

Secure the short net hooks to the fastening

rings

›››

Fig. 179

›

. The bag zip should

be f

acing up

ards.

●

Secure the straps in the bag hooks

emo

ving the net bag

The hook

ed up net bag is taut

›››

●

Remove the hooks and the net bag straps

om the f

ast

ening rings and from the bag

hooks.

●

Store the net bag in the luggage compart-

ment.

WARNING

To secure the elastic net bag on the fasten-

ing rings it must be stretched out. Once

hook

ed up it is taut. If the net bag is hooked

up or unhooked incorrectly the hooks could

cause injuries.

●

Always secur

e the net hooks properly so

that they do not suddenly release from the

fastening rings when hooking or unhooking

them.

●

On hooking or unhooking them, protect

your eyes and face in case the hooks are

released suddenly.

●

Always hook up the net bag hooks in the

described order. If a hook is unexpectedly

released the risk of injury is increased.

Luggage compartment variable

oor

Fig. 180 Variable boot floor:



aised position;



wered position.

172

Transport and practical equipment

Fig. 181 Variable boot floor: tilted position.

Variable floor in high position

●

To move from the low position to the high

position, lift the fl

oor using the handl

›

››

Fig. 180

, and pull it back until the front

of the fl

oor has fully passed the supports

●

Move the floor forward over the supports as

ar as the r

ear seat backr

est and then lower

the floor with the handle

ariabl

e fl

oor in low position

●

To move from the high position to the low

position, lift the floor using the handle

›››

Fig. 180

, and pull it back until the front

of the fl

oor has fully passed the supports

●

Now let the front part fall to the floor and

slide the fl

oor f

orw

ards as far as the rear seat

backrest; lower the floor at the same time

with the handle

Variable floor in the tilted position

When the v

ariabl

e fl

oor is tilted you can ac-

cess the spare wheel/anti-puncture kit area.

●

Lift the variable floor in the high position us-

ing handle

›››

Fig. 180

, pull it up and push

it t

ards the backrest of the rear seats until

the floor folds along the hinge line and the

movable part of the floor is resting on itself.

●

Rest the floor on its housings

›››

Fig. 181 (ar-

rows).

Variable floor with folded seats

●

To move from the high position to the low

position, lift the floor using the handle

›››

Fig. 180

and pull it back a little.

●

Push the variable floor towards the folded

ear seats with the handl

using some

wnw

d pressure so that the moving part

of the floor is flush with the backs of the rear

seats.

WARNING

During a sudden driving or braking ma-

noeuvre, or in the e

vent of an accident, ob-

jects could be flung though the interior and

cause serious or fatal injuries.

●

Always secure objects, even when the

luggage compartment floor is properly lif-

ted.

●

Only objects that do not protrude more

than 2/3 the height of the floor may be car-

ried between the rear seat and the raised

luggage compartment floor

●

Only objects that do not weigh than ap-

proximately 7.5 kg may be carried between

the rear seat and the raised luggage com-

partment floor.

CAUTION

●

The maximum w

eight that can be loaded

on the luggage compar

tment variable floor

in the top position is 150 kg.

●

Do not let the luggage compartment

floor fall when closing it. Always carefully

guide it downwards in a controlled manner.

Otherwise, the lining and the floor of the

luggage compartment could be damaged.

Note

SEAT recommends the use of straps to se-

cure objects t

o retaining rings.

Roof carrier*

Intr

oduction

The vehicle roof has been designed to opti-

mise aer

odynamics. F

or this r

eason, cross

bars or conventional roof carrier systems

cannot be secured to the roof water drains.

173

Operation

As the roof water drains are integrated in the

oof t

o r

educe air resistance, only SEAT-ap-

proved cross bars and roof carrier systems

can be used.

Cases in which cross bars and the roof

carrier system should be disassembled.

●

When they are not used.

●

When the vehicle is washed in a car wash.

●

When the vehicle height exceeds the maxi-

mum height, for example, in some garages.

WARNING

When heavy or bulky loads are transported

on the roof carrier system, car driving per

formance is affected, as the centre of grav-

ity shifts and there is greater wind resist-

ance.

●

Always secure the load properly using

belts or retaining straps that are suitable

and in a good condition.

●

Bulky, heavy, long or flat loads have a

negative effect on aerodynamics, the cen-

tre of gravity and driving performance.

●

Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.

●

Adapt your speed and driving style at all

times to suit visibility, weather, road and

traffic conditions.

CAUTION

●

Remov

e the cross bars and the roof carri-

er system before entering a car wash.

●

Vehicle height is increased by the instal-

lation of cross bars or a roof carrier system

and the load secured on them. For this pur-

pose, check that your vehicle's height does

not surpass the headspace limit, for exam-

ple, for underpasses or for entering garage

doors.

●

Cross bars, the roof carrier system and

the load secured on them should not inter-

fere with the roof aerial or hamper the path

of the panoramic sun roof and the rear lid.

●

On opening the rear lid make sure that it

does not knock into the roof load.

For the sake of the environment

When cross bars and a roof carrier system

are install

ed, the increased air resistance

means that the vehicle uses more fuel.

Attach the cross bars and the roof

carrier syst

Fig. 182

Attachment points for the roof railings

or the r

oof carrier syst

em.

The crossbars are the basis of a series of

special r

oof carrier syst

ems. F

or safety rea-

sons, special fixtures must be used to safely

transport luggage, bicycles, skis, surf boards

or boats on the roof. Suitable accessories

can be acquired at SEAT dealerships.

Always secure the crossbars and the roof

carrier system properly. Always take the as-

sembly instructions that come with the cross-

bars and the roof carrier system in question

into account.

The crossbars are assembled on the roof rail-

ings. The distance between crossbars

›››

Fig. 182

should be between 70 and 90

cm and the dist

ance betw

een the cr

ossbars

174

Transport and practical equipment

and the brackets of the roof railings

must

be 15 cm.

WARNING

Incorrect attachment and use of the cross-

bars and the roof carrier system may cause

the whol

e system to detach from the roof

and cause an accident and injuries.

●

Always take the manufacturer assembly

instructions into account.

●

Use only crossbars and the roof carrier

system when they are in perfect condition

and are properly secured.

●

Secure the crossbars and the roof carrier

system properly.

●

Check threaded joints and attachments

travelling and if necessary tighten them af-

ter you have travelled a short distance.

When making long trips, check the threa-

ded joints whenever you stop for a rest.

●

Always fit the special roof carrier sys-

tems correctly for wheels, skis and surf-

boards, etc.

●

Do not modify or repair the crossbars or

roof carrier system.

Note

Always read the assembly instructions that

come with the crossbars and the roof carri-

er syst

em carefully and keep them in the

vehicle.

Loading the roof carrier system

The load can only be secured if the crossbars

and the roof carrier system ar

e properly in-

stalled

›››

Maximum authorised roof load

The maximum permissibl

e roof load is 75 kg.

This figure comes from the combined weight

of the roof carrier, the cross bars and the load

itself on the roof

›››

Always check the w

eight of the roof carrier

system, the cross bars and the weight of the

load to be transported and weigh them if

necessary. Never exceed the maximum au-

thorised roof load.

If you are using cross bars and a roof carrier

with a lower weight rating, you will not be

able to carry the maximum authorised roof

load. In this case, do not exceed the maxi-

mum weight limit for the roof carrier which is

listed in the fitting instructions.

Distributing a load

Distribute loads uniformly and secure them

correctly

›››

Check att

achments

Once the cr

oss bars and r

oof carrier system

have been installed, check the bolted con-

nections and attachments after a short jour-

ney and subsequently with a certain frequen-

cy.

WARNING

Exceeding the maximum authorised roof

load can result in accidents and consider

ble vehicle damage.

●

Never exceed the maximum authorised

load on the roof and on the axles or the ve-

hicle's maximum authorised weight.

●

Never exceed the load capacity of the

cross bars and the roof carrier system,

even if the maximum authorised roof load

has not been reached.

●

Secure heavy items as far forward as

possible and distribute the vehicle load

uniformly.

WARNING

If the load is loose or not secured, it could

fall from the r

oof carrier system or cause

accidents and injuries.

●

Always use belts or retaining straps that

are suitable and in a good condition.

●

Secure the load properly.

175

Operation

Air conditioning

Heating, v

entil

ation and

cooling

Intr

oduction

Read the additional information carefully

›››



page 42

Viewing Climatronic information

On the screen of Climatronic control unit and

on the screen of the factory-fitted Easy Con-

nect system, the theoretical values of the

temperature zones are shown.

The unit of temperature measurement can be

changed in the Easy Connect system.

Dust and pollen filter

The dust and pollen filter with its activated

charcoal cartridge serves as a barrier

against impurities in the air taken into the ve-

hicle interior.

The dust and pollen filter must be changed

regularly so that air conditioner performance

is not adversely affected.

If the filter loses efficiency prematurely due to

use in areas with very high levels of air pollu-

tion, the filter must be changed more fre-

quently than stated in the Service Schedule.

WARNING

Reduced visibility through the windows in-

creases the risk of serious accidents.

●

Alw

ays ensure that all windows are free

of ice and snow, and that they are not fog-

ged, so as to maintain good visibility of ev-

erything outside.

●

The maximum heat output required to de-

frost windows as quickly as possible is only

available when the engine has reached its

normal running temperature. Only drive

when you have good visibility.

●

Always ensure that you use the heating

system, fresh air system, air conditioner

and the heated rear window to maintain

good visibility to the outside.

●

Never leave the air recirculation on for a

long period of time. If the cooling system is

switched off and air recirculation mode

switched on, the windows can mist over

very quickly, considerably limiting visibility.

●

Switch air recirculation mode off when it

is not required.

WARNING

Stuffy or used air will increase fatigue and

reduce driver concentr

ation possibly re-

sulting in a serious accident.

●

Never leave the fresh air fan turned off or

use the air recirculation for long periods of

time; the air in the vehicle interior will not

be refreshed.

CAUTION

●

To repl

ace the pollen filter, always visit a

service centre.

●

Switch the air conditioner off if you think

it may be broken. This will avoid additional

damage. Have the air conditioner checked

by a specialised workshop.

●

Repairs to the air conditioner require spe-

cialist knowledge and special tools. SEAT

recommends visiting a SEAT Official Serv-

ice.

Note

●

When the cooling system is turned off

, air

coming from the outside will not be dried.

To prevent fogging of the windows, SEAT

recommends leaving the cooling system

(compressor) turned on. To do this, press

the 

button. The button lamp should

light up.

●

The maximum heat output requir

ed to de-

frost windows as quickly as possible is only

available when the engine has reached its

normal running temperature.

●

Keep the air intake slots in front of the

windscreen free of snow, ice and leaves to

ensure heating and cooling are not im-

paired, and to prevent the windows from

misting over.

176

Air conditioning

Operating the Climatronic through

the Easy Connect syst

em*

3 Applies to vehicles with a Media System

Touch/Col

our.

Fig. 183

Easy Connect screen: air conditioner

menu.

In the Easy Connect system it is also possible

o perf

orm v

arious adjustments to the Clima-

tronic.

Open the air conditioner menu

●

Press the 

button on the Climatronic

contr

ol panel.

●

OR:

ess the 

button in Easy Connect.

With the r

ating s

witch select the air con-

ditioner menu and open it.

On the touch screen you can see and

change the current settings, for example, the

temperature set for the driver and passenger

sides, the air distribution and the fan speed.

To switch a function on or off, or to select a

submenu, you must press the corresponding

function button.

Function button: Function

OFF

Switch off and switch on the Clima-

onic.

SYNC

Synchronise driv

er and front passen-

ger t

emperat

ures.

SETTINGS

The air conditioning settings subme-

nu is opened. The follo

wing settings

can also be adjusted:

Air conditioning profile.:

Adjust the power of the f

an in AUTO

mode. You can choose between low,

medium and high.

Automatic air recircula-

tion: Switching aut

omatic air recir-

culation on and off

›››

page 179.

BACK : Cl

ose the submenu.



The auxiliary heat

er submenu opens.



It enabl

es manual switching on or off

of the windscr

een heat



It enables activation and deactiva-

tion of the PureAir and opens the

submenu.

Operating the Climatronic through

the Easy Connect syst

em*

3 Applies to vehicles with Media System Plus /

Navi System / Navi Syst

em Plus.

Fig. 184

Easy Connect screen: air conditioner

menu.

In the Easy Connect system it is also possible

o perf

orm v

arious adjustments to the Clima-

tronic.

Open the air conditioner menu

●

Press the 

button of the Climatronic

contr

ol panel.

On the t

op of the scr

een you can see and

change the current settings, such as, for ex-

ample, the temperature set for the driver side

and for that of passenger. Temperatures up to

+22°C (+72°F) are shown with blue arrows,

and temperatures over +22°C (+72°F) with red

arrows.

177

Operation

To switch a function on or off, or to select a

submenu, you must pr

ess the corr

esponding

function butt

on.

Function button: Function

OFF Climatronic is switched off.

ON Climatronic is switched on.

SYNC

Synchronise driver and front passen-

ger t

emperat

ures.

SETTINGS

The air conditioning settings subme-

nu is opened. The follo

wing settings

can also be adjusted:

Automatic supplementary

heater: to activat

e/deactivate the

automatic activation of the auxiliary

heating for colder countries (only for

engines with auxiliary heating). With

the option deactivated, depending

on the outside temperature the heat-

ing may need more time than normal

to reach a comfortable temperature.

Automatic front window

heating:* to swit

ch the automatic

windscreen heating on and off

›››

page 180.

Automatic air recircula-

tion: to switch automatic air recir-

culation on and off

›››

page 179.

BACK: t

o close the submenu.



The auxiliary heat

er submenu opens.

Function button: Function



It enables manual switching on or off

of the windscreen heater



It enables activation and deactiva-

tion of the PureAir and opens the

submenu.

Air conditioning user instructions

The interior cooling system only works when

the engine is running and fan is swit

ched on.

The air conditioner operates most effectively

with the windows and the panoramic sliding

sunroof closed. However, if the vehicle has

heated up after standing in the sun for some

time, the air inside can be cooled more quick-

ly by opening the windows and the panoram-

ic sliding sunroof briefly.

Climatronic: change the temperature unit

on the screen of the factory-fitted info-

tainment system

The temperature display can be changed

from Celsius to Fahrenheit on the screen of

the Infotainment system using the Infotain-

ment button 

> Settings > Units but

on.

The cooling syst

em cannot be activated

If the air conditioning system cannot be

switched on, this may be caused by the fol-

lowing:

●

The engine is not running.

●

The fan is switched off.

●

The air conditioner fuse has blown.

●

The outside temperature is lower than ap-

proximately +3°C (+38°F).

●

The air conditioner compressor has been

temporarily switched off because the engine

coolant temperature is too high.

●

Another fault in the vehicle. Have the air

conditioner checked by a specialised work-

shop.

Special characteristics

If the humidity and temperature outside the

vehicle are high, condensation can drip off

the evaporator in the cooling system and

form a pool underneath the vehicle. This is

normal and does not indicate a leak!

Note

After starting the engine, any residual hu-

midity in the air conditioner could mist o

ver

the windscreen. Switch on the defrost func-

tion as soon as possible to clear the wind-

screen of condensation.

178

Air conditioning

Air outlets

Fig. 185

On the dash panel air vents.

Air vents

o ensur

e pr

oper heating, cooling and venti-

lation in the vehicle interior, air vents

›››

Fig. 185

should remain open.

●

Turn the corresponding thumbwheel (de-

ail) in the r

equir

ed direction to open and

close the air vents. When the thumbwheel is

in the  position, the corresponding air vent is

closed.

●

Change the air direction using the ventila-

tion grille lever.

There are other additional, non-adjustable air

vents in the dash panel

, in the footwell and

in the r

ear ar

ea of the int

erior.

Note

Food, medicine and other heat or cold sen-

sitive objects shoul

d never be placed in

front of the air outlets as they may be dam-

aged or made unsuitable for use by the air

coming from the air vents.

Air recirculation mode

Basic points

Air recirculation:



Manual recirculation

Air recirculation mode prevents the ambient

air fr

om ent

ering the int

erior.

When the outside temperature is very high,

selecting manual air recirculation mode for a

short period refreshes the vehicle interior

more quickly.

For safety reasons, air recirculation mode is

switched off when the button  is pressed

or the air distributor turned to .

Switching the manual air recirculation

mode on and off 

Activate: press the  button until the warn-

ing lamp lights up.

Deactivate: press the  button until the

warning lamp goes off.

179

Operation

Functioning mode of automatic air recircu-

ation (air conditioning menu)

With the aut

omatic air r

ecirculation mode ac-

tivated, the entry of fresh air into the cabin in-

terior is enabled. If the system detects a high

concentration of hazardous substances in the

ambient air, air recirculation mode is switched

on automatically. When the level of impurities

drops to within a normal range, recirculation

mode is switched off.

The system is unable to detect unpleasant

smells.

The air recirculation will not connect auto-

matically in versions without humidity sensor

and in the following external conditions:

●

The outside temperature is lower than +3°C

(+38°F).

●

The cooling system is switched off and the

outside temperature is below +10°C (+50°F).

●

The cooling system is switched off, the out-

side temperature is below +15°C (+59°F) and

the windscreen wipers are switched on.

Activation/deactivation of automatic air recir-

culation is done in the air conditioner menu,

under Configuration.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings

›››

in Intro-

duction on page 176.

●

If the cooling system is swit

ched off and

air recirculation mode switched on, the

windows can mist over very quickly, con-

siderably limiting visibility.

●

Switch air recirculation mode off when it

is not required.

CAUTION

Do not smoke when air recirculation is

witched on in v

ehicles with an air condi-

tioner. The smoke taken in could lie on the

cooling system vaporiser and on the acti-

vated charcoal cartridge of the dust and

pollen filter, leading to a permanently un-

pleasant smell.

Note

Climatronic: air recirculation mode is acti-

vated t

o prevent exhaust gas or unpleasant

odours from entering the vehicle interior

when it is in reverse and while the automat-

ic windscreen wiper is working.

Heated windscreen*

Fig. 186

Windscreen humidity and tempera-

e sensor

The heated windscreen is comprised of a set

of heat

ed wir

es pl

aced between the layers of

the windscreen which, when electric current

is supplied to them, heat up and cause the

temperature of the glass to rise.

Its function is to assist the air-conditioning

system to prevent the windscreen from mist-

ing up or to demist it faster if it does mist up.

The system can be switched on manually or

automatically.

Manual activation

●

Press the  button of the Climatronic

control panel.

●

Press the  function button to switch the

windscreen heating on or off.

180

Air conditioning

Automatic activation

o f

acilit

ate use of the heated windscreen it

can turn on automatically.

The Climatronic control panel can detect the

danger of the windscreen misting thanks to its

temperature and humidity sensors, switching

the system on or off accordingly

›››

Fig. 186.

Moreover, it will also be activated automati-

cally when the  button is pressed on the

Climatronic control panel.

Adjust it as follows for it to switch on automat-

ically:

●

Press the  button of the Climatronic

control panel.

●

Press the SETTINGS function button on the

infotainment system.

●

Switch the function on or off by pressing the

Automatic windscreen heating

function button.

181

Operation

Auxiliary heater (additional

heat

er)*

Intr

oduction

The auxiliary heater runs on fuel from the ve-

hicle's tank and can be used whil

e you are

driving and when the vehicle is stationary.

The auxiliary heater can be switched on using

the fast heating button of the air conditioning

controls, with the remote control or by previ-

ously programming a departure time in the

auxiliary heater menu of the infotainment sys-

tem.

In winter, with the auxiliary heater switched

on, you can defog the windscreen and leave

it free of ice and snow (if it is a thin layer) be-

fore you start driving.

If the outside temperature is very high, the ve-

hicle interior can be ventilated with the en-

gine off using the auxiliary heater.

WARNING

Swallowing a battery with a 20 mm diame-

ter or any other button batt

ery can cause

serious and even fatal injuries within a very

short time.

●

Always keep the remote control, keyrings

with batteries, the spare batteries, button

batteries and all other batteries over 20

mm out of reach of children.

●

If you suspect that someone may have

allowed a battery, seek immediate med-

ical attention.

WARNING

The auxiliary heater exhaust fumes contain

carbon mono

xide, an odourl

ess and colour-

less toxic gas. Carbon monoxide can cause

people to lose consciousness. It can also

cause death.

●

Never switch on the auxiliary heater or

leave it running in enclosed spaces or

areas with no ventilation.

●

Never programme the auxiliary heater so

that it switches itself on and is running in an

enclosed space or an area with no ventila-

tion.

WARNING

The components of the auxiliary heater are

extremely hot and coul

d cause a fire.

●

Always park your vehicle so that no part

of the exhaust system can come in contact

with easily flammable materials that might

be below the vehicle, such as dried grass.

CAUTION

Never place food, medicines or other tem-

peratur

e-sensitive objects close to the air

vents. Food, medicines and other objects

sensitive to heat or cold may be damaged

or made unsuitable for use by the air com-

ing from the vents.

Note

After switching the engine on with a 12-volt

batt

ery that is heavily discharged or ne

wly

changed or after a jump start some system

settings (such as the time, the date, the

personalised comfort settings and the pro-

gramming) might be altered or deleted.

Check and correct these settings once the

battery is sufficiently charged.

Switching on and off the auxiliary

heat

Switching the auxiliary heater on:



Manually with the fast heating button of the

air conditioner controls. The contr

ol lamp of

the button will light up

›››

page 176.



Manually with the remote control

›››

page 183.

Automatically by programming and activat-

ing a departure time

›

››

page 184.

Switching the auxiliary heater off:



Manually with the fast heating button of the

air conditioner controls. The contr

ol lamp of

the button goes off

›››

page 176.

182

Air conditioning

Switching the auxiliary heater off:



Manually with the remote control

›››

page 183.

Automatically once the programmed depar-

ture time has arriv

ed or after the program-

med operating time has elapsed

›››

page 184.

Automatically when the control lamp  (fuel

el indicator)

›››

page 341 lights up.

Automatically when the 12-volt battery

charge is too l

›››

page 354.

Special feature

Once s

wit

ched off

, the auxiliary heater will

continue to operate for a short period of time

in order to burn the fuel remaining in the sys-

tem and also to expel the exhaust fumes.

Remote control

Fig. 187

Independent heating: radiofrequency

emot

e contr

ol key

Fig. 187 Meaning



Switch the auxiliary heater on



Switch the auxiliary heater off

Control lamp

If the buttons of the remote control are press-

ed unnecessarily, it coul

d s

wit

ch on the auxili-

ary heater involuntarily, even when it is out of

range or when the control lamp is flashing.

To switch on and off the independent heating,

the button must be pressed and held for ap-

proximately 1 second.

Control lamp on the remote control

When the buttons are pressed, the control

lamp on the remote control provides the user

with different information:

Control lamp

Meaning

It lights up for approx. 2

seconds in green.

The auxiliary heater has

been s

witched on using

the  button.

It lights up for approx. 2

seconds in red.

The auxiliary heater has

been s

witched off using

the  button.

It flashes for approx. 2

seconds in green (ap-

pro

x. 4 times per sec-

ond).

No on

signal has been

received.

It fl

ashes quickly for ap-

prox. 2 seconds in gr

een

(approx. 10 times per

second).

The independent heat-

ing is blocked.

ossible causes: the fuel

tank is almost empty, the

12-volt battery charge is

very low or there is a

fault.

It flashes for approx. 2

seconds in red (approx. 4

times per second).

No off

signal has been

received.

It lights up for approx.

2 seconds in orange,

then green or red.

The remote control bat-

tery is almost flat. How-

ever, the on or off signal

has been received.

183

Operation

Control lamp

Meaning

It lights up for approx.

2 seconds in orange,

then fl

ashes in green or

red.

The remote control bat-

tery is almost flat. No on

or off signal has been re-

ceived.

Flashes orange for

around 5 seconds.

The remot

e control bat-

tery is flat. No on or off

signal has been r

ceived.

The remote control is out of range. In this case it will

be necessary to get closer t

o the vehicle and press

the corresponding button again.

Replacing the remote control battery

When pressing the buttons, if the control

lamp of the remote

flashes for approx. 5

ange or does not light up

, the batt

eries

must be replaced.

The battery is located beneath a cover on

the back of the remote control.

●

To open the cover, lift it slightly at the bot-

tom and slide it down.

●

Remove the old battery.

●

Insert the new battery. When doing so, take

into account the polarity and use batteries of

the same type

›››

●

Replace the battery cover by inserting the

abs at the t

op and pr

essing the bottom.

Range

The receiver is inside the vehicle. The remote

control, when fitted with new batteries, has a

range of several hundred metres. Obstacles

between the remote control and the vehicle,

bad weather conditions and discharged bat-

teries can considerably reduce the range of

the remote control.

CAUTION

●

The radio frequency r

emote control con-

tains electronic components. Therefore,

avoid getting it wet and exposing it to

knocks or direct sunlight.

●

The use of inappropriate batteries may

damage the radio frequency remote con-

trol. For this reason, always replace the

used battery with another of the same volt-

age, size and specifications.

For the sake of the environment

●

Please dispose of your used batteries

corr

ectly and with respect for the environ-

ment.

●

The remote control battery may contain

perchlorate. Observe the legal provisions

regarding disposal.

●

Care should be taken so as not to oper-

ate the remote control unintentionally so

as to prevent the auxiliary heater being

switched on accidentally.

Programming the auxiliary heater

Before programming it, check that the vehi-

cle's dat

e and time are set correctly

›››

The auxiliary heater is progr

ammed in the

Auxiliary heater menu of the infotainment

system.

Open the Auxiliary heater menu.

●

Press the  button of the Climatronic

control panel.

●

Press the  function button.

Function button: function

Switch off: The auxiliary heater is immediately

witched off.

Heat, Ventilate: Set to heat or ventil

ate the vehi-

cle interior when the auxiliary heater is switched on.

By pressing the function button  , you can select

the desired mode.

Set: Opens the

Auxiliary heater menu.

184

Air conditioning

Function button: function

Departure time 1, Departure time

2, Departure time 3: Three differ

ent de-

parture times (hh.mm) may be programmed. If

the auxiliary heater should only be switched

on a certain day of the week, this can also be

selected.

Duration: The duration determines the oper

ating time of the auxiliary heater when switch-

ed on using the fast heating button  on the

air conditioning controls. The duration is also

used to calculate the departure time for the

manual air conditioner. It can be set between

10 and 60 minutes at 10-minute intervals.



This returns to the main menu.

The programmed departure time determines

the appr

ximat

e time it should take to reach

the temperature set in the vehicle. The start of

the heating operation is determined automat-

ically depending on the outside temperature.

Checking the programming

When a departure time is activated and the

ignition is switched off the control lamp of the

fast heating button  lights up for approxi-

mately 10 seconds.

WARNING

Never programme the auxiliary heater so

that it switches itself on and is running in an

encl

osed space or an area with no ventila-

tion. The auxiliary heater exhaust fumes

contain carbon monoxide, an odourless

and colourless t

oxic gas. Carbon monoxide

can cause people to lose consciousness. It

can also cause death.

Operating instructions

The auxiliary heater exhaust system located

below the v

ehicle must be kept clear of snow,

mud and other objects. The exhaust fumes

must be able to exit freely. The emissions

generated by the auxiliary heater are re-

moved via an exhaust pipe fitted underneath

the vehicle.

On heating the vehicle interior, depending on

the outside temperature, the warm air is first

directed at the windscreen and then to the

rest of the vehicle interior through the air

vents. Directing the diffusers – towards the

windows for example – can affect air distribu-

tion.

When will the auxiliary heater not be acti-

vated?

●

The auxiliary heater requires about as

much power as the dipped beam headlights.

If the 12-v

olt battery charge is too low, the

auxiliary heater switches off automatically

and cannot be switched on. This avoids prob-

lems when starting the engine.

●

The heating must be activated every time

you want to set off. Similarly, the departure

time must reactivate each time.

●

The control lamp  (fuel level indicator)

lights up.

Note

●

Noises will be heard while the auxiliary

heat

er is running.

●

When the air humidity is high and the in-

side temperature low, condensation from

the heating and ventilating system may

evaporate when the auxiliary heater is

switched on. In this case, steam may be re-

leased from underneath the vehicle. This

does not mean that there is a vehicle mal-

function.

●

If the vehicle is tilted, e.g. if parked on a

slope, the operation of the auxiliary heater

may be restricted if the fuel tank level is

low (just above the reserve level).

●

If the auxiliary heater is used a number of

times for a long period of time, the 12-volt

battery will lose its charge. To recharge the

battery, the vehicle must be driven for a

number of kilometres from time to time. As

a guideline: the journey should last approx-

imately as long as the heater was connec-

ted.

●

At temperatures below +5°C (+41°F), the

auxiliary heater may switch itself on auto-

matically when the engine is switched on.

The auxiliary heater is switched off again

after a certain time.

185

Infotainment System

Intr

oduction

Saf

y warnings

Safety instructions related to the

Infotainment system

Travelling on today's roads requires the driv-

er's full attention at all times.

Only oper

ate the infotainment system and its

various functions when the traffic situation

really permits this.

WARNING

●

Before st

arting the trip, you should famili-

arise yourself with the different infotain-

ment system functions.

●

High audio volume may represent a dan-

ger to you and to others.

●

Adjust the volume in a way that you can

distinguish surrounding noise, for example,

horns and sirens, etc.

●

Changes to the Infotainment system set-

tings should be made when the car is stop-

ped, or by a passenger.

WARNING

Distracting the driver in any way can lead

to an accident and cause injuries. Operat

ing the Infotainment system can distract

your attention from the traffic.

●

Always drive carefully and responsibly.

●

Select volume settings that allow you to

easily hear signals from outside the vehicle

at all times (e.g. emergency services sirens

and horns).

●

Hearing may be impaired if using too high

a volume setting, even if only for short peri-

ods of time.

WARNING

The volume level may suddenly change

when you switch audio sour

ce or connect a

new audio source.

●

Lower the base volume before connect-

ing or switching audio sources.

WARNING

The driving recommendations and traffic

indications shown on the navigation system

may diff

er from the current traffic situation.

●

Traffic signs and traffic regulations have

priority over the recommendations and dis-

plays provided by the navigation system.

●

Adjust your vehicle speed and driving

style to suit visibility, weather, road and

traffic conditions.

WARNING

Connecting, inserting or removing a data

medium while driving can distract your at

tention from the traffic and cause an acci-

dent.

WARNING

Connecting leads for external devices may

obstruct the driver.

●

Arr

ange the connecting leads so that

they do not obstruct the driver.

WARNING

External devices that are loose or not prop-

erly secured could mo

ve around the pas-

senger compartment during a sudden driv-

ing or braking manoeuvre or an accident

and cause damage or injury.

●

Never place or fit external devices to the

doors, windscreen, steering wheel, dash

panel, the backs of the seats, on top of or

near the area marked “AIRBAG” or between

these areas and the occupants. External

devices can cause serious injury in an acci-

dent, especially when the airbags inflate.

WARNING

The armrest may obstruct the driver's arm

movements, which coul

d cause an acci-

dent and severe injuries.

186

Introduction

●

Always k

eep the armrest closed while the

vehicle is in motion.

WARNING

Opening a CD or DVD player's housing can

ead to injuries fr

om invisible laser radia-

tion.

●

Have CD or DVD players repaired only by

a qualified workshop.

CAUTION

The Infotainment system can be damaged

by the incorr

ect inser

tion of a dat

a storage

device or the insertion of an incompatible

data storage device.

●

When inserting a data storage device,

make sure it is correctly positioned.

●

Applying force may irreparably damage

the memory card slot locking mechanism.

●

Only use compatible memory cards.

●

When inserting and removing CDs and

DVDs, always hold them at right angles to

the front of the CD/DVD drive without tilt-

ing so as not to scratch them.

●

If a CD or DVD is inserted while another is

already in the unit or being ejected, the

DVD drive may be irreparably damaged.

Always wait until the data medium is com-

pletely ejected.

CAUTION

Any foreign objects stuck to a data storage

device and non-round media may damage

the CD or D

VD player.

●

Only clean, standard 12 cm CDs or DVDs

should be used.

–

Do not affix stickers or other items to

the data medium. Stickers may peel off

and damage the drive.

–

Do not use printable data media. Prin-

ted labels and coverings may peel off

and damage the CD/DVD drive.

–

Do not insert 8 cm single CDs or irregu-

larly shaped CDs or DVDs.

–

Do not insert DVD-Plus discs, Dual

Discs or Flip Discs, as these are thicker

than normal CDs.

CAUTION

The vehicle loudspeakers may be dam-

aged if the volume is too high or the sound

is dist

orted.

Note

For the proper functioning of the Infotain-

ment system it is import

ant that the date

and time set in the vehicle are correct.

187

Infotainment System

Overview of the unit

Media Syst

em T

ouch / Media Syst

em Colour

Fig. 188

Overview of the controls (this configura-

tion depends on the v

ersion).

Radio Mode (change of band frequency

›

page 205

Touchscreen

›››

page 191

Vehicle settings

›››



page 35,

›››

page 229

Media mode (audio sources)

›››

page 207

Phone Mode

›

page 230

Full Link

›››

page 195

Selecting the main menu

›››

page 190

Volume. Off/on

›››

page 190

Slot for memory cards

›››

page 210

Settings button (search and selection)

›››

page 190

188

Introduction

Media System Plus / Navi System / Navi System Plus

Fig. 189 Overview of the controls

Radio Mode (change of band frequency

›

page 205

Touchscreen

›››

page 191

Navigation Mode

›››

page 216

Media mode (audio sources)

›››

page 207

Phone Mode

›››

page 230

Voice control

Full Link

›››

page 195

Vehicle settings

›



page 35,

›››

page 229

Selecting the main menu

›››

page 190

Volume. Off/on

›››

page 190

Proximity sensor

›››

page 193

Settings button (search and selection)

›››

page 190

General instructions for use

Intr

oduction

Fig. 190 Related video

189

Infotainment System

If the setup is changed, this may change the

displ

ay on the scr

een and in some cases, the

Inf

otainment system may behave in a manner

different to that described in this manual.

Note

●

Lightly pressing the buttons or briefly

essing the touchscreen is sufficient to

operate the Infotainment system.

●

Not all listed function buttons and func-

tions described may be available due to

the device software used in your market.

The equipment is not faulty if a function

button is missing from the screen.

●

Due to country-specific legislation, cer-

tain functions may not be available on the

screen when the vehicle is travelling above

a certain speed.

●

Using a mobile telephone in the vehicle

may cause noise from the vehicle loud-

speakers.

●

Restrictions on the use of devices using

Bluetooth

technology may apply in some

countries. For further information, contact

the local authorities.

●

On some vehicles with ParkPilot, the vol-

ume of the audio source is automatically

lowered when reverse gear is selected. The

volume can be lowered in the menu Sound

> Volume.

Diagram of the menus

The Infotainment system touchscreen can be

used to select the diff

erent main menus.

Press the Infotainment button 

to open

the menus summary.

The display of the touchscr

een's main menu

can be switched between “grid” and “carou-

sel” via the Settings/System > Display

menu.

Infotainment rotary/push knobs

Rotary/push knobs

The l

eft

-hand r

otary knob  is the volume

control or the on/off button.

The right-hand rotary knob is the setup but-

ton.

Infotainment buttons

The buttons on the unit are shown in this

manual with the word “infotainment button”

and their function within a rectangle, for ex-

ample, the infotainment button 

The Inf

ainment butt

ons are used by press-

ing them or pressing and holding.

Switching on and off

To manually switch the Infotainment system

on and off, briefly pr

ess the left rotary knob .

When switching on, the system starts-up with

the last set volume, provided that this does

not exceed the preset maximum start-up vol-

ume. Select Sound > Volume.

The unit will switch off automatically when

the key is removed from the ignition or when

the on/off button is pressed (depending on

the equipment fitted or the vehicle). If the In-

fotainment system is switched on again, it will

switch off automatically after approximately

30 minutes (switch-off delay).

Note

●

The Infotainment syst

em is a part of the

vehicle. It cannot be used in any other vehi-

cle.

●

If the battery has been disconnected, the

ignition must be activated before switching

on the Infotainment system.

Changing the basic volume

Increasing or decreasing the volume or

muting the sound

aise the v

olume

: turn the volume control 

clockwise or move the left thumbwheel on

the multifunction steering wheel upward .

190

Introduction

Lower the volume: t

urn the v

olume contr

ol 

clockwise or move the left thumbwheel on

the multifunction steering wheel downward

.

Changes in volume are indicated by a vol-

ume bar on the screen. The volume can be

controlled using the steering wheel controls.

In this case, the changes in volume are dis-

played on the instrument panel by a volume

bar.

It is possible to preset certain volume settings

and adjustments. Select Sound > Volume

Muting the Infotainment system sound

●

Turn the volume control  anti-clockwise

until it displays .

Muting the Infotainment system sound stops

the media source that is playing The screen

displays .

Note

If the base volume has been considerably

increased to pl

ay a certain audio source,

lower the volume again before switching to

another audio source.

Handling the function buttons and

displ

ay instructions

Fig. 191

View of some of the function buttons

on the scr

een.

Fig. 192

Sound setup menu

The Infotainment system comes equipped

with a t

ouchscr

een.

Activ

e areas of the screen that call up a cer-

tain function are called “function buttons”.

These buttons are operated by briefly press-

ing the screen or by pressing and holding.

The function buttons appear in the instruc-

tions with the label “function button” and a

button symbol inside a rectangle

Function butt

ons st

art functions or open sub-

menus. The curr

ently selected menu is dis-

played in the title bar

›››

Fig. 191

of the

submenus.

Inactiv

e (gr

ey) function butt

ons cannot be se-

lected.

Increase or decrease the size of the im-

ages displayed on the screen

The size of the navigation map image

›››

page 216 and, for example, photos when

viewing images

›››

page 207 can be en-

larged or reduced. To do so, enlarge or re-

duce the image displayed by moving two fin-

gers.

Overview of screen and function buttons

Display and function buttons: operation

and effect

The title bar shows the selected menu

and, where applicable

, other function

buttons.

Press it to open another menu.

191

Infotainment System

Display and function buttons: operation

and effect

The scroll bar is shown on the right and its

size depends on the entries in the list.

Mov

e the bar on the screen by pressing

lightly and without lifting the finger, see

›››

page 192, Opening list entries and

searching in lists.

Movable cursor: Move the cursor around

the screen by pressing lightly and without

lifting the finger.

OR: To move the cursor to a particular po-

sition, press that spot on the scr

een.

Fixed crosshair: Press the up, do

wn, left

and right arrows to move the sound ac-

cording to preference. The cursor

will

move

OR: Press the central button to centre the

ster

eo sound in the centre of the passen-

ger compartment



Press it on some lists to move up a level,

one by one.

BACK



Press to return from the submenus one at

a time t

o the main menu or to undo the

entries made.



When pressed, a pop-up window opens

(options window) which displays other

setup options.

Display and function buttons: operation

and effect

 / 

Some functions or messages are accom-

panied by a check box and are activ

ated

 or deactivated  by pressing said

check box.

OK Press to confirm an entry or a selection.

Press to close a pop-up window or an in-

put windo





ess them to change the setup adjust-

ments one at a time.



Mov

e the slider around the screen by

essing it lightly and without lifting your

finger

Opening list entries and searching

in lists

Fig. 193 Entries on a setup menu list.

The entries on a list can be activated by

essing them on the scr

een dir

ectly or by us-

ing the adjustment button.

Mark list entries using the setup button

and open them

●

Turn the setup button to mark the entries on

the list with a rectangle one by one and con-

tinue searching the list in this manner.

●

Press the setup button to activate the

marked entry on the list.

Search lists (scrolling the screen)

The scroll bar is shown on the right and its

size depends on the entries in the list

›››

Fig. 193

●

Briefly press the scr

een abo

e or below the

scroll marker.

●

OR: Place a finger over the scroll marker

and without lifting it, move it around the

screen. Lift your finger off the screen when

you reach the desired position.

●

OR: Place your finger in the centre of the

screen and without lifting it, move it around

the screen. Lift your finger off the screen

when you reach the desired position.

192

Introduction

Input masks with on-screen keypad

Fig. 194

Input window with on-screen keypad.

Input windows with on-screen keypad are

used f

or functions such as ent

ering an entry

name

, selecting a destination address or en-

tering a search term for searching long lists.

The function buttons listed below are not

available in all countries or for all topics.

Subsequent chapters only explain those

functions that differ from those in the screen

shown in the figure.

The input line with cursor is located in the top

bar of the screen. All inputs are displayed

here.

Input windows for “free text input”

In the input masks for open text, you may en-

ter letters, numbers and special characters in

any combination.

Input windows for selecting a saved entry

(e.g. selection of a destination address)

It is only possible to select a sequence of let-

ters, numbers and special characters that

matches a stored entry.

Suggestions for matching destinations ap-

pear depending on the characters entered in

the input line

›››

Fig. 194

. In the case of

compound names, it is necessary t

o ent

er a

space

If there are fewer than 99 selectable entries,

the number of remaining entries is displayed

after the input line

. Pressing this function

butt

on displ

ays these r

emaining entries in a

list.

Overview of the function buttons

Function icon and text: operation and ef-

fect

Lett

ers and

digits

Press them to copy them into the input

line.

Press to change the keypad to anoth-

er language. Keypad languages can

be selected from the menu System

settings > Language.

Press to show symbols on the keypad.

Displays the number and opens the

list of remaining select

able entries

that match the entered text.

Function icon and text: operation and ef-

fect

Scroll bar, the size of which depends

on the number of matching entries.

Hold and press to display a pop-up

window with the special characters

based on said letter. Press the desired

character to enter it. Some special

characters can be written out instead

(e.g. “AE” for “Ä”).



Press to enter a space.



Press to delete characters in the input

line from right to l

eft.

Press and hold to delete several char-

acters.

BACK  Press to close the input window.

Proximity sensors

3 Valid for: Navi System and Navi System Plus.

The Inf

otainment system is equipped with an

integrated proximity sensor

›››

Fig. 189

The image on the scr

een changes fr

om dis-

ay mode to automatic operation when your

hand moves toward it. In operation mode, the

function buttons are automatically highligh-

ted to facilitate their use.

193

Infotainment System

Additional information and display

options

The displays appearing on the screen may

vary depending on the settings, and may dif-

er from those described here.

The status bar on the screen can display, for

example, the current time and outside tem-

perature.

All displays can be viewed only after com-

pletely restarting the Infotainment system.

Initial configuration wizard

Fig. 195

Initial configuration wizard

The initial configuration wizard will help you

o set up your Inf

ainment system the first

time you switch it on.

Every time you switch on the Infotainment

system, the initial setup screen will appear

›››

Fig. 195 if any parameters have not been

set or if the NEVER function button has not

been pressed.

Function button: function

Closes the Configuration Wizard, and

the main menu or last mode in which

you used the Infot

ainment system will

appear. The next time you switch on

the system, the Configuration Wizard

will start up again.

NEVER

Disables the possibility of changing

the settings of the Infotainment sys-

em. If you want to perform the initial

system setup, you must enter via Sys-

tem setup and select Configura-

tion Wizard.

START Starts up the Configuration Wizard.

Press to configure the time and date (if

it has a navigation system it will be

configured aut

omatically with the

GPS).

Press to search and store to memory

the radio stations that hav

e the best

reception at that moment on all avail-

able bands (AM, FM and DAB).

Press to link your mobile telephone to

the Infotainment syst

em.

Press to select your home address us-

ing your current position or by man-

ually entering an addr

ess.

Function button: function

To go to the previous or next parameter

to set.

When a paramet

er has been set, the

only way to reset it is from the main

menu, clicking on it, and not using the

Previous/Next buttons.

When setting any parameter, a confir-

mation mark will appear on it .

FINISH

Once one or more settings have been

applied, click on this in the main menu

of the wizard t

o confirm and finalize

the settings.

If there are any parameters you have

not set, the next time you connect the

Infotainment system, the Initial Config-

uration Wizard will start up.

Only valid for Navi System and Navi System Plus.

194

Connectivity

Dat

a tr

ansf

This communication can allow data to be

read and/or written.

om the SETTINGS menu > Data transfer for

SEAT apps, there is a checkbox to acti-

vate/deactivate the function and a dropdown

menu called Operation via apps which con-

trols the level of interaction between the apps

and the system.

Full Link*

Full Link technology description

Fig. 196 Related video

The Full Link system provides a way of bring-

ing t

ogether t

echnol

ogies that allow commu-

nication between the Infotainment System

and mobile devices:

●

MirrorLink

●

Android Auto™

●

Apple CarPlay™

Interfaces

To access the Full Link system, press the Info-

tainment button 

(Full Link) or press the in-

ainment butt

on 

and then select the

Full Link cont

xt.

The connection t

o Full Link is made through a

USB interface.

WARNING

If a mobile terminal is not secured or is in-

correctly secured in the v

ehicle, it could

move around the passenger compartment

in the event of a sudden driving manoeuvre,

emergency stop or accident, resulting in in-

jury.

●

While driving, mobile terminals must be

securely fastened in position, outside the

airbag deployment zones, or safely stowed

away.

WARNING

Any applications that are not suitable or

execut

e incorrectly may cause damage to

the vehicle, accidents and serious injuries.

●

SEAT recommends the use of the Apps

that SEAT provides for this vehicle.

●

To make full use of SEAT Apps, you must

activate the option , Settings/System >

Data transfer for SEAT apps.

●

The interaction l

evel of the Apps on the

system must be: ALLOW.

●

Protect the mobile terminal with its appli-

cations from improper use.

●

Never make modifications to the applica-

tions.

●

Consult the instruction manual for the

mobile terminal.

WARNING

The use of applications while driving can

distr

act your attention fr

om the traffic. Dis-

tracting the driver in any way can lead to

an accident and cause injuries.

●

Always drive carefully and responsibly.

CAUTION

●

In areas where special r

egulations apply

or the use of mobile terminals is forbidden,

the mobile terminal must be switched off at

all times. The radiation produced by the

mobile terminal when switched on may in-

terfere with sensitive technical and medi-

cal equipment, possibly resulting in mal-

function or damage to the equipment.

●

SEAT cannot be held liable for any dam-

age caused to the vehicle as a result of the

use of applications that are of poor quality

or are defective, the inadequate program-

ming of the applications, the insufficient

coverage of the network, the loss of data

195

Infotainment System

during transmission or the improper use of

mobile terminal

Note

●

Use of Full Link t

echnology may r

esult in

high consumption of your 3G/4G data plan.

●

SEAT recommends having a high battery

charge on the device when connected to

Full Link.

●

SEAT recommends that to use Full Link,

the “Date and time” should be correctly

configured. Select Settings/System >

Date and Time.

●

SEAT applications are designed to com-

municate with the vehicle and interact with

it via the Full Link connection, therefore its

functionality is linked to the mobile device

being connected via USB.

●

You can find further information on the

technical requirements, compatible devi-

ces, suitable applications and availability

at www.seat.com or at SEAT dealers.

Is Full Link blocked?

Fig. 197

Message on Infotainment system

scr

een.

To unblock this feature, you must obtain the

accessory fr

om your SEAT deal

. Otherwise,

a message like this will appear on the screen

whenever you select the feature

›››

Fig. 197.

Requirements for Full Link

Fig. 198 Full Link Requirements

Full Link Activated: If you do not hav

Full Link in your v

ehicl

e you can acquire it

as an accessory at your Authorised Serv-

ice.

Compatible Phones. Go to the Mirror-

Link

, Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay™

196

Connectivity

websites to confirm whether your phone

is compatibl

e with the syst

em.

Mirr

or Link

–

Check smartphone compatibility:

www.mirrorlink.com/phones

–

MirrorLink

1.1 or higher

–

Some of the Apps certified by SEAT or

the CCC must be installed in the de-

vice.

Android Auto

–

Check smartphone compatibility. An-

droid Auto™: www.android.com/auto/

–

Android 5.0 (Lollipop) or higher

–

Install Android Auto™ app

Apple CarPlay

–

Check smartphone compatibility. Apple

CarPlay™:www.apple.com/ios/carplay

–

iPhone 5 or higher and iOS 7.1 or higher

–

Turn on the SIRI personal assistant (see

phone settings)

USB cable connecting car to phone:

use the USB cable approved and sup-

plied by the phone's official distributor.

Activation of Full Link

Fig. 199

Full Link Setup

Fig. 200

Full Link menu

Data connection via Wi-Fi or SIM is not

necessary t

o est

ablish the connection be-

een the smartphone and Full Link.

Data connection via Wi-Fi or SIM is neces-

sary to enable all of the app features

Proceed as follows to use Full Link:

●

Switch on the Infotainment system

●

Connect the smartphone to the vehicle's

USB port using a USB cable

›››

page 237.

●

In the main menu for the Full Link setup, se-

lect Activate data transfer for SEAT

apps

›››

Fig. 199:

Finally, a message will appear stating that

data transfer will commence when the device

is connected. Please note that data is trans-

ferred over connections between your vehi-

cle and mobile device. Press OK. Once selec-

ted, the technology compatible with your de-

vice can be used.

Note

Depending on your smartphone, it may

have to be unl

ocked for the connection to

occur.

Using the data connection to transfer the

smartphone apps to Full Link may invol

ve addi-

tional charges. Please check the charges with

your operator.

197

Infotainment System

What should I do if it does not con-

nect?

Restart the mobile device

Check the USB cable visually.

Make sure that the USB cable is not damaged. Check

that both connections (USB/micro USB) are not dam-

aged or worn.

Visually check

that the USB ports

are pr

operly con-

nected.

Check that the ve-

hicle and device

USB connections

are not damaged

and/or worn.

Clean the USB ports (device

and vehicle).

ry another compatible mo-

bile device

Have the USB port replaced at

a SEAT Authorised Service.

Have the mobil

e device re-

paired or repl

ace it.

Try another compatible mobile device.

Pairing of portable devices sup-

por

ting the Mirr

orLink

, Andr

oid

Auto™ and/or Apple CarPlay™

technologies

Fig. 201

Full Link menu

Carousel

When you ent

er the Full Link cont

xt for the

first time, the technologies available for pair-

ing the portable device are displayed.

Once the device connects via USB, the sys-

tem will offer you the technologies available

for establishing a connection with your mo-

bile phone.

In the event of simultaneous connections be-

tween two devices with different operating

systems, a choice will be presented for which

one to make the connection with

›››

Fig. 201.

View of the device list

iPhone™ devices only support Apple Car-

Play™.

There are some Android devices that support

MirrorLink

and Android Auto™.

Bear in mind that once the device is connec-

ted it will not be available as an audio source.

Full Link setup

Function button: function

 Activating data transfers for SEAT applications : allows

the exchange of inf

ormation between the vehicle and

applications authorised by SEAT.

Last Mode

If a session using one t

echnol

ogy ends with-

out the disconnection being made fr

om the

Infotainment system (simply by disconnect-

ing the cable) then when the device is next

connected to it, the session will start without

the user being required to take any action

Information

Consult the mobile device manual.

Unless the device requires the screen to be un-

locked in or

der to establish the connection.

198

Connectivity

Depends on each technology:

ail

abilit

y in a country

Third party applications

For further information:

MirrorLink

www.mirrorlink

.com

Apple CarPlay™:

www.apple

.com/ios/carplay

Android Auto™:

www.android.com/aut

Note

●

In order to use Andr

oid Auto™ technology

it is necessary to download the Android

Auto™ application, located on Google

Play™.

●

Only compatible applications can be

used, in accordance with the technology

connected.

MirrorLink

Fig. 202

Function buttons in the general view

of compatibl

e applications.

Fig. 203 Other MirrorLink function buttons.

MirrorLink

is a pr

ocol which enabl

es com-

munication between a portable device and

the Infotainment system via USB.

Using it makes it possible to display and man-

age the content and functions displayed on

the portable device on the Infotainment sys-

tem screen.

To avoid distracting the driver while driving,

only specially adapted applications can be

used

›››

in Full Link technology descrip-

tion on page 195.

equir

ements

In or

der to use MirrorLink

, the following re-

quirements must be met:

●

The mobile device must be compatible with

MirrorLink

●

The mobile device must be connected to

the Infotainment system via USB.

●

Depending on the mobile device used, a

suitable application must be installed for the

use of MirrorLink

on the device.

Initiating the connection

●

In order to initiate the connection with the

mobile device, it is simply necessary to con-

nect it to the Infotainment system via the USB

connection.

●

A pop-up screen will appear, which will re-

quest that you accept the device.

Function buttons and possible messages

Function button: function

Full Link

To return to the Full Link main

menu.

199

Infotainment System

Function button: function

CLOSE APPS

Press to close the open apps.

Then press the apps to be

osed or the Close all

function

button to close all the open ap-

plications.

1 : 1

Press to change to the mobile

device screen.

SETTINGS To open the Full Link setup

›››

Fig. 203

Press to return to the MirrorLink

main menu.

›››

Fig. 203

Press to display all the function

buttons in the lo

wer or upper

right-hand margin of the screen.

›››

Fig. 203  / 

Allows buttons

and

to be

hidden or shown.

››

›

Fig. 189

MirrorLink

set

Function button: function

 Activate MirrorLink pop-up windows: Allows Mirror-

Link

pop-up windows in applications that support it.

Apple CarPlay™*

3 Valid for compatible iPhone™ mobile tele-

phones. Also

, iPhone™ mobile telephones only

support Apple CarPlay™

Apple CarPlay™ is a protocol which enables

communication between a mobile telephone

and the Infotainment system via USB.

This makes it possible to display and operate

the mobile telephone on the Infotainment

system screen.

Requirements

In order to use Apple CarPlay™, the following

requirements must be met:

●

Make sure that you do not have Apple

CarPlay™ restrict

ed on your device, at: Set-

tings > General > Restrictions >

CarPlay > ON.

●

The mobile device must be compatible with

Apple CarPlay™.

●

The mobile device must be connected to

the Infotainment system via USB.

Initiating the connection

In order to initiate the connection with the

mobile device, it is simply necessary to con-

nect it to the Infotainment system via the USB

connection.

●

A pop-up screen will appear, which will re-

quest that you accept the device.

●

If you start the session using Apple

CarPlay™ technology, it will not be possible

to pair another device via Bluetooth

. The fol-

lowing message will appear in the main

Phone menu:

Please disconnect Apple CarPlay

first, before you can connect an-

other mobile telephone.

Holding down the steering wheel multifunc-

tion  button or the 

button of the Info-

ainment syst

em will st

art the Apple™ “voice

engine”.

To return to the basic contents of the Infotain-

ment system, press the SEAT icon.

Android Auto™*

3 Valid for compatible Android mobile phones.

Andr

oid Auto™ is a protocol which enables

communication between a portable device

and the Infotainment system via USB.

This makes it possible to display and operate

the mobile telephone on the Infotainment

system screen.

Requirements

In order to use Android Auto™, the following

requirements must be met:

200

Connectivity

●

The mobil

e de

vice must be compatibl

e with

Android Auto™.

●

The mobile device must be connected to

the Infotainment system via USB.

●

The Android Auto™ application should al-

ready be downloaded and installed on the

mobile device.

Initiating the connection

In order to initiate the connection with the

mobile device, it is simply necessary to con-

nect it to the Infotainment system via the USB

connection, and to be sure to follow the in-

structions of the device being paired.

●

The first connection to Android Auto™ must

be done while the vehicle is stationary.

●

Once the first pop-up window about ac-

cepting data transfer between the car and

the device has been accepted, a message

will appear requesting that you check your

mobile device for the confirmations needed

to pair it with the Infotainment system.

●

If you are initiating the session using

Android Auto™ technology via USB, the mo-

bile telephone connects automatically via

Bluetooth

to the Infotainment system tele-

phone and it will not be possible to pair an-

other mobile telephone via Bluetooth

Holding down the steering wheel multifunc-

tion  button or the 

button of the Info-

tainment system will start the Android™

“v

oice engine”.

o r

eturn to the basic contents of the Infotain-

ment system, press the Return to SEAT

button.

Note

Some mobile devices require a change in

the USB connection mode in order to use

Andr

oid Auto™.

●

Make sure that your mobile is in “Media

Transfer Protocol (MTP)” mode before it is

connected by USB to the Infotainment sys-

tem.

Note

Android Auto™ requires the use of Google™

services, as well as cert

ain basic applica-

tions of the Android system.

●

Make sure that you always have Google™

services updated in order to use this tech-

nology.

Frequently asked questions about

Full Link

What is the connection method?

USB Cable.

Will the USB cable be supplied with the vehicle?

No. The USB cable supplied with the de

vice should

be used.

Is there a navigation option?

Navigation is possible in each one of the Full Link

technol

ogies if the technology is available in your

country and if you have the Navigation app.

What is the difference between using the Full Link

system navigator (via t

elephone) instead of an-

other navigator?

Benefits: Daily updates.

Issues: data consumption, reception problems.

Can I send voice messages?

With certified apps, you can answer but not send

oice messages.

What apps are visible while driving?

Depending on the technology:

– for MirrorLink

: SEAT-certified apps and CCC,

– for Android Auto™: Apps selected by Google™,

– for Apple CarPlay™: Apps selected by Apple™.

Where can I find compatible apps?

Compatible apps can be found on the following links:

www.mirrorlink.com/

www.android.com/auto/

www.apple.com/ios/carplay/

201

Infotainment System

Where can I download apps?

On Google Play™ f

or Android Auto™/MirrorLink

and

on Apple Store™ for Apple CarPlay™.

If Full Link stops working, where can I have it re-

paired?

If the probl

em is in the car, you should go to the deal-

er. If the problem is in the mobile device, you should

see your mobile telephone vendor.

Will WhatsApp be certified?

This depends on the technology.

Is Mirr

orLink

availabl

e in my country?

Yes, MirrorLink

is available in all the countries and

regions where SEAT operates.

What are the differences between MirrorLink

Android Auto™ and Apple CarPlay™?

MirrorLink

is not compatible with Android Auto™ and

Apple CarPlay™, as they are different technologies.

They all coexist in Full Link, although Android Auto™ is

designed for mobile devices with the Android™ oper-

ating system, and Apple CarPlay™ for iPhone.

Can MirrorLink

be installed in a pr

evious SEAT

model?

No, this is not possible.

Where can I find more information about Full

Link?

If you have any questions, please see our

Innova-

tion/Connectivity sections on our website:

www.seat.es or www.seat.com or e-mail seat-re-

[email protected]

SEAT Media Control*

Introduction

3 Not availabl

e for model: Media System Touch /

Colour

Fig. 204 Related video

The SEAT Media Contr

app can be used

o r

emotely operate some partial functions in

Radio mode, Media mode and Navigation

mode. Information can be exchanged be-

tween a device and the Infotainment System.

Each one of the functions is operated by

means of a Tablet or partially by means of a

mobile phone.

Operating requirements:

●

A tablet or mobile phone.

●

The app must be available on the corre-

sponding device.

●

There must be a WLAN connection between

the Infotainment System and the device. Se-

lect Menu > Media > Settings > WLAN >

Share connection via WLAN > Configu-

ration.

Make sure that data transfer for apps is acti-

vated:

●

From the SETTINGS menu > Data trans-

fer for SEAT apps, there is a checkbox to

activate/deactivate the function and a drop-

down menu called Operation via apps

which controls the level of interaction be-

tween the apps and the system. Select Menu

> Settings/System > Transfer data

from mobile devices.

You can obtain information about technical

requirements on the SEAT website or at SEAT

dealerships.

Telephone functions are not part of the func-

tions of this app.

Availability depends on the country.

202

Connectivity

Data transmission and control

functions

Fig. 205

SEAT Media Control Main menu

The Infotainment System can be operated

om other seats in the v

ehicl

e as follows, with

the help of SEAT Media Control:

●

Radio remote control.

●

Multimedia playback remote control.

The following information can be exchanged

between a device and the Infotainment Sys-

tem, depending on the country and the

equipment:

●

Navigation destinations.

●

Traffic information.

●

Social media contents.

●

Audio transmission.

●

Vehicle data.

●

Location-specific information, for example,

POIs.

WLAN access point*

Introduction

3 Not available for model: Media System Touch /

Colour

The Inf

otainment System can be used to

share a WLAN connection with up to 8 devi-

ces

›››

page 203, Setting up WLAN connec-

tion sharing.

The Infotainment System can also use the

WLAN hotspot of an external wireless device

to provide Internet to the devices connected

to the hotspot (WLAN client)

›››

page 204,

Setting up Internet access.

Note

●

Data transmission may incur char

ges.

Due to the high volume of data exchanged,

SEAT recommends the use of a flat rate

mobile phone deal for data transmission.

Mobile phone operators can provide the

relevant information.

●

The exchange of data packages over the

internet may generate additional costs, de-

pending on your mobile phone rate, partic-

ularly if you are abroad (for example,

roaming rates).

Setting up WLAN connection shar-

ing

The Infotainment System can be used to

share a WLAN connection with 8 wirel

ess de-

vices.

Establishing the connection with the wire-

less network (WLAN)

●

Press the Infotainment 

button and

then press the Settings / System menu.

●

Activate the wireless network (WLAN) on the

Inf

ainment Syst

em. To do so, press the

WLAN function button.

●

Activate the wireless network (WLAN) on the

wireless device that is to be connected. If

necessary, refer to the manufacturer’s in-

struction manual.

●

Activate the mobile device assignment on

the Infotainment System. To do so, press the

Enable WLAN connection

button and activate

the checkbo

●

Ent

er and confirm the netw

ork key dis-

played on the wireless device.

The following settings can also be made on

the menu Share connection:

WPA2 encryption automatical-

ly generates a network key.

Network key automatically gen-

erated. Press the function button to

Security level:

Network key:

203

Infotainment System

manually change the network key. The

netw

ork k

ey must hav

e a minimum of 8

characters and a maximum of 63.

WLAN Network name (maximum of 32

characters).

Activate

the checkbox to deactivate the visibility

of the wireless (WLAN) network.

The wireless (WLAN) connection is establish-

ed. To complete the connection, it may be

necessary to enter other data into the wire-

less device.

Repeat this process to connect other wireless

devices.

Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS)

Wi-Fi Protected Setup can be used t

o cr

eat

a ciphered local wireless network quickly and

simply.

●

Establish the connection with the wireless

network (WLAN)

›››

page 214.

SSID:

Do not send network name (SSID):

●

Press the WPS button on the WLAN router

until the warning light on the router starts

flashing.

●

OR: Press and hold the WLAN button on the

WLAN router until the WLAN light on the router

starts flashing.

●

Press the WPS button on the WLAN device.

The wireless (WLAN) connection is establish-

ed.

Repeat this process to connect other wireless

devices.

Setting up Internet access

The Infotainment System can use the WLAN

hotspot of an e

ernal wir

eless device to es-

tablish an internet connection.

Establishing the connection with the wire-

less network (WLAN)

●

Activate and check the wireless hotspot on

the external device. If necessary, refer to the

manufacturer’s instruction manual.

●

Press the Infotainment 

button and

then pr

ess the Settings

/ Syst

menu; OR

access the Media or SEAT Media Contr

mode and press the SETTINGS menu.

●

Press the WLAN menu and then ent

Int

er-

net access settings on your phone and acti-

vate the checkbox.

●

Press the Find function button and select

the wireless device you want from the list.

●

If necessary, enter the network key of the

wireless device in the Infotainment System

and confirm with OK.

To manually enter the net-

work settings of an external wireless

(WLAN) device.

The wireless (WLAN) connection is establish-

ed. To complete the connection, it may be

necessary to enter other data into the wire-

less device.

Note

Due to the large number of different wire-

less devices in e

xistence, it is not possible

to guarantee fault-free operation of all

functions.

Manual settings:

This function depends on the equipment and

the country in question.

If the WLAN router does not support WPS the

network must be configured manually.

204

Operating modes

adio

ated video

Fig. 206 Radio mode

RADIO main menu

Fig. 207 RADIO main menu.

Fig. 208 Radio mode: station list (FM).

Press the infotainment button 



to open

the R

adio

main menu

›

››

Fig. 207.

RADIO main menu function buttons

Function button: function

To change the group of memory but-

tons slide a finger ov

er the memory

buttons from left to right or vice-versa

BAND

Allows you to select the frequency

band.

STATION

LIST

Opens the list of currently r

eceivable

radio from the active frequency band.

MANUAL

Allows you to select the frequency

manually.

VIEW

Allows you to select the information

shown on the screen. Only av

ailable in

DAB mode.

SETTINGS

Opens the setup menu of the active

frequency band (FM, AM or DAB).

Function button: function





Selects the previous or next stored sta-

tion or of the station list. This setting

can be changed in the Radio settings

menu (FM, AM, D

AB).

1 to 18

Memory buttons

›

››

page 206.

SCAN

Stops the scan function (only visible

when the function is under way). It can

be activat

ed in the settings menu (FM,

AM and DAB).

The Media System / Touch Colour model has 15

memories.

Inf

ormation and possibl

e icons

Display: Meaning

View the frequency or the name of the

station and, where applicabl

e, the radio

text. The name of the radio station and

the radio text will only be displayed if

equipped with RDS and if it is active.

RDS

Off

The RDS radio data service is deactiva-

ted.

affic information can be retrieved: se-

lect Radio > Settings > Traffic

station.



No st

ations with traffic news are availa-



The r

adio station is stored on a memory

button.

205

Infotainment System

Display: Meaning

AF off

The tracking of alternative frequencies is

disabl

ed.

Note

●

The availabilit

y of AM and DAB bands de-

pends on the country and/or equipment. In

the event that the AM and DAB bands are

not available, the BAND function button

text will not be shown.

●

Bear in mind that being underground, in

tunnels, in areas with tall buildings or

mountains can interfere with radio signals.

●

Foil or metal-coated stickers attached to

the windows may affect reception on vehi-

cles with a window aerial.

●

Radio stations are responsible for the

content of the information they transmit.

Memory buttons

Fig. 209

RADIO main menu.

In the R

adio main menu, you can store sta-

tions fr

om all av

ailable frequency wave-

lengths on the numbered function buttons.

These function buttons are called “memory

buttons”.

Functions of the memory buttons

Selecting the

ation fr

the memory

butt

ons

Press the memory button corre-

sponding t

o the desir

ed st

ation.

The stored stations can only be

played by pressing the corre-

sponding memory button provided

it can be received at your current

location.

Functions of the memory buttons

Change mem-

ory bank

Move your finger over the screen

from left t

o right or vice-versa.

OR: Press one of the function but-

tons

›

››

Fig. 209

The memory buttons are displayed

in three memory banks.

Storing the

station on the

memory but-

ons

Keep and hold the desired memory

button until an audible signal is

heard, the station will be stored on

this memory button. You can also

store a station from a station list.

Storing the

station logo on

the memory

butt

ons

A station logo can be assigned to

the stations stor

ed on the memory

buttons.

A logo is automatically assigned

from the database if the Advanced

radio settings option is enabled

A logo can also be assigned man-

ually from an external data source

(USB/SD card).

Not available for the Media System Touch/Colour

model.

206

Operating modes

Media

Intr

oduction

Fig. 210 Related video

“Media sour

ces

” ar

e audio sources contain-

ing audio files on various different data stor-

age devices (e.g. CD, memory card, external

MP3 player). These audio files can be played

by the Infotainment system via their corre-

sponding drives or audio input sockets (inter-

nal CD drive, memory card slot, AUX-IN multi-

media socket etc.).

Audio and video files on data storage devices

are usually protected by intellectual property

rights, as per the corresponding national and

international laws. Be aware of the current le-

gal provisions!

Note

●

Do not use memory card adapters.

●

SEAT assumes no liabilit

y for any deterio-

ration or loss of files on data storage devi-

ces.

MEDIA main menu

Fig. 211

MEDIA main menu.

Using the Media main menu, diff

ent media

sour

ces can be selected and played.

●

Press the infotainment button 

to open

the R

adio

main menu

›

››

Fig. 211.

It will continue playing the last media source

selected from the same point.

The media source being played is indicated

on the dropdown list when pressing the

SOURCE

function button

›

Fig. 211.

If there is no available media source, the Me-

dia main menu is displayed.

Function buttons of the main Media menu

Function button: function

SOURCE

Indicates the media source being

played. Press t

o select another me-

dia source

›››

page 209.

JUKEBOX

: Internal hard drive

(SSD)

›››

page 212.

CD/DVD

: Internal CD and DVD

driv

›››

page 209.

SD CARD 1

, SD CARD 2 *: SD memory

card

››

›

page 210.

USB 1

, USB 2 *: External data stor-

age device connected t

o the USB

port 

›››

page 210.

AUX

: External audio source connec-

ted to the AUX-IN multimedia sock

›››

page 211.

BT AUDIO

: Bluetooth

audio

›››

page 211.

WLAN

: External audio source

connected by WLAN

›

››

page 214

SELECTION Opens the track list.





Changes track in Media mode or

fast forward/rewind.



Playback stops. The 

function but-

ton changes to  .



Playback is resumed. The  func-

tion button changes to  .

207

Infotainment System

Function button: function





Play more like this.

Creates a virt

ual playlist that in-

cludes tracks with a similar rhythm

to the one being played if available

using Gracenote

SETTINGS

Opens the Media Settings

menu.



REPEAT

Repeat all tracks.

Repeats all the tracks that are on

the same memory l

el as the track

being played at that moment. If in

the Media Settings menu the

 Mix/Repeat including subfolders

op-

tion is enabled, it also includes the

subf

olders.



REPEAT

The current track will be repeated.

MIX



Random play.

Includes all the tracks that are on

the same memory lev

el as the track

being played at that moment. If in

the Media Settings menu the

 Mix/Repeat including subfolders

op-

tion is enabled, it also includes the

subf

olders.

The DVD drive and the Jukebox (SSD) are only

ail

abl

e for the “Navi System Plus” model.

Not available for the Media System Touch/Colour

model.

Messages and symbols on the MEDIA main

Display: Meaning

Displays information about the artist

name, album name and song title (CD

ext , ID3 tag on compressed audio

files).

Audio CD: displays track information if

available via Gracenote

®a)

. If no data is

available, it only displays Track and the

number corresponding to the position it

occupies on the data storage device.

View of album cover: If there are various

covers within the same f

older/album, the

system only displays one of them.

It prioritizes displaying the covers in the

following manner:

1. Cover embedded in the file(s).

2. Image in file folder.

3. Image provided by the Gracenote

®a)

database.

4. Default icon for the connected device.

If playing a video file, by pressing the

icon (cover) it can be pl

ayed on full

screen.

The playing time so far and time remain-

ing in minutes and seconds. In the case

of audio files with v

ariable bit rates (VBR)

the remaining time may vary.

RDS

Off

The RDS radio data service is deactiva-

ted. The RDS can be activated in the FM

setup menu.

Display: Meaning

The TP function is active and can be

uned in.



There is no tr

affic news station available.



DAB not available.

Gracenote

is a database avail

able on the Infotain-

ment system hard drive that contains information on

the tracks of different artists and albums. In order for

the user to benefit from the functions offered by

Gracenote

, the tracks must contain the artist and/or

album data (only available for the model: “Navi Sys-

tem Plus”.

Depends on the market and unit in question.

Note

●

When the media source is insert

ed, play-

ing will not start automatically; it is neces-

sary for the user to select the source. Nor

will the media source change when it is

ejected.

●

In order to see the different covers inside

of the same album/folder, make sure that

the tracks contain different information

about the Artist or Album in its metadata. If

not, you will see the same cover for all of

tracks contained in the same album/folder.

208

Operating modes

Changing the Media source

Fig. 212

MEDIA mode: change media source.

●

From the Media main menu, pr

ess the 





Infotainment button repeatedly to cycle

thr

ough the av

ail

able media sources.

●

OR: From the Media main menu, press the

SOURCE

function button

›

Fig. 212 and se-

lect the desired media source.

In the pop-up window, the Media sources not

selected are shown as deactivated (in grey).

When a Media source that has already been

played is selected again, playback is re-

sumed from the point at which it was stop-

ped.

Optional Media playback sources

Function button: media source

JUKEBOX

Internal hard drive (SSD)

›››

page 212.

CD/DVD

Internal CD/DVD drive

›››

page 209.

SD CARD 1

SD memory card

›››

page 210.

SD CARD 2

USB 1 External data storage device con-

nected to the USB port



›››

page 210.

USB 2

AUX

External audio source connected

to the AUX-IN multimedia socket

›

››

page 211.

BT AUDIO

Bluetooth

audio

›››

page 211.

WLAN

External audio source connected

by WLAN

›››

page 214

The DVD drive and the Jukebox (SSD) are only

ail

abl

e for the “Navi System Plus” model.

Not available for the Media System Touch/Colour

model.

Note

The Media source can be changed in the

Track list

view: select Media > View.

Insert or eject a CD or DVD

3 Not available for model: Media System

Touch/Col

our

Fig. 213

Slots for data storage devices in the

e compartment.

The driver should refrain from operating the

unit whil

e the v

ehicl

e is in motion. Insert or

change the data storage device before mov-

ing off!

The CD and DVD drive can play audio CDs

and DVDs and audio data CDs and DVDs.

Insert a CD or DVD

●

Hold the CD or DVD with the printed side

facing up.

The DVD drive is only available for the model:

“Navi System Plus”.

209

Infotainment System

●

Push the CD or D

VD int

o the D

VD slot

›››

Fig. 213

to the point where it is drawn in

aut

omatically.

Eject a CD or D

●

ess button 

●

The CD or DVD in the drive will be ejected

and must be r

emo

ed within approximately

10 seconds.

Insert or eject a memory card

Depending on the features and the country,

the v

ehicl

e may hav

e one or two slots for SD

cards.

Inserting a memory card

Insert the compatible memory card, bevelled

edge first and with the label face up (con-

tacts face down), into slot

›››

Fig. 213

›

Fig. 188

, until properly inserted.

If a memory car

d cannot be insert

ed, mak

sure it is positioned correctly and is compati-

ble with the unit.

Removing a memory card

The inserted memory cards must be pre-

pared for removal.

●

From the main Media menu, press the

SETTINGS

button to open the Media Set-

tings menu or pr

ess the inf

ainment button



and then press Settings / Syst

, to

open menu System settings.

●

Press the R

emo

e safely

function button. A

opdo

wn menu appears with the f

ollowing

options: SD1 Card, SD2 Card*, USB1 and

USB2*. After correctly ejecting the memory

card from the system, the function button be-

comes inactive (grey colour).

●

Press the inserted memory card. The mem-

ory card “jumps” to the eject position.

●

Remove the memory card.

Unreadable memory card

If a memory card is inserted and the data

cannot be read, the relevant warning ap-

pears.

External data storage device con-

nected to the USB port 

Depending on the features and the country,

the v

ehicl

e may hav

e one or two USB con-

nections

›››

page 237.

Audio files on an external data storage device

connected to the USB port  can be played

and controlled via the Infotainment system.

Where this manual refers to external data

storage devices, this means USB mass stor-

age devices containing supported audio files,

such as MP3 players, iPods™ and USB sticks.

Only supported audio files are displayed and

played. Other files are ignored.

Further operation of the external data medi-

um (changing track, selecting tracks and

playback modes) is described in the appro-

priate chapters of this manual

›››

page 207.

Instructions and restrictions

Compatibility with Apple™ devices and other

media players depends on the unit.

The USB port  supplies the usual USB volt-

age of 5 volts for a USB connection.

External hard disks with a capacity greater

than 32 GB must be reformatted for the FAT32

file system in some circumstances. You will

find the necessary software and information

on the Internet.

Take into account all other instructions and

limitations regarding requirements for media

sources.

Disconnecting

Any connected data storage devices must

be prepared before their disconnection in or-

der to remove them.

●

From the main Media menu, press the

SETTINGS

button to open the Media Set-

tings menu or pr

ess the inf

ainment button

210

Operating modes

 and then press Settings / Syst

, to

open menu System settings.

●

Press the R

emo

e safely

function button. A

opdo

wn menu appears with the f

ollowing

options: SD1 Card, SD2 Card*, USB1 and

USB2*. After correctly ejecting the data stor-

age device from the system, the function but-

ton becomes inactive (grey colour).

●

Now the data storage device can be dis-

connected.

Note

●

Do not connect an external media pl

ayer

at the same time to play music via Blue-

tooth

and via the USB port  with the In-

fotainment system, as this could cause

playback limitations.

●

If the external player is an Apple™ device,

it cannot be simultaneously connected by

USB and by Bluetooth

●

If a connected device is not recognised,

disconnect all the connected devices and

try connecting the device again.

●

Do not use memory card adaptors, USB

extension cords or USB hubs!

External audio source connected to

the AUX-IN multimedia sock

et 

Depending on the equipment and country

ther

e may be an AUX-IN multimedia sock

et.

The connect

ed external audio source is

played over the vehicle speakers and cannot

be controlled via the Infotainment system

controls.

The connection of an external audio source is

indicated by AUX on the screen.

Connecting an external audio

source via Bluetooth

Bluetooth

Audio mode all

ws you t

o listen to

audio files being played on a Bluetooth

au-

dio source (e.g., a mobile telephone) connec-

ted via Bluetooth

(audio playback by Blue-

tooth

) over the vehicle speakers.

Conditions

●

The Bluetooth

audio source must support

the A2DP Bluetooth

profile.

●

In the Bluetooth Settings menu the

 Bluetooth Audio (A2DP/AVRCP) function

must

be on. Sel

ect

Phone > Settings > Blue-

tooth

arting Bluetooth

audio transfer

●

Activate Bluetooth

visibility on the external

Bluetooth

audio source (e.g., mobile tele-

phone).

●

Lower the base volume on the Infotainment

system.

●

In the MEDIA main menu, press the SOURCE

function button and select B

T audio

●

Press Sear

ch f

or ne

w device

in order to con-

nect an e

ernal Bluet

ooth

audio source for

the first time

›››

page 232.

●

OR: Select a Bluetooth

external audio

source from the list.

●

Please refer to the instructions on the

screen of the Infotainment system and on the

Bluetooth

audio source regarding the rest of

the procedure.

You may still need to manually start playback

on the Bluetooth

source.

When playback on the Bluetooth

audio

source is stopped, the Infotainment system

remains in Bluetooth

Audio mode.

Controlling playback

The extent to which the Bluetooth

audio

source can be controlled via the Infotainment

system depends on the connected Blue-

tooth

audio source.

The available functions will depend on the

Bluetooth

Audio profile that the connected

external player supports.

With media players that support the AVRCP

Bluetooth

profile, playback on the Blue-

tooth

audio source can be automatically

started or stopped when the unit is switched

211

Infotainment System

to Bluetooth

Audio mode or t

o a diff

ent au-

dio source. In addition, it is possible to view or

change the track via the Infotainment system.

Note

●

Due to the lar

ge number of possible Blue-

tooth

audio sources, it is not possible to

guarantee fault-free operation of all de-

scribed functions.

●

To play music, do not link the external

media player simultaneously to Bluetooth

and the USB interface of the infotainment

system, as this can cause limitations during

playback.

●

Do not connect an external media player

to play music via Bluetooth

and via the

USB port 

›››

page 210 at the same time

with the Infotainment system, as this could

cause playback limitations.

●

If the external player is an Apple™ device,

it cannot be simultaneously connected by

USB and by Bluetooth

Jukebox (SSD)

3 Only available for the model: Navi System Plus

Fig. 214

Manage Jukebox

The “jukebox” is located on the hard drive of

the Inf

ainment syst

em (SSD

Compressed audio files (MP3 and WMA) and

some video files (Podcasts, AVIs, etc.) can be

imported from different data storage devices

to the jukebox and this used to play them.

The files will only be copied when the engine

is running. Copying copy-protected CDs and

DVDs is prohibited

Importing files

●

In Media mode, press the SETTINGS

func-

tion butt

on and then sel

ect Manage juk

ebox

●

Press the  IMPOR

function button.

●

Select the desired source from the Select

source menu.

The dat

a st

age device is prepared. This op-

eration may take a few seconds.

●

Activate the checkboxes to the right of the

files or folders to be imported.

●

If Select all

is activated, all files and folders

on the dat

a st

age device will be imported.

●

Press the  IMPORT

function button.

Depending on the sel

ection, all fil

es and f

old-

ers will be imported with the indicated name

to the Jukebox.

If no track information is available, the audio

files will be placed in the following folders:

Audio data CD

■

Album

■

Unknown albums

■

Track.mp3

■

Artists

Solid-State-Drive (SSD).

The name and extension of the file are exam-

ples.

212

Operating modes

■

Unknown artists

■

Unknown albums

■

Track.mp3

Functions and pr

ogr

ess displ

ay during the

copying operation

While copying, an animation is displayed

along with the progress percentage on the

import screen.

Audio data CD: It is not possible to copy and

play files at the same time.

●

Press the Cancel

function button to end the

import of the whol

e tr

ack that is curr

ently be-

ing imported.

●

To obtain information on the status of the

import, press the Information

function button.

●

Press the BACK function button to close

the import scr

een with the pr

ogr

ess informa-

tion.

●

When the file import ends, a message will

appear.

Deleting files

●

In Media mode, press the SETTINGS

func-

tion butt

on and then sel

ect Manage juk

ebox

●

Press the DELETE 

function button.

●

Activ

e the checkbo

xes to the right of the

files or folders to be deleted.

●

If Select all

is activated, all the files and

ders on the dat

a storage device will be de-

leted.

●

Press the DELETE 

function button. The

fil

es and f

ders will be deleted according to

the selection made.

●

When the files have been deleted, a mes-

sage will appear.

●

Press the BACK

function button to close

the menu.

Opening st

ed audio and video fil

●

Change to Jukebox (SSD) content.

When storing the tracks, they are stored un-

der different categories and lists according to

the information available.

The tracks saved can be checked and

opened from these lists according to different

categories.

Jukebox

●

Playlist

●

Artist

●

Album

●

Music genre

●

Title

●

Video

●

Non-playable files (an unsupported file has

been imported).

Note

●

If the Infotainment syst

em cancels a

copying operation, check the storage

space on the internal hard drive and check

the data storage device.

●

Due to copyright laws, before any

change in ownership of the Infotainment

system, all files stored on the jukebox must

be deleted.

●

There are several possible reasons why

files may be shown as inactive (grey): files

that cannot be imported (e.g. images), files

that are already stored in the Jukebox or

files that take up more space than availa-

ble in the internal memory.

The name and extension of the file are exam-

ples.

213

Infotainment System

Connecting an external audio

sour

ce thr

ough WLAN*

3 Not available for model: Media System

Touch/Col

our

WLAN allows wireless connection between an

external audio source (for example a smart

phone) and the Infotainment system.

To use this connection, the device being con-

nected must have an app compatible with

the UPnP (Universal Plug and Play) communi-

cation protocol, allowing the app to provide

the system with the available media content.

Conditions

●

Having a compatible (UPnP) app installed

on the mobile device

●

Having the Enable WLAN connection op-

tion active, which can be found in the wireless

connection configuration.

●

Pairing the mobile device to the Infotain-

ment system using a password generated by

the system. The pairing must be done from

the mobile device that you wish to connect to

the Infotainment system.

Starting the WLAN audio transfer

●

Lower the base volume on the Infotainment

system.

●

Start the UPnP app or the app for the play-

back of the WLAN audio source.

●

In the MEDIA main menu, press the SOURCE

function button and select WLAN .

●

Please refer to the instructions on the

scr

een of the Inf

ainment system and on the

WLAN audio source regarding the rest of the

procedure.

Controlling playback

The extent to which the WLAN audio source

can be controlled via the Infotainment system

depends on the connected WLAN audio

source and the application used.

Note

●

The Infotainment syst

em does not pro-

vide an internet connection, it only estab-

lishes a wireless connection between the

mobile device and said system.

●

Via the WLAN, only the connection be-

tween the device and the Infotainment sys-

tem can be guaranteed, its operation de-

pends on the application itself.

DVD video mode

3 Only available for the model: Navi System Plus

Fig. 215

DVD main menu.

Fig. 216

DVD mode control menu.

Regional code of video DVD

Quit

e oft

en, the pl

ayback of DVD video is

limited to certain regions (for example, to the

US and Canada) by so-called region “co-

des”. These DVDs can only be played on

units that are coded for the same region.

214

Operating modes

The unit's DVD drive is configured to read the

egional code f

or the r

egion in which the vehi-

cle was originally sold.

Starting the DVD mode

●

Insert a compatible DVD in the DVD drive.

The reading of DVD data may take a few sec-

onds.

The DVD's “intro” (short initial sequence) is

played. Next, the different DVD menus are

displayed.

Controlling a DVD menu

●

Briefly touch the screen to activate the

function buttons in the DVD mode main menu

›››

Fig. 215.

Function button: function

SOURCE Display and selection of the source.

DVD MENU

To display the control menu and re-

turn to the main D

VD screen

›››

Fig. 216.

Chapter display.

Displays play time duration and re-

maining play time.

Function button: function

 : Move the control menu window.

 : Minimise the control menu win-

dow.

 : Maximise the control menu win-

dow.

 : Close the control menu.

Use the arrow buttons to browse the

VD menu. Confirm the sel

ection by

essing OK

E Press to open the DVD main menu.





To move to the next or previous

chapter.



ayback stops. The 

function but-

ton changes to  .



Playback is resumed. The  func-

tion button changes to  .

SETTINGS

This menu contains the Video (DVD)

settings.

Note

●

The visual appearance of the DVD film

menus and the menu options which it off

ers

are the responsibility of the DVD manufac-

turer.

●

The difference in behaviour of some films

when using the same mode is the responsi-

bility of the DVD manufacturer.

●

You may not be able t

o play video DVDs

which you have burned yourself.

●

The Infotainment system screen only dis-

plays the image when the vehicle is stop-

ped. Whilst in motion, the screen discon-

nects (the image), but the audio remains

active.

Images

Fig. 217

Images main menu.

Using the Images menu, image fil

es can be

vie

ed (e.g. photos) individually or as a slide-

show.

The image files must be stored on a compati-

ble data storage device (e.g., a CD or an SD

card).

●

Press the Infotainment 

button and

then sel

ect the

Images cont

ext.

215

Infotainment System

●

ess the SOURCE

function button to select

the sour

ce wher

e the pict

ures in question are

located.

Function button: function

SOURCE Viewing and selecting the source.

SELECTION Opens a list of image files.



The image viewed was obtained via

GPS l

ocalisation and upon pressing

this function butt

on, the navigator

menu opens to start a route to this

destination.

 / 

Rotate the view of the image to the

left or the right.



Reset the vie

w of the image.



To stop the playback of a slideshow.

The 

function button changes to

 .



To continue the playback of a slide-

show. The  function button

changes to  .





To change to the PREVIOUS or

NEXT image.

The same function can be per-

ormed by sliding your finger hori-

zontally across the screen.

SETTINGS Open the Image settings menu.

Enlarging or reducing the view

o enl

ge or reduce the view of the image

displayed:

●

Stretch or reduce the image on the screen

using 2 fingers.

Rotating the view/image

To rotate an image, in addition to the buttons

provided for this ( / ), you can also press

on the screen (e.g. with your thumb) and,

while continuing to press with your thumb,

slide another finger (e.g. your index finger)

around it like a compass either clockwise (to

rotate the image to the right) or anti-clock-

wise (to turn the image to the left). This will ro-

tate the image 90° with respect to its current

position.

Requirements for viewing images

Image files Maximum resolu-

tion

BMP 4MP

JPEG 4MP (Progressive Mode)

JPG 64MP

GIF 4MP

PNG 4MP

Navigation

Intr

oduction

Fig. 218 Related video

General information

Using all the dat

a av

ail

able, the Infotainment

system calculates the optimum route to the

destination.

The destination is defined by entering an ad-

dress or a point of interest, e.g. a petrol sta-

tion or hotel. Traffic reports, if any, will also be

taken into account in the route calculation

(dynamic route guidance

›››

page 225).

Spoken instructions and visual guidance on

the navigation unit and on the instrument

panel will direct you to your destination.

CAUTION

The navigation announcements played

may be inaccurate (e

.g. due to out-of-date

navigation data).

Valid for: Navi System and Navi System Plus.

216

Operating modes

Instructions for navigation

When the Infotainment system is unable to re-

ceive any data fr

om GPS satellites (due to a

dense tree canopy, underground car park),

navigation can still continue using the vehicle

sensors.

Possible limitations in navigation

In areas that are not or are only partially digi-

tised on the data storage device (e.g. insuffi-

cient definition of one-way streets and road

categories), the Infotainment system will still

attempt to provide route guidance.

Navigation area and updating navigation

data

Roads and streets are subject to constant

change (e.g. new roads, changes to street

names and building numbers). Therefore, if

the navigation data is not updated, then er-

rors or inaccuracies may occur during guid-

ance.

SEAT recommends updating navigation data

on a regular basis. Up to date navigation data

can be downloaded from www.seat.com or

acquired at a SEAT dealer.

Updating and using navigation da-

ta from an SD car

3 Only available for the model: Navi System

The Infot

ainment system always requires the

navigation data that is currently valid for this

unit in order to allow all functions to be used

in full. Using an old version may lead to errors

during navigation.

Updating navigation data

The current navigation data can be downloa-

ded in the internet at www.seat.com and stor-

ed in a SD card compatible with the unit.

Suitable SD Cards can be acquired at SEAT

dealerships.

The procedure is described on the internet at

www.seat.com.

Using navigation data

●

Insert the memory card

›››

page 210.

●

Do not remove the memory card while test-

ing. Wait for the testing icon to disappear.

If the inserted memory card contains valid

navigation data, the following message ap-

pears: “The source contains a valid

navigation database”. It is now possible to

navigate with the memory card data. When

the memory card is no longer needed by the

hardware, it will be prepared for removal

›››

page 210.

Note

●

The inserted memory car

d must be pre-

pared before it is ejected

›››

page 210.

●

Press the Infotainment button 

and

then Settings/System to open the System

settings menu.

●

Navigation is not possibl

e without the SD

card.

●

Do not remove the memory card while

the navigation data is in use. This could

damage the memory card!

●

The navigation memory card may not be

used as memory for other files. The info-

tainment system will not recognise the files

saved.

●

SEAT recommends only using original

SEAT memory cards to use navigation data.

The use of other memory cards could limit

its operation.

Updating and installing navigation

dat

3 Only availabl

e for the model: Navi System Plus

The Infotainment system is equipped with an

internal navigation data memory. The re-

quired navigation data are already installed

on the system.

The Infotainment system always requires the

navigation data that is currently valid for this

unit in order to allow all functions to be used

217

Infotainment System

in full. Using an old version may lead to errors

during navigation.

Updating navigation dat

o updat

e navigation data visit our website:

www.seat.com.

The navigation data must be installed after

downloading. Navigation is not possible from

the memory card.

Installing navigation data

The installation process takes about 2 hours.

If the Infotainment system is switched off, the

installation process is paused and will auto-

matically resume when switched back on.

●

Switch the ignition on.

●

Insert the memory card containing the nav-

igation data

›››

page 210.

●

Press the Infotainment 

button and

then sel

ect the

System cont

ext.

●

In the System settings menu, press the

System information

function button.

●

Press Updat

e softw

to import the stored

navigation dat

●

oll

ow the instructions displayed on the

screen.

Once installed, the memory card can be re-

moved. The memory card must be prepared

for removal

›››

page 210.

CAUTION

Do not remove the memory card while the

navigation data is being install

ed. The

memory card may be irreparably dam-

aged!

Note

●

The navigation memory card may not be

used as memory stor

age for other files. The

Infotainment system will not recognise the

files saved on it.

●

SEAT recommends a CLASS 10

memory

card for the use of navigation data. The use

of other memory cards could limit its oper-

ation.

Navigation main menu

Fig. 219

Navigation main menu

The Navigation main menu all

ws you t

o se-

lect a new destination, call up a previously

used or stored destination and search for

points of interest.

Opening the main Navigation menu

●

Press the Infotainment system button 

to open the last menu that was open in navi-

gation.

Function butt

ons and messages on the

main Navigation menu

Function button: function

The split screen is displayed

›››

page 223.

The speed class of an SD card.

218

Operating modes

Function button: function

Messages and function buttons on the map

display

››

›

page 224.

NEW DESTINATION

: To enter a new destination

›››

page 219.

ROUTE : During route guidance

›››

page 221.

MY DESTS.

: To activate or manage stored destina-

tions

›››

page 221.

POI

: Search for points of interest (car parks, fuel sta-

tions and restaur

ants) within a particular search area

›››

page 222.

VIEW

To modify or activate or deactivate the split

screen and show POI

›

››

Fig. 219

›››

page 223.

SETTINGS

Open the Navigation Settings

menu.

New destination (enter destina-

tion)

Fig. 220

Search screen.

●

In the Navigation main menu, pr

ess the

w destination function button.

●

Press the Options function button and se-

ect the r

equir

ed type of destination (Search,

Address, POI on the route or On map).

●

Using voice control*, if you say Town, street

and number, without pauses, and then the in-

struction “Start Route Guidance” a route to

the given destination will start.

Search for addresses and Points of Interest

using the keypad to enter them

›››

Fig. 220.

For cities, post codes and points of interest,

the full details must be entered. You can also

search for points of interest by names or cat-

egories. When necessary, enter the name of

the city to refine the search.

›››

Fig. 220

Press to open the cursor buttons (, ),

which allow you t

o move within the text.

Address

After entering a country and a t

own, you can

start navigating towards the centre of the se-

lected town.

When narrowing down the destination ad-

dress, please note that every entry restricts

the available range of subsequent selections.

For instance, if the street you are looking for is

not in the postcode area you have selected

in a previous window, you will not be able to

find the street at the street selection stage.

Function button: function

Country : To select the desired country.

City : To enter the desired city or postcode.

Street : To enter the desired street name.

House number : To enter the desired house number.

Junction : To select the desired intersection.

Last destinations : Open the My destinations

›››

page 221.

Start

: Start route guidance to the selected address.

219

Infotainment System

Using the map

●

Select the destination on the map or enter

it using GPS coor

dinat

es and confirm with

OK .

Function button: function

Save : To save the selected point of interest in the

destination memory

›››

page 221.

Edit

: To edit a destination or to enter another desti-

nation.

Route options : To adjust route options, see Naviga-

tion Settings > Route options.

Start : Starts guided navigation to the selected point

of interest.

After starting route guidance

Fig. 221

Route calculation.

After starting route guidance, the route to the

first destination will be cal

cul

ed.

The calculation will be performed in accord-

ance with the data selected in the Route

options menu.

After starting route guidance, three alterna-

tive routes will be suggested depending on

the selected setup

›››

Fig. 221. These 3 routes

correspond to the selectable route options:

Economical, Fast and Short.

Route criteria: Meaning

Blue route: Economical route

, the route is calculated

by taking into consideration economic factors.

Red route: Fastest r

oute to the destination, even if it

is necessary to make a deviation.

Orange route: Shortest rout

e to the destination,

even if it results in longer travelling time. The route

may have unconventional sections such as secon-

dary roads.

●

Select the desired route by pressing it.

Once the r

out

e has been cal

culated, the sys-

tem gives the first navigation announcement.

Up to 3 navigation announcements are given

before a turn.

●

Press the adjustment knob

›››

Fig. 189

list

en t

o the l

ast audible navigation instruc-

tion.

A navigation announcement informs you

when you have reached your “destination”.

A navigation announcement informing you

that you have reached the “destination area”

is given if the exact destination cannot be

reached because it is located in a non-digi-

tised area.

During dynamic route guidance, you re-

ceive information about reported traffic con-

gestion on the route. An additional navigation

announcement is given if the route is recalcu-

lated due to traffic congestion.

During a navigation announcement, you can

change its volume using the button 

›››

Fig. 189

or other adjustments t

o the navigation r

ec-

ommendations, select Navigation > Set-

tings > Navigation announcements

settings.

Note

●

If you miss a turning during rout

e guid-

ance and are currently unable to turn back,

keep on driving until the navigation system

offers a new route.

●

The quality of the navigation recommen-

dations given by the Infotainment system

depends on the navigation data available

and any reported traffic problems.

220

Operating modes

Route

In the Navigation main menu, press the Rout

function button.

The Route function button is only displayed

with route guidance activ

ated.

Function button: function

Stop route guidance : Aborts current route guidance.

Enter destination : To enter a new destination or a new

stopov

›››

page 219.

Congestion ahead

: To exclude a section (of 0.2 to 10

km in length) from the curr

ent route, e.g. to avoid

congestion. To cancel the exclusion, press the Route

function button and then Cancel congestion .

Change route

: The map of the calculat

ed route ap-

pears and by holding a finger on the route and drag-

ging the finger across said map, the route is changed

to the road(s) that you want and the new route is then

recalculated.

Route details

: View route information for current route.

Only available for the model: Navi System Plus

My destinations (destination mem-

ory)

The stored destinations can be selected from

the My destinations menu.

●

ess the My destinations.

function button in

the main Navigation menu.

●

Select the desired function button.

e position , R

outes

, Destinations ,

ast destinations

or Home addr

ess

e position

●

By pr

essing the Store position

function but-

on, the v

ehicl

e's current position is stored as

a Flagged destination in the destination

memory.

●

Mark the Flagged destination in the

destination memory.

●

Press the Store

function button.

The name can be changed in the f

oll

wing

input window. Press the 

function button to

e the destination.

outes

In the Route mode, you can define various

destinations (final destination and stopovers).

The starting point of a route is always the

current vehicle position determined by the In-

fotainment system. The destination is the

end point of a route. Stopover destinations

are driven to before the destination.

●

In the Navigation main menu, press the

My Destinations.

function button.

●

Press the R

out

es function button. The

out

es st

ored previously will appear.

If you have not stored any routes or want to

create a new route, press the New route

func-

tion butt

on and then f

oll

ow the instructions as

for a new destination, before pressing Store

essing on a st

ed route brings up the fol-

lowing function buttons:

Function button: function

Delete : To delete a stored route.

Edit : To edit and store a route.

Start : To start route guidance.

Function buttons and indications in the New

route or Edit route menu

Function button or message: function or meaning



Stopover.



Destination.



...

Estimated time of arrival at destina-

tion.



...

Calculated distance to destination.



...

Travelling time.



...

Distance to the next stopover.

Press on the destination to display the function

buttons.



Delet

e destination.

221

Infotainment System



To start guidance direct to the selec-

ted destination. Destinations that

come befor

e the selected destination

are ignored.



To open the detailed view of the desti-

nation in question.

Available function buttons.

New dest. To add a new destination to the tour.

Destina-

tions

To add a new destination from My

destinations to the tour

Storing To store the created tour in the tour

memory.

Start To start route guidance.

Calculate To update calculated distance and es-

timated arrival time

Stop To stop route guidance to the active

destination.



To move a stopover or a destination to

another position on the list. Press and

drag to move the destination.

This function button is only displayed with route

guidance activ

ed and when a destination has been

added t

o the tour.

This function button is only displayed with route

guidance activated.

Last destinations

View of destinations for which a route has al-

ready been started.

My destinations

●

Press the Options function button and se-

lect the desired function button.

Function button: function

Destination memory : View of destinations stored man-

ually and from imported vCar

›››

page 226, Im-

porting vCards (electronic business cards).

Favourites

: View of destinations stored as favourites.

Contacts : View of entries in the phonebook that have

a stored addr

ess (postal address).

Home address

Only one addr

ess or position can be st

as the home address at any one time. The

stored home address can be edited or over-

written.

If a home address has already been stored,

route guidance will be started to the stored

home address.

If a home address has not yet been stored, an

address can be assigned as the home ad-

dress.

Assigning the home address for the first time:

Position : Press to store the vehicle's current position

as the home address.

Address : Press to enter the home address manually.

Editing the home address:

The home address can be edited in the Naviga-

tion settings > Manage memory menu.

Points of interest (POI)

Fig. 222

Points of interest on the map.

The points of interest saved in the navigation

dat

a memory ar

e divided int

o different point

of interest categories. Each point of interest

category is assigned a symbol for display on

the map.

If a database of points of interest has been

imported into the Infotainment system,

222

Operating modes

›››

page 226, Impor

ting P

ersonal POI

the

category Personal POI

is also shown.

In the Map settings menu, the cat

egories of

points of int

est to display on the map can

be configured. Up to 10 categories of points

of interest can be selected.

Selecting a point of interest on the map

Function button: function

There are several points of interest in the area.

Press this symbol to open a list of points of in-

erest.

The only point of interest in this zone. Press the

symbol to open the detailed view of the point of

interest.

Quick POI search

In the Navigation main menu, pr

ess the POI

function button and the three main catego-

ries will appear

. Alt

ernativ

ely, enter the name

of the point of interest to be searched using

the new destination keypad, or press

Search nearby

on the map

›

table on

page 224.

View

In the Navigation main menu, pr

ess the Vie

function button.

Function button: function



Map display in two dimensions (con-

ventional).



Map display in thr

ee dimensions (bird's

eye view).

Buildings ar

e also displayed in three

dimensions. The places of inter

est and

well-known buildings are shown in de-

tail and in colour.



To display the destination on the map.



To display the route on the map.

Auto /

Day / Night

To change between day and night for-

mat.

Split screen

Press to display the split screen

›

››

page 223.

POI Display points of interest on the map.

This function button is only displayed with route

guidance activ

ed.

Split scr

een

Fig. 223

Split screen displayed.

The split screen

›

Fig. 223

may display

any of the inf

ormation described bel

●

Press on the name of the split screen to se-

lect a display option.

Function button: function

Audio : Indicates the selected audio source.

Compass : Displays a compass with the current trav-

elling direction and indicates the current position of

the vehicle (street name).

Manoeuvre : Displays a list of the next manoeuvres,

POIs or TMCs on the rout

e and pressing them brings

up additional information

Most frequent routes

: Information on the user's most

equent routes.

223

Infotainment System

Function button: function

Position : current vehicle position in coordinates and

GPS status (sat

ellite reception).

This function button is only shown when route guid-

ance is not active or when predictiv

e route guidance

is active.

Press the 

function button to close the split

screen.

At any moment during navigation, pressing

inside the map will mak

e a pop-up menu ap-

pear with the following functions:

Function button: function

Street name or coordinates : shows the details of the

point selected on the map

Only when you press on an icon on the map:

POI

: name of the point of interest (when only one

appears on the map).

Group of POIs : more points of interest (when you

press on the map on various POIs gr

ouped to-

gether).

Favourite

: name of the favourite.

Home

: Home address.

Start route guidance : starts guidance directly.

Add stopover destination : only when you have an ac-

tive rout

Search nearby

: enters in the search menu, but only

for the area ar

ound the point selected on the map.

Function button: function

Demo mode start (only when demo mode is active)

Map display

Fig. 224

Messages and function buttons on

the map displ

ay.

Function buttons and messages on the

map displ

ay.

o activ

ate function buttons  and , press

function button .

Function button: function



Current altitude indicator.



To centre the vehicle position on the map.

Function button: function



To centre the destination on the map. This

function button is only displayed if either

Displ

ay destination on map or Display

route on the map is selected

›››

page 223.



To change the orientation of the map

(north-facing or direction of tr

avel). This

function is only available in 2D mode.



View map scale. Turn the setup button or

move your fingers t

ogether/apart on the

touchscreen to change the scale of the

map.



To select automatic scaling. If the func-

tion is active, the symbol is displ

ayed in

blue.



Briefly zooms in on the map. After a few

seconds, it automatically returns to the

last selected scale.



It can mute or repeat the last announce-

ment, or can change the announcement

volume.

Road signs: Depending on the vehicle's equip-

ment, the road signs stored in the navigation data are

displayed. Select Navigation > Settings >

Map > Show road signs.

224

Operating modes

Traffic reports and dynamic route

guidance t

o the destination (TRAF-

FIC)

Fig. 225

Traffic reports

The Infotainment system constantly receives

affic r

eports (T

MC/TMCpro) in the back-

ground, provided a TMC traffic news station

can be received at the current location. The

station being listened to does not have to be

the traffic news station.

List of available traffic reports

●

Press the Infotainment 

›

Fig. 189

button and then select the Traffic cont

xt.

Dynamic r

oute guidance

In order for dynamic route guidance to func-

tion, Dynamic route must be activated in the

route options.

If during route guidance a traffic report is re-

ceived that affects the route being travelled,

an alternative route will be searched for if the

Infotainment system calculates that time can

be saved.

Traffic reports on map (selection)

Symbol: Meaning



: Slow tr

affic



: Traffic jam



: Accident



: Slippery road surface (ice or sno



: Slippery road surface



: Danger



: R

oad works



: Str

ong wind



: Road closed to traffic

During route guidance, traffic congestion that

does not aff

ect the r

out

e calculated is dis-

played in grey.

Predictive navigation

Fig. 226

Predictive navigation

When you activate Predictive navigation, the

syst

em det

ects and st

ores in the background

routes that are frequently followed, without

them being active destination routes. This

function has no navigation announcements

unless the user requires them, getting them

by pressing the adjustment knob

›››

Fig. 189

●

On the main screen of the Navigation menu,

in the pop-up windo

, pr

ess the

Frequent routes

button. To display frequently

oll

wed routes press the Show on map

button

›

Fig. 226.

225

Infotainment System

Importing vCards (electronic busi-

ness car

ds)

Importing vCards to the destination mem-

ory

●

Insert the data storage device with the stor-

ed vCards or connect it to the Inf

otainment

system

›››

page 207.

●

Press the SETTINGS

function button in the

main Navigation menu.

●

In the Navigation settings menu, press

the Import destinations

function button.

●

Select the data carrier with the vCards

sav

ed in the list.

●

ess Import all vCar

ds from this folder

●

Confirm the import notice with the OK

function button.

The sav

ed vCar

ds will no

w be in the destina-

tion memory

›››

page 221 and may be used

for navigation.

Note

Only one address per vCard can be impor-

ted. In the ev

ent any vCards have multiple

addresses, only the main address will be

imported.

Importing Personal POI

Importing the Personal POI to a points of

interest destination memory

●

Insert the dat

a storage device with the stor-

ed Personal POI or connect it to the Infotain-

ment system

›››

page 207.

●

Press the Infotainment button 

and then

select Settings.

●

In the

Settings menu, press the

Manage memory

function button.

●

Press Updat

e my POIs and then press

Updat

and Ne

to import the Personal

POIs.

●

Confirm the import notification with the OK

function button.

The st

ed P

ersonal POI are now in the points

of interest destination memory

›››

page 222

and can be used for navigation purposes.

The stored Personal POI can be deleted in

the Navigation Settings menu.

Navigation with images

Fig. 227

Images main menu.

Selecting an image and starting route

guidance

Bear in mind the r

equir

ements and f

ormats of

the compatible images.

●

Insert the data storage device with the stor-

ed images or connect it to the Infotainment

system.

●

Press the Infotainment 

button and

then sel

ect the

Images cont

ext.

●

Press the SOURCE

›

Fig. 227 function but-

ton and select the data storage device where

the images are stored.

●

Select the desired image.

●

If the image displayed was taken using GPS

localisation, the  function button will appear.

Press to start guidance to a destination.

226

Operating modes

Route guidance in Demo mode

If demo mode is activated in the Navigation

Settings menu, an additional pop-up win-

dow opens when you start r

oute guidance.

●

Pressing the Demo mode

function button

starts a “virtual r

oute guidance” to the desti-

nation you have entered.

●

If you press the Normal

function button, a

“real rout

e guidance” starts.

Navigation in Offroad

mode*

Introduction

Offroad* navigation is a function for offroad

driving that pr

vides dir

ections in “non-digi-

tised areas” at low speeds.

Non-digitised areas are areas about which

the system does not have information for the

streets or terrain. It does not detect streets,

buildings or natural limits such as mountains

or rivers, although they may be shown on the

map.

Offroad* navigation is not suitable for driving

on conventional roads as it does not detect

one-way streets, motorway entries or similar.

Offroad Navigation Menu

Fig. 228 Offroad Navigation Menu start

Press the SETTINGS function butt

on in the

main Navigation menu.

●

In the menu, pr

ess the

Waypoint mode

function button.

●

The Offroad Navigation menu opens

›››

Fig. 228.

Function buttons in the Offroad Navigation

Function button: function

RECORD : Initiates the plotting of an Offroad tour.

MEMORY : Opens a list allowing the selection of a

stored Offroad tour.

EXIT : Ends Offroad navigation.

Recording an Offroad tour

Fig. 229

Recording an Offroad tour

An Offroad tour is formed by a series of stor-

ed w

aypoints

Only available for the model: Navi System Plus

227

Infotainment System

Starting recording

●

In the Offroad Navigation menu, in the pop-

up windo

w pr

ess the RECORD pop-up button.

●

In the pop-up window, the user is able to

ot the t

our with a giv

en destination or start

plotting the route without giving a final desti-

nation.

●

Starts plotting the route.

The offroad markers can be recorded by in-

dicating a manual waypoint.

●

In the Offroad Navigation menu, press the

ADD WAYPOINT

function button. The tour way-

points defined manually ar

e sho

wn on the

map by a mark

er.

Ending recording

●

Press the STOP RECORDING

function button

in the main Offr

oad Navigation menu.

Managing st

ed Offroad tours

Fig. 230

Offroad Navigation menu, stored

ours

●

Press the MEMORY function button in the

Offr

oad Navigation menu.

●

A list of st

ed Offroad tours opens, if there

are any.

When a tour is selected, the following icons

will appear

›››

Fig. 230:

Export the tour to an SD card.

Edit the name of the tour.

Delete the tour.

Load tour

Function button: function

IMPORT : allows the import of an Offroad route in

“.GPX” format.









Loading an Offroad tour

When the Offr

oad t

our is sel

ected, press Play

 and the selected tour will be loaded onto

the Navigation system.

Creating an Offroad tour

Fig. 231

Offroad route guidance mode

Start route guidance

●

Loads the stored Offroad tour.

●

Starting off in a stored route is not detected

by the syst

em aut

omatically.

Set

Function button: function

Invert : Reverses the direction of the stored Offroad

tour.

xt point

: Starts the Offroad tour from the nearest

point.

228

Operating modes

Function button: function

Start : Starts the complete Offroad tour.

When route guidance starts, the system

switches t

o the map view.

Stopping route guidance

●

Press the Options

button on the screen and

then press Stop .

End waypoint navigation

●

Press the EXIT

function button in the Off-

oad Navigation menu.

WARNING

Terrain features are disregarded during

route guidance Driv

e slowly and following

the instructions in order to perform the ma-

noeuvre as far as possible!

●

The general direction of travel is indica-

ted straight ahead by direction arrows in

the Infotainment System pop-up window

›››

Fig. 231

Note

If an Offroad tour is being recorded, this is

automatically stor

ed if Offroad navigation

is discontinued.

Vehicle Menu

Intr

oduction t

o using the V

ehicle

By pressing button  of the infotainment

system you will access its main menu with the

foll

owing options:

●

VIEW

●

MINIPLAYER, in the top right corner (Radio

or Media function if the HDC descent con-

trol* is not active).

●

PREVIOUS-NEXT (to change screen)

●

SETTINGS

›››



page 35

With the function button VIEW

you can ac-

cess the f

oll

wing information:

Instrument panel

Press the Instrument Panel

button to choose

om the v

arious displ

ay options and custom-

ise the information that appears in the Digital

Cockpit

›››

page 106:

Automatic Display: default information

depending on the selected Driving

Mode.

–

Classic Display: the entire lengths of

the revolutions per minute and speed-

ometer needles are shown.

Views 1, 2, 3: customise the information

that appears in the digital cockpit. Only

2 of these items of information can be

displayed at the same time, but the user

chooses which to display, and in what

order, by moving the finger vertically

over the dials. Depending on the version,

the Views can be memorised by existing

the menu or keeping the View

button

essed.

Spor

If the corr

esponding equipment is available,

the information that appears in the Sport op-

tion is the following:

Instantaneous power expressed in kW

G forces

Turbo pressure, expressed in bar (“bar”),

kilopascals (“kPa”) or in pounds per

square inch (“psi”). Press the Setup but-

ton to change the units of pressure.

Coolant temperature

Oil temperature

–

229

Infotainment System

Only 3 of these items of information can be

displ

ayed at the same time

, but the user

chooses which t

o display, and in what order,

by moving the finger vertically over the dials.

Press the Next 

button to display the L

timer

Offr

oad*

If the corresponding equipment is available,

the information that appears is the following:

Compass.

Altimeter: altitude above sea level.

Turning angle of steered wheels.

Coolant temperature.

Lubricating oil temperature

Only the altimeter and 2 more of these items

of information can be displayed at the same

time, but the user chooses which to display,

and in what order, by moving their finger ver-

tically over the dials.

Consumers

By pressing the CONSUMERS

button, informa-

tion on the st

us of the v

ehicle's main con-

sumption devices is obtained. It is shown via a

consumption indicator bar in l/h (gal/h)

Driving data

The onboard computer is equipped with 3

memories that work automatically. In these

memories you can see the distance travelled,

average speed, time passed, average con-

sumption and autonomy of the vehicle.

Ecotrainer*

If the corresponding equipment is available,

the ECOTRAINER will provide information on

driving style. The information on driving style

is only evaluated and displayed when moving

forward.

Vehicle status

Press the Vehicle status

button to access infor-

mation on the Vehicle status messages

and Start-Stop system. The V

ehicl

e st

atus

messages are displayed, in addition to being

specified on the corresponding button.

Telephone

General information

Fig. 232 Related video

The Telephone functions described below

can be used thr

ough the Inf

ainment system

if there is a mobile telephone connected to it

via Bluetooth

›››

page 232.

In order for the mobile telephone to be able

to connect to the Infotainment system the tel-

ephone must be equipped with Bluetooth

If there is no mobile telephone connected to

the Infotainment system, the telephone man-

agement system will not be available.

The instructions shown on the screen for the

telephone menus will depend on the mobile

telephone used. There may be variations.

This lap timer is independent of the one that

appears on the instrument panel.

In the case of Gas (CNG) vehicles, the units are

in kg/h.

230

Operating modes

Only use compatible Bluetooth

vices. F

further inf

ormation on compatible Bluetooth

products, ask your nearest SEAT dealer or

check on the internet.

Use the instruction manual of the mobile tele-

phone and of any accessories.

If you detect any operating issues between

your mobile telephone and the Infotainment

system, restart your mobile by switching it off

and on again.

Some functions and setup can only be per-

formed when the vehicle is stopped and are

not available on all mobile telephones.

WARNING

General, mandatory, legal and country-

specific instructions and laws for the use of

mobil

e phones inside the vehicle must al-

ways be considered.

WARNING

Speaking by telephone and using the mo-

bile tel

ephone management system whilst

driving can distract you from the road and

cause an accident.

●

Always drive carefully and responsibly.

●

Select volume settings that allow you to

easily hear signals from outside the vehicle

at all times (e.g. emergency services sirens

and horns).

●

In areas of little or no co

verage or, in

some cases, in a tunnel, garage or under-

pass, your call may be cut off and you may

not be able to make even emergency calls.

WARNING

If a mobile telephone is not secured or is in-

corr

ectly secured in the v

ehicle, it could

move around the passenger compartment

in the event of a sudden driving manoeuvre

or emergency stop, resulting in injury.

●

While the vehicle is in motion, always se-

cure the mobile telephone properly outside

the airbag deployment zone.

WARNING

Mobile telephones may interfere with and

alter the correct oper

ation of pacemakers

if they are carried directly over them.

●

Maintain a minimum distance of at least

20 centimetres between the aerials of the

mobile telephone and the pacemaker.

●

Do not carry your switched-on mobile

telephone in your breast pocket directly

over the pacemaker.

●

If you suspect interference, switch off the

mobile telephone immediately.

CAUTION

High speeds, poor weather or road condi-

tions and the quality of reception can all

affect the audio quality of a telephone con-

versation in the vehicl

Note

●

estrictions on the use of devices using

Bluet

ooth

technology may apply in some

countries. For further information, contact

the local authorities.

●

If you wish to connect a device to the tel-

ephone management system via Blue-

tooth

technology, consult the safety

warnings in its instruction manual. Only use

compatible Bluetooth

devices.

Places with special regulations

Switch off the mobile telephone and the mo-

bil

’

s Bluetooth

function in places with a risk

of explosion. In the majority of cases, these

places are signposted, but not always clearly

›››

in General information on page 231.

They include

, f

or e

xample:

●

the vicinity of chemical pipelines and tanks

●

The lower decks of boats and ferries.

●

In the proximity of vehicles that run on liquid

gas (such as propane or butane).

●

places where the air is laden with chemi-

cals or particles such as flour, dust or metal

powder.

231

Infotainment System

●

all other pl

aces wher

e the v

ehicle engine

must be switched off.

WARNING

Switch off the mobile phone in areas with a

risk of explosion! The mobil

e telephone can

automatically connect to the mobile tele-

phone network again if it loses the Blue-

tooth

connection to the telephone man-

agement system.

CAUTION

In areas where special regulations apply or

the use of mobile tel

ephones is prohibited,

both the telephone and the telephone

management system must be switched off.

The radiation produced by the mobile tele-

phone when switched on may interfere with

sensitive technical and medical equipment,

possibly resulting in a malfunction or dam-

age to the equipment.

Bluetooth

echnol

ogy all

ows a mobile tele-

phone to be connected to your vehicle's tele-

phone management system. In order to use

the telephone management system with a

mobile telephone with Bluetooth

technolo-

gy, it is first necessary to pair them.

Some Bluetooth

mobile telephones detect

and automatically connect when turning on

the ignition if a connection has been previ-

ously established. For this to take place the

telephone must be switched on and its Blue-

tooth

function activated, and there must be

no active Bluetooth

connection with other

devices.

Bluetooth

connections are free.

Bluetooth

is a registered trademark of Blue-

tooth

SIG, Inc.

Bluetooth profiles

When a mobile phone is connected to the tel-

ephone management system, a data ex-

change takes place via one of the Bluetooth

profiles.

●

Hands-Free Profile (HFP): When connect-

ing a mobile telephone to the phone manag-

er through the HFP the calls can be managed

via the Infotainment system.

●

Audio profile (A2DP): This profile makes it

easier to transmit audio to the infotainment

system with stereo quality. This function may

require connecting additional profiles for

managing and controlling audio playback.

●

Phone book access profile (PBAP):

Serves to download phone book contacts

from the mobile telephone to the Infotainment

system.

●

Message profile (MAP):

Serves the

download and synchronise short messages

(SMS) of the mobile telephone to the Infotain-

ment system.

Note

To prevent them from being heard through

the speakers, the button and mobil

e tele-

phone alert tones must be disconnected.

Where necessary, disconnect the headset

from the mobile telephone you wish to con-

nect to the system.

Pairing and connecting a mobile

ephone t

o the Infotainment sys-

tem

In order to manage a mobile telephone via

the Inf

ainment syst

em, it is necessary to

pair both devices once.

For your safety, we recommend you make the

link when the vehicle is stationary. In some

countries it is not possible to perform the pair-

ing with the vehicle running.

Not available for the Media System Touch/Col-

our model.

232

Operating modes

Conditions

ou must guar

ant

ee the following setup in the

mobile phone and the Infotainment system:

●

The ignition must be switched on.

●

The Bluetooth

function of the mobile tel-

ephone and the Infotainment system must be

active as well as visibility.

●

The keypad lock on the mobile telephone

must be deactivated.

Follow instructions in the manual for the mo-

bile telephone.

During the pairing process, it is necessary to

enter data via the mobile telephone's keypad.

Pairing a mobile telephone

●

Make sure the mobile device's Bluetooth

function is activated and visible.

●

Press the infotainment 

button.

●

Press the Find t

ephone > R

esults

function

butt

on.

OR:

●

ess the inf

otainment 

button.

●

Press the function button Set

Sel

ect mobil

e phone > R

esults

OR:

●

Press the infotainment 



button.

●

ess the Settings

> Bluet

ooth

> Find de

vices

> R

esults

button.

The name of the Bluet

ooth

function of your

Inf

ainment system will be displayed on the

main Telephone screen and you can edit this

name via the Bluetooth settings

The sear

ch pr

ocess can t

ake up to 1 minute.

On the screen, the system will dynamically

update the names of the Bluetooth

devices

found.

As soon as the search is completed, the

names of the Bluetooth

devices found are

displayed on-screen.

●

Select the Bluetooth

device you want to

connect on the infotainment system. In cer-

tain circumstances, it is possible that to finish

the connection between the two devices, you

must enter additional data in the mobile tele-

phone and Infotainment system.

●

Use your mobile telephone to enter and

confirm your PIN code, as indicated in the dis-

play of the infotainment system.

●

If more Bluetooth

profile pairing requests

are received on the mobile telephone, make

sure to reply to them.

OR:

●

Compare the PIN code shown on the dis-

play of the Infotainment system with that

shown on the mobile telephone. If they

match, confirm on both devices.

When the pairing has been finalized correct-

ly, the Telephone main menu will appear. The

phone book, call list and SMS messages stor-

ed in the mobile phone will be loaded once

the requests have been accepted in the mo-

bile phone. After downloading, the data will

be available on the Infotainment system.

Pairing and connection of mobile tele-

phones

You can pair up to 20 mobile telephones to

the Infotainment system, but the number of si-

multaneous connections varies:

●

Media System Touch / Colour: a phone

connected to the hands-free profile and the

same or a different device connected to the

Bluetooth

audio profile.

●

Media System Plus / Navi System: two mo-

bile phones simultaneously connected to the

hands-free profile and one of them is also

connected Bluetooth

audio profile.

●

Navi System Plus: two mobile phones simul-

taneously connected to the hands-free pro-

file and one of them or a third one connected

to the Bluetooth

audio profile.

When the Infotainment system is switched on,

it automatically connects to the last connec-

ted mobile telephone. If it is not possible to

connect to this mobile telephone, the tele-

phone management system will try to auto-

matically connect to the next mobile tele-

phone on the list of paired devices.

233

Infotainment System

The maximum r

ange of the Bluet

ooth

con-

nection is appr

ox. 10 meters. The active

Bluetooth

connection disconnects if this dis-

tance is exceeded. The connection is auto-

matically re-established as soon as the de-

vice is once again within Bluetooth

range.

WARNING

Do not perform the pairing and connection

process while driving. This may cause an

accident

Note

●

It may be necessary to confirm the phone

book data and SMS tr

ansfer request on the

mobile telephone.

●

Check that there are no requests pend-

ing acceptance in your mobile phone. If

there are, this could block some of the

functions in the Telephone menu.

Telephone main menu

Fig. 233

Telephone main menu (view of the 8"

scr

een).

Assign a user profile

The dat

a fr

om the phonebook

, the call lists

and the stored speed dial buttons are as-

signed to a user profile and remain stored on

the telephone management system. This in-

formation will be available every time the mo-

bile telephone is connected to the telephone

management system.

After the first connection, it will take a few mi-

nutes for the data from the phonebook of the

linked mobile phone to be available in the In-

fotainment system. The next time that the

mobile telephone is connected (e.g. on the

next journey) the phonebook is updated au-

tomatically.

If any entries in the mobile phonebook have

been modified while connected, a manual

update of the phonebook data can be initi-

ated from the User profile settings

menu.

Telephone management can store a maxi-

mum of 4 user profiles for mobile telephones.

If you wish to link/connect another mobile

phone, the oldest user profile will automati-

cally be replaced.

Telephone management system function

buttons

●

Press the infotainment button 

to open

the Phone main menu.

Function button: function

Name of connected mobile tele-

phone. Press the icon t

o the left to

connect or pair with another mobile

telephone.

Speed dial buttons, to which tele-

phone numbers from the phone-

book may be assigned respectively.

To change to another telephone

connected to the hands-fr

ee profile.

This button will only be visible when

there are two telephones connected

as hands-free. The active user pro-

file corresponds to the telephone

appearing on the screen.

DIAL NUM-

BER

To open the number pad and enter a

telephone number

›

››

page 235.

CONTACTS

To open the phonebook of the con-

nected mobile telephone.

234

Operating modes

Function button: function

SMS

To open the menu for SMS messag-

es.

CALLS

To open call lists of the connected

mobile telephone

›››

page 236.

SETTINGS

To open the Telephone set-

tings menu.

Not available for the Media System Touch/Colour

model.

Display and symbols of the tele-

phone management syst

Fig. 234

Active call.

Display: Meaning

›››

Fig. 234

Name of the mobile network operator (pro-

vider) to which the mobile t

elephone is con-

nected.

Display: Meaning

›››

Fig. 234

View of stored telephone number or name. If

the name stored in the phonebook has an

assigned phot

o, it can be displayed: select

Telephone > Settings > User

profile > Show pictures for

contacts*.



Press to accept a call.



Press t

o end a call

OR: Press t

o reject an incoming call.



Press t

o mute or to reactivate the ring tone

during an incoming call.



Press t

o mute the microphone during an ac-

tive call and to reactivate it.



This button keeps the call active. While the

call is on hold the listener will not hear the

conversation. To reactivate it, press the call

accept button . To reject it, press the reject

button .



Press to add a participant to the active call.



Charge status of a mobile telephone con-

nected via “Hands-free pr

ofile” (HFP) Blue-

tooth



Strength of coverage signal received by the

mobile tel

ephone.

Enter telephone number menu

Fig. 235

Enter telephone number menu.

Open the Enter telephone number menu

ess the DIAL NUMBER

function button from

the PHONE main menu.

Possible functions

Enter telephone

number

Entering a phone number with

the keypad.

Press the  function button to

make a call.

Select a con-

tact from the

list

Ent

er the first letters of the con-

tact to find using the k

eypad.

The available entries appear in

the phonebook.

Select the desired contact from

the phonebook to make the call

235

Infotainment System

Possible functions

Enter the coun-

try code

To enter a country code, instead

of the first two digits (interna-

tional access code e

.g. “00”)

you can enter the character “+”.

Press the function button 0

for

approx. 2 seconds to add the +.

Breakdown

service call 

Press the function button to ob-

tain help in the ev

ent of break-

down. For this the network of

SEAT dealerships is available to

you with their Mobility Service.

Information call



Press the function button to ob-

tain information on the SEAT

and and the additional serv-

ices contracted related to traffic

and travel.

Call mailbox 

Press the  Voice mail

function

button to mak

e the call.

OR: Press the 

function button

for about 2 seconds to mak

e a

call.

If the number for the mailbox has

not yet been stored, enter it and

confirm with OK

Note

●

Breakdo

wn service and information calls

can incur an additional cost on your tele-

phone bill.

●

The Roadside Assistance and Information

services might not work properly, for exam-

ple, if the vehicle and the operator of the

connected mobile t

elephone are in differ-

ent countries. If you are not able to use

these services contact an authorised SEAT

workshop.

Call Menu (call lists)

Possible displays in the Calls menu

Display: Meaning



Missed calls : Displays the numbers of missed

and unanswer

ed calls.



Dialled numbers

: Indicates the numbers dial-

led on the mobile t

elephone and on the Info-

tainment system telephone management

system.



Received calls

: Indicates the numbers of the

calls received on the mobile telephone and

on the Infotainment system telephone man-

agement system.

Note

The availability of the call lists will depend

on the mobile phone used.

236

Operating modes

Multimedia

USB/AUX-INP

Fig. 236

Centre console: USB/AUX-IN input.

Fig. 237

Centre console, rear section: USB

connect

ors.

Depending on the special characteristics and

the country, the v

ehicl

e may hav

e a

USB/AUX-IN port.

The USB/AUX-IN port can be found in the

storage compartment area of the centre

console

›››

Fig. 236.

The operating description is located in

›››

page 207.

Depending on the equipment and the coun-

try, the vehicle may also have USB connec-

tions exclusively for charging or as a power

socket.

These USB ports are located at the rear of

the console, between the front seats

›››

Fig. 237.

Connectivity Box* / Wireless

Charger*

Fig. 238 Related video

Fig. 239 Centre console: slot for mobile phone

connection.

The Connectivity Box includes different func-

tions that will help t

o use your mobil

e de

vice.

They are the “Wireless Charger” and the

“Mobile Signal Amplifier”.

The Wireless Charger only features the

“Wireless Charger” function.

“Wireless Charger”

The “Wireless Charger” allows mobile devi-

ces with Qi

technology to be charged with-

out a cable.

To charge your mobile phone wirelessly:

●

Place your mobile device with Qi technolo-

1 )

in the middle of the pad with the screen

facing up

›››

Fig. 239.

Qi technology allows you to charge your mo-

bile phone wirel

essly.

237

Infotainment System

When you do so, make sure there are no ob-

jects betw

een the pad and the mobil

e phone

The mobile phone will start charging auto-

matically. For further information about

whether your mobile device uses Qi technol-

ogy, please check your mobile phone's user

manual or visit the SEAT website.

“Mobile Signal Amplifier”

The “Mobile Signal Amplifier” allows you to

reduce the radiation in your vehicle and enjoy

better reception.

For safety reasons, it is recommended that

you pair the radio and the mobile device us-

ing Bluetooth

and place the mobile phone

on the Connectivity Box pad, so as to have

better reception without having to handle the

mobile phone.

To establish a connection with the vehicle's

external aerial:

●

Place your mobile device in the middle of

the pad with the screen facing up

›››

Fig. 239.

When you do so, make sure there are no ob-

jects between the pad and the mobile phone.

Your mobile phone will automatically be

ready to make use of the external aerial.

WARNING

The mobile phone may heat up due to the

wireless char

ging. Think about the temper-

ature of your device before you pick it up,

and take car

e when removing it.

Note

●

our mobile de

vice must support the Qi

wireless inductive charging interface

standard for proper operation.

●

If your mobile phone has a cover or a pro-

tective casing, this may affect the Connec-

tivity Box functions.

●

There must be no metallic objects be-

tween the pad and the mobile device that

might affect the wireless charging or the

connection with the external aerial.

●

The charging time and the temperature

vary in accordance with the device used.

●

To avoid malfunction, ensure that the mo-

bile phone is correctly placed on the pad.

●

The maximum charging capacity is 5 W.

●

Qi technology does not allow you to

charge more than one mobile device simul-

taneously.

●

No improvement in the transmission qual-

ity can be guaranteed if there is more than

one mobile phone on the pad.

●

You are advised to keep the engine run-

ning to guarantee proper wireless charging

of your device.

●

When a telephone with Qi technology is

connected by USB, the charging will be

performed through the medium specified

by each mobile device manufacturer.

238

Start and driving

Driving

t and driving

arting and stopping the

engine

Switching the ignition on and start-

ing the engine with the key

Fig. 240 Ignition key positions.

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 32

Diesel engines can take a few seconds longer

than usual to start on cold days. Therefore

the clutch pedal (manual gearbox) or the

brake pedal (automatic gearbox) must re-

main pressed until the engine starts up. Dur-

ing preheating, the warning lamp  remains

lit.

The preheating time depends on the coolant

and exterior temperatures. With the engine at

operating temperature, or at outside temper-

atures above +8°C, the warning lamp  will

light up for about one second. This means

that the engine starts immediately.

If the engine does not immediately start up,

interrupt the starting process and try again

after 30 seconds. To start the engine again,

return the key to position

-Stop system*

If the vehicle is stopped and the Start-Stop

system* switches off the engine, the ignition

remains switched on.

Automatic transmission: before leaving the

vehicle, make sure that the ignition is switch-

ed off and the selector lever is in position P.

Driver messages on the instrument panel

display

Press the clutch

This message appears on vehicles with a

manual gearbox if the driver tries to start the

engine without having the clutch pedal

pressed. The engine will only start if you press

the clutch pedal.

Press the brake

This message appears on vehicles with an

automatic gearbox if the driver tries to start

the engine without having the brake pedal

pressed.

Select N or P

This message appears if you try to start or

stop the engine when the selector lever of the

automatic gearbox is not in position P or N.

The engine can only be started and stopped

in those positions.

Engage position P; the vehicle can

move; doors can only close in posi-

tion P.

For safety reasons, this driver message ap-

pears and an audible warning sounds if the

selector lever of the automatic gearbox is not

in position P after you switch off the ignition.

Move the selector lever to the P position, oth-

erwise the vehicle could roll away.

Gear change: selector lever in the

drive position!

This driver message is displayed when the

selector lever is not in the position P when the

driver door is opened. Additionally, a buzzing

sound is emitted. Put the selector lever in po-

sition P, otherwise the vehicle could roll away.

239

Driving

Ignition is switched on

This driv

er message is displ

ayed and a buz

zer is sounded when the driver door is

opened with the ignition switched on.

WARNING

●

Never run the engine in confined spaces,

as the e

xhaust gases are poisonous.

CAUTION

Avoid high engine speeds, full throttle and

extreme l

oad conditions until the engine

has reached its normal operating tempera-

ture, otherwise this can damage the en-

gine.

For the sake of the environment

Do not warm up the engine by idling it. You

should drive off as soon as you st

art the en-

gine. This will help avoid unnecessary ex-

haust emissions.

Note

●

If it is difficult to turn the ignition k

ey to

the position

, move the steering wheel to

both sides to rel

ease the steering lock.

●

When starting from cold, the engine may

be a little noisy for the first few seconds un-

til oil pressure has built up in the hydraulic

valve lifters. This is quite normal, and no

cause for concern.

●

If the vehicl

e battery is disconnected and

reconnected, the key must remain in the

position

for around 5 seconds before

starting up

●

Vehicles with automatic transmission,de-

pending on the country, after switching off

the ignition, you can only remove the igni-

tion key if the selector lever is in position

“P” (parking lock). Next, the selector lever

is locked.

Switching off the engine with the

Switching off the engine

–

Stop the vehicle.

–

Turn the ignition key to position

›››

Fig. 2

Engaging the st

eering wheel lock

In vehicles with automatic gearbox, the igni-

tion key can only be removed when the se-

lector lever is in position P

–

Remove the key from the ignition in posi-

tion

›

Fig. 240

›››

–

urn the st

eering wheel until you hear it en-

gage

Possible vehicle theft is prevented with the

steering lock engaged.

WARNING

●

Never s

witch the engine off until the vehi-

cle is stationary. The brake servo and pow-

er steering functions will not be completely

covered under warranty. More force may

also be needed to turn the steering wheel

or to brake. As you cannot steer and brake

in the normal manner, there is a greater risk

of accidents and serious injury.

●

Never remove the key from the ignition if

the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the

steering could suddenly lock, making it im-

possible to steer the vehicle: risk of acci-

dent!

●

Always take the key with you when you

leave the vehicle. This is particularly impor-

tant if there are children in the vehicle, as

they might otherwise be able to start the

engine or use power-operated equipment

(e.g. the electric windows), which could

cause injuries.

CAUTION

If the engine has been running under high

load for a l

ong time, there is a risk of heat

Depending upon country.

240

Start and driving

building up in the engine compartment af-

ter it has been swit

ched off; this could

cause engine damage. For this reason, you

should idle the engine for approximately 2

minutes before you switch it off.

Note

After the engine is switched off the radiator

an may run on for up t

o 10 minutes, even if

the ignition is switched off. It is also possi-

ble that the fan turns itself on once more if

the coolant temperature increases due to

the heat accumulated in the engine com-

partment or due to its prolonged exposure

to solar radiation.

Starter button*

Fig. 241 In the lower part of the centre con-

sol

e: st

art butt

on.

Fig. 242 On the right of the steering column:

emergency start.

The vehicle engine can be started with a

art

er butt

on (Press & Drive). To do so, there

must be a valid key inside the vehicle in the

area of the front or rear seats.

In vehicles with the Keyless Access

›››

page 127 system, the engine can also be

started with the key in the luggage compart-

ment.

Opening the driver's door when exiting the

vehicle activates the electronic lock on the

steering column if the ignition is disabled.

Switching the ignition on/off manually

Briefly push the starter button without touch-

ing the brake or clutch pedal

›››

or v

ehicl

es with both manual and automatic

transmission, the starter button text

START ENGINE STOP

flashes like a heartbeat

when the system is preset for switching the

ignition on and off

Aut

omatic ignition s

witch-off

If the driver leaves the vehicle, taking the ve-

hicle key with them but leaving the ignition on,

the ignition is not switched off automatically.

The ignition is switched off automatically by

pressing the lock button on the remote con-

trol  or manually by pressing the sensor sur-

face on the door lever

›››

Fig. 140

Emergency starting function

If no valid key is detected inside the vehicle,

an emergency start-up will be required. The

relevant message will appear in the dash

panel display. This may happen when, for ex-

ample, the battery of the vehicle key button is

very low or flat:

●

Immediately after pushing the starter but-

ton, keep the vehicle key next to the right trim

of the steering column

›››

Fig. 242, as close

as possible to the Kessy logo.

●

The ignition connects and the engine starts

automatically.

Emergency disconnection

If the engine does not switch off after briefly

pressing the starter button, an emergency

disconnect will be required:

241

Driving

●

ess the st

art

er button twice within 3 sec-

onds or press it once for more than 1 sec-

ond

›››

●

The engine turns off automatically.

Engine r

est

t feature

If no valid key is detected inside the vehicle

after the engine stops, you will only have 5

seconds to restart it. A warning will display on

the dash panel screen.

After this interval, it will not be possible to

start the engine without a valid key inside the

vehicle.

Automatic deactivation of the ignition on

vehicles with the Start-Stop system

The ignition is switched off automatically

when the vehicle is stopped and the auto-

matic engine shutdown is active, if:

●

The driver's seat belt is not fastened,

●

the driver does not step on any pedal,

●

the driver door is opened.

After automatically turning off the ignition, if

the dipped beam  is on, the side light re-

mains on for approx. 30 minutes (if the bat-

tery has enough charge). If the driver locks

the vehicle or manually turns off the light, the

side light goes out.

WARNING

Any accidental movement of the vehicle

could result in serious injury.

●

When s

witching on the ignition, do not

press the brake or clutch pedal, otherwise

the engine could start immediately.

WARNING

If vehicle keys are used negligently or with-

out due care, this may cause accidents and

serious injury.

●

ver leave any key inside the vehicle

when exiting. Otherwise, a child or unau-

thorised person could lock the vehicle,

start the engine or connect the ignition

and, in this way, operate electronic equip-

ment (e.g. the windows).

Note

●

Before l

eaving the vehicle, always dis-

connect the ignition manually and, if ap-

propriate, take into account the instruc-

tions on the screen of the dash panel.

●

If the vehicle is stationary for a long time

with the ignition on, the vehicle battery

might be discharged and it might not be

possible to start the engine.

●

In diesel vehicles, there may be a delay in

the engine starting if it requires preheating.

●

If during the STOP phase you press the

START ENGINE STOP

button, the ignition is

switched off and the butt

on flashes.

●

If the indication is displayed on the in-

strument panel display “St

art-Stop system

deactivated: Start the engine manually”,

the START ENGINE STOP

button will blink.

Starting the engine

3 Valid for vehicle: with Keyless Access

Step

Starting the engine with the

start

er button

›››

page 241 (Press

& Drive).

Press and hold the brake pedal until

step 5 is performed.

In v

ehicles with a manual gearbox:

press and hold the clutch down until the

engine starts.

Put the gearbox lever in neutral or the se-

lector l

ever in position P or N.

Briefly press the starter button

›››

Fig. 241

without pressing the accelerator. For the

engine to start there must be a valid key in

the vehicle.

After starting the engine, the light of the

START ENGINE STOP button changes to a

fixed light indicating that the engine has

start

ed.

If the engine does not start, stop and wait

for appro

x. 1 minute before trying again. If

necessary, carry out an emergency start

›››

page 241.

242

Start and driving

Step

Starting the engine with the

start

er button

›››

page 241 (Press

& Drive).

Disconnect the electronic parking brake

when you are about to st

art driving

›››

page 244.

WARNING

Never leave the vehicle with the engine

running, especially if a gear or gear range

is engaged. The vehicl

e could then sudden-

ly move or something strange could hap-

pen that would cause damage, fire or seri-

ous injury.

WARNING

Cold start sprays could explode or cause a

sudden increase in the engine speed.

●

Nev

er use sprays to cold start the engine.

CAUTION

●

The start

er motor or the engine may be

damaged if you try to start the engine while

driving or if you restart it immediately after

switching it off.

●

If the engine is cold, avoid high engine

speeds, pushing the engine too hard and

rapid acceleration.

●

Do not start the engine by pushing the

vehicle or towing it. Unburnt fuel could en-

ter the catalytic converter and damage it.

Note

●

Do not wait until the engine warms up

with the v

ehicle stationary; if you have

good visibility through the windows, start

driving immediately. This helps the engine

reach operating temperature faster and re-

duces emissions.

●

Electrical components with a high power

consumption are switched off temporarily

when the engine starts.

●

When starting with a cold engine, noise

levels may briefly increase. This is quite

normal, and no cause for concern.

●

When the outside temperature is below

+5°C (+41°F), if the engine is diesel, some

smoke may appear under the vehicle when

the fuel-operated auxiliary heater is on.

Stopping the engine

3 Valid for vehicle: with Keyless Access

Step

Switch off the engine with the

start

er button

›››

page 241.

1. Stop the vehicle completely

›››

Press and hold the brake pedal until the

step 4 is performed.

If you are driving an automatic vehicle,

place the select

or lever in position P.

Connect the electronic parking brake

›››

page 244.

Step

Switch off the engine with the

start

er button

›››

page 241.

Briefly press the start-up button

›››

Fig. 241. The START ENGINE STOP

button

blinks again. If the engine fails to switch

off, perform an emergency disconnect

›››

page 241.

If the vehicle is equipped with a manual

gearbox, put it into 1st or reverse.

WARNING

Never switch off the engine while the vehi-

cle is moving. This coul

d cause loss of con-

trol of the vehicle, accidents and serious in-

jury.

●

The airbags and belt tensioners do not

work when the ignition is switched off.

●

The brake servo does not work with the

engine off. Therefore, you need to press the

break pedal harder to brake the vehicle.

●

Power steering does not work when the

engine is not running. You need more

strength to steer when the engine is switch-

ed off.

●

If the ignition is switched off, the steering

column could be locked, making it impossi-

ble to control the vehicle.

CAUTION

If the engine is made to work hard for a long

time, it may ov

erheat after being switched

off. To prevent damage to the engine

243

Driving

before switching it off, leave it idle for ap-

prox. 2 minut

es in neutral.

Note

After switching off the engine, the cooling

an may continue to oper

ate in the engine

compartment for a few more minutes, even

with the ignition off. The radiator fan is au-

tomatically switched off.

“My Beat” Function

For vehicles with a convenience key there is

the “My Beat” function. This f

eat

e provides

an additional indication of the vehicle ignition

system.

When accessing the vehicle, e.g. by opening

the doors with the remote control, the

START ENGINE STOP

button flashes, calling at-

ention t

o the r

elevant starter system button.

Upon switching the ignition on/off, the light of

the START ENGINE STOP

button flashes. With

the engine s

wit

ched off

, after a few seconds,

the STOP ENGINE START

button stops flashing

and goes out.

With the engine running, the

T ENGINE STOP

button light stays on, indi-

cating that the engine is running. The time

that l

apses betw

een the moment the user

arts the engine with the START ENGINE STOP

button and the lighting changes from flashing

to fixed will depend on specific engine size

char

act

eristics. Upon s

witching the ignition

off with the START ENGINE STOP

button, it starts

ashing again.

In v

ehicl

es with the Start-Stop system, the

“My Beat” function also offers additional in-

formation:

●

When the engine stops during the Stop

phase, the light of the START ENGINE STOP

but-

on st

ays on, since

, even though the engine is

off, the Start-Stop system is active.

●

When the engine cannot be stated again

with the Start-Stop system,

›››

page 269, and

needs to be started manually, the

START ENGINE STOP

button flashes to indicate

this f

act.

aking and parking

Inf

ormation on the brakes

New brake pads

or the first 400 km (250 mil

es), ne

w brake

pads have not yet reached their maximum

braking capacity, and need to be “run in” first.

However, you can compensate for the slightly

reduced braking effect by applying more

pressure on the brake pedal. Avoid overload-

ing the brakes while running them in.

Wear

The rate of wear on the brake pads depends

a great deal on how you drive and the condi-

tions in which the vehicle is operated. This is a

particular problem in urban traffic and short

stretches, or with very sporty driving.

Depending on the speed, the braking force

and the environmental conditions (for exam-

ple, the temperature, air humidity, etc.) noises

may be produced on braking.

Wet roads or road salt

In certain situations (for example, on driving

through flooded areas, in severe downpours

or after washing the vehicle) the braking ac-

tion could be delayed if the discs and pads

are damp, or frozen in winter. In this case the

brakes should be “dried” by pressing the

brake pedal several times.

At high speed and with the windscreen wipers

activated, the brake pads will briefly touch

the brake discs. This takes place, although

unnoticeable to the driver, at regular intervals

to improve the response time of the brakes

when they are wet.

The effectiveness of the brakes can also be

temporarily reduced if the vehicle is driven for

some distance without using the brakes when

there is a lot of salt on the road in winter. The

layer of salt that accumulates on the discs

and pads can be removed by gently apply-

ing the brakes a few times.

244

Start and driving

Corrosion

Ther

e may be a t

endency f

or corrosion to

form on the discs and dirt to build up on the

brake pads if the vehicle is used infrequently

or the brakes are not used very often.

If the brakes are not used frequently, or if rust

has formed on the disks, it is advisable to

clean off the pads and disks by braking firmly

a few times at a moderately high speed

›››

ault in the br

e system

If the brake pedal travel should ever increase

suddenly, this may mean that one of the two

brake circuits has failed. Drive immediately to

the nearest specialised workshop and have

the fault repaired. Drive there slowly and re-

member that you will have to apply more

pressure on the brake pedal and allow for

longer stopping distances.

Low brake fluid level

Malfunctions can occur in the brake system if

the brake fluid level is too low. The brake fluid

level is monitored electronically.

Brake servo

The brake servo increases the pressure you

apply to the brake pedal. It works only when

the engine is running.

WARNING

●

Apply the brakes heavily t

o clean the

brake system only in a suitable traffic situa-

tion. Do not put other road users in danger:

there is risk of causing an accident.

●

Ensure the vehicle does not move while in

neutral, when the engine is stopped. Failure

to follow this instruction could result in an

accident.

●

If the brake fluid loses its viscosity and is

subjected to heavy use, vapour bubbles

can form in the brake system. This reduces

the efficiency of the brakes.

CAUTION

●

Never l

et the brakes “drag” by leaving

your foot on the pedal when it is not neces-

sary to brake. This overheats the brakes, re-

sulting in longer stopping distances and

greater wear.

●

Before driving down a long, steep gradi-

ent, it is advisable to reduce speed and se-

lect a lower gear. This makes use of engine

braking and relieves the brakes. If you still

have to use the brakes, it is better to brake

firmly at intervals than to apply the brakes

continuously.

Note

●

If the brake serv

o is out of action, for ex-

ample when the car is being towed, you will

have to press the brake pedal considerably

harder than normal to make up for the lack

of servo assistance

●

If you wish to equip the vehicle with ac-

cessories such as a front spoiler or wheel

covers, it is important that the flow of air to

the front wheels is not obstructed, other-

wise the brakes can overheat.

Control lamps



It lights up red

Brake fluid level too low

›››

page 353 or fault in the

brake system.

 Do not carry on driving!



It lights up red

Electronic parking brake

›››

page 246.

The warning lamp turns off when the electronic park-

ing brake is released.



It lights up green

Auto Hold function activated

›››

page 272.



It lights up yellow

Front brake pads worn.

WARNING

●

If the brake w

arning lamp does not go out

or if it lights up when driving, the brake fluid

245

Driving

level in the reservoir is too low so there is a

risk of an accident

›››

page 353, Brake fluid.

Stop the vehicle and do not drive on. Ob-

tain technical assistance.

●

If the brake warning lamp lights up  to-

gether with the ABS lamp  this could be

due to an ABS fault. This could cause the

rear wheels to lock quickly when you brake.

This could cause the rear to break away.

Risk of skidding. Stop the vehicle and seek

technical assistance.

Electronic parking brake

Fig. 243

Centre console, lower part: electron-

ic parking br

e butt

on.

The electronic parking brake replaces the

handbr

Activating the electronic parking brake

The electronic parking brake can be activa-

ted whenever the vehicle is at a standstill,

even when the ignition is switched off. Acti-

vate it whenever you leave or park the vehi-

cle.

●

Pull and hold the 

›››

Fig. 243 button.

●

The parking brake is activated when the

control light of the

›››

Fig. 243 button (arrow)

and the red  control light of the display in

the dash panel are on.

●

Release the button.

Releasing the electronic parking brake

●

Switch the ignition on.

●

Press the button 

›››

Fig. 243. At the same

time step hard on the brake pedal or, if the

engine is running, press the accelerator pedal

slightly.

●

The control light of the

›››

Fig. 243 button

(arrow) and the red  control light of the dis-

play in the dash panel go out.

Automatic release of the electronic park-

ing brake on starting the engine

The electronic parking brake is automatically

switched off when starting if, after the driver's

door is closed and the driver's seat belt fas-

tened, any of the following situations take

place:

●

In vehicles with automatic transmission: a

gear range is engaged or the vehicle is

switched to another one and the accelerator

pedal is lightly pressed.

●

In vehicles with manual transmission: the

clutch pedal is pressed fully before starting

off and the accelerator is pedal lightly press-

ed.

●

To facilitate certain manoeuvres there are

exceptions that allow the automatic parking

brake to be released without the driver's seat

belt being fastened.

The parking brake can be prevented from be-

ing automatically released by continuously

pulling up the 

›››

Fig. 243 switch when

starting off.

The electronic parking brake is not discon-

nected until the  button is released. This

can facilitate starting off when a heavy load

is towed

›››

page 329.

Automatic activation of the electronic

parking brake when exiting the vehicle in-

correctly

In vehicles with automatic transmission, the

electronic parking brake is activated auto-

matically when exiting the vehicle incorrectly

if:

●

The selector lever is in the D/S or R position

or in the Tiptronic selector gate.

●

AND: the vehicle is stationary.

246

Start and driving

●

AND: the driv

er door is open.

Emer

gency br

aking function

Only use the emergency brake function if you

are unable to stop the vehicle with the foot

brake

›››

●

Pull and hold the 

›

Fig. 243 button in

this position to forcefully stop the vehicle. At

the same time, an acoustic warning can be

heard.

●

To stop the braking process, release the

button or press the accelerator.

WARNING

The improper use of the electronic parking

brake can cause accidents and serious in-

jury.

●

ver use the electronic parking brake to

stop the vehicle, unless it is an emergency.

Braking distances can be considerably lon-

ger, since, under certain circumstances,

only the rear wheels brake. Always use the

foot brake.

●

Never accelerate from the engine when a

gear range or a gear is engaged and the

engine is running. The vehicle could move,

even if the electronic parking brake is acti-

vated.

CAUTION

To prevent the vehicle from unintentionally

moving when parking it, first apply the

electronic parking brake and then remove

your foot from the br

ake pedal.

Note

●

In v

ehicles with a manual gearbo

x, re-

leasing the clutch and accelerating at the

same time automatically disconnects the

electronic parking brake.

●

If the vehicle battery is flat, it will not be

possible to disconnect the electronic park-

ing brake. Use the jump-start

›››



page 59.

●

When the electronic parking brake is ap-

plied or released, noises may be heard.

●

The system performs automatic and au-

dible tests sporadically in the parked vehi-

cle if some time elapses without the elec-

tronic parking brake being used.

Parking

The electronic parking brake should always

be applied when the v

ehicl

e is park

ed.

Always note the following points when park-

ing the vehicle:

–

Use the brake pedal to stop the vehicle.

–

Apply the electronic parking brake.

–

Put it in 1st gear.

–

Switch the engine off and remove the key

from the ignition. Turn the steering wheel

slightly to engage the steering lock.

–

Never leave a vehicle key in the vehicle.

Additional notes on parking the vehicle on

gradients:

Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicle

rolls against the kerb if it started to roll.

●

If the vehicle is parked facing downhill, turn

the front wheels so that they point towards

the kerb.

●

If the vehicle is parked facing uphill, turn

the front wheels so that they point away from

the kerb.

●

Secure the vehicle as usual by applying the

electronic parking brake firmly and putting it

in 1st gear.

WARNING

●

Take measur

es to reduce the risk of injury

when you leave your vehicle unattended.

●

Never park where the hot exhaust system

could ignite inflammable materials, such as

dry grass, low bushes, spilt fuel etc.

●

Never allow vehicle occupants to remain

in the vehicle when it is locked. They would

be unable to open the vehicle from the in-

side, and could become trapped in the ve-

hicle in an emergency. In the event of an

emergency, locked doors will delay assis-

tance to vehicle occupants.

247

Driving

●

Never l

eave children alone in the vehicle.

They could set the vehicle in motion, for ex-

ample, by releasing the electronic parking

brake or the gearshift lever, which would

cause the vehicle to move, but uncontrolla-

bly.

●

Depending on weather conditions, it may

become extremely hot or cold inside the

vehicle. This can be fatal.

Braking and stability sys-

tems

Control l

amps



It lights up

Fault in the ESC or disconnection caused by the sys-

tem.

As the ESC operat

es in conjunction with the ABS, the

ESC light will also come on if a fault should occur in

the ABS.



Flashes

ESC or ASR activated.



It lights up

ASR manually deactivated.

Or: ESC in Sport mode

›››

page 250.



It lights up

ABS faulty or does not work.

The control lamps light up together when the

ignition is switched on and shoul

d turn off af-

ter approximately 2 seconds. This is the time

taken for the function check.

Hydraulic Brake Assist (HBA)

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

The ESC helps t

o impr

ve safety. It reduces

the tendency to skid and improves the stabili-

ty and roadholding of the vehicle. The ESC

detects critical handling situations, such as

vehicle understeer or oversteer, or wheelspin

on the driving wheels. It stabilises the vehicle

by braking individual wheels or by reducing

the engine torque. The warning lamp will

flash on the instrument panel when the ESC is

intervening .

The ESC includes the anti-lock brake system

(ABS), the hydraulic brake assist (HBA), the

traction control system (ASR), electronic dif-

ferential lock (EDS), electronic torque control

(XDS) and tractor-trailer sway mitigation*.

ESC also helps stabilise the vehicle by

changing the torque.

Anti-lock brake system (ABS)

ABS prevents the wheels from locking up un-

der braking until the vehicle has reached a

virtual standstill. You can continue to steer the

vehicle even when the brakes are on full.

Keep your foot on the brake pedal and do not

pump the brakes. You will feel the brake pedal

pulsate while the ABS is working.

Hydraulic Brake Assist (HBA)

The brake assist system can reduce the re-

quired braking distance. The braking force is

automatically boosted if you press the brake

pedal quickly in an emergency. You must

keep pressing the brake pedal until the dan-

ger has passed.

Traction control system (ASR)

In the event of wheelspin, the traction control

system reduces the engine torque to match

the amount of grip available. This helps the

car to start moving, accelerate or climb a

gradient.

Electronic differential lock (EDL)

When the EDL detects wheelspin, it brakes

the spinning wheel and directs the power to

the other driven wheel. This function is active

up to approximately 100 km/h (62 mph).

To prevent the disc brake of the braked wheel

from overheating, the EDL cuts out automati-

cally if subjected to excessive loads. The

248

Start and driving

vehicle can still be driven. The EDL will switch

on again aut

omatically when the br

e has

cooled down.

Tractor-trailer sway mitigation*

If the vehicle is pulling a trailer, it will control

the following: tractor-trailers tend to sway.

When the swaying of the trailer is felt by the

vehicle and detected by the ESC, it will auto-

matically brake the towing vehicle within the

limits of the system and mitigate the sway.

Tractor-trailer sway mitigation is not available

in all countries.

Electronic torque management (XDS)

When taking a curve, the driveshaft differen-

tial mechanism allows the outer wheel to turn

at a higher speed than the inner wheel. In this

way, the wheel that is turning faster (outer

wheel) receives less drive torque than the in-

ner wheel. This may mean that in certain sit-

uations the torque delivered to the inner

wheel is too high, causing the wheels to spin.

On the other hand, the outer wheel is receiv-

ing a lower drive torque than it could transmit.

This causes an overall loss of lateral grip on

the front axle, resulting in understeer or

“lengthening” of the trajectory.

The XDS system can detect and correct this

effect via the sensors and signals of the ESC.

Via the ESC, the XDS will brake the inside

wheel and counter the excess driving torque

of that wheel. This means that the driver's de-

sired trajectory is much more precise.

The XDS system works in combination with

the ESC and is always active, even when ASR

traction control is disconnected, or the ESC in

Sport mode or disconnected.

Multi-collision Brake

In an accident, the multi-collision brake can

help the driver by braking to avoid the risk of

skidding during the accident, which could

lead to further collisions.

The multi-collision brake works for front, side

or rear accidents, when the airbag control

unit records its activation level and the acci-

dent takes place at a speed of over 10 km/h

(6 mph). The ESC automatically brakes the

vehicle, as long as the accident has not dam-

aged the ESC, the brake hydraulics or the on-

board network

The following actions control automatic brak-

ing during the accident:

●

When the driver presses the accelerator,

the automatic braking does not take place.

●

When the braking pressure through press-

ing the brake pedal is greater than the sys-

tem’s braking pressure the vehicle will brake

automatically.

●

Multi-collision braking will not be available

if ESC is malfunctioning.

WARNING

●

The ESC, ABS, ASR, EDS and the electron-

ic t

orque control system cannot exceed the

limits imposed by the laws of physics. Al-

ways bear this in mind, especially on wet or

slippery roads. If you notice the systems

cutting in, you should reduce your speed

immediately to suit the road and traffic

conditions. Do not be encouraged to take

risks by the presence of more safety sys-

tems. If you do, an accident may occur.

●

Please remember that the accident risk

always increases if you drive fast, espe-

cially in corners or on a slippery road, or if

you follow too close behind the vehicle in

front of you. The ESC, ABS, brake assist,

EDS and the electronic torque control sys-

tem cannot prevent accidents: risk of acci-

dents!

●

Accelerate with caution on slippery sur-

faces (for example, icy or snow-covered).

Despite the control systems, the driven

wheels could spin, affecting the stability of

the vehicle: risk of accident!

Note

●

The ABS and ASR will only operate cor

rectly if the four wheels have identical

tyres. Any differences in the rolling radius

of the tyres can cause the system to re-

duce engine power when this is not desired.

●

The regulating processes of the systems

can make noises when they intervene.

249

Driving

●

If the warning lamp

 lights up, or  al-

ternatively, there could be a fault

›››

page 122.

Switching on/off the ESC and ASR

The ESC is switched on automatically when

the engine is started, and only w

orks when

the engine is running and includes the ABS,

EDS and ASR systems.

The ASR function should only be switched off

in situations in which traction is insufficient, in-

cluding:

●

When driving in deep snow or on surfaces

that are not very firm.

●

o “free” the vehicle if it gets stuck.

Then switch the ASR function back on.

Depending on the finishes and versions, there

is the possibility of disconnecting only the

ASR or activating the ESC Sport mode.

Disable ASR

The Easy Connect system menu is used to

switch off the ASR

›››



page 35. The trac-

tion control system will be disabled.

The control lamp  lights up. For vehicles with

a driver information system* the driver will be

informed that ASR is disabled.

Activate ASR

The Easy Connect system menu

›››



page 35 is used to switch on the ASR.

The traction control system will be enabled.

The control lamp  switches off. For vehicles

with a driver information system* the driver

will be informed that ASR is enabled.

ESC in “Sport” mode

Sport mode can be connected via the Easy

Connect

›››



page 35 system menu. In

front-wheel drive vehicles, the interventions

by the ESC and the ASR are limited. In four-

wheel drive vehicles, the interventions by the

ESC are limited and the ASR is switched off

completely

›››

The contr

ol l

amp

 lights up. For vehicles with

a driver information system* the driver will be

informed that:

Electronic Stability Control

(ESC): sport. Warning! Limited

stability

Disable ESC “Sport” mode

Through the Easy Connect system menu

›››



page 35. The warning lamp  will

switch off. For vehicles with a driver informa-

tion system* the driver will be informed that:

Electronic Stability Control

(ESC): on

ESC in “Offroad” mode

Turn the Driving Experience button to select

the Offroad mode and connect it

›››

page 304. The interventions of the ESC, as

well as of the ASR, EDS and the ABS, adapt to

irregular terrain.

In the following exceptional situations it may

make sense to activate the Offroad mode to

allow the wheels to spin:

●

When “swinging” the vehicle to get it un-

stuck.

●

Driving in deep snow or on loose surfaces.

●

When driving on rough terrain with much of

the car's weight is lifted off the wheels (axle

articulation).

●

Steep descents with braking on unpaved

terrain.

Only for 4Drive models.

250

Start and driving

For your safety we recommend that you turn

off the Offr

oad mode when it is not absolut

ly necessary.

Disabl

e the ESC Offroad mode

Turn the Driving Experience button to select a

different driving mode

›››

page 304.

ESC in “Snow” mode

Turn the Driving Experience button to select

the “Snow” mode and connect it.

›››

page 304 Traction control system (ASR) in-

terventions adjust to the adhesion of snowy

roads.

Disable the ESC “Snow” mode

Turn the Driving Experience button to select a

different driving mode

›››

page 304.

WARNING

The ESC Sport mode should be activated

only when traffic conditions and the ability

of the driv

er allow it. Danger of skidding!

●

With ESC in Sport mode, the stabilising

function will be limited to allow for a sporti-

er drive. The driving wheels could spin and

the vehicle could skid.

WARNING

You should only activate the Offroad Mode

or disable the ASR if the experience of the

driv

er and traffic conditions allow it. Dan-

ger of skidding!

●

With the Offroad mode activated, the

stabilisation function is limited. In particu-

lar, if the road is too smooth and slippery,

the driving wheels could spin and the vehi-

cle could skid.

Note

If the ASR or the ESC is disconnected or the

Sport mode is select

ed, cruise control* will

be switched off.

Manual gearbox

Changing gear

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 41

In some countries the clutch pedal must be

fully pressed down for the engine to start.

Selecting reverse gear

●

Engage reverse gear only when the vehicle

is stopped.

Changing down gears

While driving, changing down a gear must al-

ways be done gradually, i.e. to the gear di-

rectly below and when the engine speed is

not too high

›››

. Changing down while by-

passing one or v

arious gears at high speeds

or at high engine speeds can damage the

clut

ch and the gearbo

x, even if the clutch

pedal remains depressed

›››

WARNING

When the engine is running, the vehicle will

start t

o move as soon as a gear is engaged

and the clutch released. This is also the

case with the electronic parking brake

switched on.

●

Never engage reverse gear when the ve-

hicle is moving.

WARNING

If the gear is changed down inappropriate-

ly by selecting a gear that is too l

ow, you

may lose control of the vehicle, causing an

accident and serious injuries.

Only for 4Drive models.

251

Driving

CAUTION

When travelling at high speeds or at high

engine speeds, selecting a gear that is too

ow can cause considerable damage to the

clutch and the gearbox. This can also oc-

cur if the clutch pedal is pressed and held

and it does not engage.

CAUTION

To prevent damage and avoid premature

wear, pl

ease observe the following:

●

Do not rest your hand on the gear lever

while driving. The pressure applied by your

hand is transmitted to the gearbox selector

forks.

●

Always ensure that the vehicle is com-

pletely stopped before engaging the re-

verse gear.

●

Always press the clutch to the floor when

changing gears.

●

Never hold the vehicle “on the clutch” on

hills with the engine on.

Automatic gearbox/DSG au-

omatic gearbo

Intr

oduction

Your vehicle is equipped with an electronical-

ly contr

oll

ed manual gearbo

x. Torque be-

tween the engine and the gearbox is trans-

mitted via two independent clutches. They

replace the torque converter found on con-

ventional automatic gearboxes and allow for

smooth, uninterrupted acceleration of the ve-

hicle.

The tiptronic system allows the driver to

change gears manually if desired

›››

page 255, Engaging gears with the tip-

tronic mode*.

Control lamps



It lights up green

The brake pedal is not engaged.

To select a r

ange of gears, press the brake pedal.



Flashes green

The interlock button on the selector lever is not

pressed.

Mov

ement of the vehicle is prevented. Engage the se-

lector lever lock.

Selector lever positions

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 41

The selector lever position engaged is high-

lighted on the display in the instrument clus-

ter. With the selector lever in the manual

gearbox positions G, D, E and S, the engaged

gear is also indicated on the display.

P – Parking lock

When the selector lever is in this position, the

driven wheels are locked mechanically. The

parking lock must be engaged only when the

vehicle is stationary

›››

The int

erl

ock butt

on (the button on the selec-

tor lever handle) must be pressed in and si-

multaneously the brake pedal must be de-

pressed before moving the selector lever ei-

ther in or out of position P.

R – Reverse gear

Reverse gear must be engaged only when

the vehicle is stationary and the engine is

idling

›››

o mo

e the selector lever to position R, the

interlock button must be pressed in and at the

same time the brake pedal must be de-

pressed. The reverse lights come on when the

selector lever is in the R position with the igni-

tion on.

N – Neutral (idling)

With the selector lever in this position, the

gear is in neutral.

252

Start and driving

D/S – Permanent drive (forward) position

The sel

ect

or l

ever in the D/S position enables

the gears to be controlled in normal mode

(D) or Sport (S). To select Sport mode (S),

move the selector lever backwards. Moving

the lever again will select normal mode (D).

The selected driving mode is shown on the in-

strument panel display.

In normal mode (D), the gearbox automati-

cally selects the best gear ratio. This de-

pends on the engine load, the road speed

and the dynamic gear control programme

(DCP).

Sport mode (S) must be selected for a sporty

driving style. This setting makes use of the en-

gine's maximum power output. When accel-

erating the gear shifts will be noticeable.

Press the brake pedal to move the selector

lever from N to D/S when the vehicle is sta-

tionary or at speeds below 3 km/h (2 mph)

›››

Under cert

ain cir

cumst

ances (e.g. when driv-

ing in mountains) it can be advantageous to

switch temporarily to tiptronic mode

›››

page 255, in order to manually select

gear ratios to suit the driving conditions.

WARNING

●

Take car

e not to accidentally press the

accelerator pedal when the vehicle is stop-

ped. The vehicle could otherwise start

moving immediately (in some cases even if

the parking brake is engaged) r

esulting in

the risk of an accident.

●

Never move the selector lever to R or P

when driving. Failure to follow this instruc-

tion could result in an accident.

●

With selector lever in any position (ex-

cept P) the vehicle must always be held

with the foot brake when the engine is run-

ning. This is because an automatic gearbox

still transmits power even at idling speed,

and the vehicle tends to “creep”. The ac-

celerator pedal must on no account be

pressed inadvertently when a gear is en-

gaged with the vehicle stationary. The ve-

hicle could otherwise start moving immedi-

ately (in some cases even if the parking

brake is engaged) resulting in the risk of an

accident.

●

While you are selecting a gear and the

vehicle is stopped with the engine running,

do not accelerate. Failure to follow this in-

struction could result in an accident.

●

As a driver you should never leave your

vehicle if the engine is running and a gear is

engaged. If you have to leave your vehicle

while the engine is running, apply the elec-

tronic parking brake and engage the park-

ing lock (P).

●

To avoid accidents, apply the electrome-

chanical parking brake and put the selec-

tor lever in position P before opening the

bonnet and working on the vehicle with the

engine running. Please always observe the

important safety warnings

›››

page 347,

Working in the engine compartment.

Note

●

If the sel

ector l

ever is moved accidental-

ly to N when driving, release the accelera-

tor and let the engine speed drop to idling

before selecting gear range D or S again.

●

Should the power supply to the selector

lever be interrupted in position P, the selec-

tor lever will be locked. If this should hap-

pen the manual release can be used

›››



page 41.

Selector lever lock

Fig. 244

Selector lever lock.

The selector lever lock prevents gears from

being engaged inadv

ert

ently, so that the v

hicle is not set in motion unintentionally.

253

Driving

The selector lever lock is released as follows:

–

Switch the ignition on.

–

Press the brake pedal and, at the same

time

, hol

d the l

ock button in the direction of

the arrow

›››

Fig. 244.

Automatic selector lever lock

With the ignition switched on, the selector

lever is locked in the positions P and N. The

brake pedal must be pressed to release the

lever while pressing the release button if the

selector lever is in the position P. As a remind-

er for the driver, with the lever in positions P or

N the following message will be shown on the

display:

When stationary, apply footbrake

while selecting a gear.

Level lock only engages with the vehicle sta-

tionary and at speeds of up to 5 km/h

(3 mph). At speeds of over 5 km/h (3 mph) the

lever lock is automatically deactivated in po-

sition N.

The selector lever lock is not engaged if the

selector lever is moved quickly through posi-

tion N (e.g. when shifting from R to D). This

makes it possible, for instance, to rock the ve-

hicle “backwards and forwards” if it is stuck.

The selector lever lock engages automatical-

ly if the brake pedal is not depressed and the

lever is in position N for more than about two

seconds.

Interlock button

The interlock button on the selector lever

handle prevents the driver from inadvertently

engaging certain gears. Press the button in to

disengage the selector lever lock.

Safety interlock for ignition key

Depending on the country, once the ignition

has been turned off, the key may be removed

only if the gear selector is in position P. While

the key is not in the ignition, the selector lever

is locked in position P.

Note

●

If the selector l

ever lock does not en-

gage, there is a fault. The transmission is in-

terrupted to prevent the vehicle from acci-

dentally moving. Follow the procedure be-

low in order for the selector lever lock to

engage again:

–

With a 6-speed gearbox: press the

brake pedal and release it again.

–

With a 7-speed gearbox: press the

brake pedal. Move the selector lever to

position P or N and subsequently en-

gage a gear.

●

Despite a gear being engaged, the vehi-

cle does not move forwards or back. Pro-

ceed to the next mode:

–

When the vehicle does not move in the

required direction, the system may not

have the gear range correctly engag-

ed. Press the brake pedal and engage

the gear range again.

–

If the vehicl

e still does not move in the

required direction, there is a system

malfunction. Seek specialist assistance

and have the system checked.

254

Start and driving

Engaging gears with the tiptronic

mode*

Fig. 245

Centre console: changing gear with

tiptr

onic

Fig. 246

Steering wheel: automatic gearbox

ers

The tiptronic gives the driver the option to

change gears manually.

Changing gear manually with the selector

It is possible to change to tiptronic mode,

both when the vehicle is stopped and while

driving.

–

To switch to tiptronic mode, move the selec-

tor lever from position D/S to the right. As

soon as the change is made the selector

level will be shown in the position M on the

instrument panel display (for example M4

means that the fourth gear is engaged).

–

Move the selector lever forwards

to se-

ect a higher gear

›

Fig. 245.

–

Move the selector lever backwards

–

sel

ect a l

wer gear.

–

To exit the Triptonic mode, move the selec-

tor lever to the left.

Changing gear manually with the gear-

shift paddles*

The gearshift paddles can be used when the

selector lever is in the position D/S or M.

–

Press the gearshift paddle

to select a

higher gear

›

Fig. 246.

–

Press the gearshift paddle

–

to select a

er gear.

–

To exit the Triptonic mode, pull the right-

hand lever towards the steering wheel for

approximately 1 second or move the selec-

tor lever to the left.

–

With the selector lever in position D/S, if no

paddle is operated during a short period of

time, the gearbox control system switches

back to automatic mode. To switch to per-

manent manual gear change using the

gearshift paddles, move the selector lever

from position D/S to the right.

When accelerating, the gearbox automati-

cally shifts up into the next gear shortly be-

fore the maximum engine speed is reached.

If you select a lower gear, the automatic

gearbox will not shift down until there is no

risk of over-revving the engine.

When the kick-down feature is used, the

gearbox shifts down to a lower gear, depend-

ing on road speed and engine speed.

Driving tips

The gearbox changes gear ratios automati-

cally as the v

ehicl

e mo

ves.

The engine can only start with the selector

lever in position P or N. At low temperatures,

below -10°C (+14°F), the engine can only

start with the selector lever in position P.

Starting the vehicle

–

Press and hold the brake pedal.

–

Press and hold the interlock button (the

button on the selector lever handle), move

255

Driving

the selector lever to the desired position, for

inst

ance

›››

page 252, and release the

interlock button.

–

Wait for the gearbox to engage the gear (a

slight movement can be felt).

–

Release the brake and press the accelera-

tor

›››

opping briefly

–

Apply the f

oot br

ake to hold the vehicle

briefly when stationary (for instance at traf-

fic lights). Do not press the accelerator.

Stopping/Parking

If the driver door is opened and the selector

lever is not in position P, the vehicle could

move. The driver message will be:  Gear

change: selector lever in the drive

position!. Additionally, a buzzer will sound.

–

Press and hold the brake pedal

›››

–

Apply the electronic parking brake.

–

Move the selector lever to position P.

Hol

ding the car on a hill

–

ays apply the brake pedal firmly to pre-

vent the vehicle from “moving backwards; if

necessary, apply the electronic parking

brake”

›››

. Do not try t

o st

op the v

ehicle

“rolling back” by increasing the engine

speed when a gear is engaged (pressing

the accelerator)

›››

ting off uphill without the Aut

o Hold

function activated

–

Pull on the electronic parking brake button.

–

Once you have engaged a gear, gently

press the accelerator and pull on the elec-

tronic parking brake button.

Starting off uphill with the Auto Hold func-

tion activated

–

Once you have engaged a gear, take your

foot off the brake pedal and gently press

the accelerator.

Driving downhill: in some situations (on

mountain roads or when towing a trailer or

caravan) it can be advantageous to switch

temporarily to the manual gearbox pro-

gramme so that the gear ratios can be selec-

ted manually to suit the driving conditions

›››

On l

el ground it is sufficient to move the se-

lector lever to position P. On slopes, first en-

gage the parking brake and then put the se-

lection lever into the P position. This avoids

overloading the locking mechanism and it will

be easier to move the selector lever from po-

sition P.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings

›››

in Selec-

tor le

ver positions on page 253.

●

Never allow the brake to rub and do not

use the brake pedal too often or for long

periods. Constant braking causes over-

heating in the brakes. This could signifi-

cantly reduce braking power, increase

braking distance or even result in the total

failure of the brake system.

●

If you have to stop on a hill and to avoid

rolling backwards, always keep the vehicle

braked using the brake pedal or use the

electronic parking brake.

CAUTION

●

If you stop the vehicl

e on a gradient, do

not attempt to stop it from rolling by de-

pressing the accelerator when a gear has

been selected. This could cause overheat-

ing and damage the automatic gearbox.

Apply the electronic parking brake or keep

the brake pedal pressed to prevent the ve-

hicle from rolling backwards.

●

If you allow the car to roll with the selec-

tor lever in position N with the engine

switched off, the automatic gearbox will be

damaged as it will not be lubricated.

●

In certain driving situations or traffic con-

ditions, such as frequently starting, pro-

longed “creeping” of the vehicle or traffic

jams with continuous stoppages, the gear-

box could overheat causing damage! If the

256

Start and driving

warning lamp  lights up, stop the v

ehicle

as soon as possible and wait for the gear-

box to cool

›››

page 259.

Kick-down feature

The kick-down feature allows maximum ac-

celeration t

o be reached.

When the accelerator pedal is pressed right

down past the point of resistance at full throt-

tle, the gearbox will shift down to a lower

gear, depending on road speed and engine

speed. The upshift to the next higher gear is

delayed until the engine reaches maximum

rpm.

WARNING

Please note that if the road surface is slip-

pery or wet, the kick-do

wn feature could

cause the driving wheels to spin, which

could result in skidding.

Launch control program

3 Valid for vehicles: with Launch-Control/6-

Speed DSG with diesel engines superior to 125

kW and petr

ol engines superior to 140 kW.

The Launch control programme enables

maximum acceleration.

Condition: the engine must have reached op-

erating temperature and the steering wheel

must not be turned.

The engine speed for launch-control is differ-

ent on petrol and diesel engines. To use the

launch-control you must disconnect the anti-

slip regulation (ASR) through the Easy Con-

nect system menu

›››



page 35. The

warning lamp  will stay switched on or will

flash slowly depending on whether or not the

vehicle has a driver information system*.

On vehicles with the driver information sys-

tem, the ESC lamp lights up permanently and

the corresponding text message Stability

control deactivated (temporary) appears

on the instrument panel to indicate the deac-

tivation status.

–

When the engine is running, switch off the

traction control (ASR)

–

urn the selector lever to the position “S” or

tiptronic, or else select the sport driving

mode from the SEAT Drive Profile*

›››

page 303.

–

Press the brake pedal firmly with your left

foot and hold it down for at least one sec-

ond.

–

With your right foot, press the accelerator

down to the full throttle or kick-down posi-

tion. The engine speed will stabilise at

about 3,200 rpm (petrol engine) or about

2,000 rpm (diesel engine).

–

Take your left foot off the brake pedal.

WARNING

●

Always adapt your driving st

yle to the

traffic conditions.

●

Only use the launch control programme

when road and traffic conditions permit,

and make sure your manner of driving and

accelerating the vehicle does not incon-

venience or endanger other road users.

●

Make sure that the ESC remains switched

on. Please note that when the ASR and ESC

are deactivated, the wheels may start to

spin, causing the vehicle to lose grip. Risk

of accident!

Vehicles without driver information system: the

warning lamp fl

ashes slowly/Vehicles with driver

information system: the warning lamp stays on.

257

Driving

●

After putting the vehicl

e into gear, the

“sport” mode of the ESC should be deacti-

vated again by briefly pressing the OFF

button.

Note

●

Aft

er using the Launch contr

ol pro-

gramme, the temperature in the gearbox

may have increased considerably. In this

case, the programme could be disabled for

several minutes. The programme can be

used again after the cooling phase.

●

Accelerating with the Launch control pro-

gramme places a heavy load on all parts of

the vehicle. This can result in increased

wear and tear.

Downhill speed control*

The downhill speed control function helps the

driv

er when driving do

wn st

eep gradients.

Downhill speed control is activated when the

selector lever is in D/S and the driver applies

the foot brake. The automatic gearbox auto-

matically engages a lower gear that is suita-

ble for the slope. The downhill speed control

function attempts to maintain the speed at

which the vehicle was travelling when the

foot brake was applied (subject to the laws of

physics and technical drive limitations). It

may be necessary to adjust the speed again

using the foot brake in certain situations. Giv-

en that the downhill speed control can only

change down to 3rd gear, on very steep de-

scents the tiptronic mode may be required. In

this case, manually reduce the tiptronic to

2nd or 1st gear to use the engine brake and

reduce the charge on the brakes.

Downhill speed control is deactivated as

soon as the road levels out again or you press

the accelerator pedal.

On vehicles with cruise control system*

›››

page 274, downhill speed control is acti-

vated when you set a cruising speed.

WARNING

The downhill speed control cannot defy the

laws of physics. Theref

ore, speed cannot

be maintained constant in all situations. Al-

ways be prepared to use the brakes!

Inertia mode

The inertia mode enables the kinetic energy

of the v

ehicl

e t

o be harnessed enabling cer-

tain stretches to be driven without using the

accelerator. This enables fuel to be saved.

Use the inertia mode to “let the vehicle roll”

before, for example, arriving in a town.

Switching on inertia mode

Condition: selector lever must be in position

D, gradients below 12 %.

–

Select, in SEAT Drive Profile*, Eco mode

›››

page 303.

–

Take your foot off the accelerator.

The driver message Inertia will be dis-

played. At speeds higher than 20 km/h (12

mph), the gearbox will automatically disen-

gage and the vehicle will roll freely, without

the effect of the engine brake. While the vehi-

cle rolls, the engine runs at idling speed.

Stopping inertia mode

–

Press the brake or the accelerator pedal.

To make use of the braking force and switch

off the engine again, simply press the brake

pedal briefly.

Applying both the inertia mode (= prolonged

section with less energy) and the switching

off using inertia (= shorter section without

the need for fuel) facilitates improved fuel

consumption and emission balance.

WARNING

●

If the inertia mode has been swit

ched on,

take into account, when approaching an

obstacle and releasing the accelerator

pedal, that the vehicle will not decelerate

in the usual manner: risk of accident!

●

When using inertia mode while travelling

down hills, the vehicle can increase speed:

risk of accident!

258

Start and driving

●

If other users drive your vehicl

e, warn

them about inertia mode.

Note

●

Iner

tia mode is only avail

able in eco

(SEAT Drive Profile*) driving mode.

●

The driver message Inertia is only dis-

played with the current consumption. In in-

ertia mode the gear will no longer be dis-

played (for example “E” will appear instead

of “E7”).

●

On downhill sections with gradients

above 15 %, the inertia mode will automati-

cally be switched off temporarily.

Emergency program

A backup programme is in place if a fault

shoul

d occur in the contr

ol syst

em.

If all the positions of the selector lever are

shown over a light background on the instru-

ment panel display, there is a system fault

and the automatic gearbox will operate in

with the backup programme. When the back-

up programme is activated, it is possible to

drive the vehicle, however, at low speeds and

within a selected range of gears. In some ca-

ses driving in reverse gear may not be pos-

sible.

CAUTION

If the gearbox operates with the backup

programme

, take the vehicle to a special-

ised workshop and have the fault repaired

without delay.

Indications on the instrument panel

display

Clutch



Clutch overheating! Please stop!

The clutch has ov

erheated and could be

damaged. Stop the vehicle and wait for the

gearbox to cool with the engine at idling

speed and the selector lever in position P.

When the warning lamp and the driver mes-

sage switch off, have the fault corrected by a

specialised workshop without delay. If the

warning lamp and the driver message do not

switch off, do not continue driving. Seek spe-

cialist assistance.

Gearbox malfunctions

 Gearbox: Fault! Stop the vehicle

and place the lever in the posi-

tion P.

There is a fault in the gearbox. Stop the vehi-

cle in a safe place and do not continue driv-

ing. Seek specialist assistance.

 Gearbox: System fault! You may

continue driving.

Have the fault corr

ected by a specialised

workshop without delay.

 Gearbox: System fault! You can

continue driving with restric-

tions. Reverse gear disabled

Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop

and have the fault repaired without delay.

 Gearbox: System fault! You can

continue driving in D until

switching off the engine

Stop the vehicle in a safe place well away

from moving traffic. Seek specialist assis-

tance.

 Gearbox: too hot. Adapt your

driving accordingly

Continue driving at moderate speeds. When

the warning lamp switches off, you can con-

tinue driving in a normal manner.

 Gearbox: press the brake and en-

gage a gear again.

If the fault was caused by a gearbox with a

high temperature, this driver message will be

displayed when the gearbox has cooled

again.

259

Driving

Gear-change recommenda-

tion

Choosing the ideal gear

Fig. 247

Instrument panel: gear-change indi-

cat

or (manual gearbo

x).

While driving, and depending on vehicle

equipment, the instrument panel displ

ay may

sho

w a r

ecommendation with the gear num-

ber that would be advisable to save fuel.

In vehicles with an automatic gearbox, the

selector lever must be in the tiptronic position

›››

page 255.

No recommendation will appear if the opti-

mal gear is already engaged. The current

gear will be displayed.

Display Meaning



The optimal gear is selected.

  

Changing to a higher gear is rec-

ommended.

  

Changing to a lower gear is rec-

ommended.

Information regarding the “cleanliness” of

the particulat

e filter

The exhaust system manager detects that

the particulate filter is nearly saturated and

contributes to self-cleaning by recommend-

ing the optimal gear. For this reason, it might

be necessary to drive for a short time at a

high rpm.

WARNING

The gear change indicator is only an auxili-

ary function and in no case should be a

substitut

e for careful driving.

●

The responsibility of choosing the correct

gear depending on the situation (e.g. over-

taking, driving up or down a slope or towing

a trailer) lies with the driver.

For the sake of the environment

Selecting the correct gear can help to save

fuel.

Note

The recommended gear indication turns off

when the clutch pedal is pressed in v

ehi-

cles with manual gearbox or when the se-

lector lever is removed from the tiptronic

position in vehicles with an automatic gear-

box.

Steering

Information rel

ated to steering the

vehicle

Electro-mechanical power steering assists

the driv

er when st

eering.

ectro-mechanical power steering adapts

electronically to the speed of the car, torque

and turning angle.

If the power steering should fail at any time or

the engine is switched off (for instance when

being towed), the car can still be steered, as

long as the key remains in the ignition. How-

ever, more effort than normal will be required

to turn the steering wheel.

Progressive steering

Depending on the vehicle’s features, it may or

may not incorporate a progressive steering

system.

260

Start and driving

In cit

y traffic you do not need to turn so much

on parking, manoeuvring or in v

ery tight t

urns.

On the road or on the motorway, progressive

steering transmits, for example, in bends, a

sportier, more direct and noticeably more dy-

namic driving sensation.

Power-assisted steering

Power-assisted steering helps the driver in

critical situations. It recommends the rotation

direction of the steering wheel to perform a

corrective manoeuvre (counter-steering),

thereby causing a small turn of the wheel in

the correct direction to avoid skidding

›››

WARNING

Power-assisted steering, together with the

ESC, helps the driver to contr

ol vehicle

steering in critical situations. However, the

driver is ultimately responsible for steering

the vehicle at all times. Power-assisted

steering does not remove this responsibili-

ty.

Control lamp



It lights up red

The electromechanical steering is damaged.

Do not continue driving. Stop the vehicle safely and

as soon as possible.

Have the steering checked immediately by a special-

ised workshop.



It lights up yellow

The operation of the electromechanical steering is

limited.

See a specialised workshop immediat

ely and have

the steering checked.

If the yellow warning lamp does not light up again af-

ter the engine is restarted and the vehicle has travel-

led a short distance, you do not need to take it to a

specialised workshop.

Or: The 12-volt battery was disconnected and has

been connected again.

Driv

e for a short time at 15-20 km/h (9-12 mph).



It flashes yellow

The steering column is tight.

Turn the wheel a little t

o both sides.

Or: Not unlocked or blocked steering column.

Remo

ve the key from the ignition and then switch the

ignition back on. If necessary, check the messages

displayed on the instrument panel display.

Do not drive on if the steering column remains

locked after the ignition has been switched on. Seek

specialist assistance.

The control lamp should light up for a few

seconds when the ignition is s

wit

ched on. It

shoul

d go out once the engine is started.

WARNING

If the warning lamps and the corresponding

messages are ignored when they light up

the vehicle may stall in traffic. It could case

damage to the vehicle and cause acci-

dents and severe injuries.

●

Never ignore the warning lamps or mes-

sages.

●

Stop the vehicle at the next opportunity

and in a safe place.

Run-in and economical driv-

ing

Running in the engine

A new vehicle should be run in over a dis-

ance of 1500 km (

1000 mil

es). For the first

1,000 km the engine speed should not ex-

ceed 2/3 of the maximum permissible engine

speed. In doing so, do not accelerate at full

throttle and do not drive with a trailer! From

1000 to 1500 km (600 to 1000 miles) you

can gradually increase the engine rpm and

road speed.

261

Driving

During its first few hours of running, the inter-

nal friction in the engine is gr

eat

er than l

ater

on when all the moving parts have bedded

down.

How the vehicle is driven for the first 1,500 km

influences the future engine performance.

Subsequently, also drive at a moderate rate,

especially when the engine is still cold: this

will lead to less engine wear and tear and will

prolong its useful life.

You should also avoid driving with the engine

speed too low. Change down to a lower gear

when the engine no longer runs “smoothly”. If

the engine revs too much, cut fuel injection to

protect the engine.

Environmental compatibility

Environmental protection is a top priority in

the design, choice of mat

erial

s and manuf

ac-

ture of your new SEAT.

Constructive measures to encourage re-

cycling

●

Joints and connections designed for easy

dismantling.

●

Modular construction to facilitate disman-

tling.

●

Increased use of single-grade materials.

●

Plastic parts and elastomers are marked in

accordance with ISO 1043, ISO 11469 and

ISO 1629.

Choice of materials

●

Use of recycled materials.

●

Use of compatible plastics in the same part

if its components are not easily separated.

●

Use of recycled materials and/or materials

originating from renewable sources.

●

Reduction of volatile components, including

odour, in plastic materials.

●

Use of CFC-free coolants.

Ban on heavy metals, with the exceptions

dictated by law (Annex II of ELV Directive

2000/53/EC): cadmium, lead, mercury,

hexavalent chromium.

Manufacturing methods

●

Reduction of the quantity of thinner in the

protective wax for cavities.

●

Use of plastic film as protection during vehi-

cle transport.

●

Use of solvent-free adhesives.

●

Use of CFC-free coolants in cooling sys-

tems.

●

Recycling and energy recovery from resi-

dues (RDF).

●

Improvement in the quality of waste water.

●

Use of systems for the recovery of residual

heat (thermal recovery, enthalpy wheels,

etc.).

●

The use of water-soluble paints.

Economical and environmentally-

friendly driving

Fuel consumption, environmental pollution

and wear to the engine

, brakes and tyres de-

pends largely on driving style. Fuel consump-

tion can be reduced by 10-15% with an eco-

nomical driving style and proper anticipation

of traffic conditions. The following section

gives you some tips on lessening the impact

on the environment and reducing your oper-

ating costs at the same time.

Active cylinder management (ACT

Depending on vehicle equipment, the active

cylinder management (ACT

) may automati-

cally deactivate some of the engine cylinders

if the driving situation does not require too

much power. When it is switched off, no fuel is

injected into these cylinders, hence total fuel

consumption may be reduced. The number

of active cylinders can be seen on the instru-

ment panel display.

›››

page 108.

262

Start and driving

Foresight when driving

Accel

ation causes the v

ehicle to consume

more fuel. If you think ahead when driving,

you will need to brake less and thus acceler-

ate less. Wherever possible, let the car roll

slowly to a stop, with a gear engaged (for in-

stance when you can see that the next traffic

lights are red). This takes advantage of the

engine braking effect, reducing wear on the

brakes and tyres. Emissions and fuel con-

sumption will drop to zero due to the overrun

fuel cut-off.

Changing gear to save energy

An effective way of saving is to change in ad-

vance to a higher gear. Running the engine at

high rpm in the lower gears uses an unneces-

sary amount of fuel.

Manual transmission: shift up from first to

second gear as soon as possible. In any case,

we recommend that you change to a higher

gear upon reaching 2,000 rpm. Choosing the

right gear enables fuel savings. Select the

highest possible gear appropriate for the

driving situation (the engine should continue

functioning with cyclical regularity).

Automatic transmission: accelerate gradu-

ally and without reaching the “kick-down”

position.

Avoid driving at high speed

Avoid travelling at top speed, whenever pos-

sible. Fuel consumption, emission of harmful

gases and noise pollution multiply dispropor-

tionately as speed is increased. Driving at

moderate speeds will help to save fuel.

Reduce idling time

In vehicles with the Start-Stop system idling is

automatically reduced. In vehicles without

the Start-Stop system it is worth switching off

the engine, for example, at level crossings

and at traffic lights that remain red for long

periods of time. When an engine has reached

operating temperature, and depending on

the cylinder capacity, keeping it switched off

for a minimum of about 5 seconds already

saves more than the amount of fuel necessa-

ry for restarting.

The engine takes a long time to warm up

when it is idling. Mechanical wear and pollu-

tant emissions are also especially high during

this initial warm-up phase. It is therefore best

to drive off immediately after starting the en-

gine. Avoid running the engine at high speed.

Regular maintenance

Regular servicing helps in saving fuel even

before the engine is started. A well-serviced

engine gives you the benefit of improved fuel

efficiency as well as maximum reliability and

an enhanced resale value. A badly serviced

engine can consume up to 10% more fuel

than necessary.

Avoid short journeys

The engine and catalytic converter need to

reach their optimal operating temperature

in order to minimise fuel consumption and

emissions.

A cold engine consumes a disproportionate

amount of fuel. The engine reaches its work-

ing temperature after about four kilometres

(2.5 miles), when fuel consumption will return

to a normal level.

Check tyre pressure

Always make sure the tyres are inflated to the

correct pressures

›››

page 358 to save fuel. If

the pressure is below half bar, fuel consump-

tion may increase by 5%. Due to the greater

rolling resistance, under-inflation also increa-

ses tyre wear and impairs handling.

Do not use winter tyres all year round as

they increase fuel consumption by up to 10%.

Avoid carrying unnecessary loads

Given that every kilo of extra weight will in-

crease the fuel consumption, it is advisable to

always check the luggage compartment to

make sure that no unnecessary loads are be-

ing transported.

263

Driving

Since the luggage rack increases the aer

dynamic dr

of the vehicle, you should re-

move it when not needed. At speeds of

100-120 km/h (62-75 mph), this will save 12%

of fuel.

Save electrical energy

The engine drives the alternator, thereby

generating electricity. This implies that any

increase in power consumption also increa-

ses fuel consumption! For this reason, switch

off any unneeded electrical devices. Devices

that use a lot of electricity includes the blow-

er at a high setting, the rear window heating

or the seat heating*.

Power management

This system helps to ensure relia-

ble starting

The power management controls the distri-

bution of el

ectrical ener

gy and thus helps t

ensure that there is always enough power

available to start the engine.

If a vehicle with a conventional electrical sys-

tem is left parked for a long time, the battery

will gradually lose its charge because certain

electrical devices, such as the electronic

gearbox lock continues to draw current even

when the ignition is off. In some cases there

may not be enough power available to start

the engine.

Your vehicle is equipped with an intelligent

power management system to control the

distribution of electrical energy. This signifi-

cantly improves reliability when starting the

engine, and also prolongs the useful life of the

battery.

The main functions incorporated in the power

management system are battery diagnosis,

residual current management and dynam-

ic power management.

Battery diagnosis

The battery diagnosis function constantly

registers the condition of the battery. Sensors

detect the battery voltage, battery current

and battery temperature. This enables the

system to calculate the current power level

and charge condition of the battery.

Residual current management

The residual current management reduces

power consumption while the vehicle is

parked. It controls the supply of power to the

various electrical devices while the ignition is

switched off. The system takes the battery di-

agnosis data into consideration.

Depending on the power level of the battery,

switch off the individual electrical devices

one after the other to prevent the battery

from losing too much charge and to ensure

that the engine can be started reliably.

Dynamic power management

While the vehicle is moving, this function dis-

tributes the available power to the various

electrical devices and systems according to

their requirements. The power management

ensures that on-board systems do not con-

sume more electrical power than the alterna-

tor can supply, and thus maintains the maxi-

mum possible battery power level.

Note

●

Neither is the power management syst

able to overcome the given physical limits.

Please remember that the power and use-

ful life of the battery are limited.

●

When there is a risk that the vehicle will

not start, the alternator power failure or

low battery charge level warning lamp will

be shown 

›››

page 122.

Flat battery

Starting ability has first priority.

Short trips, cit

y tr

affic and l

ow temperatures

all place a heavy load on the battery. In

these conditions a large amount of power is

consumed, but only a small amount is sup-

plied. The situation is also critical if electrical

devices are in use when the engine is not

264

Start and driving

running. In this case power is consumed when

none is being gener

ed.

In these sit

uations you will be aware that the

power management system is intervening to

control the distribution of electrical power.

When the vehicle is parked for long peri-

ods

If you do not drive your vehicle for a period of

several days or weeks, the power manage-

ment will gradually shut off the electrical de-

vices one by one or reduce the amount of

current they are using. This limits the amount

of power consumed and helps to ensure reli-

able starting even after a long period. Some

convenience functions, such as remote vehi-

cle opening, may not be available under cer-

tain circumstances. These functions will be

restored when you switch on the ignition and

start the engine.

With the engine switched off

For example, if you listen to the sound system

with the engine switched off the battery will

run down.

If the energy consumption means there is a

risk that the engine will not start, a text will

appear in vehicles with a driver information

system*.

This driver indicator tells you that you must

start the engine so that the battery can re-

charge.

When the engine is running

Although the alternator generates electrical

power, the battery can still become dis-

charged while the vehicle is being driven. This

can occur when a lot of power is being con-

sumed but only a small amount supplied, es-

pecially if the battery is not fully charged ini-

tially.

To restore the necessary energy balance, the

system will then temporarily shut off the elec-

trical devices that are using a lot of power, or

reduce the current they are consuming. Heat-

ing systems in particular use a large amount

of electrical power. If you notice, for instance,

that the seat heating* or the rear window

heater is not working, they may have been

temporarily switched off or regulated to a

lower heat output. These systems will be

available again as soon as sufficient electri-

cal power is available.

You may also notice that the engine runs at a

slightly faster idling speed when necessary.

This is quite normal, and no cause for con-

cern. The increased idling speed allows the

alternator to meet the greater power require-

ment and charge the battery at the same

time.

Engine management and

emission control system

Introduction

WARNING

●

Because of the high temperat

ures which

can occur in the exhaust purification sys-

tem (catalytic converter or particulate fil-

ter), do not park the vehicle where the ex-

haust can come into contact with flamma-

ble materials under the car (e.g. on grass or

at the forest edge). Fire hazard!

●

Do not apply wax underneath the vehicle

around the area of the exhaust system: Fire

hazard!

Control lamps



It lights up

Fault in the emission control system. (e.g. faulty

lambda sensor).

Reduce speed and driv

e carefully to the nearest spe-

cialised workshop to have the engine checked.



Flashes

Combustion fault which could damage the catalytic

converter

Reduce speed and drive carefully to the nearest spe-

cialised workshop to have the engine checked.

265

Driving



It lights up

Particulate filter blocked

›››

page 266.



It lights up

Fault in the management of the petrol engine.

Have the engine checked by a specialised w

orkshop

as soon as possible.

The warning lamp  (Electronic P

ower Control)

lights up when the ignition is switched on while sys-

tem operation is being verified. It should go out once

the engine is started.



It lights up

Diesel engine glow plug system.

The engine glow plug syst

em has been activated.

The engine can be started straight away when the

lamp switches off.



Flashes

Fault in the management of the diesel engine.

Have the engine checked by a specialised w

orkshop

as soon as possible.

Note

While the control lamps are on , , 

or  there might be faults in the engine

fuel consumption may go up and the en-

gine might lose power.

Catalytic converter

To maintain the useful life of the catalytic

convert

●

Use only unleaded petrol with petrol en-

gines, as lead damages the catalytic con-

verter.

●

Do not let the fuel get too low in the tank.

●

For engine oil changes, do not replenish

with too much engine oil

›››

page 351, Top-

ping up engine oil.

●

Never tow the vehicle to start it, use jump

leads if necessary

››

›



page 59.

If you notice misfiring, uneven running or loss

of power when the vehicle is moving, reduce

speed immediately and have the vehicle in-

spected at the nearest specialised workshop.

In general, the exhaust warning lamp  will

light up when any of the described symptoms

occur. If this happens, unburnt fuel can enter

the exhaust system and escape into the envi-

ronment. The catalytic converter can also be

damaged by overheating.

CAUTION

Never run the fuel tank completely dry be-

cause the irregularit

y of the fuel supply

may cause ignition problems. This allows

unburnt fuel to enter the exhaust system,

which could cause overheating and dam-

age the catalytic converter.

For the sake of the environment

Even when the emission control system is

working perfectly, ther

e may be a smell of

sulphur from the exhaust gas under some

conditions. This depends on the sulphur

content of the fuel used. Quite often the

problem can be solved by changing to an-

other brand of fuel.

Particulate filter

The particulate filter eliminates most of the

soot fr

om the e

xhaust gas syst

em. Under nor-

mal driving conditions, the filter cleans itself.

The particulate filter is cleaned automatically

without need for indication by the warning

lamp . This may be noticed because the

engine idle speed increases and an odour

may be detected.

If automatic filter purification cannot be car-

ried out (because only short trips are taken,

for example), soot will accumulate on the fil-

ter and the particulate filter warning lamp will

 switch on.

Facilitate the automatic filter cleaning proc-

ess by driving in the following manner:

●

Drive for approximately 15 minutes at a

minimum speed of 60 km/h (37 mph) in 4th or

5th gear (automatic gearbox: S gear range).

266

Start and driving

●

Maint

ain the engine speed at appr

ximate-

ly 2,000 rpm.

The rise in temperature causes the soot on

the filter to burn. On completion of the clean-

ing the warning lamp will switch off. If the

warning lamp does not switch off, go immedi-

ately to a specialised workshop to rectify the

problem.

Driving tips

Driving on flooded roads

To prevent damage to the vehicle when driv-

ing thr

ough w

er, for example, along a floo-

ded road, please observe the following:

●

The water should never come above the

lower edge of the bodywork.

●

Drive at pedestrian speed.

WARNING

After driving through water, mud, sludge,

etc., the braking eff

ect can be delayed

slightly due to moisture build-up on the

discs and brake pads. Applying the brakes

carefully several times will remove the

moisture and restore the full braking effect.

CAUTION

●

Driving through flooded ar

eas may se-

verely damage vehicle components such

as the engine, transmission, running gear or

electrical system.

●

Whenever driving through water, the

Start-Stop system* must be switched off

›››

page 269.

Note

●

Check the depth of the water bef

ore en-

tering the flooded zone.

●

Do not stop in the water, drive in reverse,

or stop the engine in any situation.

●

Note that vehicles travelling in the oppo-

site direction may splash water that could

exceed the maximum permitted water

height for your vehicle.

●

Avoid driving through salt water (corro-

sion).

Total traction (4Drive)

3 Valid for vehicles: 4Drive all-wheel drive

On f

our-wheel drive models, the engine pow-

er is distributed to all four wheels

General notes

On four-wheel drive vehicles, the engine

power is distributed to all four wheels. The

distribution of power is controlled automati-

cally according to your driving st

yle and the

road conditions. Also see

›››

page 248.

The four-wheel drive is specially designed to

complement the superior engine power. This

combination gives the vehicle exceptional

handling and performance capabilities, both

on normal roads and in more difficult condi-

tions, such as snow and ice. Even so (or per-

haps especially for this reason), it is important

to observe certain safety points

›››

Wint

er t

Thanks to four-wheel drive, your vehicle will

have plenty of traction in winter conditions,

even with the standard tyres. Nevertheless,

we still recommend that winter tyres or all-

season tyres be fitted on all four wheels to

give even better braking response.

Snow chains

On roads where snow chains are mandatory,

this also applies to cars with four-wheel drive

›››



page 58.

Changing tyres

On vehicles with four-wheel drive, all four

tyres must have the same rolling circumfer-

ence. Also avoid using tyres with varying

tread depths

›››

page 360.

267

Driving

Off-roader?

If your SEAT v

ehicl

e is not an off

-roader: it

does not have enough ground clearance to

be used as such. It is therefore best to avoid

rough tracks and uneven terrain as much as

possible.

WARNING

●

Even with four

-wheel drive, you should al-

ways adjust your speed to suit the condi-

tions. Do not let the extra safety features

tempt you into taking any risks when driv-

ing. Risk of accident!

●

The braking capability of your vehicle is

limited by the tyres' grip. It is therefore no

different from a car without four-wheel

drive. So do not be tempted to drive too fast

on firm or slippery roads just because the

vehicle still has good acceleration in these

conditions. Risk of accident!

●

On wet roads bear in mind that the front

wheels may start to “aquaplane” and lose

contact with the road if the car is driven too

fast. If this should happen, there will be no

sudden increase in engine speed to warn

the driver, as occurs with a front-wheel

drive car. For this reason you should always

choose a driving speed suitable for the

road conditions. Risk of accident!

268

Driver assistance systems

-Stop system*

Control lamps



It lights up

The Start-Stop system is available, the automatic en-

gine shutdown is active.



It lights up

The Start-Stop system is not available.

Instructions for the driver on the instru-

ment panel displ

Start-Stop system deactivated.

Start the engine manually

This driv

er message is displ

ayed when cer-

tain conditions are not met during the stop-

ping phase and the Start-Stop system can-

not restart the engine. The engine must be

started manually.

Start-Stop system: Fault! Function

not available

There is a fault in the Start-Stop system. Take

the vehicle to a workshop to have the fault re-

paired.

Description and operation

The Start-Stop system helps save fuel and

reduce CO

emissions.

In Start

-Stop mode, the engine will automati-

cally switch off when the vehicle stops or is

stopping; for example when stopping at traf-

fic lights. The ignition remains switched on

during the stopping phase. The engine auto-

matically switches back on when required. In

this situation, the light of the

START ENGINE STOP

button stays on

As soon as the ignition is switched on, the

art-Stop function is automatically activa-

ted.

Further information about the Start-Stop sys-

tem can be found on the Easy Connect sys-

tem: by pressing the button 

in the Vehi-

cle status menu.

ehicl

es with a manual gearbo

●

Before stopping the vehicle or when it is

stopped, put it into neutral and release the

clutch pedal. The engine will switch off. The

warning lamp  will appear on the instru-

ment panel display. The engine may stop be-

fore the vehicle comes to a halt in the decel-

eration phase (at 7 km/h).

●

When the clutch pedal is pressed the en-

gine will start up again. The warning lamp will

switch off.

Vehicles with an automatic gearbox

●

Brake the vehicle until it is stopped, and

keep your foot on the brake pedal or activate

the Auto Hold* system so that the vehicle re-

mains braked. The engine will switch off. The

warning lamp  will appear in the display.

The engine may stop before the vehicle

comes to a halt in the deceleration phase (at

7 km/h or 2 km/h, depending on the vehicle’s

gearbox).

●

When you take your foot off the brake ped-

al the engine will start up again. The warning

lamp will switch off. In vehicles with the Auto

Hold* system, when the system is active, the

engine will not start if you remove your foot

from the brake pedal. The car starts when

you press the accelerator pedal.

Basic requirements for the Start-Stop

mode

●

The driver door must be closed.

●

The driver must have their seat belt fas-

tened.

●

The bonnet must be closed.

Only in vehicles with Keyless Access.

269

Driving

●

The engine must hav

e r

eached a minimum

service t

emperature.

●

The reverse gear must not be engaged.

●

The vehicle must not be on a very steep

slope.

The system can interrupt the Start-Stop

mode frequently for different reasons.

The engine does not switch off

Before the stopping phase, the system verifies

whether certain conditions are met. The en-

gine does not switch off, in the following sit-

uations for example:

●

The engine has not yet reached the mini-

mum required temperature for the Start-Stop

mode.

●

The interior temperature selected for the air

conditioner has not yet been reached.

●

The interior temperature is very high/low.

●

Defrost function button activated

›››



page 42.

●

The parking aid* is switched on.

●

The battery is very low.

●

The steering wheel is overly turned or is be-

ing turned.

●

If there is a danger of misting.

●

After engaging reverse gear.

●

In case of a very steep gradient.

The indication  is shown on the instrument

panel display, and in addition, the driver infor-

mation system* shows, .

The engine starts by itself

During a stopping phase the normal Start-

Stop mode can be interrupted in the following

situations: The engine restarts by itself with-

out involvement from the driver.

●

The interior temperature differs from the

value selected on the air conditioner.

●

Defrost function button activated

›››



page 42.

●

The brake has been pressed several times

consecutively.

●

The battery is too low.

●

High power consumption.

Additional information related to the auto-

matic gearbox

The engine stops when the selector lever is in

the positions P, D, N and S, in addition to when

in Triptonic mode. With the selector lever in

position P, the engine will also remain switch-

ed off when you take your foot off the brake

pedal. In order to start the engine up again

the accelerator must be pressed, or another

gear engaged or the brake released.

If the selector lever is placed in position R dur-

ing the stopping phase, the engine will start

up again.

Change from position D to P to prevent the

engine from accidentally starting when

changing and passing by position R.

Additional information about vehicles with

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

In vehicles with ACC function, the engine will

start up again in certain operating conditions

if the radar sensor detects that the vehicle

ahead drives off again.

WARNING

●

Never s

witch the engine off until the vehi-

cle is stationary. The brake servo and pow-

er steering functions will not be completely

covered under warranty. More force may

also be needed to turn the steering wheel

or to brake. As you cannot steer and brake

in the normal manner, there is a greater risk

of accidents and serious injury.

●

Never remove the key from the ignition if

the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the

steering could lock making it impossible to

steer the vehicle.

●

To avoid injury, make sure that the Start-

Stop system is switched off when working

in the engine compartment

›››

page 271.

CAUTION

The Start-Stop system must always be

switched off when driving thr

ough flooded

areas

›››

page 271.

270

Driver assistance systems

Note

●

In vehicles with an aut

omatic gearbox,

you can control whether the engine should

switch off or not by reducing or increasing

the brake force applied. While the vehicle

remains stopped, the engine will not stop if

the brake pedal is slightly pressed, in traffic

jams with frequent stopping and starting

for example. As soon as strong pressure is

applied to the brake pedal, the engine will

stop.

●

In vehicles with manual gearbox, during

the stopping phases the brake pedal must

remain depressed to prevent the vehicle

from moving.

●

If the engine “stalls” in vehicles with

manual gearbox, it can be directly started

up again by immediately pressing the

clutch pedal.

●

In vehicles with an automatic gearbox, if

the selector lever is placed in position D, N

or S after engaging reverse gear, the vehi-

cle must be driven at a speed faster than 10

km/h (6 mph) for the system to return to

conditions in which the engine can be stop-

ped.

Manually switching on/off the

-Stop system

Fig. 248

Centre console: Start-Stop system

butt

on.

If you do not wish to use the system, you can

wit

ch it off manually.

●

o manually switch on/off the Start-Stop

system, press the  button

›››

Fig. 248.

The button symbol  remains lit up yellow

when the system is switched off.

Note

The system is automatically switched on

each time the engine is deliberately st

op-

ped during a stopping phase. The engine

will start automatically.

Hill Descent Control (HDC)

Contr

ol l

amps

3 Valid for vehicles: 4Drive all-wheel drive



It lights up white

Hill Descent Control is active.



It lights up grey

Hill Descent Control is not active. The system is

switched on, but is not adjusting.

Some control and warning lamps will light up

briefly when the ignition is s

wit

ched on t

check certain functions. They will switch off

after a few seconds.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings

›››

in Con-

trol and warning l

amps on page 123.

Description and operation

Hill Descent Control limits the speed on steep

descents by aut

omatically br

aking all f

our

wheels, both when moving forward and in re-

verse. As the anti-lock brake system remains

active, it prevents the wheels from locking. In

vehicles with manual transmission, the Hill

Descent Control adapts the theoretical

271

Driving

speed without slowing the engine below its

idling speed.

Aft

er st

arting the descent of a sl

ope below

30 km/h (18 mph), speed is limited to a mini-

mum of 2 km/h (1 mph) and a maximum of

30 km/h (18 mph). When appropriate, the

driver may increase or decrease the speed

within the limit by pressing the accelerator or

the brake. At this point the function is interrup-

ted and, if necessary, it is then reactivated.

Even so, it is imperative that the surface guar-

antees sufficient adhesion. For this reason,

the Hill Descent Control will not fulfil its func-

tion when, for example, descending a slope

with a frozen or slippery surface.

Hill Descent Control is available when the

dash panel display shows the message .

Hill Descent Control automatically intervenes

if the following conditions are met:

●

The vehicle engine is running.

●

The Offroad driving profile has been selec-

ted

›››

page 303. Driving at a speed below 30

km/h (18 mph) (the message  is shown on

the dash panel display).

●

The slope of the descent is at least 10%

when driving forward and 9% when driving in

reverse.

●

The brake and the accelerator are not

pressed.

Hill Descent Control is deactivated on press-

ing the brake and the accelerator or if the

slope is below 5%. The function may be dis-

connected manually in the Easy Connect

system by pressing the 

button > HDC

function butt

›



Fig. 51.

WARNING

Always be ready to brake. Otherwise, an

accident could occur and cause injury.

●

Hill Descent Control is only an auxiliary

syst

em that in some situations may not suf-

ficiently brake the vehicle when going

down a slope.

●

The speed of the vehicle may increase

despite the intervention of Hill Descent

Control.

Auto Hold Function

Description and oper

ation

Fig. 249 In the lower part of the centre con-

sol

e: Aut

o Hol

d function button.

The control light of the 

›

Fig. 249 button

remains on when the Auto Hold function is

connected.

Once connected, the Auto Hold function as-

sists the driver in keeping the vehicle station-

ary at repeated intervals or for a certain peri-

od of time with the engine running, for exam-

ple, when going up a slope, when stopped at

traffic lights or in heavy traffic with intermit-

tent stops.

When connected, the Auto Hold function au-

tomatically prevents the vehicle from rolling

when stationary without pressing the brake

pedal.

272

Driver assistance systems

After detecting that the vehicle is stationary

and the br

e pedal has been r

eleased, the

Auto Hold function holds the vehicle. The driv-

er can lift their foot off the brake pedal.

When the driver touches the accelerator

pedal or accelerates slightly to continue driv-

ing, the Auto Hold function releases the brake.

The vehicle moves according to the slope of

the road.

If the vehicle is stationary and one of the con-

ditions required by the Auto Hold function is

impaired, it disconnects itself and the button's

control light goes out

›››

Fig. 249. The elec-

tronic parking brake connects automatically,

if necessary, to park the vehicle safely

›››

Conditions f

or k

eeping the v

ehicle station-

ary with the Auto Hold function

●

The driver door must be closed.

●

The driver's seat belt must be fastened.

●

The engine is running.

Switching the Auto Hold function on and

off

Press the button 

›››

. The control lamp on

the butt

on goes out when the Aut

o Hol

d func-

tion is switched off.

Automatically engaging and disengaging

the Auto Hold function

If the Auto Hold function was switched on with

the  button before disengaging the ignition,

the function will remain on after the ignition is

re-engaged.

If the Auto Hold function was not switched on,

it will automatically remain off next time the

ignition is engaged.

The Auto Hold function is automatically

switched on if the following conditions are

met:

All conditions must be met at the same

time

›››

Manual gearbox Automatic gear-

box

1. The v

ehicle is kept stationary with the br

ake

pedal on a flat surface or on a slope.

2. The engine rotates “correctly”.

Upon pressing the

clutch and acceler

ating at the same

time, the brake re-

leases gradually.

Upon accelerating,

the brake releases

gradually.

The Auto Hold function is automatically

urned off if the f

oll

owing conditions are

met:

Manual gearbox

Automatic gear-

box

If any of the conditions mentioned on

›››

page 273, Conditions for keeping the ve-

hicle stationary with the Auto Hold function

are no longer met.

If the engine is running irregularly or an anom-

aly is detected.

If the engine is t

urned

off or stalls.

If the engine is s

witch-

ed off.

The clutch and the

accelerat

or are

pressed at the same

time.

If the accelerator is

pressed.

If any of the tyr

es has

only minimal cont

act

with the gr

ound, e

.g.

in the case of axle ar-

ticulation.

WARNING

The smart technology incorporated into

the Auto Hold function cannot defy the

aws of physics; it only works within the lim-

its of the system. The greater convenience

provided by the Auto Hold function should

never tempt you to take any risk that may

compromise safety.

273

Driving

●

Never l

eave the vehicle running and with

the Auto Hold function switched on.

●

The Auto Hold function cannot always

keep the vehicle stationary uphill or down-

hill or stop it sufficiently, for example, on

slippery or frozen surfaces.

Note

Before entering a car wash, always switch

off the Aut

o Hold function, because if the

ectronic parking brake is automatically

connected, it may cause damage.

Cruise control system

(CCS)*

Contr

ol l

amp



It lights up green

The Cruise Control System (GRA) is switched on and

active.

OR:

The Adaptive Cruise Control syst

em (CCS) is

switched on and active.

OR: the speed limiter is swit

ched on and active.

Several warning and control lamps light up

or a f

w seconds when the ignition is switch-

ed on, signalling that the function is being

verified. They will switch off after a few sec-

onds.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings

›››

in Con-

trol and warning l

amps on page 123.

Cruise control operation

Fig. 250 Instrument panel display: CCS status

indications.

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 40

The cruise control system (CCS) is able to

maintain the set speed from 20 km/h (15

mph).

The CSS only reduces vehicle speed by

ceasing to accelerate, not by actively braking

the vehicle

›››

Displ

ayed on the CCS scr

een

atus Fig. 250:

CCS temporarily switched off. The set

speed is displayed in small or darkened

figures.

System error. Contact a specialised

workshop.

CCS switched on. The speed memory is

empty.

The CCS is switched on. The set speed is

displayed in large figures.

Changing gear in CCS mode

The CCS decelerates as soon as the clutch

pedal is pressed, intervening again automati-

cally after a gear is engaged.

Travelling down hills with the CCS

When travelling down hills the CCS cannot

maintain a constant speed. Slow the vehicle

down using the brake pedal and reduce

gears if required.

Automatic off

The cruise control system (CCS) is switched

off automatically or temporarily:

274

Driver assistance systems

●

If the syst

em det

ects a f

ault that could af-

fect the working order of the CCS.

●

If you press and maintain the accelerator

pedal for a certain time, driving faster than

the stored speed.

●

If the dynamic driving control systems inter-

vene (e.g. ASR or ESC).

●

If the airbag is triggered.

WARNING

Use of the cruise control could cause acci-

dents and sever

e injuries if it is not possible

to drive at a constant speed maintaining

the safety distance.

●

Do not use the cruise control in heavy

traffic, if the distance from the vehicle in

front is insufficient, on steep roads, with

several bends or in slippery circumstances

(snow, ice, rain or loose gravel), or on floo-

ded roads.

●

Never use the CCS when driving off-road

or on unpaved roads.

●

Always adapt your speed and the dis-

tance to the vehicles ahead in line with visi-

bility, weather conditions, the condition of

the road and the traffic situation.

●

To avoid unexpected operation of the

cruise control system, turn it off every time

you finish using it.

●

It is dangerous to use a set speed which is

too high for the prevailing road, traffic or

weather conditions.

●

When travelling do

wn hills, the CCS can-

not maintain a constant speed. The vehicle

tends to accelerate under its own weight.

Select a lower gear or use the foot brake to

slow the vehicle.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings

›

››

in Con-

trol and warning l

amps on page 123.

Speed limiter

Contr

ol l

amp



It lights up green

The speed limiter is switched on and active.



Flashes green

The speed set by the speed limiter has been excee-

ded.



It lights up

The adaptive cruise control (ACC) or the speed limit-

er is active.

Some warning and control lamps will light up

briefly when the ignition is s

wit

ched on t

check certain functions. They will switch off

after a few seconds.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings

›››

in Con-

trol and warning l

amps on page 123.

Display indications

Fig. 251

On the instrument panel display: indi-

cations of the speed limit

er st

us.

The speed limiter helps avoid exceeding a

speed individually pr

ogr

ammed up

wards of

approximately 30 km/h (19 mph) driving in

forwards gears

›››

Display messages on the speed limiter

›››

Fig. 251:

The speed limiter is active. The last speed

set is displayed in large figures.

The speed limiter is not active. The last

speed set is displayed in small or dark-

ened figures.

275

Driving

The speed limiter is switched off. The total

mil

eage is displ

ayed.

WARNING

After use, always switch off the speed limit-

er to pre

vent the speed being regulated

against your wishes.

●

The speed limiter does not relieve the

driver of their responsibility to drive at the

appropriate speed. Do not drive at high

speed if not necessary.

●

Using the speed limiter under adverse

weather conditions is dangerous and can

cause serious accidents, e.g. aquaplaning,

snow, ice

, leaves, etc. Only use the speed

limiter when the status of the road and the

weather conditions allow it.

●

When driving downhill, the speed limiter

cannot limit the vehicle speed. Its speed

will increase due to its own weight. In this

case, select a lower gear or use the foot

brake to slow the vehicle.

Note

●

Diff

erent v

ersions of the instrument panel

are available and therefore the versions

and instructions on the display may vary.

●

If when switching the ignition off, the

cruise control system (CCS), the adaptive

cruise control (ACC) or the speed limiter

were switched on, then the cruise control

system or the adaptive cruise contr

ol will

automatically switch themselves on when

the ignition is back on. However, no speed

will be stored. The last set speed of the

speed limiter will be stored.

276

Driver assistance systems

Operate the speed limiter

Fig. 252 On the left of the steering column:

control and buttons t

o operate the speed limit-

er.

Fig. 253 On the left of the steering column:

third le

ver for operating the speed limiter.

Function

Position of the turn signal lever

›››

Fig. 252 or the third

lever

›››

Fig. 253

Effect

Switching on the speed limiter

Move controller

of the turn signal lever to the  position and press

button

or move the third lever forward and press button

The system switches on. The last set speed of the speed

limiter is stor

ed. It does not take effect yet.

Switching between the speed limiter

and cruise control (CCS) or the adap-

tive cruise contr

ol (ACC) (with the

speed limiter switched on)

Press the button for the driving assistance systems on the turn signal

lever

›››

page 122, then select with the right thumbwheel on the multi-

function steering wheel in the menu of the dashboard and press the

thumbwheel to confirm your selection.

It switches between the speed limiter and the CCS or the

adaptive cruise control (ACC).

Activ

ating the speed limiter

Press the button

on the turn signal lever or button 

on the third

lev

er.

The current speed is stored as the maximum speed and

the limiter is switched on.

Temporarily switching off the speed

limiter limitation

ace control

of the turn signal lever in position  or mo

ve the

third lever into position .

The limiter is switched off temporarily. The speed will be

stored.

Temporarily switch off the speed limiter

limitation pressing do

wn the accelera-

tor (kick-down)

Press down on the accelerator beyond the point of resistance (e.g. to

overtake). Surpassing the set speed switches the speed limiter off tem-

porarily.

The limiter is switched off temporarily. The speed will be

stored. The limiter is reactivated automatically after re-

turning to less than the set speed.

277

Driving

Function

Position of the turn signal lever

›››

Fig. 252 or the third

lever

›››

Fig. 253

Effect

Switching the speed limiter on again

Press button

on the turn signal lever or move the third lever into po-

sition .

The speed is limited to the set speed as soon as the

speed you are driving at is lo

wer than the speed set as

maximum.

Increasing the set speed of the limiter

Briefly press button

on the turn signal lever in the  area or

move the third lever into position  to increase the speed in small

increments of 1 km/h (1 mph) and set it.

The speed is limited to the set value

Press  on the third lever to increase the speed in increments of

10 km/h (5 mph) and set it.

Hold do

wn the button

on the turn signal lever in the  area or

hold do

wn  to increase continuously in increments of 10 km/h

(5 mph) and set it.

Reducing the set speed of the limiter

Briefly press button

on the turn signal lever in the 

area or

press 

on the third lever to reduce the speed in small increments

of 1 km/h (1 mph) and set it.

The speed is limited t

o the set value

Press  on the third lever to reduce the speed in increments of

10 km/h (5 mph) and set it.

Hold do

wn the button

on the turn signal lever in the 

area or

hold down  to continuously decrease the speed in increments of

10 km/h (5 mph), then set it.

Switching off the speed limiter

Move control

of the turn signal lever into position  or the third le

er into position .

The system switches off

The values shown in the table in brackets, in

mph, ar

e displ

ayed only in instrument panel

with indications in miles.

Going down slopes with the speed limiter

If the set speed of the speed limiter is excee-

ded while driving downhill, soon afterwards

the warning and control lamps 

›››

page 275 flash and an acoustic warning

may sound. In this case, use the foot brake to

slow the vehicle or, if necessary, select a low-

er gear.

Switching off temporarily

If you wish to temporarily switch off the speed

limiter, e.g. to overtake, move control

›››

Fig. 252

of the turn signal lever into po-

sition 



or the thir

d lever into pressure

point  or press button

on any lever.

278

Driver assistance systems

After overtaking, the speed limiter can be

wit

ched on with the pr

eviously set speed by

pressing button

on the turn signal lever in

the ar



 or by moving the third lever into

pressure point .

Switch the speed limiter off temporarily by

pressing down the accelerator (kick-

down)

If the accelerator is pressed right down (kick-

down) and the set speed is exceeded be-

cause driver wishes to do so, the limiter is

temporarily disabled.

To confirm it being switched off an acoustic

signal sound once. While the limiter is off, the

warning and control lamp  flashes.

When the accelerator is no longer pressed

down and the speed is reduced below the set

value, the limiter switches on again. The con-

trol lamp  will light up and remain lit.

Automatic off

The speed limiter is automatically switched

off:

●

If the system detects a fault that could neg-

atively affect the working order of the limiter.

●

If the airbag is triggered.

CAUTION

For automatic switching off due to system

failures, f

or security reasons, the limiter is

only completely switched off when the

driver stops pr

essing the accelerator at

some point or consciously switches off the

system.

Emergency braking assis-

tance system (Fr

ont Assist)*

Topic introduction

Fig. 254

On the instrument panel display: ad-

ance w

arning indications.

The objective of the emergency braking as-

sist

ance syst

em is t

o prevent head-on colli-

sions against objects that may be in the vehi-

cle’s path or minimise the consequences of

such impacts.

Within the limitations imposed by the environ-

mental conditions and by the system itself,

the function acts in staggered fashion, de-

pending on how critical the situation is. Initial-

ly it warns the driver, and if the driver’s reac-

tion does not occur or is insufficient, it acti-

vates an independent emergency braking.

The function is oriented at avoiding the fol-

lowing situations:

●

Collisions with parked vehicles or vehicles

in the same lane travelling in the same direc-

tion.

●

Hitting pedestrians who cross in front of the

vehicle's path or who are walking in the same

lane and direction.

It may fail to activate in other danger situa-

tions.

The Front Assist function is active within a

range of speeds between 4 km/h (2.5 mph)

and 250 km/h (156 mph). Depending on

speed, traffic conditions and driver behaviour,

some of the sub-functions described below

are omitted in order to optimise the system’s

general behaviour.

The Front Assist is a driving assistance

function that can never replace the driv-

er’s attention.

Safety distance warning

If the system detects a situation of danger

because the vehicle is too close to the vehicle

ahead, it will warn the driver by means of an

279

Driving

indication on the instrument panel display

.

The timing of the w

arning v

aries depending

on driv

er behaviour and the traffic situation.

Advance warning

If the system detects a possible collision with

the vehicle in front, it may alert the driver by

means of an audible warning and an indica-

tion on the instrument panel display

›››

Fig. 254.

The warning moment varies depending on

the traffic situation and driver behaviour. At

the same time, the vehicle will prepare for a

possible emergency braking

›››

Critical w

arning

If the driv

er f

ails to react to the pre-warning

(advance warning), the system may actively

intervene in the brakes and generate a brief

jolt to warn the driver of the imminent danger

of a collision.

Automatic braking

If the driver also fails to react to the critical

warning, the system may initiate independent

emergency braking by progressively increas-

ing the braking effect in accordance with how

critical the situation is.

Driver emergency braking assistance sys-

tem

Faced with an imminent collision, the system

may detect that the driver is not braking hard

enough to avoid the collision. In this case, it

will automatically increase the braking effect.

Due to certain driving circumstances and the

limitations of its operation, there are some

cases in which the system cannot prevent a

collision, although it can significantly mini-

mise the consequences by reducing the

speed and the force of the impact.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings

›››

in Con-

trol and warning l

amps on page 123.

WARNING

The Front Assist system cannot change the

laws of physics or repl

ace the driver in

terms of keeping control of the vehicle and

reacting to a possible emergency situation.

WARNING

Following a Front Assist emergency warn-

ing, pay immediate attention t

o the situa-

tion and try to avoid the collision by brak-

ing or by dodging the obstacle, as applica-

ble.

●

If the Front Assist does not work as de-

scribed in this chapter (e.g. it repeatedly

intervenes unnecessarily), switch it off.

●

Adapt your speed and safe distance t

the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit

visibility, weather, road and traffic condi-

tions.

●

The Front Assist alone cannot avoid acci-

dents and serious injuries.

●

In complex driving situations, occasional-

ly the Front Assist may issue warnings and

intervene in braking unnecessarily, for ex-

ample at traffic islands.

●

If the operation of the Front Assist is im-

paired, for example, by dirt or because the

radar sensor has lost its settings, the sys-

tem may issue unnecessary warnings and

intervene inopportunely in the braking.

●

The Front Assist does not react to animals

or vehicles crossing your path or ap-

proaching head-on down the same lane.

●

The Front Assist does not react to pedes-

trians walking head-on in the same lane.

●

The driver must always be ready to take

over the control of the vehicle.

Note

●

When the Front Assist is connected, the

indications on the instrument panel scr

een

may be concealed by warnings from other

functions, such as an incoming call.

●

When the Front Assist causes a braking,

the brake pedal is “harder”.

●

Automatic interventions by the Front As-

sist on the brakes may be interrupted by

280

Driver assistance systems

pressing the clutch, accelerator or moving

the wheel.

●

The Front Assist may brake the vehicle

until it stops complet

ely. However, the

brake system does not halt the vehicle per-

manently. Use the foot brake!

●

If the Front Assist does not work as de-

scribed in this chapter (e.g. in intervenes

several times unnecessarily), switch it off.

Have the system checked by a specialised

workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a

SEAT dealership.

Radar sensor

Fig. 255 On the front behind the SEAT badge:

adar sensor

On the front behind the SEAT badge, a radar

sensor has been inst

all

ed t

o capture the traf-

fic situation

›››

Fig. 255.

The radar sensor's visibility may be impaired

by dirt, mud or snow, or by environmental in-

fluences such as rain or mist. In this case, the

Front Assist does not work. The instrument

panel displays the following message: Front

Assist: No sensor vision! If necessary

clean the radar sensor

›››

When the r

adar sensor begins t

o oper

ate

properly again, the Front Assist will automati-

cally be available again. The message will

disappear from the instrument panel display.

Front Assist operation may be affected by a

strong radar reverse reflection. This may oc-

cur, for example, in a closed car park or due

to the presence of metallic objects (e.g. rails

on the road or sheets used in road works).

The area in front of and around the radar

sensor should not be covered with adhesives,

additional or similar headlights, as this may

negatively affect Front Assist operation.

If the front of the vehicle is not properly re-

paired or structural modifications are made

to it, for example if the suspension is lowered,

Front Assist operation may be affected. SEAT

recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for

this purpose.

CAUTION

If you have the sensation that the radar

sensor is damaged or has lost its settings,

disconnect the Front Assist. This will av

oid

possible dangerous situations caused by a

system malfunction. If this occurs have it

adjusted.

●

The sensor may become damaged or

lose its settings when knocked, f

or exam-

ple, during a parking manoeuvre. This may

compromise the system's efficacy or dis-

connect it.

●

Repairs to the radar sensor require spe-

cialist knowledge and special tools. SEAT

recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for

this purpose.

●

Clean away the snow with a brush and

the ice preferably with a solvent-free de-

icer spray.

Operating the Emergency braking

assist

ance syst

em (Fr

ont Assist)

Fig. 256 On the screen of the instrument panel

ont Assist s

wit

ched off message.

281

Driving

The Front Assist is active whenever the igni-

tion is s

wit

ched on.

When the Fr

ont Assist is switched off, so too

are the advance warning function (pre warn-

ing) and the distance warning.

SEAT recommends leaving the Front Assist al-

ways switched on. Exceptions

›››

page 282,

Switching the Front Assist off temporarily

in the following situations.

Switching the Front Assist on and off

With the ignition switched on, the Front Assist

can be switched on and off as follows:

●

Select the corresponding menu option us-

ing the button for the driver assistance sys-

tems

›››

page 122.

●

OR: switch the system on and off in Easy

Connect using the 

button SETTINGS >

Driver assistance button

›



page 35.

When Front Assist is switched off, the instru-

ment panel will inform that it has been

switched off with the following indicator 

›››

Fig. 256.

Activating or deactivating the pre-warning

(advance warning)

The pre-warning function (advance warning)

can be switched on or off in the Easy Con-

nect system with the 

button > SETTINGS

Driver assistance function butt

›



page 35.

The system will store the setting for the next

time the ignition is switched on.

SEAT recommends keeping the pre-warning

function switched on at all times.

Depending on the infotainment system instal-

led in the vehicle, the advance warning func-

tion may be adjusted as follows:

●

Advance

●

Medium

●

Delayed

●

Deactivated

SEAT recommends driving with the function in

“Medium” mode.

Switching distance warning on and off

If the safe distance with regard to the vehicle

in front is exceeded, the relevant warning will

appear on the instrument panel display

. In this case, increase the safe distance.

The distance warning can be switched on

and off in the Easy Connect system using the



button > SETTINGS > Driver assis-

tance

›



page 35.

The system will store the setting for the next

time the ignition is switched on.

SEAT recommends keeping the distance

warning switched on at all times.

Switching the Front Assist off tem-

porarily in the following situations

In the following situations the Front Assist

should be deactivat

ed due to the system's

limitations:

●

When the vehicle is to be towed.

●

If the vehicle is on a test bed.

●

When the radar sensor is damaged.

●

If the radar sensor takes a heavy knock, for

exampl

e in a rear collision.

●

If it intervenes several times unnecessarily.

●

If the radar sensor is covered temporarily

with some kind of accessory, such as an ad-

ditional headlight or the like.

●

When the vehicle is to be loaded on a lorry,

ferry or train.

System limitations

The Front Assist has certain physical limita-

tions inher

ent t

o the syst

em. Thus, in certain

circumstances, some of the system's reac-

tions may be inopportune from the driver's

standpoint. So pay attention in order to inter-

vene if necessary.

282

Driver assistance systems

The following conditions may cause the

ont Assist not t

o r

eact or to do so too

late:

●

In the first few instants of driving after

switching on the ignition, due to the system’s

initial auto-calibration.

●

On taking tight bends or complex paths.

●

Pressing the accelerator all the way down.

●

If the Front Assist is switched off or dam-

aged.

●

If the ASR has been disconnected or the

ESC activated in Sport mode manually

›››

page 250.

●

If the ESC is controlling.

●

If several brake lights of the vehicle or elec-

trically connected trailer are damaged.

●

If the radar sensor is dirty or covered.

●

If there are metal objects, e.g. rails on the

road or sheets used in road works.

●

If the vehicle is reversing.

●

If the vehicle over-accelerates.

●

In case of snow or heavy rain.

●

In case of narrow vehicles, such as motor-

bikes.

●

Misaligned vehicles.

●

Vehicles crossing the other's path.

●

Vehicles approaching in the opposite direc-

tion.

●

Special loads and accessories of other ve-

hicles that jut out over the sides, backwards

or over the top.

Adaptive cruise control

(ACC)*

Introduction

Fig. 257 Related video

Fig. 258

Detection area.

The adaptive cruise control (ACC) is an e

ension of the normal cruise contr

ol sys-

tem (CCS)

›››

The ACC function allows the driver to pro-

am a cruise speed of betw

een 30 and

10 km/h (18 and 130 mph) and to select the

distance required with regard to the vehicle in

front.

The ACC will adapt the vehicle's cruise

speed at all times, maintaining a safe dis-

tance with the vehicle in front based on its

speed.

When driving behind another vehicle, the

ACC function reduces speed until it is the

same as that of the vehicle ahead and main-

tains the set distance between the vehicles. If

the vehicle ahead accelerates, the adaptive

cruise control also accelerates, going no

higher than the target speed programmed.

If the vehicle is equipped with automatic

gearbox, the ACC can brake the vehicle until

it stops completely if a vehicle in front of it

stops.

The distance programmed should be in-

creased when the road surface is wet.

Driver intervention prompt

During driving, the ACC is subject to certain

limitations inherent in the system. In other

words, in certain circumstances the driver will

have to adjust speed him or herself, as well as

the distance from other vehicles.

In this case, the instrument panel screen will

warn you to intervene by applying the brake

283

Driving

and a warning tone will be heard

›

page 284.

WARNING

The intelligent technology in the ACC can-

not over

come the system's inherent limita-

tions or change the laws of physics. If used

negligently or involuntarily, it may cause

serious accidents and injuries. The system

is not a replacement for driver awareness.

●

Adapt your speed and safe distance to

the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit

visibility, weather, road and traffic condi-

tions.

●

Do not use the ACC when visibility is bad,

on steep roads, with several bends or in

slippery circumstances such as snow, ice,

rain or loose gravel, or on flooded roads.

●

Never use the ACC when driving off-road

or on unpaved roads. The ACC has been

designed for use on paved roads only.

●

The ACC does not react on approaching

a fixed obstacle, such as the tail of a traffic

jam, a damaged vehicle or a vehicle stop-

ped at the traffic lights.

●

The ACC only reacts to people if a pe-

destrian monitoring system is available. In

addition, the system does not react to ani-

mals or vehicles crossing your path or ap-

proaching head-on down the same lane.

●

If the ACC does not reduce speed suffi-

ciently, brake the vehicle immediately by

applying the pedal.

●

If you are driving using the spare wheel,

the ACC syst

em could automatically

switch off during the journey. Switch off the

system when starting off.

●

If the vehicle continues to move involun-

tarily after a driver intervention prompt,

brake the vehicle by applying the pedal.

●

If the dash panel displays a driver inter-

vention prompt, adjust the distance your-

self.

●

The driver should be ready to accelerate

or brake by him/herself at all times.

CAUTION

If you have the sensation that the radar

sensor is damaged, disconnect the ACC.

This will avoid possible damage

. If this oc-

curs have it adjusted.

●

Repairs to the radar sensor require spe-

cialist knowledge and special tools. SEAT

recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for

this purpose.

Note

●

If the ACC system does not work as de-

scribed in this chapt

er, do not use it until it

has been checked by a specialised work-

shop. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT

dealership for this purpose.

●

Maximum speed with the ACC activated

is limited to 210 km/h (130 mph).

●

When the ACC is switched on, str

ange

noises may be heard during automatic

braking cause by the braking system.

Symbols on the instrument panel

display and control l

amps



The speed reduction by the ACC

to maintain the dist

ance from the

vehicle in front is not sufficient.

Brake! apply the foot brak

e! Driver intervention

prompt.



The ACC is not currently availa-

ble.

With the v

ehicle stationary, switch off the engine and

start it up again. Check the SEAT badge area on the

ont

›››

Fig. 260 (in case it is dirty or icy or it has

been hit). If it is still unavailable, refer to a specialised

workshop to have the system inspected.

The symbol on the instrument panels with colour

displ

ay is in col

our



The ACC is active.

No vehicle is detected in front. The programmed

speed remains constant.

284

Driver assistance systems



If the symbol is white: the ACC is

active.

A v

ehicle in front has been detected. The ACC ad-

justs speed and distance from the v

ehicle in front.



If the symbol is grey: ACC is inac-

tive (Standby)

The system is switched on, but is not adjusting.



The lamp lights up green

The ACC is active.

Some control and warning lamps will light up

briefly when the ignition is s

wit

ched on t

check certain functions. They will switch off

after a few seconds.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings

›››

in Con-

trol and warning l

amps on page 123.

Indications on the display

Fig. 259

On the instrument panel display: (A)

ACC inactiv

e (St

andby). (B) ACC activ

Status display

Indications on the displ

›

Fig. 259:

Vehicle ahead detected. ACC is not ac-

tive and is not regulating your speed.

Distance from the vehicle ahead. ACC is

not active and is not regulating your dis-

tance.

Vehicle ahead detected. ACC is active

and is r

egul

ating your speed.

Dist

ance level 2 set by the driver.

ACC is active and is regulating your dis-

tance based on speed.

Note

When the ACC is connected, the indica-

tions on the instrument panel screen may

be concealed by w

arnings from other func-

tions, such as an incoming call.

Radar sensor

Fig. 260

On the front behind the SEAT badge:

adar sensor

On the front behind the SEAT badge, a radar

sensor has been inst

all

ed t

o capture the traf-

fic situation

›››

Fig. 260.

285

Driving

The radar sensor's visibility may be impaired

by dirt, mud or sno

, or by envir

onmental in-

fluences such as rain or mist. In this case the

adaptive cruise control (ACC) does not work.

The instrument panel displays the following

message: ACC: No sensor vision! If nec-

essary, clean the SEAT badge area

›››

When the r

adar sensor begins t

o oper

ate

properly again, the ACC will automatically

be available again. The message on the in-

strument panel screen will switch off and the

ACC will be reactivated again.

ACC operation may be affected by a strong

radar reverse reflection. This may occur, for

example, in a closed car park or due to the

presence of metallic objects (e.g. rails on the

road or sheets used in road works).

The area in front of and around the radar

sensor should not be covered with adhesives,

additional or similar headlights, as this may

negatively affect ACC operation.

If the front of the vehicle is not properly re-

paired or structural modifications are made

to it, for example, if the suspension is lowered,

ACC operation may be affected. In this sce-

nario, SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT

dealership.

CAUTION

If you have the sensation that the radar

sensor is damaged or has lost its settings,

disconnect the ACC. This will avoid possi-

ble damage. If this occurs hav

e it adjusted.

●

The sensor may become damaged or

lose its settings when knocked, for exam-

ple, during a parking manoeuvre. This may

compromise the system's efficacy or dis-

connect it.

●

Repairs to the radar sensor require spe-

cialist knowledge and special tools. SEAT

recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for

this purpose.

●

Clean away the snow with a brush and

the ice preferably with a solvent-free de-

icer spray.

Operating the Adaptive Cruise

Contr

ol ACC

Fig. 261 On the left of the steering column:

thir

d l

ver for operating the Adaptive Cruise

Control.

Fig. 262 On the left of the steering column:

third le

ver for operating the Adaptive Cruise

Control.

When the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is

connect

ed, the gr

een contr

ol lamp  will

light up on the instrument panel, and the pro-

grammed speed and ACC status will be dis-

played

›››

Fig. 259.

What ACC settings are possible?

●

Setting your speed

›››

page 287.

●

Setting your distance

›››

page 287.

●

Connecting and activating the ACC

›››

page 287.

●

Disconnecting and deactivating the ACC

›››

page 287.

●

Adjusting the default distance level at the

start of your journey

›››

page 287.

●

Adjusting the driving profile

›››

page 287.

●

Conditions in which the ACC does not re-

act

›››

page 288.

286

Driver assistance systems

Setting speed

o set your speed, mo

e the third lever loca-

ted in position

upwards or downwards until

the desir

ed speed is sho

wn on the instrument

panel displ

ay. The speed adjustment is made

at 10 km/h (6 mph) intervals.

Once you are driving, if you wish to set the

current speed as the vehicle’s cruise speed

and activate the ACC, press the 

›››

Fig. 262 button. If you wish to increase or

reduce speed by intervals of 1 km/h (0.6

mph), move the lever to position

›››

Fig. 261 or pr

ess the  butt

on, r

espective-

ly.

The set speed can be changed when the ve-

hicle is stopped or during driving, as you like.

Any modification to the programmed speed

will be shown on the bottom left part of the

instrument panel display

›››

Fig. 259.

Setting your distance level

To increase/reduce the distance level, press

the rocker switch towards the left/right

›››

Fig. 262

The instrument panel displ

ay sho

ws the mod-

ification of the dist

ance level. There are 5 dis-

tance levels to choose from. SEAT recom-

mends level 3. The set distance can be

changed when the vehicle is stopped or dur-

ing driving, as you like

›››

Connecting and activating the ACC

o connect and activ

e the ACC, the posi-

tion of the gearbox selector lever, the vehicle

speed and the position of the third level of the

ACC must all be taken into account.

●

With a manual transmission, the gearbox

selector lever must be in any gear except

first, and the speed must be higher than ap-

proximately 30 km/h. With an automatic

transmission, the gearbox selector lever must

be in position D or S.

●

To activate the ACC, with the third lever in

position

press the  butt

on or mo

e the

third lever of the ACC to position

›››

Fig. 261. At this point, the image of the

ACC on the instrument panel displ

ay will

wit

ch to Active mode

›››

Fig. 259.

When the ACC function is active, the vehicle

travels at a set speed and distance from the

vehicle ahead. Both speed and distance can

be changed at any time.

Disconnecting and deactivating the ACC

To disconnect the ACC move the lever to the

position

›

Fig. 261 (engaged). An ACC

deactivated message appears and the

function is totally deactivated.

If you do not wish to disconnect the ACC, just

to switch it temporarily to inactive mode

(Standby), move the third lever to position

›››

Fig. 261 or pr

ess the br

e pedal.

It will also switch to inactive mode (Standby)

if the vehicle is stopped and the driver door is

opened.

Adjusting the default distance level at the

start of your journey

In wet road conditions, you should always set

a larger distance with regard to the vehicle in

front than when driving in dry conditions.

The following distances can be preselected:

●

Very short

●

Short

●

Media

●

Long

●

Very long

In the Easy Connect system you can adjust

the distance level that will be applied when

the ACC is connected using the 

> SET-

TINGS > Driver assistance

›



page 35.

Changing the driving profile

In vehicles with SEAT Drive Profile, the driving

profile selected can have an influence on the

ACC’s acceleration and braking behaviour

›››

page 303.

In vehicles without SEAT Drive Profile, the be-

haviour of the ACC can also be affected by

selecting any of the following drive profiles in

the Easy Connect system:

287

Driving

●

Normal

●

Sport

●

Eco

●

Convenience

In this case

, you shoul

d access the ACC set

tings using the 

> SETTINGS > Driver

assistance > ACC

›



page 35.

The following conditions may lead the

ACC not to react:

●

If the accelerator is pressed.

●

If there is no gear engaged.

●

If the ESC is controlling.

●

If the driver is not wearing his/her seat belt.

●

If several brake lights of the vehicle or elec-

trically connected trailer are damaged.

●

If the vehicle is reversing.

●

Driving faster than 210 km/h (130 mph).

Driver messages

 ACC not available

The system can no longer continue to guar-

antee safe vehicle detection and will be de-

activated. The sensor has lost its setting or is

damaged. Take the vehicle to a specialised

workshop and have the fault repaired.

 ACC and Front Assist: currently

not available. No sensor vision

This message will be displayed to the driver if

the radar sensor's vision is impaired due, for

example, to leaves, snow, heavy fog or dirt.

Clean the SEAT badge

›››

Fig. 260.

 ACC: currently not available.

Gradient too steep

The maximum road slope has been excee-

ded, hence safe ACC operation cannot be

guaranteed. The ACC cannot be switched

on.

 ACC: only available in D, S or

Select the D/S or M position on the selector

lever.

 ACC: parking brake applied

The ACC is deactivated if the parking brake is

applied. The ACC is available once again af-

ter the parking brake is released.

 ACC: currently not available.

Intervention of stability control

The message for the driver is displayed when

the electronic stability control (ESC) inter-

venes. In this case, the ACC is automatically

switched off.

 ACC: Take action!

The message for the driver is displayed if,

when the vehicle starts up on a hill with a mild

slope, the vehicle rolls back even although

the ACC is activated. Apply the brake to stop

the vehicle from moving/colliding with anoth-

er vehicle.

 ACC: speed limit

The message for the driver is displayed if, in

vehicles with manual gearbox, the current

speed is too low for the ACC mode.

The speed to be stored must be at least

30 km/h (18 mph). The speed limiter switches

off if the speed falls below 20 km/h (12 mph).

 ACC: available as of the 2nd

gear

The ACC is operational as of the 2nd gear

(manual gearbox).

 ACC: engine speed

The message for the driver is displayed if,

when the ACC accelerates or brakes, the

driver does not shift up or down a gear in

time, which means exceeding or not reaching

the permissible engine speed. The ACC

switches itself off. A buzzer warning is heard.

 ACC: clutch applied

Vehicles with manual transmission: pressing

the clutch pedal for longer abandons control

mode.

Door open

Vehicles with automatic transmission: the

ACC cannot be activated with the vehicle

stationary and the door open.

288

Driver assistance systems

WARNING

There is a danger of rear collision when the

minimum distance to the v

ehicle in front is

exceeded and the speed difference be-

tween both vehicles is so great that a

speed reduction by the ACC will not suf-

fice. In this case the brake pedal should be

applied immediately.

●

The ACC may not be able to detect all

situations properly.

●

“Stepping” on the accelerator may

cause the ACC not to intervene in braking.

Driver braking will have priority over inter-

vention by the speed control or adaptive

cruise control.

●

Always be ready to use the brakes!

●

Observe country-specific provisions gov-

erning obligatory minimum distances be-

tween vehicles.

Note

●

The programmed speed is er

ased once

the ignition or the ACC are switched off.

●

When the traction control system (ASR) is

deactivated during acceleration or else the

ESC is activated in Sport* Mode

(

›››



page 35), the ACC switches off au-

tomatically.

●

In vehicles with the Start-Stop system,

the engine switches off automatically dur-

ing the ACC stopping phase and restarts

automatically to begin driving.

Function for preventing overtaking

in an inside l

ane

Fig. 263

On the instrument panel display:

ACC activ

, v

ehicle detected in an outer lane.

The adaptive cruise control (ACC) has a

function that helps av

oid o

ertaking while

driving in inside lanes at certain speeds.

If another vehicle is detected travelling at a

slower speed in an outer lane, it is displayed

on the multifunction display

›››

Fig. 263.

To avoid overtaking while driving in an inside

lane the system will gently brake, and in ac-

cordance with the speed will prevent the car

from overtaking. The driver can override this

function at any time by pressing the acceler-

ator pedal. At low speeds the function is inac-

tive, for greater comfort in a traffic jam or in

city traffic.

Deactivating the Adaptive Cruise

Control ACC temporarily in certain

situations

In the following situations the Adaptive Cruise

Control (ACC) should be deactiv

ated due to

the system's limitations

›››

●

When changing lanes, on tight bends and

roundabouts, in acceler

ation and decelera-

tion lanes on motorways or in sections with

road works to prevent involuntary accelera-

tion to reach the programmed speed.

●

When going through a tunnel, as operation

could be affect

ed.

●

On roads with several lanes, when other ve-

hicles are driving more slowly in the overtak-

ing lane. In this case, slower vehicles will be

overtaken on the right.

●

In case of heavy rain, snow or spray, as the

vehicle in front might not be detected proper-

ly or, in certain circumstances, might not be

detected at all.

WARNING

If the ACC does not switch off in the situa-

tions described, serious accidents and inju-

ries may occur.

●

Alw

ays switch off the ACC in critical sit-

uations.

289

Driving

Note

If you do not switch off the ACC in the

aforementioned sit

uations, you may com-

mit a legal offence.

Special driving situations

Fig. 264

(A) Vehicle on a bend. (B) Motorcy-

clist ahead out of r

ange of the r

adar sensor

Fig. 265 (C) Vehicle changing lanes. (D) One

ehicl

e t

urning and another stationary.

The adaptive cruise control (ACC) has cer-

ain physical limit

ations inher

ent in the sys-

tem. For example, certain reactions of the

ACC, in certain circumstances, may be unex-

pected or come late from the driver's point of

view. So pay attention in order to intervene if

necessary.

For example, the following traffic situations

call for the utmost attention:

Starting driving after a stopping phase

(only vehicles with automatic gearbox)

After a stopping phase, the ACC may begin

driving automatically when the vehicle in

front drives off

›››

Overtaking

When the t

urn signal lights up bef

e the ve-

hicle begins an overtaking manoeuvre, the

ACC accelerates the vehicle automatically

and thus reduces the distance from the vehi-

cle in front.

When the vehicle enters the overtaking lane,

if the ACC does not detect another vehicle in

front, it accelerates until it reaches the pro-

grammed speed and maintains it.

System acceleration can be interrupted at

any time by pressing the brake or moving the

third lever backwards

›››

page 286.

Driving through a bend

On entering or exiting bends, the radar sensor

may stop detecting the vehicle in front or re-

acting to a vehicle in the adjacent lane

›››

Fig. 264 A In these situations the vehicle

may brake unnecessarily or fail to react to

the vehicle in front. In this case, the driver has

to intervene by accelerating or interrupting

the braking process by applying the brake or

pushing the third lever backwards

›››

page 286.

Driving in tunnels

When driving through tunnels the radar sen-

sor may be limited. Switch off the ACC in tun-

nels.

290

Driver assistance systems

Narrow or misaligned vehicles

The r

adar sensor can only det

ect narr

ow or

misaligned vehicles when they are within

range

›››

Fig. 264 B. This applies particularly

to narrow vehicles such as motorbikes. In

these cases, you should brake as necessary.

Vehicles with special loads and accesso-

ries

Special loads and accessories of other vehi-

cles that jut out over the sides, backwards or

over the top may be out of the ACC's range.

Switch off the ACC when driving behind vehi-

cles with special loads and accessories or

when overtaking them. In these cases, you

should brake as necessary.

Other vehicles changing lanes

Vehicles changing lanes a short distance

away from your own can only be detected

when they are within range of the sensors.

Consequently, the ACC will take longer to re-

act

›››

Fig. 265 C. In these cases, you should

brake as necessary.

Stationary vehicles

The ACC does not detect stationary objects

while driving, such as traffic tails or damaged

vehicles.

If a vehicle detected by the ACC turns or

moves over and there is a stationary vehicle

in front of it, the ACC will not react to it

›››

Fig. 265 D. In these cases, you should

brake as necessary.

Vehicles driving in the opposite direction

and vehicles crossing your path

The ACC does not react to vehicles ap-

proaching from the opposite direction or ve-

hicles crossing your path.

Metal objects

Metal objects, e.g. rails on the road or sheets

used in road works, can confuse the radar

sensor and cause the ACC to react wrongly.

Factors that may affect how the radar

sensor operates

If laser sensor operation is impaired, due to

heavy rain, spray, snow or mud, the ACC is

deactivated temporarily. The relevant text

message will appear in the dash panel dis-

play. If necessary clean the SEAT

badge

›››

Fig. 260.

When the radar sensor begins to operate

properly again, the ACC will automatically

be available again. The message on the in-

strument panel screen will switch off and the

ACC will be reactivated again.

ACC operation may be affected by a strong

radar reverse reflection, for example in a

closed car park.

Trailer mode

When driving with trailer the ACC controls

less dynamically.

Overheated brakes

If the brakes overheat, for example after

abrupt braking or in long and steep slopes,

the ACC may be deactivated temporarily.

The relevant text message will appear in the

dash panel display. In this case, adaptive

cruise control cannot be activated.

Adaptive Cruise Control can be reactivated

once brake temperature has cooled suffi-

ciently. The message will disappear from the

instrument panel display. If the message ACC

not available remains on for quite a long

time it means that there is a fault. Contact a

specialised workshop. SEAT recommends vis-

iting a SEAT dealership.

WARNING

If you do not heed the Press the brake

message, the vehicl

e may initiate an invol-

untary movement and could crash into the

vehicle ahead. In any event, before driving

off, check that the road is clear. The radar

sensor may not detect obstacles on the

road. This could cause an accident and se-

rious injuries. If necessary, apply the brake.

291

Driving

Lane Assist system*

Intr

oduction

Fig. 266 On the windscreen: field of vision of

the L

ane Assist syst

em camer

Using the camera located in the windscreen,

the L

ane Assist syst

em det

ects the possible

lines dividing the lanes. When the vehicle in-

voluntarily approaches a dividing line it has

detected, the system notifies the driver with a

corrective steering movement. The purpose is

not only to warn the driver, but also to keep

the vehicle inside the lane. This movement

can be over-regulated at any time.

No warning is produced with the turn signals

activated, given that the Lane Assist system

understands that a lane change is required.

Control lamp



It lights up yellow

Lane Assist active but not available.

The system cannot accurately recognise the lane.

Please see page 294, Lane Assist system is not avail-

able (the control lamp is lit up yellow).



It lights up green

Lane Assist system active and available.

Some control and warning lamps will light up

briefly when the ignition is s

wit

ched on t

check certain functions. They will switch off

after a few seconds.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings

›››

in Con-

trol and warning l

amps on page 123.

Indications on the instrument panel

displ

Fig. 267 On the instrument panel display: Indi-

cation on the L

ane Assist syst

em displ

ay (ex-

ample 1).

292

Driver assistance systems

Fig. 268

On the instrument panel display: In-

dication on the L

ane Assist syst

em displ

ay (ex-

ample 2).

Status display

The syst

em is activ

, but not available,

either because the minimum speed has

not been reached or because the lane

lines are not recognised

›››

Fig. 267 A.

The system is active and available, both

lane lines are recognised. The steering

angle is not being corrected at this mo-

ment

›››

Fig. 267 B.

–

The system is operational, the highligh-

ted line

indicates that there was a risk

of inv

olunt

arily cr

ossing the lane line and

that the steering is being adjusted to

correct the angle

›››

Fig. 268 C.

The two highlighted lines

light up si-

mult

aneously when both l

ane lines ar

recognised and the Lane Assist function

is active

›››

Fig. 268 D.

Operating mode

Steering wheel vibration

The f

oll

wing situations can cause vibration

in the steering wheel and require the driver to

take active control of driving:

●

When the steering angle assist value re-

quired to keep the vehicle in the lane is higher

than the system’s maximum operating value.

●

If the system ceases to display the lane

lines while assisting with steering.

Switching the Lane Assist system on or off

Through the Easy Connect system

●

Press the Easy Connect button 

●

Press the function button SETTINGS >

Driver assistance t

o open the menu.

Or:

Using the

Driving Assist button on the

turn signal lever*

›››

page 122.

–

Lane Assist with lane centring guide

The Lane Centring Guide function is inten-

ded to keep the vehicle in the centre of the

lane.

If the driver has a tendency to veer slightly off

centre in the lane, the system adapts to driver

preferences.

The Lane Centring Guide function is acti-

vated/deactivated in the Easy Connect sys-

tem using the 

button > SETTINGS function

butt

›



page 35.

Automatic deactivation: the Lane Assist sys-

tem can be automatically deactivated if

there is a system malfunction. The control

lamp disappears.

Hands-Off Function

In the absence of steering wheel activity the

system alerts the driver with acoustic signals

and a text message on the dash panel asking

to actively take over the steering.

If the driver does not react to this, the system

also alerts the driver with a little shaking mo-

tion through the brakes and, if the vehicle has

it, activates the Emergency Assist function

›››

page 296.

In vehicles without Emergency Assist, the

adaptive lane guidance function will be disa-

bled after the corresponding warnings to the

driver.

293

Driving

The lane assist system is active but it is not

ail

abl

e (the control lamp is lit up yellow)

●

When driving at speeds below 65 km/h (38

mph).

●

When the Lane Assist system does not de-

tect the dividing lines of the road. For exam-

ple, in the event warnings indicating road

works, and snow, dirt, moisture or reflections.

●

When the radius of a curve is too small.

●

When no road markings can be seen.

●

When the distance to the next marking to

too great.

●

When the system does not detect any clear

and active steering movement during a long

period of time.

●

Temporarily, in the event of very dynamic

driving styles.

●

If a turn signal is activated.

●

With the stability control system (ESC) in

Sport mode or switched off.

BSD Plus (Lane Assist with Blind Spot De-

tector)*

The BSD Plus function is achieved by activat-

ing the Lane Assist and BSD functions

›››

page 298. In this case, the Lane Assist

function expands its functions in the following

way:

If the driver tries to change lane and there is a

vehicle in the blind spot:

●

The  lamp flashes in the corresponding

rear-view mirror even though the turn signal

has not been activated.

●

The steering wheel vibrates to warn the

driver of the risk of collision.

●

torque is applied to correct the steering

and return the vehicle to its lane.

Switching off the Lane Assist system in the

following situations

Due to the limits of the Lane Assist system,

switch it off in the following situations:

●

When more attention is required of the driv-

●

When driving in a sporty style

●

In unfavourable weather conditions

●

On roads in poor condition

●

In areas of road works

WARNING

The intelligent technology in the Lane As-

sist system cannot change the limits im-

posed by the laws of physics and by the

ery nature of the system. Careless or un-

controlled use of the Lane Assist system

may cause accidents and injury. The sys-

tem is not a replacement for driver aware-

ness.

●

Always adapt your speed and the dis-

tance to the vehicles ahead in line with visi-

bility, weather conditions, the condition of

the road and the traffic sit

uation.

●

Always keep your hands on the steering

wheel so it can be turned at any time.

●

The Lane Assist system does not detect

all road markings. The road surfaces, road

structures or objects in poor condition can

be incorrectly detected as road markings

under certain circumstances by the Lane

Assist system. In such situations, switch the

Lane Assist system off immediately.

●

Please observe the indications on the in-

strument panel and act as is necessary.

●

Always pay attention to the vehicle's sur-

roundings.

●

When the area of vision of the camera

becomes dirty, covered or is damaged, the

Lane Assist system function can be affec-

ted.

CAUTION

In order to avoid influencing the operation

of the system, the foll

owing points must be

taken into account:

●

Regularly clean the area of vision of the

camera and keep it in a clean state, without

snow or ice.

●

Do not cover the area of vision of the

camera.

●

Check that the area of vision of the wind-

screen camera is not damaged.

294

Driver assistance systems

Note

●

The lane depart

ure warning system has

been exclusively developed for driving on

paved roads only.

●

If the Lane Assist system does not work as

described in this chapter, do not use it and

contact a specialised workshop.

●

Before starting a journey, verify that the

field of vision of the camera is not covered

›››

Fig. 266.

●

Always keep the field of vision of the

camera clean.

●

If there is a fault in the system, have it

checked by a specialised workshop.

Traffic Jam Assist

Description and oper

ation

Fig. 269 Related video

Traffic Jam Assist helps the driver keep the

car within its l

ane and t

o mo

ve in convoy in

case of traffic congestion or slow traffic.

Traffic Jam Assist is an additional function of

Lane Assist

›››

page 292 and combines Lane

Assist functions with Adaptive Cruise Control

(ACC)

›››

page 283. Therefore, it is essential

that you read these two chapters carefully

and note the limitations of the systems and

the information about them.

Operation of Traffic Jam Assist

At speeds of below 60 km/h (40 mph), Traffic

Jam Assist can maintain a (temporary) dis-

tance preset by the driver with respect to the

vehicle ahead and help stay within the lane

›››

o do this, the syst

em aut

omatically controls

the accelerator, brakes and steering, and

slows the vehicle, stopping it fully if neces-

sary, when faced with a vehicle in front that

has stopped. It automatically moves off again

when the vehicle ahead moves.

Traffic Jam Assist is designed only for use on

motorways and wide roads. Therefore, never

use it in city traffic.

Technical requirements for using Traffic

Jam Assist

●

Lane departure warning must be activated:

Infotainment button 

> SETTINGS >

Driver assistance > Lane departure

warning (Lane Assist) function butt

›



page 35.

●

Adaptive lane guidance must be activated:

Infotainment button 

> SETTINGS >

Driver assistance > Lane Assist func-

tion butt

on.

●

Adaptiv

e Cruise Contr

ol (ACC) must be

connected and active

›››

page 286.

●

The speed must be below 60 km/h

(38 mph).

Traffic Jam Assist is not active (the Lane

Assist control light turns yellow)

●

If any of the conditions mentioned on

page 295, Technical requirements for us-

ing Traffic Jam Assist are no longer met.

●

If any of the conditions required for opera-

tion of the Lane Assist are not met

›››

page 292.

●

If any of the conditions necessary for the

adaptive cruise control (ACC) to work are no

longer fulfilled

›››

page 283.

Situations in which Traffic Jam Assist must

be switched off

Due to the limitations of the system, Traffic

Jam Assist must always be switched off in the

following situations:

●

When more attention is required by the

driver.

●

When driving in a very sporty style.

●

In adverse weather conditions, e.g. in case

of snow or heavy rain.

295

Driving

●

When driving on r

oads in poor condition.

●

In sections with r

oadw

orks.

●

In city journeys.

WARNING

The smart technology incorporated into

Traffic Jam Assist cannot defy the l

aws of

physics; it only works within the limits of the

system. Accidents and severe injury may

occur if Traffic Jam Assist is used negli-

gently or involuntarily. The system is not a

replacement for driver awareness.

●

Adapt your speed and safe distance to

the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit

the visibility, weather, road and traffic con-

ditions.

●

Do not use Traffic Jam Assist in city jour-

neys.

●

Do not use Traffic Jam Assist if there is

poor visibility, for example, in case of snow,

ice, rain or loose gravel, or on steep or slip-

pery sections or flooded roads.

●

Do not use Traffic Jam Assist offroad or

on roads where the surface is not firm. Traf-

fic Jam Assist has been designed for use on

paved roads only.

●

Traffic Jam Assist does not react to peo-

ple or animals or vehicles crossing your

path or that approach you head-on down

the same lane.

●

If Traffic Jam Assist does not reduce

speed sufficiently, brake the vehicle imme-

diately by applying the pedal.

●

If the vehicle continues t

o move when you

wish it to stop after a driver intervention

prompt, brake the vehicle by applying the

pedal.

●

If driver intervention is requested on the

dash panel display, immediately resume

control of the vehicle.

●

Keep your hands on the wheel at all times

to be ready to intervene in the steering at

any time. The driver is always responsible

for keeping the vehicle in its own lane.

●

Always be prepared to take charge of

driving (accelerating or braking) yourself.

Note

●

If Traffic Jam Assist does not w

ork as de-

scribed in this chapter, stop using it and

contact a specialised workshop.

●

If the system is faulty, take it to a special-

ised workshop and have it checked.

Emergency Assist

Description and oper

ation

Emergency Assist detects whether there is in-

activit

y by the driv

er and can aut

omatically

keep the car within the lane and stop it alto-

gether if necessary. This way the system can

actively help avoid an accident.

Emergency Assist is an additional function of

Lane Assist

›››

page 292 and combines Lane

Assist functions with Adaptive Cruise Control

(ACC)

›››

page 283. Therefore, it is essential

that you read these two chapters carefully

and note the limitations of the systems and

the information about them.

Operation of Emergency Assist

Emergency Assist detects when the driver

ceases to perform any activity and repeated-

ly requests that he/she regain active control

of the vehicle, through the use of optical and

acoustic warnings and by applying the

brakes.

If the driver continues to do nothing, the sys-

tem automatically takes over the accelerator,

brakes and steering in order to brake the ve-

hicle and keep it in its lane

›››

. When the

Emer

gency Assist is activ

ely adjusting, the

haz

ard warning lights come on

›››

page 152

and the vehicle makes slight zigzag move-

ments in the lane in order to warn other driv-

ers.

If the remaining braking distance is sufficient,

if necessary the system slows down the vehi-

cle until it stops completely and automati-

cally switches on the electronic parking

brake

›››

page 246.

296

Driver assistance systems

Switching the Emergency Assist on and off

The Emer

gency Assist is s

wit

ched on auto-

matically when the Lane Assist is switched on

›››

page 292.

Technical requirements for using the Emer-

gency Assist

●

The adaptive cruise control (ACC) must be

switched on

›››

page 283.

●

The Lane Assist must be switched on

›››

page 292.

●

The selector lever must be in the D/S posi-

tion or in the Tiptronic selector gate.

●

The system must have detected a lane

separation line on both sides of the vehicle

›››

Fig. 268.

The following conditions may cause the

Emergency Assist not to react or to switch

off automatically:

●

If the driver accelerates, brakes or moves

the steering wheel.

●

If any of the conditions mentioned in

›››

page 297, Technical requirements for

using the Emergency Assist are not fulfilled.

●

If any of the conditions required for opera-

tion of the Lane Assist are not met

›››

page 292.

●

If any of the conditions necessary for the

adaptive cruise control (ACC) to work are no

longer fulfilled

›››

page 283.

WARNING

The smart technology incorporated into

the Emergency Assist cannot ov

ercome the

limits imposed by the laws of physics; it on-

ly works within the limits of the system. The

driver is responsible for driving the vehicle.

●

Adapt your speed and safe distance to

the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit

the visibility, weather, road and traffic con-

ditions.

●

Keep your hands on the wheel at all times

to be ready to intervene in the steering at

any time.

●

The Emergency Assist alone cannot al-

ways avoid accidents or serious injuries.

●

If the operation of the Emergency Assist

is impaired, for example if the radar sensor

of the adaptive cruise control (ACC) or the

Lane Assist camera are covered or have

lost their settings, the system may inter-

vene inopportunely in braking or in steer-

ing.

●

The Emergency Assist does not react to

people or animal or vehicles crossing your

path or which approach you head-on in the

same lane.

WARNING

If the Emergency Assist Intervenes inoppor-

tunely, serious accidents and injuries may

occur.

●

If the Emergency Assist does not operat

properly, switch off the Lane Assist

›››

page 292. Doing so will also switch off

the Emergency Assist.

●

Have the system checked by a special-

ised workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a

SEAT dealership for this.

Note

●

Aut

omatic interv

entions by the Emergen-

cy Assist on the brakes may be interrupted

by pressing the accelerator or brake or by

moving the wheel.

●

Hazard warning lights that come on auto-

matically can be switched off by pressing

the accelerator or the break, moving the

steering wheel or pressing the hazard

warning light switch.

●

If this occurs, the Emergency Assist may

decelerate the vehicle until it comes to a

complete stop.

●

When the Emergency Assist is activated,

it is only available again after the ignition

has been switched off and back on again.

297

Driving

Blind spot detector (BSD)

with parking assist

ance

(RC

A)*

Introduction

Fig. 270 Related video

The blind spot detector (BSD) helps to detect

the tr

affic sit

uation behind the v

ehicle.

The integrated parking assistant (RCTA) helps

the driver when backing out of a parallel

parking spot and in manoeuvring.

The blind spot detector has been developed

for driving on paved roads.

WARNING

The smart technology incorporated into

the blind spot detector (BSD) with parking

assist

ance (RCTA) included cannot over-

come the limits imposed by the laws of

physics; it only works within the limits of the

system. Accidents and severe injury may

occur if the blind spot detection system or

the rear cross traffic alert are used negli-

gently or involuntarily. The system is not a

replacement f

or driver awareness.

●

Adapt your speed and safe distance to

the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit

visibility, weather, road and traffic condi-

tions.

●

Keep your hands on the wheel at all times

to be ready to intervene in the steering at

any time.

●

Pay attention to the control lamps that

may come on in the external rear view mir-

rors and on the instrument panel, and fol-

low any instructions they may give.

●

The blind spot assistant could react to

any special constructions that might be

present on the sides of the vehicle: e.g. high

or irregular dividers. This may cause erro-

neous warnings.

●

Never use the blind spot detector with

rear cross traffic alert on unpaved roads.

The blind spot detector with rear cross traf-

fic alert has been designed for use on

paved roads.

●

Always pay attention to the vehicle's sur-

roundings.

●

Never use the blind spot detector or the

parking assistant if the radar sensors are

dirty.

●

The external rear view mirror control

lamps may have limited functionality due

to solar radiation.

CAUTION

●

The radar sensors on the rear bumper

may be damaged or shift

ed in the event of

a collision, for example, when entering or

exiting a parking space. This may result in

the system disconnecting itself, or at least

possibly having its functionality diminished.

●

In order to ensure that the radar sensors

work properly, keep the rear bumper free of

snow and ice and do not cover it.

●

The rear bumper should only be painted

with paint authorised by SEAT. The blind

spot detector's functions may be limited or

work incorrectly if other paints are used.

Note

If the blind spot detector with parking as-

sistant does not work as described in this

chapt

er, do not use it and contact a speci-

alised workshop.

Control lamps

Control lamp in external rear view mirrors:



It lights up

It lights up once briefly: the blind spot detector is ac-

tivated and r

eady to operate.

It lights up: blind spot detector has detected a vehi-

cle in the blind spot.

298

Driver assistance systems



Flashes

The blind spot detector has detected a vehicle in the

blind spot and the turn signal has been turned on in

the dir

ection of the detected vehicle

›››

For vehicles that are also equipped with Lane Assist

›››

page 292, a warning to switch lanes will also ap-

pear even though the turn signal has not been en-

gaged (blind spot detector “Plus”).

Some warning and control lamps will light up

briefly when the ignition is switched on t

check certain functions. They will switch off

after a few seconds.

If there are no indications from the control

lamp in the external rear view mirror, this

means that the blind spot detector has not

detected any other vehicles in the area

›››

If the dipped beam is on, then the contr

amps in the e

xternal rear view mirrors will be

dimmed (night mode).

WARNING

If the warning lamps and the corresponding

messages are ignored when they light up

the vehicle may stall in traffic and cause

accidents and severe injuries.

●

Never ignore the warning lamps or mes-

sages.

●

Carry out the necessary operations.

CAUTION

Failure to heed the control lamps and cor-

responding te

xt messages when they light

up may result in damage to the vehicle.

Blind spot detector (BSD)

Fig. 271 On external rear-view mirrors: blind

spot det

ect

or displ

ay.

Fig. 272 Rear view of the vehicle: radar sensor

areas.

The blind spot detector uses radar sensors to

monit

or the ar

eas behind the v

ehicle

›››

Fig. 272. The system does this by measur-

ing the vehicle's distance from other vehicles

and its speed differential. The blind spot de-

tector will not work at speeds of less than ap-

prox. 15 km/h (9 mph). The system uses opti-

cal signals in the external rear view mirrors to

notify the driver.

Indication in the external rear view mirrors

The control lamp (expanded view) provides

an indication in the corresponding external

mirror

›››

Fig. 271 regarding the traffic situa-

tion behind the vehicle, if it is deemed to be

critical. The control lamp of the left-hand ex-

ternal mirror indicates the traffic situation to

the left of the vehicle, and the control lamp of

the right-hand external mirror indicates the

traffic situation to the right of the vehicle.

299

Driving

In the case of retrofitted tinted windows or

windo

ws with tint

ed film, the indications of the

xternal mirrors may not be seen clearly or

correctly.

Keep the external mirrors clean and free of

snow and ice, and do not cover them with ad-

hesives or other similar materials.

Radar sensors

The radar sensors are located on the left and

right of the bumper and are not visible from

the outside

›››

Fig. 272. The sensors monitor

both the blind spot and traffic behind the ve-

hicle

›››

Fig. 273,

›››

Fig. 274. The range to the

sides of the vehicle is a bit larger than the

width of a lane.

The lane width is not detected individually,

but is rather pre-configured in the system.

Thus if you are driving in wide lanes or in be-

tween two lanes, the indications may be in-

correct. Furthermore, the system can detect

vehicles driving in the lane next to you (if

there are any), and can also detect station-

ary objects such as dividers, and thus give an

incorrect indication.

300

Driver assistance systems

Driving situations

Fig. 273 Schematic diagram:  Passing situa-

tion with tr

affic behind the vehicle.  Indication

from the blind spot detector in the left-hand ex-

ternal mirror.

Fig. 274 Schematic diagram:  Situation of

passing and then moving int

o the right-hand

lane.  Indication from the blind spot detector

in the right-hand external mirror.

In the following situations, an indication will

be displ

ayed in the e

ernal mirror

›››

Fig. 273

 (arrow) or

›››

Fig. 274  (arrow):

●

When being overtaken by another vehicle

›››

Fig. 273 .

●

When passing another vehicle

›››

Fig. 274

 with a speed differential of approx. 10 km/h

(6 mph). If the vehicle is passing at a consid-

erably higher speed, no indication will be dis-

played.

The faster the vehicle approaches, the soon-

er an indication will be displayed in the exter-

nal mirror, because the blind spot detector

takes into account the speed differential with

other vehicles. Thus even though the distance

from the other vehicle is identical, the indica-

tion will appear sooner in some cases and

later in others.

Physical limitations inherent to the system

In some situations the blind spot detector

may not interpret the traffic situation correct-

ly. E.g. in the following situations:

●

on tight bends;

●

in the case of lanes with different widths;

●

at the top of slopes;

●

in adverse weather conditions;

301

Driving

●

in the case of special constructions t

o the

side of the v

ehicl

e, e.g., high or irregular divid-

ers.

Parking assistant (RCTA)

Fig. 275

Diagram of the parking assistant: de-

ect

ed ar

ea around the vehicle that is driving

off.

The parking assistant uses the radar sensors

on the r

ear bumper

›

Fig. 272 to monitor the

traffic crossing behind the vehicle as it backs

out of a parallel parking space or as it is be-

ing manoeuvred, for example in very low visi-

bility conditions.

If the system detects that someone else on

the road is approaching the rear of the vehi-

cle

›››

Fig. 275, an acoustic alarm is heard.

In addition to the acoustic alarm, the driver is

also informed by means of a visual signal on

infotainment system display. This signal is dis-

played in the form of a red strip at the back of

the image of the vehicle on the infotainment

system screen. This strip displays the side of

the vehicle towards which traffic is approach-

ing.

Automatic braking to reduce damages

If the rear cross traffic alert detects that

someone else on the road is approaching the

rear of the vehicle and the driver does not

step on the brake, the system will engage the

brakes automatically.

The parking system helps the driver by auto-

matically engaging the brakes to reduce any

damage. The automatic intervention on the

brakes takes place when driving in reverse at

approx. 1-12 km/h (1-7 mph. After detecting

that the vehicle is stationary, the system

keeps it that way for around 2 seconds.

After automatically braking to reduce dam-

age, the system will not be able to automati-

cally brake again for approximately 10 sec-

onds.

You can interrupt the automatic braking by

stepping hard on the accelerator pedal or

the brake pedal in order to regain control of

the vehicle.

WARNING

The smart technology incorporated into

the rear cross tr

affic alert cannot over-

come the limits imposed by the laws of

physics; it only works within the limits of the

system. The parking assistant function

should not tempt you into taking any risks.

The system is not a replacement for driver

awareness.

●

The system should never be used in limi-

ted visibility conditions or complicated

traffic, e.g., in high-traffic areas or when

crossing multiple lanes.

●

Be sure to always be aware of the vehi-

cle's surroundings, since the system often

fails to detect things such as bicycles or

pedestrians.

●

The rear cross traffic alert itself will not

brake the vehicle to a complete stop.

It is only displayed if the vehicle is equipped

with a parking system.

302

Driver assistance systems

Using the blind spot detector (BSD)

with parking assist

ant (RC

Activating and deactivating the blind spot

detector (BSD) with parking assist

ant

(RCTA)

The blind spot detector with parking assistant

can be switched on and off by accessing the

Assistance systems menu on the dash

panel display using the steering wheel con-

trols. If the vehicle is equipped with a multi-

function camera, it can also be accessed by

means of the driver assistance systems key

located on the main beam headlight lever.

Open the Assistants menu.

●

 Blind spot

●

 Exit Assist

If the verification box on the contr

ol panel is

checked , the functionality will be automat-

ically activated at ignition.

When the blind spot detector is ready to op-

erate, the indications in the external mirrors

will turn on briefly as confirmation.

When the vehicle is restarted, the last adjust-

ment in the system will remain active.

If the blind spot detector was automatically

deactivated, it will only be possible to restart

the system after turning the vehicle off and

restarting it.

Automatic deactivation of the blind spot

detector (BSD)

The r

adar sensors of the blind spot detector

with rear cross traffic alert will be automati-

cally deactivated when, among other rea-

sons, one of the sensors is detected to be

permanently covered. This may be the case

if, for example, there is a layer of snow or ice

in front of one of the sensors.

The relevant text message will appear in the

dash panel display.

Trailer mode

The Blind spot detector and the rear cross

traffic alert will be automatically deactivated

and it will be impossible to activate them if

the tow hitch is electrically connected to a

trailer or other similar object.

As soon as the driver starts to drive with a

trailer connected electrically to the vehicle, a

message will appear on the instrument panel

display indicating that the blind spot detector

and the rear cross traffic alert are deactiva-

ted. Once the trailer has been unhitched from

the vehicle, if you want to use the blind spot

detector and the rear cross traffic alert, you

will have to reactivate them in the corre-

sponding menu.

If the towing hitch is not factory equipped,

then the blind spot detector and the rear

cross traffic alert will have to be deactivated

manually when driving with a trailer.

SEAT Drive Profile*

Introduction

Fig. 276 Related video

The SEAT Drive Profile enables the driver to

choose betw

een f

our pr

ofiles or modes, Eco,

Normal, Sport and Individual, that modify

the behaviour of various vehicle functions,

providing different driving experiences.

In addition, the 4Drive version features the

Offroad and Snow profiles.

The Individual profile can be configured

according to personal preferences. The other

profiles have a fixed configuration.

Description

Depending on the equipment fitted in the ve-

hicl

, SEAT Driv

e Profile can operate on the

following functions:

303

Driving

Engine

Depending on the pr

ofil

e sel

ected, the engine

responds more spontaneously or more in har-

mony with the movements of the accelerator.

Additionally, when the Eco profile is selected,

the Start-Stop function is automatically acti-

vated.

In vehicles with automatic transmission, the

gear change points are modified to position

them in lower or higher engine speed ranges.

Additionally, the Eco profile activates the in-

ertia function, enabling consumption to be

further reduced.

In manual gearbox vehicles, the Eco profile

causes the gear change recommendation in-

dications that appear on the dash panel to

vary, facilitating more efficient driving.

Address

The power steering varies its driving modes

and adapts to the profile selected, thus offer-

ing the best behaviour for each situation.

Air conditioning

In vehicles with Climatronic, this can operate

in eco mode, especially restricting fuel con-

sumption.

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

The acceleration and braking gradient of the

adaptive cruise control varies according to

the active driving profile

›››

page 283.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

In the Offroad and Snow driving profiles, the

electronic stability Control (ESC)

›››

page 248 adjusts to adapt to the terrain.

In addition, hill descent control (HDC) is acti-

vated in the Offroad profile

›››

page 271.

Adjusting driving profile

Fig. 277 Centre console: Driving Experience

butt

on.

You can select the Eco, Normal, Sport, Indi-

vidual, Offroad

and Snow

)

The desir

ed mode can be sel

ected as follows:

●

Turn the Driving Experience button until the

required profile lights up on the Easy Connect

system display as well as on the Driving Ex-

perience button

›››

Fig. 277.

●

OR: select the required profile on the touch-

screen of the Easy Connect system, in the

menu that opens up on turning the Driving

Experience button.

The features of each profile can be seen by

pressing the Profile information button of

the Easy Connect system display.

In the Individual profile it is possible to con-

figure the characteristics of the vehicle using

the Profile setup button of the Easy Connect

system display.

An icon on the Easy Connect system display

provides information about the active profile

if it is different than Normal. The selector

identifies the profile chosen by means of a

red LED light.

Driving

profile

Char

acteristics

Eco

Places the vehicle in a particularly

low state of consumption, facilitat-

ing a fuel-saving driving style that

is respectful to the environment.

Only for 4Drive models.

304

Driver assistance systems

Driving

profile

Char

acteristics

Normal

Offers a balanced driving experi-

ence, suitabl

e for everyday use.

Sport

Provides a complete dynamic per-

formance in the vehicl

e, enabling

the user a more sporty driving style.

Individual

It allows you to personalise the

configuration. The functions that

can be adjusted depend on the

equipment fitt

ed in the vehicle.

Offroad

It adjusts the vehicle's parameters

in order to maint

ain optimal off-

road driving.

Snow

It adjusts the vehicle's behaviour for

driving on slippery road surfaces,

optimising grip and manoeuvrabili-

ty.

Only for 4Drive models.

WARNING

When operating SEAT Drive Profile, pay at-

tention to all tr

affic: doing otherwise could

cause an accident.

Note

●

When the vehicle is s

witched off it will

store the driving profile that was selected

when the ignition key was removed. Never-

theless, when the engine is restarted, the

engine and the gear will start by default in

the Normal setting. For engine and gear to

rev

ert to the desired position, select the

corresponding drive profile again rotating

the thumbwheel (Driving Experience

Button) or on the Easy Connect display.

●

When the vehicle is restarted after using

the Offroad or Snow settings, the system is

always activated in the Normal profile.

●

Your speed and driving style must always

be adjusted to visibility, weather, and traf-

fic conditions.

●

The Eco profile is not recommended when

towing a vehicle.

Park Assist*

Intr

oduction

Fig. 278 Related video

The Park Assist system is an additional func-

tion of P

arkPil

›

››

page 315 and helps the

driver to:

●

find a suitable parking space,

●

select a parking mode,

●

park driving in reverse in suitable perpen-

dicular and parallel spaces,

●

park driving forwards in suitable perpendic-

ular spaces,

●

exit a parking space driving forwards from a

parallel space.

In vehicles with a Park Assist system and fac-

tory infotainment system, the front, rear and

side areas are represented, and the position

of obstacles is shown relative to the vehicle.

The Park Assist system is subject to certain

limitations inherent to the system and its use

requires special attention by the driver

›››

WARNING

The technology used in the park assist sys-

tem invol

ves a series of limitations inherent

in the actual system and in the use of ultra-

sonic sensors. The use of Park Assist should

never tempt you to take any risk that may

compromise safety. The system is not a re-

placement for driver awareness.

●

Any accidental movement of the vehicle

could result in serious injury.

●

Adapt your speed and driving style at all

times to suit visibility, weather, road and

traffic conditions.

●

Certain surfaces of objects and gar-

ments do not reflect the ultrasound sen-

sors' signals. The system cannot detect, at

least correctly, these objects or people

wearing such clothes.

305

Driving

●

Ultrasound sensor signals may be aff

ec-

ted by external sound sources. In certain

circumstances this may prevent them from

detecting people or objects.

●

The ultrasound sensors have blind spots

in which obstacles and people are not reg-

istered.

●

Monitor the area around the vehicle at all

times, since the ultrasound sensors do not

detect small children, animals or certain

objects in all situations.

WARNING

Quick turns of the steering wheel when

parking or exiting a parking space with

Park Assist can cause serious injury.

●

Do not hol

d the steering wheel during

manoeuvres to park or exit a parking space

until the system requests it. Doing so disa-

bles the system during the manoeuvre, re-

sulting in the parking being cancelled.

CAUTION

●

In certain cir

cumstances, the ultrasonic

sensors do not detect objects such as trail-

er tongues, bars, fences, posts or thin trees,

or an open (or opening) rear lid, which

could damage the vehicle.

●

Retrofitting of certain accessories to the

vehicle, such as a bicycle rack, may inter-

fere with the operation of the Park Assist

system and cause damage.

●

The Park Assist system uses as a r

efer-

ence parked vehicles, curbs and other ob-

jects. Make sure that the tyres and wheels

are not damaged while parking. If necessa-

ry, opportunely interrupt the parking ma-

noeuvre to avoid damaging the vehicle.

●

The ultrasound sensors on the bumper

may be damaged or shifted in the event of

a collision, for example, when entering or

exiting a parking space.

●

If you use high-pressure or vapour equip-

ment to clean the ultrasound sensors, do

not apply it directly unless very briefly and

always from a distance of more than 10 cm.

●

A registration plate or plate holder on the

front with larger than the space for the reg-

istration plate, or a registration plate that is

curved or warped can cause:

–

false detections,

–

loss of sensor visibility.

–

cancellation of the parking manoeuvre

or defective parking.

●

If one of the ultrasonic sensors is dam-

aged, the area corresponding to that group

of sensors (front or rear) is deactivated and

cannot be activated until the fault is cor-

rected. However, you can still use the sen-

sors of the other bumper as per usual. If

there is a fault in the system, consult a spe-

cialist workshop. SEAT recommends visiting

a SEAT dealership for this.

Note

●

In order to guar

antee good system oper-

ation, keep the ultrasound sensors of the

bumper clean, free of snow or ice, and do

not cover them with adhesives or other ob-

jects.

●

Certain sources of noise, such as rough

asphalt or paving stones and the noise of

other vehicles can induce the Park Assist

system or ParkPilot to give erroneous warn-

ings.

●

In order to become familiar with the sys-

tem and its functions, SEAT recommends

that you practice operating the Park Assist

system in an area where there is not too

much traffic or in a car park.

Description of the Park Assist sys-

Fig. 279 In the centre console, top section:

butt

on t

o s

witch on the Park Assist system.

306

Driver assistance systems

The components of the Park Assist system

e the ultr

asonic sensors l

ocated in the front

and rear bumpers, the  button

›››

Fig. 279

to switch the system on and off and the mes-

sages on the instrument panel display.

Prematurely stopping or automatically in-

terrupting the manoeuvres for parking or

exiting a parking space

Park Assist interrupts the manoeuvres for

parking or exiting a parking space in any of

the following cases:

●

Press the  button.

●

The speed exceeds approximately 7 km/h

(4 mph).

●

The driver takes hold of the steering wheel.

●

The parking manoeuvre does not end within

6 minutes from the activation of automatic

steering.

●

There is a fault in the system (the system is

temporarily unavailable).

●

ASR is switched off.

●

ASR or ESC intervene with regulation.

●

The driver door is opened.

To restart the manoeuvre it is necessary that

none of these things occur and that the 

button is pressed again.

Special characteristics

The Park Assist system is subject to certain

limitations inherent to the system. For exam-

ple, it is therefore not possible to enter or exit

a parking space on sharp bends.

While entering or exiting a parking space, a

brief signal sounds to prompt the driver to

change between forward and reverse gears

(depending on the case). In successive ma-

noeuvres, the assistant tells the driver to

change gears, at the latest, when the contin-

uous audible signal is given (object present at

a distance of ≤30 cm) by Park Pilot.

When the Park Assist system turns the steer-

ing wheel with the vehicle stationary, the in-

strument panel also displays the symbol .

Keep the brake pedal depressed while the

symbol remains on the dash panel display to

turn the wheels with the vehicle stopped. This

way, the system will require fewer manoeu-

vres to complete the parking action.

Trailer mode

The Park Assist system cannot be switched

on if the factory-fitted towing bracket

›››

page 329 is electrically connected to a

trailer.

After changing a wheel

If, after changing a wheel, the vehicle stops

entering and exiting parking spaces correct-

ly, the circumference of the new wheel may

be different and the system may need to

adapt to it. The adaptation is automatic and

takes place during driving. Making turns slow-

ly and in both directions (20 km/h [12 mph])

for a few minutes may contribute to this

adaptation process

›››

in Introduction on

page 305.

307

Driving

Selecting a parking mode

Fig. 280 Overview of reduced displays for park-

ing modes:  Parall

el parking in reverse.  Per-

pendicular parking in reverse.  Perpendicular

parking forwards.

Fig. 281 On the instrument panel display: dis-

play of the assisted parking syst

em with de-

creased visibility.

Selecting a parking mode with Park Assist

with prior st

ep in fr

ont of the space

Aft

er activating the Park Assist system and af-

ter detecting a parking space, the display on

the instrument panel proposes a parking

mode. The Park Assist system selects the

parking mode automatically. The selected

mode is shown on the instrument panel dis-

play

›››

Fig. 281. The reduced display of other

possible parking modes is also shown

›››

Fig. 280. If the mode selected by the sys-

tem does not correspond to the desired

mode, you can select another mode by

pressing the  button

›››

Fig. 279.

Action

The necessary conditions to park with Park

Assist have to be met

›

››

page 310.

Press the  button.

A control l

amp on the  button lights up when

the system is s

witched on. Additionally, the

selected parking mode is shown on the instru-

ment panel display and the reduced display

shows another parking mode it can be

changed to.

Action

Turn on the corresponding turn signal towards

the side of the road where you ar

e parking.

The instrument panel displays the side corre-

sponding to the road. By default, if the turn

signal is not on, it parks on the right in the di-

rection of traffic.

If necessary, press the  button again to

change t

o the next parking mode.

Once you have switched to all possible park-

ing modes, if the  button is pressed again,

the syst

em switches off.

Press the  button again to s

witch the system

back on.

Follow the instructions displayed on the in-

strument panel while paying attention to traf-

fic and drive the vehicle past the parking

space.

308

Driver assistance systems

Special case of perpendicular parking

space t

o park f

orw

ards without driving

past first

Action

The necessary conditions to park with Park

Assist have to be met

›

››

page 310.

Action

Drive forward towards the parking space while

paying attention to tr

affic and stop the vehi-

cle.

Action

Press the  button once

A control lamp on the  button lights up when

the system is s

witched on. Additionally, the

selected parking mode is shown on the instru-

ment panel display without reduced display.

Release the steering wheel

›››

in Introduc-

tion on page 306.

309

Driving

Park with Park Assist

Fig. 282 On the instrument panel display: per-

pendicular parking. 

Finding a parking space.

 Parking position.  Manoeuvring.

Fig. 283 On the instrument panel display: paral-

lel parking.  Finding a parking space.

 Park-

ing position.  Manoeuvring.

Key to Fig. 282 and Fig. 283:

Message t

o mo

e forwards

Your vehicle

Parked vehicle

Parking space detected

Message to park

Message to press the brake pedal

Progress bar

Progress bars

The pr

ogr

ess bar

›

››

Fig. 282

and

›

Fig. 283

on the

scr

een of the instrument panel displ

ays the

elative distance to be covered. The greater

the distance, the fuller the progress bar.

When driving forward, the content of the pro-

gress bar decreases upwards, and when re-

versing, it decreases downwards.

Necessary conditions to park with Park As-

sist

For parallel parking

spaces

For perpendicular

parking spaces

The traction control system (ASR) must be turned on

›››

page 250.

310

Driver assistance systems

For parallel parking

spaces

For perpendicular

parking spaces

Do not exceed approxi-

mately 40 km/h

(25 mph)

when driving

past the parking space.

Do not exceed approxi-

mately 20 km/h

(12 mph) when driving

past the parking space.

Keep a distance between 0.5 and 2.0 metres

when

driving past the parking space.

Length of the space:

length of the vehicl

e +

0.8 metres

Width of the space:

width of the vehicle +

0.8 metres

Do not exceed approximately 7 km/h (4 mph) when

parking.

Parking

Do the following:

The necessary conditions have to be met to

park with Park Assist

››

›

page 310 and the

parking mode must be selected

›››

page 308.

Look at the display on the instrument panel to

see if the space has been detected as “appr

priate” and if the correct position for parking

has been reached

›››

Fig. 282 

›››

Fig. 283 .

The space is considered “appropriate” if the

display on the instrument panel shows the

message t

o park

Stop the vehicle and, after a brief pause, en-

gage the rev

erse gear.

Do the following:

Release the steering wheel

›››

in Introduc-

tion on page 306.

Please note the following message: Auto-

matic steering enabled. Pay at-

tention to your surroundings.

While you keep watch around you, carefully

start acceler

ating up to no more than 7 km/h

(4 mph).

During the parking manoeuvre, the system on-

ly takes char

ge of the steering. You, as the

driver, have to accelerate, engage the

clutch if necessary, change gears and

brake.

Reverse until the ParkPilot continuous signal is

hear

OR: re

verse until the instrument panel displays

the message to go f

orwards

›››

Fig. 282 

›››

Fig. 283 .

OR: reverse until the instrument panel displays

the message Park Assist finished.

The progress bar

indicates the distance to

cover

›

››

page 310.

Press down the brake pedal until the Park As-

sist system has finished turning the steering

wheel.

OR: until the  symbol on the instrument pan-

el display switches off.

8. Select first gear.

Do the following:

Go forward until the ParkPilot continuous sig-

nal is heard.

OR: go forw

ard until the instrument panel dis-

play sho

ws the message to reverse.

The Park Assist system steers the vehicle for-

ward and back until it centr

es it in the space

›››

Fig. 282  or

›››

Fig. 283 .

10.

For best results, wait at the end of each ma-

noeuvre until the Park Assist syst

em has finish-

ed turning the steering wheel.

The parking manoeuvre ends when a corre-

sponding message is displayed on the instru-

ment panel and, in some cases, an acoustic

signal sounds.

Note

If the manoeuvre is terminated prematurely

during parking, the result may not be the

best.

311

Driving

Exiting a parking space with Park

Assist (only f

or par

all

el spaces)

Fig. 284

On the instrument panel display:

driving off fr

om perpendicul

ar parking.

Key to the Fig. 284:

ark

ed v

ehicle

Your vehicle in reverse gear

Progress bar to indicate the distance left

to cover

Message giving the proposed manoeuvre

to exit the parking space

Necessary conditions to exit a parking

space with Park Assist

●

Only for parallel parking spaces

●

The traction control system (ASR) must be

turned on

›››

page 250.

●

Length of the space: length of the vehicle

+ 0.5 metres

●

Do not e

ceed appr

oximately 7 km/h

(4 mph) when exiting the parking space.

Exiting a parking space

Do the following:

For parallel parking spaces

The necessary conditions to exit a parking

space with Park Assist have t

o be met

›››

page 312.

2. Switch on the engine

›››

page 239.

Press the  button

››

›

Fig. 279.

A control lamp on the  button lights up when

the system is s

witched on.

Turn on the corresponding turn signal towards

the road you will enter when e

xiting the park-

ing space.

Engage reverse gear or turn the selector lever

o position

For parallel parking spaces

Release the steering wheel

›››

in Introduc-

tion on page 306.

Please note the following message: Auto-

matic steering enabled. Pay at-

tention to your surroundings.

While you keep watch around you, carefully

start acceler

ating up to no more than 7 km/h

(4 mph).

When exiting the parking space, the system

only takes char

ge of the steering. You, as the

driver, have to accelerate, engage the

clutch if necessary, change gears and

brake.

Reverse until the ParkPilot continuous signal is

heard.

OR: go backwards until the instrument panel

displ

ay shows the message to go forward.

The progress bar

›››

Fig. 284

indicates the

distance to co

ver

›››

page 310.

Press down the brake pedal until the Park As-

sist syst

em has finished turning the steering

wheel.

OR: press down the brake pedal until the 

symbol on the instrument panel display

switches off.

312

Driver assistance systems

For parallel parking spaces

Go forward until the ParkPilot continuous sig-

nal is heard.

OR: go forw

ard until the instrument panel dis-

play sho

ws the message to reverse.

The Park Assist system steers the vehicle for-

ward and back until it can e

xit the space.

10.

The vehicle can exit the space when a corre-

sponding message is displayed on the instru-

ment panel and, in some cases, an acoustic

signal sounds.

Tak

e charge of the steering with the turning

angle set by the Park Assist syst

em.

11.

Paying attention to the traffic, exit the parking

space.

Automatic braking intervention by

ark Assist

Park Assist helps the driver by automatically

aking in cert

ain sit

uations.

The driver is always responsible for braking in

time

›››

Aut

omatic br

aking int

ervention to avoid

exceeding the speed limit

To avoid exceeding the allowed speed of ap-

prox. 7 km/h (4 mph) when entering or leaving

a parking space, the brakes may activate au-

tomatically. After automatically activating

the brakes, the manoeuvres to enter or exit a

parking space may continue.

The brakes are only automatically activated

once for each attempt to enter or exit a park-

ing space. If the speed of approximately

7 km/h (4 mph) is exceeded again, the corre-

sponding operation is halted.

Automatic braking to reduce damages

Depending on certain conditions, the Park

Assist system can automatically brake the

vehicle when faced with an obstacle, briefly

actioning and holding down the brake ped-

›››

. Following this the driver must press

the br

e pedal.

Aut

omatic braking intervention to reduce

damage leads to the parking manoeuvre fin-

ishing.

WARNING

The automatic braking intervention by Park

Assist should nev

er tempt you to take any

risk that may compromise safety. The sys-

tem is not a replacement for driver aware-

ness.

●

The Park Assist system is subject to cer-

tain limitations inherent to the system. In

certain situations, the automatic braking

intervention may only work in a limited way

or not work at all.

●

Always be r

eady to use the brakes your-

self!

●

The automatic braking intervention will

end after approximately 1.5 seconds. After-

wards, brake the vehicle yourself.

Parking aid parking and ma-

noeuvring (ParkPilot)

Intr

oduction

Assorted assistance systems – which vary

depending on the equipment fitt

ed in the car

– will help you when parking or manoeuvring:

–

arking Syst

em Plus. It assists the driver

by visually and audibly warning them about

obstacles detected in front and behind the

vehicle

›››

page 315.

–

Rear parking aid. It is an audible and visual

assistant that warns about obstacles loca-

ted behind the vehicle

›››

page 319.

WARNING

●

Always pay att

ention, also when looking

straight ahead, to traffic and the vehicle

surroundings. The assistance systems are

not a replacement for driver awareness.

When inserting or removing the vehicle

from a parking space, or when performing

313

Driving

similar manoeuvres the driver always as-

sumes the responsibility.

●

Adapt your speed and driving st

yle at all

times to suit visibility, weather, road and

traffic conditions.

●

The ultrasound sensors have blind spots

in which obstacles and people are not reg-

istered. Pay special attention to children

and animals.

●

Always keep visual control of the sur-

roundings: use the mirrors for additional

help.

CAUTION

Parking Aid functions may be negatively af-

fected by diff

erent factors that may lead to

damage to the vehicle or its immediate sur-

rounds:

●

Under certain circumstances, the system

does not detect or display certain objects:

–

Objects such as chains, trailer draw

bars, fences, posts and thin trees.

–

Objects that are located above the

sensors, such as protrusions in a wall.

–

Objects with certain surfaces or struc-

tures, such as wire mesh fences or pow-

der snow.

●

Certain surfaces of objects and gar-

ments do not reflect the ultrasound sen-

sors' signals. The system cannot detect

these objects or people wearing such

clothes correctly.

●

Ultrasound sensor signals may be aff

ec-

ted by external sound sources. In certain

circumstances this may prevent them from

detecting people or objects.

●

Please note that low obstacles detected

by the system may no longer be registered

by the sensors as the car moves closer, so

the system will not give any further warn-

ing. In certain circumstances, objects such

as high kerbs that could damage the bot-

tom of the vehicle are not detected either.

●

If the first warning from the Parking Aid is

ignored, the vehicle could suffer considera-

ble damage.

●

The knocks or damage on the radiator

grille, bumper, wheel arch and vehicle un-

derbody can adjust the orientation of the

sensors. This can affect the parking aid

function. In this case, have the function

checked by a specialised workshop.

●

A registration plate or plate holder on the

front with larger than the space for the reg-

istration plate, or a registration plate that is

curved or warped can cause:

–

false detections,

–

loss of sensor visibility.

Note

●

In certain sit

uations, the system can give

a warning even though there is no obstacle

in the detected area, e.g:

–

with rough or cobbled fl

oors or ground

with long grass;

–

with external ultrasound sources, such

as cleaning vehicles or other vehicles

equipped with ultrasound systems;

–

in downpours, intense snow, hail or

dense exhaust gases,

–

if the number plate is not perfectly se-

cured to the bumper surface,

–

or in locations such as the brow of a

hill.

●

In order to guarantee good system oper-

ation, keep the ultrasound sensors clean,

free of snow or ice, and do not cover them

with adhesives or other objects.

●

If you use high-pressure or vapour equip-

ment to clean the ultrasound sensors, ap-

ply it directly only very briefly and always

from a distance of more than 10 cm.

●

Retrofitting of accessories to the vehicle,

such as a bicycle rack, may interfere with

the operation of the Parking Aid.

●

Fitting certain accessories to the front of

the vehicle, such as a plate holder with ad-

vertising, may interfere with the operation

of the Park Assist.

●

In order to familiarise yourself with the

system, it is advised that you practice park-

ing in an area or car park that is free from

traffic. There must be good weather and

light conditions.

314

Driver assistance systems

●

The volume and tone of the w

arnings can

be modified, in addition to the indications

›››

page 321.

●

In vehicles without an infotainment sys-

tem, these parameters can be modified in a

SEAT Official Service or in a specialised

workshop.

●

Please observe information on towing a

trailer

›››

page 321.

●

The display on the Easy Connect screen

shows a slight time delay.

Parking System Plus*

Description

Fig. 285

Represented area.

During parking, P

arking Syst

em Plus

assists

the driver by visually and audibly warning

them about obstacles detected in front of

and behind the vehicle.

There are ultrasound sensors integrated in

the front and rear bumpers. When they de-

tect an obstacle, you are alerted by audible

warnings and visually on the Easy Connect

system.

In case of risk of rear or front collision, an au-

dible warning will be emitted. You can tell

whether the risk is in front of or behind the ve-

hicle by choosing different sound frequencies

on Easy Connect.

Make particularly sure that the sensors are

not covered by adhesives, residues and the

like, as this could affect the system's opera-

tion. Cleaning instructions

›››

page 371.

The approximate measurement range of the

sensors is:

1.20 m

1.60 m

0.90 m

As you approach the obstacle, the time inter-

val between the audible warnings will be re-

duced. When you reach around 0.30 m the

warning will be constant: do not continue to

move forward (or backward)!

If you maintain separation from the obstacle,

the volume of the warning begins to reduce

after four seconds (does not affect the tone

of the constant warning).

In order to view the entire periphery of the ve-

hicl

, the v

ehicle must be moved a few me-

tres forwards or backwards. Thus, the missing

areas are screened and obstacles at the

sides of the vehicle are displayed

›››

Fig. 285

Special f

eat

es of ParkPilot with Area

View

In the following situations the screened area

on the side of the vehicle is automatically hid-

den:

●

When a vehicle door is opened.

●

When the ASR is switched off.

●

When there is ASR or ESC regulation.

●

If the vehicle remains stationary for more

than approximately 3 minutes.

Parking Aid operation

Fig. 286

Centre console: parking aid button

(depending on the v

ersion).

315

Driving

Manual connection of Parking Aid

●

Press the  butt

once

Manual disconnection of Parking Aid

●

Press the  button again.

Manual disconnection of Parking Aid dis-

play (the audible sounds remain active)

●

Press a button on the main menu of the fac-

tory-assembled infotainment system.

●

OR press the BACK

function button.

Aut

omatic connection of P

arking Aid

●

Engage r

everse gear or turn the selector

lever to position R.

●

OR: If the vehicle approaches an obstacle

that is in its forwards path at a speed below

15 km/h (9 mph)

›››

page 316. The obstacle is

detected from a distance of approx. 95 cm if

the automatic connection is activated in the

infotainment system. A reduced display is

shown.

●

OR: if the vehicle moves backwards.

Automatic disconnection of Parking Aid

●

Move the selector lever to position P.

●

OR: accelerate to approx. 15 km/h (9 mph)

or faster.

Temporary suppression of sound in Park-

ing Aid

●

Press the  function button.

Change from reduced view to full view

●

Engage reverse gear or turn the selector

lever to position R.

●

OR: press the car icon in reduced view.

If necessary, switch to the rear-assist im-

age (Rear View Camera “RVC”)

●

Engage reverse gear or turn the selector

lever to position R.

●

OR press the RVC function button.

A short confirmation signal will be heard and

the button symbol will light up yellow when

the system is switched on.

Automatic activation

Fig. 287

Miniature indication of automatic ac-

tiv

ation.

When the Plus P

arking Aid

connects aut

matically, a miniature of the vehicle and the

segments will appear on the left of the dis-

play

›››

Fig. 287.

Automatic activation occurs when slowly ap-

proaching an obstacle located in front of the

vehicle. It only operates every time the speed

is reduced below approximately 15 km/h (9

mph) for the first time.

If the parking aid is switched off using the 

button, the following actions must be carried

out in order for it to automatically switch on:

●

Switch off the ignition and switch it on

again.

●

OR: accelerate above 15 km/h (9 mph) be-

fore reducing speed below this number again.

316

Driver assistance systems

●

OR: pl

ace the sel

ect

or lever in position P

and then move it from this position.

●

OR: switch on and off the automatic activa-

tion in the Easy Connect system menu.

The automatic activation with parking aid

miniature indication can be switched on and

off from the Easy Connect system menu

›››



page 35:

●

Switch the ignition on.

●

Select: Infotainment button 

SETTINGS

> Parking and manoeuvring function but

on.

●

Sel

ect the Automatic activation option.

When the function button check box is activa-

ted , the function is on.

If the system has been activated automati-

cally, an audible sound warning will only be

given when obstacles in front are at a dis-

tance of less than 50 cm.

CAUTION

The automatic connection of the Parking

Aid only works when you are driving sl

owly.

If driving style is not adapted to the circum-

stances, an accident and serious injury or

damage may be caused.

Segments of the visual indication

Fig. 288

Parking Aid display on the Easy Con-

nect syst

em scr

een.

The distance of separation from the obstacle

can be estimat

ed using the segments ar

ound

the v

ehicle.

The optical indication of the segments works

as follows:

they are displayed when

the obstacle 30 cm away from the vehi-

cle or further if it is not within the vehi-

cle's trajectory or the direction of travel

is in the opposite direction to its location,

and also when the electronic parking

brake is activated.

obstacles located in the

vehicle's trajectory and which are more

than 30 cm away from the vehicle are

displayed in yellow.

White segments:

Yellow segments:

obstacles that are less than

30 cm away from the vehicle are dis-

played in red.

Moreover, with the Media System Plus, Navi

System or Navi System Plus systems, a yellow

trail indicates the vehicle's expected trajecto-

ry based on the steering angle.

Whenever the obstacle is located in the vehi-

cle’s direction of travel, the corresponding

audible warning will sound.

As the vehicle approaches an obstacle, the

segments are displayed closer to the vehicle.

When the penultimate segment is displayed,

this means that the vehicle has reached the

collision zone. In the collision zone, the obsta-

cles are represented in red, including those

out of the path. Do not continue to move for-

ward (or backward)

›››

in Introduction on

page 313,

›

in Introduction on

page 314 !

In the e

ent the car is equipped with the T

View Camera system, Park Assist visual guid-

ance will appear in accordance with the view

selected in the Top View Camera system.

Red segments:

317

Driving

Adjusting the display and audible

arnings

The settings for the display and audible

warnings are contr

olled via the Easy

Connect*.

Automatic activation

 on – activates the Automatic activa-

tion option

›››

page 316.

 off – deactivates the Automatic acti-

vation option

›››

page 316.

Front volume*

Volume in the front and rear area.

Front sound settings/sharpness*

Frequency (tone) of the sound in the front

area.

Rear volume*

Volume in the rear area.

Rear sound settings/sharpness*

Frequency (tone) of the sound in the rear

area.

Adjust volume

With the parking aid switched on, the active

audio/video source volume will be reduced to

the intensity of the selected setting.

Error messages

When the Parking Aid is activated or when it is

switched on, if a message r

eporting a Parking

aid error is displayed on the instrument panel,

there is a fault in the system.

If the fault does not disappear before discon-

necting the ignition, the next time that the

parking aid is engaged in reverse, no audible

signal of the existence of a fault will be is-

sued.

If there is a fault in the parking aid system a

message will appear on the instrument panel

indicating the error.

If there is a fault in a sensor, the symbol  is

displayed on the Easy Connect display in

front of/behind the vehicle. If a rear sensor is

faulty, only the obstacles in area

are dis-

ayed

›

Fig. 285. If a front sensor is faulty,

only the obstacles in area

are displayed.

Hav

e the f

ault corr

ected by a specialised

workshop without delay.

Driving with a trailer

Fig. 289

Parking assist display on the screen

with tr

ail

er att

ached.

In vehicles equipped with a towing bracket

vice fr

om the f

actory, when the trailer is

connected electrically, the Parking Aid rear

sensors will not be activated when reverse

gear is engaged, when the selector lever is

turned to position R or when the button  is

pressed.

The distance to possible obstacles at the rear

of the vehicle and at its sides will not be dis-

played on the screen and will not be indica-

ted by means of audible sound signals.

The Easy Connect system screen will only

display objects detected at the front, and the

vehicle's trajectory will be hidden.

318

Driver assistance systems

Braking while manoeuvring func-

tion*

3 Only valid with Parking System Plus

The emergency br

aking function is used to

minimise damage in the event of a collision.

Depending on the equipment, if the Parking

Aid is active, the braking while manoeuvring

function activates emergency braking when it

detects an obstacle in the vehicle’s path that

could cause a collision, driving forwards or in

reverse.

The function will not brake if the Parking Aid is

activated automatically. For the system to

operate, manoeuvring speed must be be-

tween 2.5 and 10 km/h (between 1.5 and 6

mph) for the front area and between 1.5 and

10 km/h (between 1 and 6 mph) for the rear.

Following an intervention, the braking while

manoeuvring function will be inactive in the

same direction of travel for 5 metres. Once

the gear is changed, or the selector lever’s

position is changed, the function will be ac-

tive again. The Parking Aid’s limitations apply.

The braking while manoeuvring function is

controlled in the Easy Connect system with

the 

button and the SETTINGS > Park

and manoeuvre function butt

ons.

●

 on – permits the use of the braking whil

manoeuvring function.

●

 off – does not permit the use of the

braking whil

e manoeuvring function.

Temporary suppression of emergency

braking

●

When the function is deactivated with the

Braking while manoeuvring

button that appears

on the P

arking Syst

screen of the Easy

Connect system.

●

Whenever any of the car doors, rear lid or

bonnet are opened.

Rear parking aid*

Description

The r

ear parking aid is an audible and visual

assist

ant that w

arns of obstacles located be-

hind the vehicle.

There are sensors integrated in the rear

bumper. When they detect an obstacle, you

are alerted by audible warnings and visually

on the Easy Connect system.

If the Top View Camera* is installed, the rear

parking aid will issue an audible warning

about objects near the rear of the vehicle,

and the Top View Camera* image will be

available on the Easy Connect screen, giving

a real image of the objects around the car.

Make particularly sure that the sensors are

not covered by adhesives, residues, dirt and

the like, as this could affect the system's op-

eration. Cleaning instructions

›››

page 371.

The approximate measurement range of the

rear sensors is:

0.60 m

1.60 m

Automatic disconnection of Parking Aid

●

Move the selector lever to position P.

●

OR: accelerate to approx. 15 km/h (9 mph)

or faster.

Temporary suppression of sound in Park-

ing Aid

●

Press the  function button.

Change from reduced view to full view

●

Engage reverse gear or turn the selector

lever to position R.

●

OR: press the car icon in reduced view.

As you approach the obstacle, the time inter-

val between the audible warnings will be re-

duced. When you reach around 0.30 m the

warning will be constant: Do not continue to

move forward (or backward)

›››

in Intro-

duction on page 313,

›

in Introduction

on page 314 !

Side area:

Central area:

319

Driving

If you maintain separation from the obstacle,

the v

olume of the w

arning begins t

o reduce

after four seconds (does not affect the tone

of the constant warning).

Parking Aid operation

Parking Aid connection

●

Engage reverse (for manual gears) or set

the selector l

ever to R (for automatic gears).

Parking Aid disconnection

●

Place the selector level in position P, N or D

(for automatic gearbo

xes) or disengage re-

verse (for manual gearboxes).

Set the lever to the N or D position to maintain

the system active for approximately 8 sec-

onds before switching off. During that time,

Parking assist will switch off if:

●

The selector lever is moved to position P.

●

OR: the vehicle accelerates to approx.

15 km/h (9 mph) or faster.

If the Top View Camera* is installed, rear

parking aid will be automatically deactivated

when disengaging reverse gear.

Manual disconnection of Parking Aid dis-

play (the audible sounds remain active)

●

Press a button on the main menu of the fac-

tory-assembled infotainment system.

●

OR press the BACK

function button.

empor

ary suppr

ession of sound in Park-

ing Aid

●

Press the  function button. If you have the

Top View Camera* system installed, you can-

not use the temporary suppression of sound

in Parking Aid.

Switch from reduced to full-screen view if

the rear assist is fitted (Rear View Camera

“RVC”)

●

Press the car icon in the reduced view.

If necessary, switch to the rear-assist im-

age (Rear View Camera “RVC”)

●

Engage reverse gear or turn the selector

lever to position R.

●

OR: press the RVC function button.

Segments of the visual indication

Fig. 290

Parking Aid display on the Easy Con-

nect syst

em scr

een.

The distance to the obstacles can be estima-

ed with the help of the segments at the r

ear

of the v

ehicle.

The optical indication of the segments works

as follows:

they are displayed when

the obstacle 30 cm away from the vehi-

cle or further if the direction of travel is in

the opposite direction to its location, and

also when the electronic parking brake is

activated.

obstacles located in the

vehicle's trajectory and which are more

than 30 cm away from the vehicle are

displayed in yellow.

White segments:

Yellow segments:

320

Driver assistance systems

obstacles that are less than

30 cm aw

ay fr

om the v

ehicle are dis-

played in red.

Whenever the obstacle is located in the vehi-

cle’s direction of travel, the corresponding

audible warning will sound.

As the vehicle approaches an obstacle, the

segments are displayed closer to the vehicle.

When the penultimate segment is displayed,

this means that the vehicle has reached the

collision zone. In the collision zone, the obsta-

cles are represented in red (including those

out of the path). Do not continue to reverse

›››

in Introduction on page 313,

›

in In-

oduction on page 314

If you ar

e equipped with the Top View

Camera*

Segments are not displayed when the vehicle

is equipped with Top View Camera*.

The Parking Aid system will issue an audible

warning for objects that are near the rear of

the vehicle, and the Top View Camera* im-

age will be available on the screen, giving a

real image of the objects around the car.

Red segments:

Adjusting the display and audible

warnings

The settings for the display and audible

warnings are contr

olled via the Easy Con-

nect*.

Rear volume*

Volume in the rear area.

Rear sound settings/sharpness*

Frequency (tone) of the sound in the rear

area.

Adjust volume

With the parking aid switched on, the active

audio/video source volume will be reduced to

the intensity of the selected setting.

Error messages

When the Parking Aid is activated or when it is

wit

ched on, if a message r

eporting a Parking

aid error is displayed on the instrument panel,

there is a fault in the system.

If the fault disappears before disconnecting

the ignition, the next time that the parking aid

is engaged in reverse, no audible signal of the

existence of a fault will be issued.

If there is a fault in a sensor, the  symbol is

displayed on the Easy Connect display.

Have the fault corrected by a specialised

workshop without delay.

Towing bracket

In vehicles equipped with a towing bracket

device from the f

actory, when the trailer is

connected electrically, the Parking Aid will

not be activated when reverse gear is engag-

ed (manual gears) nor when the selector lev-

er is turned to position R (automatic gears).

Top View Camera*

Introduction

Fig. 291 Related video

Using 4 cameras, the system generates a

epr

esent

ation that is shown on the infotain-

ment system display. The cameras are loca-

ted on the radiator grille, the exterior mirrors

and the rear lid.

321

Driving

The functions and representations of the Area

Vie

w syst

em may v

ary depending on whether

or not the vehicle has ParkPilot.

WARNING

The image from the cameras does not

make it possible t

o calculate the distance

to the obstacles (people, vehicles, etc.)

precisely, so using them could cause seri-

ous accidents and injury.

●

The camera lenses augment and distort

the visual field and the objects on the

screen are seen differently and imprecise-

ly.

●

Certain objects may not be shown or may

not be shown very clearly, for example,

posts or thin rails, due to the screen resolu-

tion or if light conditions are insufficient.

●

The cameras have blind spots in which

obstacles and people are not registered.

●

The camera lens must be kept free, with-

out snow or ice, and should not be covered.

WARNING

The smart technology incorporated into

the Top View Camer

a* system cannot over-

come the limits imposed by the laws of

physics and it only works within the limits of

the system. The greater convenience provi-

ded by the Area View system should never

tempt you to take any risk that may com-

promise safety. If used negligently or invol-

untarily, it may cause serious accidents

and injuries. The system is not a replace-

ment for driver aw

areness.

●

Adapt your speed and driving style to suit

visibility, weather, road and traffic condi-

tions.

●

Do not be distracted from the traffic by

looking at the screen.

●

Monitor the area around the vehicle at all

times, since the cameras do not capture

small children, animals and certain objects

in all situations.

●

The use of a number plate may interfere

in the views shown on the screen, since the

cameras' field of vision may be reduced.

●

The system will probably be unable to

represent all areas clearly.

CAUTION

●

The camera images are only tw

o-dimen-

sional. Due to a lack of spatial depth, ob-

jects that jut out or holes on the road, for

example, are more difficult to detect or

may not be seen at all.

●

In certain circumstances, the camera

does not capture objects such as beams,

fences, posts or thin trees, which could

damage the vehicle.

●

The system displays the auxiliary lines

and boxes regardless of the vehicle's envi-

ronment, no objects are detected. The driv-

er is responsible for determining that the

vehicle will fit in the parking space.

CAUTION

In order to guarantee good system opera-

tion, keep the cameras cl

ean, free of snow

or ice, and do not cover them with adhe-

sives or other objects.

●

Never use abrasive cleaning products to

clean the camera lenses.

●

Do not use hot or warm water to remove

ice or snow from the camera lenses. Doing

so could damage the lenses.

Area View system

Fig. 292 Display of the Area View system: aer-

ial vie

There are four different views to choose from:

322

Driver assistance systems

Key to the Fig. 292:

Symbol Meaning

A Front camera area

B Right camera area

C Rear camera area

D Left camera area



Exit the current display.



Three-dimensional views



Depending on the equipment: con-

necting and disconnecting the P

ark-

Pil

ot sound.



Adjust the display: bright, contrast

and colour.

The aerial view is generated by combining

the images fr

om all the camer



›››

Fig. 292. The aerial view can be selected

by pressing the vehicle in the area.

Select the corresponding view by pressing

the different areas

›››

Fig. 292

of the

aerial vie

w or the r

educed aerial vie

Conditions necessary for the use of the

Area View system

●

The doors and the rear lid must be closed.

●

The image must be reliable and clear. For

this reason, for example, the camera lens

must be clean.

●

The area around the vehicle must be clear-

ly and totally visible.

●

The area for parking or manoeuvring

should be a flat surface.

●

The vehicle should not be loaded very

heavily at the rear.

●

The driver must be used to the system.

●

There should be no damage to the vehicle

in the camera area. If the position or installa-

tion angle of the cameras have been

changed, e.g. after a rear-end collision, the

system should be checked by a specialised

workshop.

Camera image view

●

Aerial view (bird's eye view): to obtain a

panoramic view of the vehicle , three-di-

mensional views, from different camera posi-

tions.

●

Front camera (front view): to observe traf-

fic ahead of the vehicle (vehicles crossing)

, for front parallel parking , when ap-

proaching an obstacle and in off-road driving

.

●

Side cameras (side view): to view the area

close to the sides of the vehicle, both on the

left  and on the right , or a combination of

both sides .

●

Rear camera (rear view): To observe traf-

fic behind the vehicle (vehicles crossing) ,

for reverse perpendicular parking , for re-

verse parallel parking  and for hitching a

trailer to the vehicle .

The selected view is displayed on the right

side of the screen. The reduced aerial view

shown on the right side displays the view

framed in yellow. In addition, the right margin

of the screen displays the menu options pos-

sible and the views (the so-called “modes”)

of the camera in question. The active view

(mode) at the time is highlighted.

The reduced aerial view can be hidden by

pressing the  symbol to thus display the se-

lected view full-screen.

Instructions for use

Fig. 293

Centre console: button for activat-

ing/deactiv

ating the Ar

ea Vie

w system manual-

ly in combination with the parking aid system

() or else with the rear ParkPilot system ().

323

Driving

Connecting and disconnecting the Area

View system

Manual con-

nection of the

display:

Press the

 button

››

›

Fig. 293

once.

The infotainment system screen

displays the aerial view

›

››

Fig. 292. If you press the  but-

ton when driving above 15 km/h (9

mph), the image will not be dis-

played.

Automatic

connection of

the display:

Engage re

verse gear.

OR: The vehicle mo

ves backwards.

The view of the image of the vehi-

cle's r

ear camera is shown in paral-

lel parking mode with the reduced

aerial view.

Manual dis-

connection of

the display:

Press the

 button

››

›

Fig. 293

again.

OR: press a button on the factory-

equipped infotainment system, for

example the RADIO

button.

OR: press the  function button.

Automatic dis-

connection of

the displ

ay:

Drive f

orwards at over 15 km/h

(9 mph) approximat

ely.

OR: switch off the ignition. The Area

View system menu disappears im-

mediately.

Special characteristics

Examples of optical illusions caused by

the cameras:

The images on the area vie

w system cameras are on-

ly two-dimensional. Due t

o a lack of spatial depth, it

is difficult or impossible to make out on-screen any

holes there may be on the ground, objects jutting out

from the ground or parts protruding from other vehi-

cles.

Situations in which the objects or other vehicles ap-

pear to be further away or cl

oser than they really

are:

– On moving from a horizontal plane to a slope.

– On moving from a slope to a horizontal plane.

– If the vehicle is heavily loaded at the rear.

– If the vehicle approaches protruding objects. These

objects may be outside the cameras' angl

e of visibili-

ty.

Trailer mode

The Ar

ea Vie

w syst

em conceals, in the rear

camera area, all the auxiliary guiding lines

when the factory-fitted towing bracket is

connected electrically to a trailer

›››

page 329.

Note

In order to become familiar with the system

and its functions, SEAT recommends that

you practice handling the Ar

ea View sys-

tem in an area where there is not too much

traffic or in a car park.

Top View Camera system menus

(modes)

Fig. 294

Display on the Area View system

scr

een: Fr

ont camer

a: off-road view. Rear

camera: off-road view.

324

Driver assistance systems

Key to the Fig. 294:

Symbol Meaning



Depending on the equipment: con-

necting and disconnecting the Park-

Pilot sound.



Showing the reduced display.



Hiding the reduced display.



Exiting the Area View system screen:



Adjust the display: bright, contrast

and col

our.

Aerial views (bird's eye view)

View

On-screen display of all cam-

eras

Main

mode



The vehicl

e and its immediate vicinity

seen from abov

e are shown. Depending

on the equipment, the ParkPilot's path

may also be displayed.

Three-di-

mension-

al views



The vehicl

e and its vicinity

seen from abov

e are shown.



The vehicle and its vicinity

seen from abov

e are shown

obliquely.



The vehicle and its vicinity

seen obliquely are shown.

Swipe the infotainment system display with

your finger in the dir

ection of the arr

ws to

change the angle of vision in the three-di-

mensional views of the vehicle and its vicinity.

Front camera views (front view)

View

On-screen display of the front

camera

Cross tr

affic

at the front



Left side of the scr

een: perpendicular

street to the l

eft.

Middle of the screen: area directly in

front of the vehicl

Right side of the screen: perpendicu-

lar street t

o the right.

Parallel

parking



The area in front of the vehicle is

shown. Orientation lines ar

e shown to

give guidance.

Off-road



The area directly in front of the vehi-

cle seen from abo

ve is shown. For ex-

ample, on a slope, in order to see the

area directly in front of the vehicle.

The red line is shown at a distance of

approx. 0.4 m away from the vehicle.

Side camera views (side view)

View

On-screen display of the side

cameras

Right and

left sides



The areas located directly to the side

of the vehicle seen fr

om above are

represented in order to navigate pos-

sible obstacles more precisely. The

orange auxiliary lines are shown at a

distance of approx. 0.4 away from

the vehicle

Left side



The area directly next to the vehicle,

on the driver's or fr

ont passenger's

side, is displayed, and the blind spots

all along the vehicle can be seen. The

auxiliary orange line is shown at a

distance of approx. 0.4 m away from

the vehicle.

Right side



Rear camera views (rear view)

View

On-screen display of the rear

camera

Par

allel

parking



The area behind the vehicle is shown.

Auxiliary lines are shown t

o give guid-

ance.

Perpendicu-

lar parking



The vehicl

e's initial position on initiat-

ing this function will be a decisive

factor in determining the place where

the manoeuvre executed by the as-

sistant will end.

325

Driving

View

On-screen display of the rear

camera

Off-r

oad or

hitching a

trail

er func-

tion



The vehicle's rear is presented. The

red auxiliary line establishes the saf

ty distance.

Green and red semicircular auxiliary

lines are displayed in v

ehicles with a

factory-fitted towing bracket. The

auxiliary lines indicate the distance

from the towing bracket. The distance

between the auxiliary (green and red)

lines is approximately 0.3 m. The or-

ange auxiliary line indicates, de-

pending on the turn of the steering

wheel, the pre-calculated direction

of the towing bracket.

In vehicles with a factory-fitted tow-

ing bracket, the dist

ance from the red

auxiliary line to the vehicle is approx.

0.4 m. No other lines are shown.

Cross traffic

at the rear



Left side of the scr

een: perpendicular

street to the l

eft.

Middle of the screen: area directly

behind the vehicle.

Right side of the screen: perpendicu-

lar street to the right.

Rear Assist (Rear View Cam-

a)*

Oper

ating and saf

ety warnings

WARNING

●

The Rear Assist does not make it possibl

to precisely calculate the distance from

obstacles (people, vehicles, etc.) and nor

can it overcome the system's own limits,

hence using it may cause serious accidents

and injuries if used negligently or without

due care. The driver should be aware of

his/her surroundings at all times to ensure

safe driving.

●

The camera lens expands and distorts

the field of vision and displays the objects

on the screen in a different, vague manner.

The perception of distances is also distor-

ted by this effect.

●

Due to the screen resolution or insuffi-

cient light conditions, some items may be

displayed in an unsatisfactory manner or

not at all. Take special care with thin posts,

fences, railings or trees that might not be

displayed on screen and could damage the

vehicle.

●

The rear assist has blind spots where it is

not possible to represent people or objects

(small children, animals and certain ob-

jects cannot be detected in its field of vi-

sion). Monitor the vehicle's surrounding

area at all times.

●

Keep the camera l

ens clean, free of ice

and snow, and do not cover it.

●

The system is not a replacement for driv-

er awareness. Supervise the parking oper-

ation at all times, as well as the vehicle's

surrounding area. Adapt your speed and

driving style at all times to suit visibility,

weather, road and traffic conditions.

●

Do not be distracted from the traffic by

looking at the screen.

●

The images on the rear assist screen are

only two-dimensional. Due to a lack of spa-

tial depth, protruding parts or holes in the

road, for example, are more difficult to de-

tect or may not be seen at all.

●

Vehicle load modifies the representation

of the orientation lines displayed. The

width represented by the lines diminishes

with vehicle load. Pay special attention to

the vehicle's surroundings when the inside

of the vehicle of the luggage compartment

is carrying a heavy load.

●

In the following situations, the objects or

other vehicles shown in the navigation sys-

tem display appear to be further away or

closer than they really are: Pay special at-

tention:

–

On moving from a horizontal plane to a

slope.

–

On moving from a slope to a horizontal

plane.

–

If the vehicle is heavily loaded at the

rear.

326

Driver assistance systems

–

When the vehicle appr

oaches objects

that are not on the ground surface or

are jutting out from it. These objects

may also be outside the camera's an-

gle of vision when reversing.

Note

●

It is impor

tant t

o take great care and pay

special attention if you are not yet familiar

with the system.

●

Rear assist will not be available if the ve-

hicle's rear lid is open.

Instructions for use

Fig. 295

On the rear lid handle: location of the

ear assist camer

A camera installed in the rear lid handle as-

sists the driv

er in r

verse parking or manoeu-

vring

›››

Fig. 295. The camera image is

viewed together with orientation lines projec-

ted by the system on the Easy Connect sys-

tem screen. The bottom of the screen dis-

plays part of the bumper corresponding to

the number plate area that will be used as

reference by the driver.

Rear assist settings

Rear assist offers the user the possibility to

change the image's brightness, contrast and

colour settings.

To change these settings:

●

Park the vehicle in a safe place.

●

Apply the parking brake.

●

Switch the ignition on.

●

If necessary, switch on the Easy Connect

system.

●

Engage reverse gear or turn the selector

lever to position R.

●

Press the  function button displayed on

the right of the image.

●

Make the desired adjustments on the menu

by pressing the –/+ function buttons or by

moving the corresponding scroll button.

Necessary conditions for parking and ma-

noeuvring with the rear assist

The system should not be used in the follow-

ing cases:

●

If the image displayed is not very reliable or

is distorted, for example low visibility or dirty

lens.

●

If the area behind the vehicle is not dis-

played very clearly or is incomplete.

●

If the vehicle is heavily loaded at the rear.

●

If the position and installation angle of the

camera have been changed, e.g. after a rear-

end collision. Have the system checked by a

specialised workshop.

Familiarising yourself with the system

To familiarise yourself with the system, the

orientation lines and their function, SEAT rec-

ommends practising parking and manoeu-

vring with the rear assist in a place without

too much traffic or in a car park when there

are good weather and visibility conditions.

Cleaning the camera lens

Keep the camera lens clean and clear of

snow and ice:

●

Moisten the lens using a normal alcohol-

based glass cleaning product and clean the

lens with a dry cloth.

●

Remove snow using a small brush.

●

Use de-icing spray to remove any ice.

CAUTION

●

Never use abr

asive cleaning products to

clean the camera lens.

327

Driving

●

Do not use hot or warm wat

er to remove

ice or snow from the camera lens. Doing so

could damage the camera.

Parking and manoeuvring with the

rear assist

Fig. 296 Display on the Easy Connect system

scr

een: guidance lines.

Switching the system on and off

●

The rear assist will switch on when the igni-

tion is on or the engine running, on engaging

erse gear (manual gearbox) or on chang-

ing the selector lever to the R position (auto-

matic gearbox).

●

The system switches off 8 seconds after

disengaging reverse gear (manual gearbox)

or removing the selector lever from the R po-

sition (automatic gearbox). The system will

also disconnect immediately after the ignition

is switched off.

●

The camera will stop transmitting images

above the speed of 15 km/h (9 mph) with re-

verse engaged.

In combination with the Parking System Plus

›››

page 315, the camera image will cease to

be transmitted immediately when reverse

gear is disengaged or when the selector lever

is moved from the R position, and the optical

information provided by the Parking Aid sys-

tem will be displayed.

Also in combination with the system, the rear

assist image can also be concealed:

●

By pressing one of the Infotainment system

buttons on the display.

●

OR: by pressing the miniature vehicle that

appears on the left of the screen (which

switches to the full-screen mode of the Park-

ing System Plus's optical system).

If you wish to display the rear assist image

again:

●

Disengage reverse, or change the selector

lever's position, engage reverse again or

move the selector lever to position R.

●

OR: Press the RVC function button

Meaning of the orientation lines

›››

Fig. 296

Side lines: extension of the vehicle (the

approximate width of the vehicle plus the

rear view mirrors) on the road surface.

End of the side lines: the area marked in

green ends approximately 2 m behind the

vehicle on the road surface.

Mid line: indicates a distance of approxi-

mately 1 m behind the vehicle on the road

surface.

Horizontal red line: indicates a safe dis-

tance of approximately 40 cm at the rear

of the vehicle on the road surface.

Parking manoeuvre

●

Place the vehicle in front of the parking

space and engage reverse gear (manual

gearbox) or move the selector to the R posi-

tion (automatic gearbox).

WARNING: the RVC function button will only be

activat

ed and available when the reverse gear is

engaged or the selector lever is set to position R.

328

Towing bracket device*

●

erse slowly, and turn the steering wheel

so that the side orientation lines lead towards

the parking space.

●

Guide the vehicle into the parking space so

that the side orientation lines run parallel to it.

Towing bracket device*

ail

er mode

Introduction

Take into account country-specific regula-

tions about driving with a trailer and the use

of a t

owing bracket.

The vehicle has been developed primarily for

carrying people, although it can also be used

to tow a trailer if fitted with the corresponding

technical equipment. This additional load has

an effect on the useful life, fuel consumption

and vehicle performance and in some cases

can reduce the service intervals.

Driving with a trailer requires more force from

the vehicle, and thus more concentration

from the driver.

In winter, winter tyres should be fitted on both

the vehicle and the trailer.

Maximum vertical load technically per-

missible on the coupling

The maximum vertical load technically per-

mitted from the trailer draw bar on the towing

bracket's tow hitch is 80 kg.

Vehicles with the Start-Stop system

If the vehicle has a factory-fitted towing

bracket or one that is retrofitted by SEAT, the

Start-Stop system operates as normal. No

special characteristics need t

o be taken into

account.

If the system does not recognise the trailer or

the trailer bracket has not been retrofitted by

SEAT, the Start-Stop system must be discon-

nected by pressing the corresponding button

in the lower part of the centre console before

driving with the trailer, and it should remain

off for the rest of the journey

›››

ehicl

es with driving pr

ofile selection

If you are going to be towing a trailer, the use

of the Eco driving profile is not recommen-

ded. You are advised to select another of the

available driving profiles before beginning to

drive with a trailer.

WARNING

Never use the trailer to transport people,

since it would put their lif

e in danger and is

also prohibited.

WARNING

Undue use of the towing bracket may

cause injury and accidents.

●

Only use the towing bracket if it is in a

perfect stat

e of repair and is properly se-

cured.

●

Never modify or repair the towing bracket

in any way.

329

Driving

●

In order to r

educe the danger of injury in

the event of rear-end collisions and to

avoid injury to pedestrians and cyclists

when parking the vehicle, cover or remove

the tow hitch when you are not using a trail-

er.

●

Never fit a towing bracket “with weight

distribution” or “load compensation”. The

vehicle has not been designed for this type

of towing bracket. The towing bracket

could fail and the trailer could be released

from the vehicle.

WARNING

Driving with a trailer and transporting

heavy or large ob

jects can affect driving

properties and even cause an accident.

●

Always secure the load properly using

belts or straps that are suitable and in

good condition.

●

Adapt your speed and driving style at all

times to suit visibility, weather, road and

traffic conditions.

●

Trailers with a high centre of gravity are

more likely to overturn than those with a

low one.

●

Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.

●

Take great care when overtaking.

●

Reduce speed immediately if you notice

that the trailer is swaying, however slightly.

●

Never drive at more than 80 km/h

(50 mph) when towing a trailer (or at more

than 100 km/h (60 mph) in exceptional cir-

cumstances). This also applies in countries

wher

e driving at higher speeds is permit-

ted. Take into account the speed limit for

vehicles with trailers in the corresponding

country, as it could be less than the speed

limit for vehicles without a trailer.

●

Never attempt to “straighten” the towing

vehicle and trailer while accelerating.

WARNING

If the towing bracket has been retrofitted

by a non-SEAT w

orkshop, the St

art-Stop

system must be disconnected manually

whenever driving with a trailer. Otherwise

the brake system could be damaged and

could consequently cause a serious acci-

dent or injury.

●

Always disconnect the Start-Stop system

manually when using a towing bracket that

has not been fitted by a SEAT workshop.

Note

●

Before hit

ching or unhitching a trailer, al-

ways deactivate the anti-theft alarm

›››

page 127. Otherwise, the tilt sensor

could cause the alarm to go off.

●

Do not drive with a trailer for the engine's

first 1000 km

›››

page 261.

●

SEAT recommends that, if possible, the

tow hitch be disassembled or covered

when it is not going to be used. In the event

of a rear-end collision, the damage to the

vehicle coul

d be greater if the bracket is fit-

ted.

●

Some retrofitted towing brackets cover

the rear towing eye. In these cases, the

towing eye should not be used for tow-

starting or for towing other vehicles. For

this reason, if the vehicle has been retrofit-

ted with a towing bracket, always keep the

tow hitch in the vehicle when you disas-

semble it.

Control lamp



Lamp on button lights up

The tow hitch is not securely locked in position.

Check that the towing br

acket is locked

›››

page 332.

Some warning and control lamps will light up

briefly when the ignition is s

wit

ched on t

check certain functions. They will switch off

after a few seconds.

WARNING

If the warning lamps and the corresponding

messages are ignored when they light up

the vehicle may stall in traffic and cause

accidents and severe injuries.

●

Never ignore the warning lamps or mes-

sages.

330

Towing bracket device*

●

Stop the vehicl

e at the next opportunity

and in a safe place.

CAUTION

Failure to heed the control lamps and cor-

esponding te

xt messages when they light

up may result in damage to the vehicle.

Technical requirements

Vehicles that are f

act

ory

-equipped with a

towing bracket fulfil all the technical and le-

gal requirements for driving with a trailer.

If the vehicle is retrofitted with a towing

bracket, only a bracket that is authorised for

the maximum authorised load of the trailer

that is to be towed may be fitted. The towing

bracket must be suitable for the vehicle and

the trailer and must be properly secured to

the vehicle's chassis. Only use a towing

bracket that has been authorised by SEAT for

this vehicle. Always check and take into ac-

count the towing bracket manufacturer's in-

structions. Never fit a towing bracket “with

weight distribution” or “load compensation”.

Towing bracket fitted on the bumper

Never fit a towing bracket to the bumper or to

the area where the bumper is mounted. The

towing bracket should not impair the bum-

per's function. Do not make modifications or

repairs to the exhaust system or the brake

system. Make regular checks to ensure that

the towing bracket is secure.

Engine cooling system

Driving with a trailer increases the load on the

engine and cooling system. The cooling sys-

tem should have sufficient coolant and be

prepared for the additional effort involved in

driving with a trailer.

Trailer brakes

If the trailer has its own brake system, please

take the relevant legal requirements into ac-

count. Never connect the trailer's brake sys-

tem to the vehicle's brake system.

Tow rope

Always use a cable between the vehicle and

the trailer

›››

page 333.

Trailer rear lights

The trailer's rear lights should comply with

the statutory safety regulations

›››

page 333.

Never connect the trailer's rear lights directly

to the vehicle's electric system. If you are not

sure that the trailer's electrical connection is

correct, have it checked by a specialised

workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT

dealership for this.

Exterior mirrors

If you cannot see the area behind the trailer

with the exterior mirrors of the towing vehicle,

additional mirrors will have to be installed in

accordance with the regulations of the coun-

try in question. The exterior mirrors should be

adjusted before you start driving and must

provide a sufficient field of vision at the rear.

Trailer maximum electricity consumption

Consumers Europe, Asia, Af-

rica, South

America and

Central Ameri-

Austral

Brake lights (to-

tal)

84 Watts

108 Watts

Turn signal (on

each side)

42 Watts 54 Watts

Side lights (on

each side)

50 Watts 100 Watts

Reverse lights

(in total)

2 Watts 54 Watts

Rear fog light 42 Watts 54 Watts

Never exceed the values indicated!

WARNING

If the towing bracket is wrongly fitted or is

not the right one, the trail

er could become

331

Driving

detached from the vehicle and cause seri-

ous injury.

CAUTION

●

If the r

ear lights of the trail

er are not cor-

rectly connected, the vehicle's electronic

system may be damaged.

●

If the trailer absorbs excessive electric

current, the vehicle's electronic system

may be damaged.

●

Never connect the trailer's electric sys-

tem directly to the electrical connections

of the tail lights or any other power sour-

ces. Only use the connections intended for

providing electric current to the trailer.

Electrical unlocking tow hitch

Fig. 297 Right side of the boot: button to un-

ock the t

w hitch.

The tow hitch is located in the bumper. The

ectrical unl

ocking t

ow hitch cannot be dis-

assembled.

There should be no person, animal or object

in the path of the tow hitch

›››

Unl

ock the t

w hitch and remove it

●

Stop the vehicle and connect the electronic

parking brake

›››

page 244.

●

Switch off the engine.

●

Open the rear lid.

●

Pull the

›››

Fig. 297 button briefly. The tow

hitch unlocks electrically and automatically

turns outwards. The control lamp in the but-

ton will flash

›››

Fig. 297.

●

Remove the tow hitch with your hand until

you feel and see that it has engaged and the

control lamp on the button stays on.

●

Close the rear lid.

Cover the tow hitch

●

Stop the vehicle and apply the electronic

parking brake.

●

Switch off the engine.

●

Unhook the trailer and interrupt the electri-

cal connection between it and the vehicle. If

you are using an adapter, remove it from the

trailer's power socket.

●

Open the rear lid.

●

Pull the

›››

Fig. 297 button briefly. The tow

hitch unlocks electrically.

●

Turn the tow hitch under the bumper with

your hand until you feel and see that it en-

gages and the control lamp on the

›››

Fig. 297 button stays on.

●

Close the rear lid.

Meaning of control lamp

●

If the warning light of the button

›››

Fig. 297

is flashing, this means that the tow hitch has

not been attached properly or is damaged

›››

●

If the warning lamp st

ays on

with the r

ear

lid open, the tow hitch is correctly in place

both when engaged and when covered.

●

The control light of the lamp switches off

approximately 1 minute after closing the read

lid.

WARNING

Undue use of the towing bracket may

cause injury and accidents.

●

Only use the tow hitch if it is properly en-

gaged.

●

Always ensure that no person, animal or

object is to be f

ound in the path of the tow

hitch.

●

Never use a tool or instrument while the

tow hitch is moving.

332

Towing bracket device*

●

Never pr

ess the

›››

Fig. 297 button when

there is a trailer hooked to the vehicle or

when a carrier system or other accessories

are mounted on the tow hitch.

●

If the tow hitch is not attached properly,

do not use it. Instead, go to a specialised

workshop and have the towing bracket

checked.

●

If you detect any fault in the electrical

system or in the towing bracket, contact a

specialised workshop and ask them to

check it.

●

If the ball has a diameter of less than 49

mm at any one point, do not use the towing

bracket under any circumstances.

CAUTION

If you clean the vehicle with high-pressure

or steam devices, do not point the jet di-

ectly towards the retractable tow hitch or

the trailer power socket, as this may dam-

age the joints or remove the grease neces-

sary for lubrication.

Note

At extremely low temperatures, the tow

hitch may be impossible t

o use. In this case,

place the vehicle in a warmer location (for

example, a garage).

Fitting a bicycle carrier on the re-

act

abl

e tow hitch

The maximum allowed weight of the carrier

system, including the load, is

75 kg. The carri-

er system should not protrude more than 700

mm backwards from the spherical head. On-

ly carrier systems on which up to 3 bikes can

be mounted are allowed. Heavier bicycles

must be mounted as close to the vehicle as

possible (tow hitch).

WARNING

The incorrect use of the tow hitch with a bi-

cycle rack mount

ed on the tow hitch can

cause accidents and injury.

●

Never exceed the maximum weight or the

limits indicated above.

●

The bicycle rack may not be mounted to

the neck of the hitch below the ball be-

cause, due to the shape of the neck and

depending on the rack model, the rack

could be incorrectly mounted on the vehi-

cle.

●

Always read and take the manufacturer

assembly instructions into account.

CAUTION

If the maximum weight and limits indicated

above ar

e exceeded, the vehicle may suf-

fer considerable damage.

●

Never exceed the values indicated!

Note

SEAT recommends removing, as far as pos-

sible, all r

emovable parts of the bicycles

before setting off. These parts include, for

example, baskets and saddlebags, child

seats or batteries. This improves aerody-

namics and the centre of gravity of the rack

system.

Hooking up and connecting a trail-

Fig. 298

Diagram: assignment of the pins of

the tr

ail

's electrical socket.

Key to the Fig. 298:

Pin Meaning

1 Left turn signal

2 Rear fog light

3 Earth for pins 1, 2, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8

333

Driving

Key to the Fig. 298:

Pin Meaning

4 Right turn signal

5 Rear light, right

6 Brake lights

7 Rear light, left

8 Reverse lights

9 Permanent live

10 Live charge cable

11 Earth for pin 10

12 Unassigned

13 Earth for pin 9

Trailer power socket

The v

ehicl

e is fitt

ed with a 13-pole power

socket for the electrical connection between

the trailer and the vehicle. With the engine

running, electrical devices on the trailer re-

ceive power from the electrical connection

(pin 9 and pin 10 of the trailer power socket).

If the system detects that a trailer has been

connected electrically, the electrical equip-

ment on the trailer will receive voltage

through this connection (pins 9 and 10). Pin 9

has a permanent live. This powers, for exam-

ple, the trailer's interior lighting. Electrical de-

vices such as a fridge in a caravan only re-

ceive electrical power if the engine is running

(through pin 10).

To avoid overloading the electrical system,

you cannot connect the ground wires of pin 3,

pin 11 or pin 13.

If the trailer has a 7-contact connector, you

will need to use an adapter cable. In this case

the function corresponding to pin 10 will not

be available.

Tow rope

The tow rope must always be securely fixed

to the towing vehicle and loose enough so

that the vehicle can handle turns smoothly.

However, make sure that the cable does not

rub on the ground while driving.

Trailer rear lights

Always check the trailer's rear lights to ensure

they are working correctly and that they

comply with the relevant safety regulations.

Make sure that the maximum permissible

power that can be absorbed by the trailer is

not exceeded

›››

page 331.

Connection to the anti-theft system

The trailer is included in the anti-theft system

if the following conditions are met:

●

If the vehicle is factory-equipped with an

anti-theft alarm and towing bracket.

●

If the trailer is electrically connected to the

towing vehicle through the trailer power sock-

et.

●

If the electrical systems of the vehicle and

trailer are in perfect condition and have no

faults or damage.

●

If the vehicle is locked with the key and the

anti-theft alarm is activated.

When the vehicle is locked, the alarm is trig-

gered if the electrical connection with the

trailer is cut off.

Before hitching or unhitching a trailer, always

turn off the anti-theft alarm. Otherwise, the tilt

sensor could cause the alarm to go off.

Trailers with LED rear lights

For technical reasons, trailers fitted with LED

rear lights cannot be connected to the anti-

theft alarm system.

When the vehicle is locked, the alarm does

not go off when the electrical connection

with the trailer is cut if it has rear lights with

light-emitting diodes.

If the Eco driving profile was selected when

hitching the trailer, this will automatically

switch to the Normal profile. If the system

cannot detect the attached trailer or if the

towing bracket has been retrofitted by an au-

to repair shop other than SEAT, you must

manually select the Normal profile before

you start driving with a trailer attached. To

334

Towing bracket device*

reconnect the Eco pr

ofil

e once the tr

ailer has

been unhitched, switch the ignition off and

back on once.

WARNING

If the cables are improperly or incorrectly

connected, it may lead t

o an excessive

amount of current supplied to the trailer,

which can cause abnormalities in the entire

vehicle electronic system, as well as acci-

dents and serious injuries.

●

Ensure that any repairs that need to be

carried out on the electrical system are

carried out by a specialised workshop.

●

Never connect the trailer's electric sys-

tem directly to the electrical connections

of the tail lights or any other power sour-

ces.

WARNING

Contact between the pins of the trailer

power sock

et can cause short circuits,

overloading of the electrical system or fail-

ure of the lighting system, and consequent-

ly can cause accidents and serious injuries.

●

Never connect the pins of the trailer pow-

er socket to each other.

●

Make sure any work on bent pins is car-

ried out by a specialised workshop.

CAUTION

Do not leave the trailer connected to the

vehicle when park

ed; place it on its support

wheel or its supports. If the vehicle rises or

falls due, for example, to a variation of the

load or a burst tyre, increased pressure will

be placed on the towing bracket and the

trailer, and both the vehicle and the trailer

can be damaged.

Note

●

In case of malfunctioning of the electri-

cal systems of the v

ehicle or trailer, as well

as of the anti-theft system, have these

checked out by a specialised workshop.

●

If the trailer accessories consume energy

through the power socket to the trailer and

the engine is turned off, the battery will dis-

charge.

●

If the vehicle battery is running low, the

electrical connection with the trailer will be

automatically cut.

Loading a trailer

Technically permissible maximum trailer

eight and v

tical load on the coupling

device

The technically permissible maximum trailer

weight is the weight that the vehicle can tow

›››

. The vertical load on the coupling load

is exerted vertically from above on the tow

hit

ch of the t

wing bracket

›››

page 381.

The information on the maximum trailer

weight and vertical load on the coupling de-

vice contained in the type plate of the towing

bracket are experimental values only. The

correct figures for your specific model, which

may be lower than these figures, are given in

the vehicle documentation. The information in

the vehicle documentation takes precedence

at all times.

To promote safety while driving, SEAT recom-

mends making the most of the maximum ver-

tical load technically permissible on the

coupling device

›››

page 329. An insufficient

vertical load has a negative influence on the

behaviour of both the vehicle and trailer.

The vertical load increases the weight on the

rear axle, reducing the vehicle's carrying ca-

pacity.

Gross combination weight of the towing

vehicle and trailer

The gross combination weight is the actual

weight of the loaded vehicle plus the actual

weight of the loaded trailer.

In some countries trailers are classified into

distinct categories. SEAT recommends ob-

taining information from a specialised work-

shop regarding which type of trailer is most

suitable for your vehicle.

335

Driving

Trailer loading

The w

eight of the t

wing vehicle and trailer

must be balanced. In order to do this, the

load must be as close as possible to the max-

imum vertical load technically permissible on

the coupling point, and it must be evenly dis-

tributed between the back and front of the

trailer:

●

Distribute loads in the trailer so that heavy

objects are as near to the axle as possible or

above it.

●

Secure the trailer load properly.

Tyre pressure

Set the tyre pressure of the trailer tyres in ac-

cordance with the trailer manufacturer's rec-

ommendations.

When towing a trailer, inflate the tyres of the

towing vehicle with the maximum allowable

pressure

›››

page 358.

WARNING

If the maximum permissible axle weight, the

maximum load technically permissibl

e on

the coupling point, the maximum author-

ised vehicle weight or the gross combina-

tion weight of the towing vehicle and trailer

are exceeded, accidents and serious inju-

ries may occur.

●

Nev

er exceed the values indicated!

●

The actual weight on the front and rear

axles must never exceed the maximum per-

missible axle weight. The weight on the

front and rear axles must never exceed the

maximum permissible weight.

WARNING

A shift in weight could jeopardize the stabil-

y and security of the t

owing vehicle and

trailer, which could lead to accidents and

serious injuries.

●

Always load the trailer correctly.

●

Always secure the load properly using

belts or straps that are suitable and in

good condition.

Driving with a trailer

Adjusting the headlights

The fr

ont part of the v

ehicl

e may be raised

when the trailer is connected and the light

may dazzle the rest of the traffic.

Adapt the height of the headlights using the

headlight range adjuster

›››

page 154

Special characteristics of driving with a

trailer

●

If your trailer has an overrun brake, brake

gently at first and then rapidly. This will pre-

vent the jerking that can be caused by the

locking of trailer wheels.

●

Due to the gross combination weight of the

towing vehicle and trailer, the braking dis-

tance increases.

●

When going down a slope, go into a lower

gear (if using a manual gearbox or the tip-

tronic automatic gearbox mode) to take ad-

vantage of the braking power provided by the

engine. Otherwise, the braking system could

overheat and even fail.

●

The trailer weight, as well as the gross com-

bination weight of the towing vehicle and

trailer, change the centre of gravity and the

properties of the vehicle.

●

If the towing vehicle is empty and the trailer

is loaded, then the load distribution is incor-

rect. Under these conditions, drive slowly and

with extra caution.

Hill starts with a trailer

Depending on the slope of the hill and the

combination weight of the towing vehicle and

trailer, the vehicle might start rolling back-

wards slightly when you first start up.

This does not apply for vehicles with Full LED

xenon headlights.

336

Towing bracket device*

For hill-starting with a trailer, do the following:

●

Press and hold the brake pedal.

●

Press the  butt

on t

o disconnect the el

ec-

tronic parking brake

›››

page 244.

●

If the vehicle is equipped with a manual

gearbox, push the clutch pedal all the way

down.

●

Put the vehicle into first gear or turn the se-

lector lever to position D/S

›››

page 251.

●

Pull out the  button and hold it in that po-

sition to stop the towing vehicle and trailer

with the electronic parking brake.

●

Release the brake pedal.

●

Start driving slowly. To do this, in the case of

a manual gearbox, slowly release the clutch

pedal.

●

Do not release the  button until the en-

gine has sufficient force to start driving.

WARNING

If a trailer is pulled incorrectly, this may

lead to l

oss of control of the vehicle and

serious injury.

●

Driving with a trailer and transporting

heavy or large objects will change the ve-

hicle handling and braking distances.

●

Always drive cautiously and carefully.

Brake earlier than usual.

●

Adapt your speed and driving style at all

times to suit visibility, weather, road and

traffic conditions. Slow down, especially

when driving down hills or sl

opes.

●

Accelerate with particular care and cau-

tion. Avoid sudden braking and manoeu-

vres.

●

Take great care when overtaking. Reduce

speed immediately if you notice that the

trailer is swaying, however slightly.

●

Never attempt to “straighten” the towing

vehicle and trailer while accelerating.

●

Take into account the speed limit for vehi-

cles with a trailer, as it could be lower than

for vehicles without a trailer.

Stabilisation of the towing vehicle

and tr

ail

The stabilisation of the towing vehicle and

ail

er t

ogether is an additional function of the

electronic stability control (ESC).

If the system detects that the trailer is sway-

ing, it intervenes automatically with the driver

steering recommendation to reduce the

swaying of the trailer.

Requirements for the stabilisation of the

towing vehicle and trailer

●

The vehicle is factory-equipped with a tow-

ing bracket or has been retro-fitted with a

compatible towing bracket.

●

The ESC and ASR are active. The control

lamp  or  is not lit up on the instrument

cluster.

●

The trailer is electrically connected to the

towing vehicle through the trailer power sock-

et.

●

The vehicle is travelling at over 60 km/h

(approx. 37 mph).

●

The maximum vertical load technically per-

missible is being utilised on the coupling de-

vice.

●

The trailer has a rigid draw bar.

●

If the trailer has brakes, it must be equipped

with a mechanical overrun brake.

WARNING

The enhanced security provided by the

electric stabilit

y control of the towing vehi-

cle and trailer should not lead you to take

any risks that could compromise your safe-

ty.

●

Adapt your speed and driving style at all

times to suit visibility, weather, road and

traffic conditions.

●

Accelerate with caution when the road is

slippery.

●

When adjusting any settings, stop accel-

erating.

337

Driving

WARNING

The electric stability control for the towing

vehicle and tr

ailer may not correctly de-

tect all driving conditions.

●

When the ESC is switched off, the stabili-

sation of the towing vehicle and trailer is al-

so switched off.

●

The stability system does not always de-

tect light and unstable trailers, so it may

not stabilise these correctly.

●

When driving on slippery surfaces with

poor grip, the trailer can even interfere with

the stability system.

●

Trailers with a high centre of gravity can

tip even without having previously swayed.

●

If a trailer is not attached, but the trailer

power socket is connected (e.g. installation

of a bicycle rack with lights), repeated au-

tomatic braking may occur in extreme driv-

ing conditions.

Retrofitting a towing bracket

Fig. 299

Limits and attachment points for ret-

ofitting a t

wing bracket.

SEAT recommends that towing brackets be

etr

ofitt

ed at a specialised workshop. For ex-

ample, it may very well be necessary to ad-

just the cooling system or mount thermal pro-

tection plates. SEAT recommends visiting a

SEAT dealership for this.

If a towing bracket is retrofitted, the distance

specifications should always be kept in mind.

The distance between the centre of the

spherical head and the road

›››

Fig. 299

must never be less than that indicated. This

so applies when the v

ehicl

e is fully loaded,

including the technically permissible maxi-

mum vertical load on the coupling device.

Distance specifications

›››

Fig. 299:

Attachment points

932.5 mm

65 mm min.

350-420 mm

220 mm

615.5 mm

1,043 mm

WARNING

If the cables are improperly or incorrectly

connected, this may lead t

o malfunctions

in the entire vehicle electronic system, as

well as to accidents and serious injuries.

●

Never connect the trailer's electric sys-

tem to the electrical connections of the tail

lights or any other unsuitable power sour-

ces. Only use suitable connectors to con-

nect the trailer.

338

Towing bracket device*

●

The towing br

acket should be retrofitted

only at a specialised workshop.

WARNING

If the towing bracket is badly fitted or un-

suit

able

, the trailer may separate from the

vehicle while driving. This could cause seri-

ous accidents and fatal injuries.

Note

Only use towing brackets that have been

approv

ed by SEAT for the model in ques-

tion.

339

Practical tips

Car

e and maint

enance

Accessories and modifica-

tions t

o the vehicle

Accessories, replacement parts

and repair work

Always ask your dealer or specialist retailer

or advice bef

e purchasing accessories

and replacement parts.

Your vehicle is designed to offer a high stand-

ard of active and passive safety. For this rea-

son, we recommend that you ask a SEAT Offi-

cial Service for advice before fitting accesso-

ries or replacement parts. Your SEAT Official

Service has the latest information from the

manufacturer and can recommend accesso-

ries and replacement parts which are suita-

ble for your requirements. They can also an-

swer any questions you might have regarding

official regulations.

We recommend you to use only SEAT acces-

sories and Genuine SEAT parts

. SEAT has

tested these parts and accessories for suita-

bility, reliability and safety. SEAT Official

Services have the necessary experience and

facilities to ensure that the parts are installed

correctly and professionally.

Any retro-fitted equipment which has a di-

rect effect on the vehicle and/or the way it is

driven, such as a cruise control system or

electronically-controlled suspension, must

be approved for use in your vehicle and bear

the e mark (the European Union's authorisa-

tion symbol).

If any additional electrical devices are fit-

ted which do not serve to control the vehicle

itself (for instance a refrigerator box, laptop

or ventilator fan, etc.), they must bear the 

sign (manufacturer conformity declaration in

the European Union).

WARNING

Accessories, for example telephone hold-

ers or cup holders, should ne

ver be fitted

on the covers, or within the working range

of the airbags. Otherwise, there is a danger

of injury if the airbag is triggered in an acci-

dent.

Technical modifications

Modifications must always be carried out ac-

cor

ding t

o our specifications.

Unauthorised modifications t

o the electronic

components, software, wiring or data transfer

in the vehicle may cause malfunctioning. Due

to the way the electronic components are

linked together in networks, other indirect

systems may be affected by the faults. This

can seriously impair safety, lead to excessive

wear of components, and also invalidate

your vehicle registration documents.

You will appreciate that your SEAT dealership

cannot be held liable for any damage

caused by modifications and/or work per-

formed incorrectly.

We therefore recommend that all work should

be performed by a SEAT Official Service us-

ing genuine SEAT parts

WARNING

Incorrectly performed modifications or

other work on your vehicl

e can lead to mal-

functions and cause accidents.

Radio transmitters and office

equipment

Radio transmitters (fixed installation)

Any r

etr

ofit inst

allations of radio transmitters

in the vehicle require prior approval. SEAT

generally authorises in-vehicle installations

of approved types of radio transmitters provi-

ded that:

●

The aerial is installed correctly.

340

Checking and refilling levels

●

The aerial is inst

all

ed on the e

xterior of the

vehicle (and shielded cables are used to-

gether with non-reflective aerial trimming).

●

The effective transmitting power does not

exceed 10 Watts at the aerial base.

A SEAT Official Service and specialised work-

shop will be able to inform you about options

for installing and operating radio transmitters

with a higher transmitting power.

Mobile radio transmitters

Commercial mobile telephones or radio

equipment might interfere with the electron-

ics of your vehicle and cause malfunctions.

This may be due to:

●

No external aerial.

●

External aerial incorrectly installed.

●

Transmitting power more than 10 W.

You must, therefore, do not operate portable

mobile telephones or radio equipment inside

the vehicle without a properly installed exter-

nal aerial

›››

ease not

e al

so that the maximum range of

the equipment can only be achieved with an

external aerial.

Business equipment

Retrofit installation of business or private

equipment in the vehicle is permitted, provi-

ded the equipment cannot interfere with the

driver's immediate control of the vehicle and

that any such equipment carries the  mark.

Any retrofit equipment that could influence

the driver's control of the vehicle must have a

type approval for your vehicle and must carry

the e mark.

WARNING

Mobile telephones or radio equipment

which is operated inside the v

ehicle without

a properly installed external aerial can

create excessive magnetic fields that

could cause a health hazard.

Note

●

The posterior fitting of electric and el

ec-

tronic equipment in this vehicle affects its

licence and could lead to the withdrawal of

the vehicle registration document under

certain circumstances.

●

Please use the mobile telephone/radio

operating instructions.

Checking and refilling lev-

Filling the t

ank

efuelling

Read the additional information carefully

›››



page 47

If the automatic filler nozzle is operated cor-

rectly, it will switch itself off as soon as the

fuel tank is “full”. Do not try to put in more fuel

after the nozzle cuts out, as this will fill the ex-

pansion chamber in the fuel tank.

The correct fuel grade for your vehicle is giv-

en on a sticker on the inside of the fuel tank

flap. Further notes on fuel can be found at

›››

page 343.

The capacity of your vehicle's fuel tank is giv-

en in

›››



page 47.

WARNING

Fuel is highly flammable and can cause se-

rious burns and other injuries.

●

When refuelling, turn off the engine, the

auxiliary heater

››

›

page 182 and turn off

the ignition for safety reasons.

●

Do not smoke when filling the fuel tank or

a canister. Naked flames are forbidden in

the vicinity due to the risk of explosion.

341

Practical tips

●

Observe legisl

ation governing the use,

storage and carrying of a spare fuel canis-

ter in the vehicle.

●

For safety reasons we do not recommend

carrying a spare fuel canister in the vehi-

cle. In an accident the canister could be

damaged and could leak.

●

If, in exceptional circumstances, you

have to carry a spare fuel canister, please

observe the following points:

–

Never fill fuel into the spare fuel canis-

ter if it is inside or on top of the vehicle.

An electrostatic charge could build up

during filling, causing the fuel vapour to

ignite. Danger of explosion. Always

place the canister on the ground to fill

it.

–

Insert the filling nozzle as far as possi-

ble into the spare fuel canister.

–

If the spare fuel canister is made of

metal, the filling nozzle must be in con-

tact with the canister during filling. This

helps prevent an electrostatic charge

building up.

–

Never spill fuel in the vehicle or in the

luggage compartment. Fuel vapour is

explosive. Risk of fatal accident!

CAUTION

●

If any fuel is spilt onto the vehicl

e, it

should be removed immediately. It could

otherwise damage the paintwork.

●

Never run the tank completely dry. An ir-

regular fuel supply could cause misfiring.

As a result, unburnt fuel could enter the ex-

haust system and damage the catalytic

converter.

●

When filling the fuel tank after having run

it completely dry on a vehicle with a diesel

engine, the ignition must be switched on for

at least 30 seconds before starting the en-

gine. When you then start the engine it may

take longer than normal (up to one minute)

to start firing. This is because air needs to

be bled from the fuel system while starting.

For the sake of the environment

Do not overfill the fuel tank, it may cause

the fuel to ov

erflow if it becomes warm.

Note

There is no emergency mechanism for the

manual release of the fuel t

ank flap. If nec-

essary, request assistance from special-

ised personnel.

Note

Diesel vehicles are fitted with a protective

device that pre

vents the insertion of the

wrong fuel hose

. It is only possible to re-

fuel with Diesel nozzles.

●

If the pump nozzle is worn, damaged, or if

it is very small, it is possible that it will not

be able to open the protective device. Be-

fore trying to insert the pump nozzle by

turning it, try a different pump or request

specialist help.

●

If you fill the tank from a reserve fuel can-

ister, the protective device will not open.

One way to resolve this is to pour the fuel in

very slowly.

Depending on country

342

Checking and refilling levels

Fuel

Identification of the fuel

Fig. 300 Identification of fuels according to

Eur

opean Union (EU) Dir

ectiv

e 2014/94/

Fuels are identified with different symbols.

Depending on the fuel, the diff

ent symbol

are on the pump and the tank lid of your vehi-

cle. The identification serves to prevent con-

fusion when choosing the fuel.

Petrol with ethanol (“E” stands for Etha-

nol). The number indicates the percent-

age of ethanol in the petrol. “E5” means,

for example, an ethanol ratio of 5% max.

Diesel with biodiesel (“B” stands for Bio-

diesel). The number indicates the per-

centage of biodiesel in the diesel. “B7”

means, f

or e

ample, a proportion of bio-

diesel of max. 7%.

Natural gas: “CNG” means Compressed

Natural Gas.

Type of petrol

3 Applies to vehicles: with petrol engine

The correct gr

ade of petrol is listed inside the

fuel tank flap.

The vehicle is equipped with a catalytic con-

verter and must only be run on unleaded

petrol. The petrol must comply with the

standard EN 228 and be sulphur-free. Fuels

with a 10% ethanol ratio can be refuelled

(E10)

. The types of petrol are differentiated

by using the octane numbers (RON) or via

the anti-knock index (AKI).

The following pieces of text show the infor-

mation included in the corresponding stickers

on the tank lid (examples):

Super unleaded petrol 95 octane petrol or

normal 91 oct

ane petr

ol at l

east

We recommend refuelling with super 95 oc-

tane petrol (91 AKI). If not available: normal 91

octane petrol (87 AKI) (with a slight power

loss).

Super unleaded petrol, 95 octanes at

least

You should use super 95 octane petrol (91

AKI) at least.

If super is not available, if necessary, use nor-

mal 91 octane petrol (87 AKI). In this case only

use moderate engine speeds and a light

throttle. Refuel with super as soon as possi-

ble.

Unleaded super plus 98 octane petrol or

super 95 octane petrol at least

We recommend refuelling with super plus 98

octane petrol (93 AKI). If not available: super

95 octane petrol (91 AKI) (with a slight power

loss).

If super is not available, if necessary, use nor-

mal 91 octane petrol (87 AKI). In this case only

use moderate engine speeds and a light

Depending on country

Follow the regulations of the country you are

driving in.

343

Practical tips

throttle. Refuel with super as soon as possi-

CAUTION

●

Fuels high percent

age of ethanol, e.g.

E30 - E100 button must not be used. The

fuel system would be damaged. Exception:

vehicles with Totalflex engine

›››

page 344,

Ethanol fuel.

●

A single refuelling with leaded fuel or

other metal additives entails a permanent

deterioration of the effectiveness of the

catalytic converter.

●

Only use fuel additives that have been

approved by SEAT. The products that con-

tain substances to increase the octane rat-

ing or decrease knocking may contain met-

al additives that damage the engine and

catalytic converter. This type of products

must not be used.

●

Do not use fuels shown in the pump as

containing metals. LRP (lead replacement

petrol) fuels contain high concentrations of

metal additives. Risk of engine damage!

●

High engine speed and full throttle can

damage the engine when using petrol with

an octane rating lower than the correct

grade for the engine.

Note

●

Fuel with an octane rating higher than the

one r

equired by the engine can be used.

●

In countries in which there is no sulphur-

free fuel, it is also allowed to use low sul-

phur content fuel.

Ethanol fuel

3 Applies to vehicles: with Totalflex engine

You can r

ecognise vehicles with Totalflex en-

gines

by label on the fuel tank lid with with

the marking “Petrol/ethanol”.

Vehicles with Totalflex engine can run with

unleaded petrol (95 octane / 91 AKI) accord-

ing to ANP No. 57 and with fuels with any high

percentage of ethanol. The vehicle is refuel-

led in the same way as petrol refuelling.

Also consider that

›››

page 343, Type of pet-

rol

Note

SEAT recommends filling the tank exclu-

sively with petrol e

very 10,000 km to de-

crease impurities that using E100 ethanol

fuel might have left in the engine.

Diesel

3 Applies to vehicles: with diesel engine

Please not

e the information on the inside of

the fuel tank flap.

We recommend you use Diesel according to

standard EN 590.

The diesel can thicken at very low tempera-

tures, thus affecting the start or operation of

the engine. To ensure that you can continue

to use your vehicle as usual, the diesel sold in

gas stations is provided -depending on the

station- with fluidity when cold. Ask the em-

ployee of the petrol station whether their die-

sel is suitable for use in winter and if it is suited

for current and future temperatures.

Water in the fuel filter

If your vehicle has a diesel engine and is

equipped with a fuel filter with a water sep-

arator, the instrument panel may display the

following warning:



Water in the fuel

filter. If this is the case, take the vehicle to

a specialised workshop so that they can

drain the fuel filter.

This motor is only available in some markets.

Depending upon country.

344

Checking and refilling levels

CAUTION

●

Never use of F

AME (biodiesel), petrol,

heating oil, other fuels or thinning agents

as they can cause severely damage the

fuel system and the engine.

●

If the wrong fuel has been filled, do not

start the engine under any circumstances.

Risk of damaging the fuel system and the

engine! Obtain technical assistance.

AdBlue

Inf

ormation on AdBlue

Fig. 301 Related video

The consumption of AdBlue

depends on

your personal driving st

, the temperature

of the system and on the outdoor tempera-

ture when the vehicle is used.

AdBlue

freezes at temperatures of -11°C

(+13°F). The system has heating elements

that guarantee its operation even at low tem-

peratures.

The AdBlue

tank level capacity is approxi-

mately 11 litres.

The AdBlue

tank should never be empty.

When the distance to empty drops below

2400 km, a warning to refill the AdBlue

tank

will appear on the dash panel display

›››

page 345. If this information is ignored,

later on it will not be possible to re-start the

engine. If this warning does not appear, it is

not necessary to refill the AdBlue

tank.

AdBlue

is a registered brand of the German

Association of the Automotive Industry (VDA)

and is also known as AUS32 or DEF (Diesel

Exhaust Fluid).

CAUTION

Filling the AdBlue

tank ex

cessively can

cause damage to the tank.

Refilling AdBlue

Fig. 302

AdBlue tank cap.

Operations prior to refilling

ark the v

ehicl

e on a flat surface. If the vehi-

cle is not parked on a flat surface, but, for ex-

ample, on a slope or on the side of a curb, the

level indicator may not detect the load prop-

erly.

If a warning message about AdBlue

levels

appears on the dash panel display, fill at

least the minimum amount required (ap-

prox. 5 litres) Only after adding this amount

will the system detect that AdBlue

has been

added and you will be able to start the en-

gine again. The maximum amount that can

be refilled is 11 litres.

Switch the ignition off. If the ignition is not

switched off during refilling, the warning to re-

fill may continue to appear on the instrument

panel display.

345

Practical tips

Fill with a refill bottle

Only use AdBlue

that complies with ISO

222

41-

1. Only use original cont

ainers.

●

Open the tank cover

›››

Fig. 302.

●

Unscrew the tank cap by turning it in an an-

ti-clockwise direction.

●

Please observe the manufacturer's instruc-

tions, indicated on the refill bottle.

●

Check the expiry date.

●

Remove the cap of the refill bottle.

●

Insert the neck of the bottle in the tank filler

neck vertically and screw the bottle on by

hand, by turning it in a clockwise direction.

●

Press the refill bottle in the direction of the

filler neck and hold it in this position.

●

Wait until the contents of the refill bottle

have been poured into the AdBlue

tank. Do

not compress or break the bottle!

●

Turn the bottle in a counter-clockwise di-

rection and gently pull it upwards

›››

●

The AdBlue

ank is full when no mor

e liquid

comes out of the bottl

●

Screw on the tank cap in a clockwise direc-

tion until it is tightly closed.

●

Close the fuel tank flap.

Operations before driving

●

After refilling the tank, only switch on the ig-

nition.

●

Leave the ignition on for at least 30 sec-

onds for the system to detect the fluid load.

●

Make sure you wait for at least 30 seconds

before starting the engine!

Refilling the dispenser with AdBlue

Valid for vehicles with selective catalytic re-

duction.

●

Open the tank cap.

●

Turn the SCR tank cap anti-clockwise

›››

Fig. 302.

●

Add AdBlue until the nozzle stops for the

first time.

●

Close the SCR tube by turning it clockwise

until you hear a click.

WARNING

AdBlue

should only be stor

ed in the origi-

nal container, which should be tightly

closed and kept in a safe place.

●

Never keep AdBlue

in empty food con-

tainers, bottles or other similar containers.

Other people may confuse it for other

products.

●

Keep AdBlue

out of the reach of chil-

dren.

CAUTION

●

When refilling, the nozzl

e grip should be

aligned downward. Otherwise the nozzle

will not connect automatically.

●

Do not try to add any more additive after

the nozzle has stopped for the first time.

The AdBlue tank could overflow and AdBlue

could spill out.

●

Only use AdBlue

that complies with ISO

22241-1. Only use original containers.

●

Never mix AdBlue

with water, fuel or ad-

ditives. Any type of damage caused by

such a mixture will not be covered by the

warranty.

●

Never pour AdBlue

into the fuel tank.

This could result in engine damage.

●

Do not carry the refill bottle inside the

vehicle. If there is a leak (due to tempera-

ture changes or damage to the bottle), the

AdBlue

may damage the vehicle.

For the sake of the environment

Dispose of the refill bottle in an environ-

ment-friendly manner.

Note

You can buy refill bottles that are adequate

for AdBlue

use at SEAT dealerships.

346

Checking and refilling levels

Engine compartment

orking in the engine compar

ment

Read the additional information carefully

›››



page 18

Always be aware of the danger of injury

and scalding as well as the risk of acci-

dent or fire when working in the engine

compartment (e.g. when checking and re-

filling fluids). Always observe the warnings

listed below and follow all general safety

precautions. The engine compartment of

the vehicle is a potentially hazardous area

›››

WARNING

●

Switch the engine off

, remove the key

from the ignition and apply the electronic

parking brake. If the vehicle has a manual

gearbox, place the lever in neutral; if it has

an automatic gearbox, place the selector

lever in position P. Wait for the engine to

cool down.

●

Keep children away from the engine

compartment.

●

Never spill liquids used for vehicle opera-

tion on the engine compartment, as these

may catch fire (e.g. the antifreeze in cool-

ant).

●

Take car

e not to cause short circuits in

the electrical system, especially when

working on the battery.

●

If working inside the engine compart-

ment, remember that, even when the igni-

tion is switched off, the radiator fan may

start up automatically, and therefore there

is a risk of injury.

●

Never cover the engine with additional in-

sulating materials such as a blanket. Risk of

fire!

●

Do not unscrew the cap on the coolant

expansion tank when the engine is hot. The

cooling system is under pressure.

●

Protect face, hands and arms by cover-

ing the cap with a large, thick rag to protect

against escaping coolant and steam.

●

If it is necessary to work in the engine

compartment while the engine is running,

the rotating components (for example,

poly-V belt, alternator, radiator fan) and

the high voltage ignition system are an ad-

ditional hazard.

●

Observe the following additional warn-

ings if work on the fuel system or the elec-

trical system is necessary:

–

Always disconnect the battery from the

on-board network.

–

Do not smoke.

–

Never work near naked flames.

–

Always keep an approved fire extin-

guisher immediately available.

CAUTION

When topping up fluids make sure the cor-

rect fluid is put into the corr

ect filler open-

ing, otherwise this can cause serious mal-

functions or engine damage.

For the sake of the environment

Inspect the ground underneath your vehi-

cle regul

arly so that any leaks are detec-

ted at an early stage. If you find spots of oil

or other fluids in the area where it was

parked, have your vehicle inspected at the

workshop.

Note

In right-hand drive vehicles* some brake

fluid reservoirs ar

e on the other side of the

engine compartment

›››

Fig. 303.

Opening and closing the bonnet

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 18

WARNING

●

Never open the bonnet if you see st

eam

or drips of coolant being released from the

engine compartment. Failure to comply

could result in burns. Wait until no steam or

coolant can be seen before opening the

bonnet.

347

Practical tips

●

For safet

y reasons the bonnet must al-

ways be completely closed when the vehi-

cle is moving. Therefore, after closing the

bonnet, always check that the locking ele-

ment is properly engaged. This is the case

if the bonnet is flush with the adjacent

body panels.

●

Should you notice that the bonnet is not

safely secured when the vehicle is moving,

stop the vehicle immediately and close the

bonnet. Failure to follow this instruction

could result in an accident.

CAUTION

To avoid damage to the bonnet and to the

windscreen wiper arms, only open it when

the windscreen wipers ar

e in place against

the windscreen.

348

Checking and refilling levels

Checking levels

Fig. 303

Diagram for the location of the various el-

ements.

From time to time, the levels of the different

fluids in the v

ehicl

e must be check

ed. Never

fill with incorrect fluids, otherwise serious

damage to the engine may be caused.

Coolant expansion tank

Engine oil dipstick

Engine oil filler cap

Brake fluid reservoir

Vehicle battery (underneath the cover)

Windscreen washer reservoir

The checking and refilling of service fluids are

carried out on the components mentioned

above. These operations are described in

›

page 347.

Overview

You will find further explanations, instructions

and restrictions on the technical specifica-

tions as of

›››

page 380.

Engine oil

General notes

The engine comes with a special, multi-grade

oil that can be used all year r

ound.

Because the use of high-qualit

y oil is essen-

tial f

or the correct operation of the engine

and its long useful life, when topping up or

changing oil, use only those oils that comply

with VW standards.

We recommend that the oil change indicated

in the Maintenance Programme, be per-

formed by a technical service or specialised

workshop.

If the engine oil level is too low

You can get information about the correct en-

gine oil for your vehicle at your specialised

shop. If you have to change your engine oil,

use that oil.

349

Practical tips

If the recommended engine oil is not availa-

, in the e

vent of an emergency you can

add oil once up to a maximum of 0.5 L of the

next oil until the next oil change:

●

Valid for vehicles with petrol engines:

standard VW 504 00, VW 502 00,

VW 508 00, ACEA C or API SN.

Vehicles with diesel particulate filter*

Only VW 507 00 engine oil, with reduced ash

formation, may be used in diesel engines

equipped with particulate filter. Using other

types of oil will cause a higher soot concen-

tration and reduce the life of the DPF. There-

fore:

●

Avoid mixing this oil with other engine oils.

●

Only in exceptional circumstances, if the

engine oil level is too low

›››

page 350 and

you cannot obtain the oil specified for your

vehicle, you can use a small quantity of oil

(once) conforming to the specifications

VW 506 00, VW 506 01, VW 505 00,

VW 505 01 or ACEA B3/ACEA B4 (up to 0.5 l)

›››



page 48.

Note

Before a long trip, we recommend finding

an engine oil that conforms to the corr

sponding VW specifications and recom-

mend keeping it in the vehicle. This way, the

correct engine oil will always be available

for a top-up if needed.

Warning lamp



It lights up red

 Do not continue driving!

Engine oil pressure too low.



It lights up yellow

Check the engine oil level as soon as possible.

Top up the oil at the next opport

unity

›››

page 351.



It flashes yellow

Fault in the oil level sensor.

Take the v

ehicle to a specialised workshop to have

the system inspected. Until then it is advisable to

check the oil level every time you refuel.

If this warning symbol  st

arts t

o fl

ash, and

is accompanied by three audible warnings,

switch off the engine and check the oil level. If

necessary, add more oil

›››

page 351.

If the warning lamp



flashes although the

oil level is correct, stop driving. Do not even

run the engine at idle speed! Obtain technical

assistance.

Checking engine oil level

Fig. 304

Engine oil dipstick.

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 47

The engine oil dipstick indicates the level of

the oil.

Checking oil level

–

Park the vehicle in a horizontal position.

–

Briefly run the engine at idle speed until the

operating temperature is reached and then

stop.

–

Wait for about two minutes.

–

Pull out the dipstick. Wipe the dipstick with

a clean cloth and insert it again, pushing it

in as far as it will go.

–

Then pull it out once more and check the oil

level

›››

Fig. 304. Top up with engine oil if

necessary.

350

Checking and refilling levels

Depending on how you drive and the condi-

tions in which the v

ehicl

e is used, oil con-

sumption can be up t

o 0.5 l/1000 km. Oil

consumption is likely to be higher for the first

5,000 km. For this reason the engine oil level

must be checked at regular intervals, prefera-

bly when filling the tank and before a journey.

WARNING

Any work carried out in the engine com-

partment or on the engine must be carried

out cautiously.

●

When working in the engine compar

ment, always observe the safety warnings

›››

page 347.

CAUTION

If the oil level is above area

, do not start

the engine. This could r

esult in damage to

the engine and catalytic converter. Con-

tact a Technical Service.

Topping up engine oil

Fig. 305

In the engine compartment: Engine

oil fill

er cap

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 47

Before opening the bonnet, read and observe

the warnings

›››

in Working in the engine

compar

tment on page 347

The position of the oil fill

er opening is shown

in the corresponding engine compartment il-

lustration

›››

page 349.

Engine oil specification

›››



page 48.

WARNING

Oil is highly inflammable! Ensure that no oil

comes into contact with hot engine compo-

nents when t

opping up.

CAUTION

If the oil level is above area

›››

Fig. 304

do not start the engine

. This could result in

damage to the engine and catalytic con-

verter. Contact a specialised workshop.

For the sake of the environment

The oil level must never be above zone

›››

Fig. 304

. Otherwise oil can be drawn

in through the crank

case breather and leak

into the atmosphere via the exhaust sys-

tem.

Note

Before a long trip, we recommend finding

an engine oil that conforms to the corr

sponding VW specifications and recom-

mend keeping it in the vehicle. This way, the

correct engine oil will always be available

for a top-up if needed.

Changing engine oil

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 47.

The engine oil must be changed at the inter-

vals given in the service schedule.

We recommend that you have the engine oil

changed by a Technical Service.

351

Practical tips

The oil change intervals are shown in the

Maint

enance Pr

ogr

amme.

WARNING

Only change the engine oil yourself if you

have the specialist knowl

edge required!

●

Before opening the bonnet, read and ob-

serve the warnings

›››

page 347.

●

Wait for the engine to cool down. Hot oil

may cause burn injuries.

●

Wear eye protection to avoid injuries,

such as acid burns, caused by splashes of

oil.

●

When removing the oil drain plug with

your fingers, keep your arm horizontal to

help prevent oil from running down your

arm.

●

Wash your skin thoroughly if it comes into

contact with engine oil.

●

Engine oil is poisonous! Used oil must be

stored in a safe place out of the reach of

children.

CAUTION

No additives should be used with engine oil.

This could result in engine damage

. Any

damage caused by the use of such addi-

tives would not be covered by the factory

warranty.

For the sake of the environment

●

Because of disposal problems and the

special t

ools and specialist knowledge re-

quired, we recommend that you have the

engine oil and filter changed by a Techni-

cal Service.

●

Never pour oil down drains or into the

ground.

●

Use a suitable container when draining

the used oil. It must be large enough to hold

all the engine oil.

Cooling system

opping up cool

ant

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 49

Top up coolant when the level is below the

MIN (minimum) mark.

Checking coolant level

–

Park the vehicle in a horizontal position.

–

Switch the ignition off.

–

Read off the coolant level on coolant ex-

pansion tank. When the engine is cold, the

coolant level should be between the marks.

When the engine is hot, it may be slightly

above the upper mark.

Topping up coolant

–

Wait for the engine to cool down.

–

Cover the coolant expansion tank cap with

a cloth and carefully unscrew it to the left

›››

–

Top up the coolant only if there is still cool-

ant in the e

xpansion t

ank

, otherwise you

could damage the engine. If there is no

coolant in the expansion tank, do not con-

tinue driving. You should obtain professional

assistance

›››

–

If there is still some coolant in the expansion

ank

, t

op up to the upper mark.

–

Top up with coolant until the level becomes

stable.

–

Screw the cap back on correctly.

Any loss of coolant fluid normally indicates a

leak in the cooling system. Take the vehicle

straight to a specialised workshop to have

the cooling system examined. If there are no

leaks in the engine cooling system, a loss of

coolant can only occur if the coolant boils

and is forced out of the system as a result of

overheating.

WARNING

●

The cooling system is under pressur

e. Do

not unscrew the cap on the coolant expan-

sion tank when the engine is hot: risk of

burns!

352

Checking and refilling levels

●

The antifreez

e and coolant fluid can be a

health hazard. Therefore, the antifreeze

should be stored in the original container in

a safe place out of reach of children. Fail-

ure to comply could result in poisoning.

●

If working inside the engine compart-

ment, remember that, even when the igni-

tion is switched off, the radiator fan may

start up automatically, and therefore there

is a risk of injury.

WARNING

If there is not enough anti-freeze in the

cool

ant system, the engine may f

ail lead-

ing to serious damage.

●

Please make sure that the percentage of

additive is correct with respect to the low-

est expected ambient temperature in the

zone in which the vehicle is to be used.

●

When the outside temperature is very

low, the coolant could freeze and the vehi-

cle would be immobilised. In this case, the

heating would not work either and inade-

quately dressed passengers could die of

cold.

CAUTION

Do not top up the expansion tank with cool-

ant fluid if it is empty! Air could ent

er the

cooling system. In this case, stop driving.

Seek specialist assistance. Otherwise,

there is a risk of engine damage.

CAUTION

The original additives should never be

mixed with coolants which ar

e not ap-

proved by SEAT. Otherwise, you run the risk

of causing severe damage to the engine

and the engine cooling system.

●

If the fluid in the expansion tank is not

purple but is, for example, brown, this indi-

cates that the G13 additive has been mixed

with an inadequate coolant. The coolant

must be changed as soon as possible if this

is the case! This could result in serious

faults and engine damage.

For the sake of the environment

Coolants and additives can contaminate

the environment. If any fluids are spill

ed,

they should be collected and correctly dis-

posed of, with respect to the environment.

Brake fluid

op up br

e fluid

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 49

Checking the brake fluid level

The brake fluid level must be between the

MIN and MAX markings.

However, if the brake fluid level goes down

noticeably in a short time, or drops below the

MIN mark, there may be a leak in the brake

system. Seek specialist assistance. A warning

light on the instrument panel display monitors

the brake fluid level

›››



page 39.

In right-hand drive vehicles the brake fluid

reservoir is on the other side of the engine

compartment.

Changing brake fluid

The regular intervals at which the brake fluid

should be replaced are listed in the Mainte-

nance Programme. We recommend you have

it replaced at a SEAT Official Service, during

an Inspection Service.

WARNING

●

Brake fluid shoul

d be stored in the closed

original container in a safe place out of

reach of children. Risk of poisoning!

●

If the brake fluid is left in the system for

too long and the brakes are subjected to

heavy use, vapour bubbles may form in the

brake system. This would seriously affect

the efficiency of the brakes and the safety

of the vehicle. This may cause an accident.

CAUTION

Brake fluid should not come into contact

with the vehicle paintw

ork, as it is abrasive.

353

Practical tips

Windscreen washer reservoir

Checking and t

opping up the wind-

scr

een w

asher reservoir

Read the additional information carefully

›››



page 50

Check the water level in the windscreen

washer reservoir regularly and top up as re-

quired.

The container for the windscreen washer

contains the cleaning fluid for the wind-

screen, the rear window and the headlight

washer system*.

●

Open the bonnet 

›››

page 347.

●

The windscreen washer reservoir is marked

with the symbol  on the cap.

●

Check there is enough windscreen water in

the reservoir.

Recommended windscreen wipers

●

For the hottest seasons we recommend

summer G 052 184 A1 for clear glass. Propor-

tions of the mixture in the washer fluid tank:

1:100 (1 part concentrate per 100 parts wa-

ter).

●

All year round, G 052 164 A2 for clear glass.

Approximate proportion of the winter mixture,

up to -18°C (0°F): 1:2 (1 part concentrate per 2

parts water); otherwise, a 1:4 proportion of

mixture in the washer fluid tank.

Capacity

The reservoir holds approximately 3 litres in

versions without headlight washer and 5 litres

in versions with headlight washer.

WARNING

If the water from the windscreen washer

does not contain enough anti-free

ze, it may

freeze on the windscreen and rear window,

reducing forward and rear visibility.

●

In winter, ensure the windscreen washer

contains enough anti-freeze.

●

In cold conditions, you should not use the

windscreen wiper system unless you have

warmed the windscreen with the ventila-

tion system. The antifreeze could freeze on

the windscreen and reduce visibility.

WARNING

Never mix an unsuitable antifreeze or other

similar additives with the windscr

een wash-

er water. A greasy layer may be formed on

the windscreen which will impair visibility.

●

Use clean water with a window cleaner

recommended by SEAT.

●

If necessary, add a suitable antifreeze to

the water in the reservoir.

CAUTION

●

Do not mix cleaning products r

ecommen-

ded by SEAT with other products. This

could lead to flocculation and may block

the windscreen washer jets.

●

When topping up service fluids, make ab-

solutely certain that you fill the fluids into

the correct reservoirs. Using the wrong flu-

ids could cause serious malfunctions and

engine damage!

●

Not having windscreen wiper fluid re-

duces visibility through the windscreen,

and leads to loss of visibility in headlights

in models with headlight washer.

Battery

Gener

al inf

ormation

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 50.

The battery is located in the engine compart-

ment and is almost maintenance-free. It is

checked as part of the Inspection Service.

Nevertheless, check the terminals are clean

and have the correct tightening torque, espe-

cially in summer and winter.

Disconnecting the battery

The battery should only be disconnected in

exceptional cases. When the battery is

354

Checking and refilling levels

disconnected, some of the vehicle's functions

e “l

ost” (

›

››

table on page 355). These

functions will require resetting after the bat-

tery is reconnected.

Deactivate the anti-theft alarm* before you

disconnect the battery Otherwise the alarm

will be triggered.

Function Reprogramming

One-touch function of

the electric windows

›

››

page 143, One-touch

opening and closing.

Remote control key

If the vehicle does not re-

spond to the key, they

shoul

d be synchronised

›››

page 136.

Digital clock

›››

page 116.

ESC w

arning lamp

After driving for a few me-

tres, the warning l

amp

goes out again.

If the vehicle is not used for long periods

The v

ehicl

e has a syst

em for monitoring the

current consumption when the engine is left

unused for long periods of time

›››

page 264.

Some functions, such as the interior lights, or

the remote door opening, may be temporarily

disabled to prevent the battery from running

flat. These functions will come back on as

soon as the ignition is switched on and the

engine started.

Winter conditions

During the winter, the starting power may be

reduced, and if necessary, the battery should

be charged

›››

in Important safety warn-

ings f

or handling a v

ehicl

e battery on

page 355

Warning lamp



It lights up

Alternator fault.

The control lamp lights up when the ignition is

wit

ched on. It shoul

d go out when the engine

has started running.

If the control lamp  lights up while driving,

the alternator is no longer charging the bat-

tery. You should immediately drive to the

nearest specialised workshop.

You should avoid using electrical equipment

that is not absolutely necessary because this

will drain the battery.

Important safety warnings for han-

dling a vehicle battery

All work on batteries requires specialist

kno

edge

. Please refer to a SEAT Official

Service or a workshop specialising in batter-

ies: risk of burns or exploding battery!

The battery must not be opened. Never try

to change the fluid level of the battery. Oth-

erwise explosive gas is released from the bat-

tery that could cause an explosion.



Wear eye protection.



Battery acid is very corrosive and caustic.

Wear prot

ective gloves and eye protection. In

the event of electrolyte splashes, rinse off with

plenty of water.



Fires, sparks, open flames and smoking are

prohibited.



The batt

ery should only be charged in a well-

ventilat

ed zone. Risk of explosion!



Keep children away from acid and batteries!

WARNING

●

When repairing or working on the el

ectri-

cal system, proceed as follows:

–

1. Remove the key from the ignition. The

negative cable on the battery must be

disconnected.

–

2. When the repair is finished, recon-

nect the negative pole of the battery.

●

Switch off all electrical devices before

reconnecting the battery. Reconnect first

the positive cable and then the negative

cable. Never reverse the polarity of the

355

Practical tips

connections. This could cause an electrical

fire.

●

Ensur

e that the vent hose is always con-

nected to the battery.

●

Never use damaged batteries. This could

cause an explosion! Replace a damaged

battery immediately.

CAUTION

●

ver disconnect the batt

ery if the igni-

tion is switched on or if the engine is run-

ning. This could damage the electrical sys-

tem or electronic components.

Charging the battery

Terminals for charging the battery are fitted in

the engine compartment.

–

Note the warnings

›

in Important safe-

y w

arnings f

or handling a vehicle bat-

tery on page 355 and

›››

–

Switch off all electrical devices. Remove

the ignition k

ey.

–

aise the bonnet

›

››



page 18.

–

Open the battery cover.

–

Connect the charger clamps as described

to the positive pole of the battery (+) and

exclusively to an earth on the bodywork

(–).

–

Only use a charger which is compatible for

use with 12 V nominal voltage batteries. The

charge must not exceed a voltage of 15 V.

–

Now connect the battery charger to the

power socket and switch on.

–

At the end of the charging process: switch

off the battery charger and disconnect the

power socket cable.

–

Finally disconnect the charger cables from

the battery.

–

Replace the battery cover correctly.

–

Close the bonnet

›››



page 18.

Important: Before you charge the battery

make sure you read the manufacturer's in-

structions for using the battery charger.

WARNING

Never charge a battery that has frozen: re-

place it! F

ailure to do so may lead to an ex-

plosion.

Note

Use only the terminals in the engine com-

partment to char

ge the battery.

Replacing the battery

The new battery should have the same speci-

fications (amperage, l

oad and voltage) as

the used battery.

Your vehicle is equipped with an intelligent

power management system to control the

distribution of electrical energy

›››

page 264.

The power management function ensures

that the battery is charged much more effi-

ciently than on vehicles without a power

management system. To maintain this func-

tion after replacing the battery, we recom-

mend that the replacement battery used is of

the same make and type as the original fitted

battery. To make proper use of the power

management function after the battery has

been changed, have the battery coded to the

power management mode at a specialised

workshop.

CAUTION

●

Some vehicles, f

or example those with

the Start-Stop system* are fitted with a

special battery (AGM-type or EFB-type

battery). If any other type of battery is fit-

ted, the Start-Stop function may be consid-

erably reduced and the vehicle may not

stop on repeated occasions.

●

Make sure that the vent hose is always

attached to the original opening on the

side of the battery. Gases or battery acid

356

Wheels

can otherwise escape and possibly cause

damage.

●

The battery hol

der and clamps must al-

ways be correctly secured.

●

Before starting any work on the battery,

always observe the warnings listed under

›››

page 355, Important safety warnings for

handling a vehicle battery.

●

Do not forget to replace the battery cov-

erings, where applicable. It is a protection

for high temperatures. This in turn extends

the vehicle service life.

For the sake of the environment

 Batteries contain toxic substances in-

cluding sulphuric acid and lead. They must

be disposed of appr

opriately and must not

be disposed of with ordinary household

waste. Make sure disconnected batteries

cannot tip over. Sulphuric acid could be

spilt!

Wheels

Wheel

s and t

General notes

–

When driving with new tyr

es, be especially

careful during the first 500 km (300 miles).

–

If you have to drive over a kerb or similar

obstacle, drive very slowly and as near as

possible at a right angle to the obstacle.

–

Check from time to time if the tyres are

damaged (punctures, cuts, cr

acks or

dents). Remove any foreign objects em-

bedded in the treads.

–

Damaged wheels and tyres must be re-

placed immediately.

–

Keep grease, oil and fuel off the tyres.

–

Replace any missing valve caps as soon as

possible.

–

Mark the wheels before taking them off so

that they rotate in the same direction when

put back.

–

When removed, the wheels or tyres should

be stored in a cool, dry and preferably dark

place.

New tyres

New tyres do not give maximum grip straight

away and should therefore be “run in” by

driving carefully and at moderate speeds for

about the first 500 km (300 miles). This will

also increase the useful life of the tyres.

The tread depth of new tyres may vary, ac-

cording to the type and make of tyre and the

tread pattern.

Low profile tyres

Low profile tyres, compared to other rim and

tyre combinations, offer a broader tread and

a greater rim diameter along with a lower

height of the tyre sidewall. This results in a

more agile driving behaviour. However, on

roads that are in poor condition, this might af-

fect comfort and cause more noise.

Low profile tyres may deteriorate more quick-

ly than standard tyres, for instance due to

strong knocks, potholes, manhole covers and

kerbs. Therefore, maintaining the correct tyre

pressure is particularly important

›››

page 358.

To avoid damage to tyres and wheels, drive

with special care when driving on roads in

poor condition.

Visually inspect your tyres every 3,000 km re-

garding damage, e.g. flattening/cracks on

the tyre sidewall or deformations/cracks on

the rims.

357

Practical tips

If the rims and tyres have received a heavy

impact or hav

e been damaged, hav

e them

check

ed and, if required, replaced at a speci-

alised workshop.

Low profile tyres may deteriorate more quick-

ly than standard tyres.

Concealed damage

Damage to tyres and rims is often not readily

visible. If you notice unusual vibration or the

car pulling to one side, this may indicate

that one of the tyres is damaged. Reduce

speed immediately if there is any reason to

suspect that damage may have occurred. In-

spect the tyres for damage. If no external

damage is visible, drive slowly and carefully

to the nearest specialised workshop and

have the car inspected.

Tyres with directional tread pattern

An arrow on the tyre sidewall indicates the di-

rection of rotation on single drive tyres. Al-

ways note the direction of rotation indicated

when mounting the wheel. This guarantees

optimum grip and helps to avoid aquaplan-

ing, excessive noise and wear.

Retrofitting accessories

If you wish to change or fit wheels, rims or

wheel trims, we recommend that you consult

with a SEAT Official Service centre for advice

regarding current techniques.

Service life of tyres

Fig. 306 Location of the tyre pressure sticker.

Correct inflation pressures and sensible driv-

ing habits will incr

ease the useful lif

e of your

yres.

●

Check tyre pressure at least once a month,

and also prior to any long trip.

●

The tyre pressure should only be checked

when the tyres are cold. Do not reduce the

pressure of warm tyres.

●

Adjust tyre pressure to the load being car-

ried by the vehicle.

●

In vehicles with a tyre pressure indicator,

save the modified pressure of tyres

›››

page 361,

›››

page 358.

●

Avoid fast cornering and hard acceleration.

●

Inspect the tyres for irregular wear from

time to time.

The useful life of your tyres depends on the

following factors:

Tyre pressure

The tyre inflation pressures are listed on a

sticker on the rear of the front left door frame

›››

Fig. 306.

Insufficient or excessive pressure greatly re-

duces the useful life of the tyres and adverse-

ly affects vehicle performance and ride. Cor-

rect inflation pressures are very important,

especially at high speeds.

Depending on the vehicle, tyre pressure can

be adjusted to medium load to improve driv-

ing comfort (tyre pressure ). When driving

with comfort tyre pressure fuel consumption

may increase slightly.

The tyre pressure must be adjusted accord-

ing to the load the vehicle is carrying. If the

vehicle is going to carry the maximum load,

the tyre pressure should be increased to the

maximum value indicated on the sticker

›››

Fig. 306.

358

Wheels

Do not forget the spare wheel when checking

the t

e pr

essures: Keep this spare wheel in-

flated to the highest pressure required for the

road wheels.

In the case of a minimised temporary spare

wheel (125/70 R18) inflate to a pressure of 4.2

bar as indicated on the tyre pressure label

›››

Fig. 306.

Driving style

Fast cornering, heavy acceleration and hard

braking (squealing tyres) all increase tyre

wear.

Wheel balance

The wheels on new vehicles are balanced.

However, certain circumstances may lead to

imbalance (run-out), which is detected as vi-

brations in the steering wheel.

Unbalanced wheels should be rebalanced,

as they otherwise cause excessive wear on

steering, suspension and tyres. A wheel must

also be rebalanced when a new tyre is fitted

or if a tyre is repaired.

Incorrect wheel alignment

Incorrect running gear alignment causes ex-

cessive tyre wear, impairing the safety of the

vehicle. If you notice excessive tyre wear, you

should check wheel alignment at a SEAT Of-

ficial Service.

WARNING

●

Always adapt the t

yre pressure accord-

ingly when the vehicle load changes.

●

A tyre with low air pressure has to flex a

lot more when the vehicle is heavily loaded

or at high speeds, therefore causing over-

heating to occur. Under these conditions,

the tyre bead may be released or the tyre

may burst. Risk of accident!

For the sake of the environment

Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel con-

sumption.

Wear indicators

Fig. 307 Tyre profile: tread wear indicators.

Tread wear indicators indicate if a tyre is

orn.

The original t

es on your vehicle have

1.6 mm high “tread wear indicators” running

across the tread. Depending on the manu-

facturer, there will be 6 to 8 of them spaced

at equal distances around the tyre. Markings

on the tyre sidewall (for instance the letters

“TWI” or a triangle) indicate the positions of

the tread wear indicators.

The minimum tread depth required by law is

1.6 mm (measured in the tread grooves next

to the tread wear indicators). (Different fig-

ures may apply in other countries.)

WARNING

The tyres must be replaced at the latest

when the tread is worn do

wn to the tread

wear indicators. Failure to follow this in-

struction could result in an accident.

●

Especially in difficult driving conditions

such as wet or icy roads. It is important that

the tyre tread be as deep as possible and

be approximately the same on the tyres of

both the front and the rear axles.

●

The scant driving safety due to insuffi-

cient tread depth is particularly evident in

vehicle handling, when there is a risk of

“aquaplaning” in deep puddles of water

and when driving through corners, and

braking is also adversely affected.

●

The speed has to be adapted according-

ly, otherwise there is a risk of losing control

over the vehicle.

359

Practical tips

Interchanging tyres

Fig. 308

Interchanging tyres.

To ensure that the wear is equal on all tyres

the wheel

s shoul

d be changed r

ound from

time to time according to the system

›››

Fig. 308. The useful life of all the tyres will

then be about the same time.

New tyres or new wheels

–

All four wheels must be fitted with tyres of

the same t

ype

, siz

e (rolling circumference)

and preferably the same tread pattern.

–

Tyres should be replaced at least in pairs

and not individually (i.e. both front tyres or

both rear tyres together).

–

Do not use tyres whose effective size ex-

ceeds the dimensions of the factory-ap-

proved makes of tyre.

–

If you wish to fit the vehicle with rims or

tyres different to those installed in manu-

facture, it is advisable to consult a SEAT Of-

ficial Service before purchasing them.

The tyres and wheel rims are an essential

part of the vehicle's design. The tyres and

rims approved by SEAT are specially match-

ed to the characteristics of the vehicle and

make a major contribution to good roadhold-

ing and safe handling

›››

The siz

es of the rims and t

es approved for

your vehicle are listed in the vehicle docu-

mentation (e.g. EC Certificate of Conformity

or COC document

). The vehicle documen-

tation varies depending on the country of res-

idence.

A knowledge of tyre designations makes it

easier to choose the correct tyres. The fol-

lowing wording can be read on the sides of

the tyre:

215/60 R16 95V

This contains the following information:

215 Tyre width in mm

60 Height/width ratio in %

R Tyre construction: Radial

16 Rim diameter in inches

95 Load rating code

V Speed index

The manufacturing dat

e is also indicated on

the tyre sidewall (possibly only on the outer

part):

DOT ... 2216 ...

it means, for example, that the tyre was man-

ufactured in the 22nd week of 2016.

But note that with some types of tyre, the

actual tyre size can differ from the nomi-

nal size marked on the tyre (for instance

215/60 R16 95 V), and there may be signif-

icant differences in the contours of the

tyres, even though the tyres are marked

with the same nominal size. When replac-

ing the tyres, it is therefore important to

make sure that the actual size of the new

tyres does not exceed the dimensions of

the factory-approved makes of tyre.

Failure to observe this requirement can af-

fect the clearance needed for the tyres. If

the tyres rub against the bodywork, in cer-

tain circumstances the tyres, running gear

or bodywork and pipes may be damaged,

COC = certificate of conformit

360

Wheels

and vehicle safety could be severely im-

pair

›

››

If you use t

es that ar

e approved by SEAT

you can be sure that the actual tyre di-

mensions will be correct for your vehicle. If

you decide to fit a different type of tyre,

you must obtain the appropriate manufac-

turer's certificate from the tyre retailer to

confirm that the tyres are suitable for your

vehicle. Keep this certificate in a safe

place.

Your SEAT Official Service will be able to

advise you on which tyres may be fitted to

your vehicle.

It is best to have all servicing of wheels and

tyres performed by a specialised workshop.

They are familiar with the procedure and

have the necessary special tools and spare

parts as well as the proper facilities for dis-

posing of the old tyres respecting the envi-

ronment.

WARNING

●

It is very import

ant to ensure that the

tyres you have chosen have adequate

clearance. When selecting replacement

tyres, do not rely entirely on the nominal

tyre size marked on the tyre, since the ef-

fective tyre size can differ significantly de-

pending on the manufacturer. Inadequate

tyre clearance can result in damage to the

tyres or the vehicle, causing a serious safe-

ty risk. Risk of accident! It may also invalid-

ate the vehicle's registration for use on

public roads.

●

Avoid running the v

ehicle on tyres that

are more than 6 years old. If you have no

alternative, you should drive slowly and

with extra care at all times.

●

If wheel trims are fitted after the car is

purchased, ensure that there is an ade-

quate flow of air for cooling the brake sys-

tem.

For the sake of the environment

Old tyres must be disposed of according to

the l

aws in the country concerned.

Note

●

A SEAT Service Centre should be consul

ted to find out whether wheels or tyres of

different sizes to those originally fitted by

SEAT can be fitted, and to find out about

the combinations allowed between the

front axle (axle 1) and the rear axle (axle 2).

●

Never mount used tyres if you are not

sure of their “previous history”.

●

For technical reasons, it is not generally

possible to use the wheels from other vehi-

cles. In some cases, this may also be true

for the same model of wheel.

●

When 245/40 R19 tyres are outfitted, the

corresponding reflector must also be in-

stalled.

Wheel bolts

The wheel bolts are matched t

o the rims.

When installing different wheels (for instance

alloy wheels or wheels with winter tyres) it is

important to use the correct wheel bolts with

the right length and correctly shaped bolt

heads. This ensures that wheels are fitted se-

curely and that the brake system functions

correctly.

The wheel bolts must be clean and turn easi-

ly.

A special adapter is required to turn the anti-

theft wheel bolts*

›››



page 55.

Tyre monitoring system

Introduction

WARNING

Unsuitable handling of the wheels and

tyres may l

ead to sudden tyre pressure los-

ses, to tread separation or even to a blow-

out.

●

Check tyre pressures regularly and en-

sure they are maintained at the pressures

indicated. Tyre pressure that is too low

could cause overheating, resulting in tread

detachment or even burst tyres.

361

Practical tips

●

Tyre pr

essure should be that indicated on

the label when the tyres are cold at all

times

›››

page 382.

●

Regularly check the cold inflation pres-

sure of the tyres. If necessary, change the

tyre pressure of the vehicle tyres while they

are cold.

●

Regularly check your tyres for damage

and wear.

●

Never exceed the maximum permitted

speed or loads specified for the type of

tyre fitted on your vehicle.

For the sake of the environment

Under-inflated tyres lead to increased fuel

consumption and tyre w

ear.

Note

●

Driving for the first time with new t

yres at

a high speed can cause them to slightly ex-

pand, which could then produce an air

pressure warning.

●

Only replace used tyres with those au-

thorised by SEAT for the corresponding

type vehicle.

●

Do not only rely on the tyre monitoring

system. Regularly check your tyres to en-

sure that the tyre pressure is correct and

that the tyres are not damaged due to

puncture, cuts, tears and impacts/dents.

Remove objects from the tyres only when

they have not pierced the tyres.

Tyre control lamp



It lights up

The tyre pressure in one or more wheels has clearly

gone down from the tyre pressure set by the driver or

the tyre has structural damage.

Additionally, an audible warning can be heard and a

text message is displayed on the instrument panel

display.

Stop the vehicle! Reduce speed immediately!

Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible. Avoid

sudden manoeuvres and braking! Check all tyres

and pressures. Replace any damaged tyres.



Flashes

Fault in the system.

The control lamp fl

ashes for approximately one mi-

nute and then lights up permanently.

If tyre pressure is correct, switch the ignition off and

on again. If the control lamp remains lit up, the tyre

monitoring indicator can be calibrated. Have the sys-

tem checked by a specialised workshop.

Several control and warning lamps light up

or a f

w seconds when the ignition is switch-

ed on while the function is verified. They will

switch off after a few seconds.

WARNING

When the tyres are inflated at different

pressures or at a pr

essure that is too low

then a tyre may be damaged resulting in a

loss of control of the vehicle and a serious

or fatal accident.

●

If the warning lamp

 lights up, stop im-

mediately and check the tyres.

●

If the tyres are inflated at different pres-

sures or if a tyre pressure is too low, this will

increase tyre wear, negatively affecting ve-

hicle stability and increasing braking dis-

tances.

●

If tyres are inflated at different pressures

or a tyre pressure is too low, a tyre may be

damaged and burst resulting in a loss of

control of the vehicle.

●

The driver is responsible for ensuring that

all of the vehicle tyres are correctly infla-

ted to the right pressure. The recommen-

ded tyre pressure is indicated on the label

›››

page 382.

●

The tyre monitoring system can only op-

erate correctly if all of the tyres are infla-

ted to the correct pressure when cold.

●

Driving with tyres at the wrong pressure

can damage them and result in an acci-

dent. Ensure that the tyre pressures of all

the tyres correspond to the vehicle load.

●

Before starting a journey, always inflate

tyres to the correct pressure.

●

Tyres with insufficient pressure are sub-

jected to more flexing. Due to this, the tyre

could become excessively hot, causing

tread separation and also tyre blow-out.

●

With an overloaded vehicle at high

speed, the tyres can overheat and burst re-

sulting in a loss of vehicle control.

362

Wheels

●

Tyre pr

essures which are too high or too

low reduce the useful life of the tyre, affect-

ing vehicle performance.

●

If a tyre has not been punctured and it

does not have to be changed immediately,

drive to the nearest specialised workshop

at a moderate speed and have the tyre

checked and inflated to the correct pres-

sure.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings

›

››

in Con-

trol and warning l

amps on page 123.

Note

●

If excessiv

ely low tyre pressure is detec-

ted with the ignition on, an audible warning

will sound. In the event that there is a fault

in the system, an audible warning will

sound.

●

Driving on dirt tracks for a long period of

time or driving in a sporty style can tempo-

rarily deactivate the TPMS. The control

lamp shows a fault, but disappears when

road conditions or the driving style change.

Tyre monitoring indicator

Fig. 309

Instrument panel: warning of loss of

e pr

essure.

The tyre monitor indicator compares wheel

olutions and, with this information, the

tread of each wheel using the ABS sensors. If

the rolling circumference of one or more

wheels has changed, the tyre monitoring indi-

cator will indicate this on the instrument pan-

el through a warning lamp and a warning to

the driver

›››

Fig. 309. When only one specific

tyre is affected, its position within the vehicle

will be indicated.

 Loss of pressure: Check left

tyre pressure!

Wheel tread change

The wheel tread changes when:

●

Tyre pressure is manually changed

●

Tyre pressure is insufficient

●

Tyre structure is damaged

●

The vehicle is unbalanced because of a

load

●

The wheels on an axle are subject to a

heavier load (e.g. with a heavy load).

●

The vehicle is fitted with snow chains

●

The temporary spare wheel is fitted

●

The wheel on one axle is changed

There may be a delay in the reaction of the

tyre  monitoring indicator or it may not indi-

cate anything under certain circumstances

(e.g. sporty driving, snow-covered or un-

paved roads, or when driving with snow

chains).

Calibrating the tyre monitoring in-

dicator

After changing the tyre pressure or replacing

one or mor

e wheel

s, the t

yre monitoring indi-

cator must be recalibrated. Do the same, for

example, when the front and rear wheels are

swapped.

●

Switch the ignition on.

363

Practical tips

●

e the ne

w tyre pressure in the Easy

Connect

system with the 

> SETTINGS

function butt

›



page 35.

●

In vehicles without a radio: press and hold

down the  button , with the ignition on,

until an acoustic signal is heard.

When driving, the system self-calibrates the

tyre pressure provided by the driver and the

wheels fitted. After a long journey with varied

speeds the programmed values are collected

and monitored.

With the wheels under very heavy loads, the

tyre pressure must be increased to the total

recommended tyre pressure before the cali-

bration

›››

page 382.

Note

●

The tyre monit

oring indicator does not

function when there is a fault in the ESC or

ABS

›››

page 248.

●

An erroneous indication may be given

when snow chains are in use because they

increase the tread of the wheel.

Temporary spare wheel

Gener

al inf

ormation

Fig. 310 Spare wheel: floor panel raised.

The temporary spare wheel has been de-

signed t

o be used f

or short periods of time

Have the tyres checked and replaced as

soon as possible at a SEAT Official Service or

at a specialised workshop.

Please note the following restrictions when

using the compact temporary spare wheel.

The compact temporary spare wheel is de-

signed specifically for this model. For this rea-

son, do not use a temporary spare wheel

from a different type of vehicle.

Removing the temporary spare wheel

–

Lift and hold up the floor panel to remove

the temporary spare wheel.

–

Turn the thumb wheel anti-clockwise

›››

Fig. 310.

–

Take out the temporary spare wheel.

Chains

For technical reasons, snow chains must not

be used on the temporary spare wheel.

If you have a puncture on one of the front

wheels when using snow chains, fit the tem-

porary spare wheel in place of one of the rear

wheels. Fit the snow chains on the rear wheel

that you have removed and replace the

punctured front wheel with this wheel.

WARNING

●

After fitting the tempor

ary spare wheel,

check the tyre pressures as soon as possi-

ble. Failure to do so may cause an acci-

dent. The tyre pressure is listed on the back

of the left front door frame

›››

Fig. 306.

In vehicles that are not equipped with the Easy

Connect system, the swit

ch for adjusting tyre

pressure is located in the centre console next to

the hazard warning lights.

364

Wheels

●

Do not drive at ov

er 80 km/h (50 mph)

when the temporary spare wheel is fitted

on the vehicle: risk of accident!

●

Never travel more than 200 km using a

temporary spare wheel.

●

Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking

and fast cornering: risk of accident!

●

Never use more than one temporary

spare wheel at the same time, risk of acci-

dent.

●

No other type of tyre (normal summer or

winter tyre) may be fitted on the compact

temporary spare wheel rim.

●

If you are driving using the spare wheel,

the ACC system could automatically

switch off during the journey. Switch off the

system when starting off.

Getting the spare wheel out of ve-

hicl

es with BEAT

S Audio 10 speak

ers (with

subwoofer

Fig. 311

In the boot: remove the subwoofer.

To remove the spare wheel, you must first re-

e the sub

woofer.

●

Lift and secure the luggage compartment

floor as described in

›››

page 173.

●

Disconnect the subwoofer

›››

Fig. 311

speaker cable.

●

Turn the securing wheel in an anti-clock-

wise dir

ection

›

Fig. 311

●

Remove the sub

oof

er speaker and the

spare wheel.

●

When re-mounting the spare tyre, place the

subwoofer on the base of the wheel rim with

care. When doing so, the tip of the “FRONT”

arrow on the subwoofer should point forward.

●

Reconnect the speaker cable and firmly ro-

tate the securing wheel clockwise so that the

subwoofer system and wheel are firmly in

place.

Winter service

Winter tyres

–

Winter tyres must be fitted on all f

our

wheel

–

Only use wint

er tyres that are approved for

your vehicle.

–

Please note that the maximum permissible

speed for winter tyres may be lower than

for summer tyres.

–

Also note that winter tyres are no longer ef-

fective when the tread is worn down.

–

After fitting the wheels you must always

check the tyre pressures. When doing so,

take into account the correct tyre pressures

listed on the rear of the front left door frame

›››

page 358.

In winter road conditions winter tyres will con-

siderably improve vehicle handling. The

365

Practical tips

design of summer tyres (width, rubber com-

pound, tr

ead patt

ern) giv

es less grip on ice

and snow. This applies particularly to vehicles

equipped with wide section tyres or with

high speed tyres (code letters H, V or Y on

the sidewall).

Only use winter tyres of the correct type ap-

proved for your vehicle. The sizes of these

tyres are specified in the vehicle's documents

(e.g. EC Certificate of Conformity or COC

The vehicle documentation varies depending

on the country of residence. See also

›››

page 360.

Winter tyres lose a great deal of their proper-

ties when the tread is worn down to a depth

of 4 mm.

The performance of winter tyres is also se-

verely impaired by ageing, even if the tread is

still much deeper than 4 mm.

Winter tyres are subject to the following max-

imum speed limits according to speed rating

code letter:

›››

Speed rating

code letter

›

››

page 360

Maximum speed limit

Q 160 km/h (100 mph)

S 180 km/h (112 mph)

Speed rating

code letter

›

››

page 360

Maximum speed limit

T 190 km/h (118 mph)

H 210 km/h (130 mph)

240 km/h (149 mph) (please

note rel

evant restrictions)

W 270 km/h (168 mph)

Y 300 km/h (186 mph)

Vehicles capable of exceeding these speeds

must hav

e an appr

opriat

e sticker attached

so that it is visible to the driver. Suitable stick-

ers are available from the SEAT Official Serv-

ice and specialised workshop. Please note

the regulations to this effect in your country.

“All-weather” tyres can also be used instead

of winter tyres.

Using winter tyres with V-rating

Please note that the generally applicable

240 km/h (149 mph) speed for winter tyres

with the letter V is subject to technical re-

strictions; the maximum permissible speed

for your vehicle may be significantly lower.

The maximum speed limit for these tyres de-

pends directly on the maximum axle weights

for your car and on the listed weight rating of

the tyres being used.

It is best to contact a SEAT Official Service to

check the maximum speed which is permissi-

ble for the V-rated tyres fitted on your car on

the basis of this information.

WARNING

Exceeding the maximum speed permitted

for the winter t

yres fitted on your car can

cause tyre failure, resulting in a loss of con-

trol of the vehicle – risk of accident.

For the sake of the environment

Summer tyres should be fitted again as

soon as possible after the wint

er period;

they give better handling on roads which

are free of snow and ice. Summer tyres per-

form with less rolling noise, tyre wear and –

most important – reduce fuel consumption.

COC = certificate of conformit

366

Service

Maintenance

Service

Service int

erv

Servicing and Digital Maintenance

Plan

Log of services performed (“Digital Main-

tenance Plan”)

The SEAT deal

ership or a specialised work-

shop records Service receipts in a central

system. Thanks to this comprehensive docu-

mentation of the service history, it is possible

to reproduce the services performed any

time. SEAT recommends requesting a Service

receipt after every service carried out con-

taining all the services carried out on the sys-

tem.

Whenever there is a new service the receipt is

replaced with a current one.

The Digital Maintenance Plan is not avail-

able in some markets. In this case, your

SEAT dealer will inform you about the cur-

rent documentation of the work.

Service works

In the Digital Maintenance Pl

an, your SEAT

authorised service or specialised workshop

documents the following information:

●

When each one of the services was carried

out.

●

Whether a specific repair has been sugges-

ted, e.g. changing the brake pads in the near

future.

●

If you have expressed a special request for

the maintenance. Your Service Advisor will

write the work order.

●

The components or fluids that were

changed.

●

The date of the next service.

The Long Life Mobility Warranty is valid until

the next inspection. This information is docu-

mented in all checks performed.

The type and the volume of the service may

vary from one vehicle to another. A special-

ised workshop will be able to provide specific

information on the jobs for your vehicle.

WARNING

If the services are insufficient or not per-

formed and if the service interv

als are not

observed, the vehicle may be immobilised

in traffic cause an accident and severe in-

juries.

●

Make sure that any r

epairs are carried

out by a SEAT authorised service or speci-

alised workshop.

CAUTION

SEAT cannot be held liable for any damage

o the vehicl

e due to insufficient work or of

lack of availability of spare parts.

Note

Regular services on the vehicle not only

maintain its value

, but also its correct oper-

ation and road safety. For this reason, con-

duct the services in accordance with SEAT

guidelines.

Fixed Service or Flexible Service

Services are classified as oil change service

and inspection. The service int

erv

al displ

on the instrument panel display serves as a

reminder of the next service.

Depending on the features, the engine and

the conditions of use of the car, either the

Fixed service or the Flexible service will be

applied for an oil change service..

How to know which type of service needs

to his vehicle

●

Check the tables below:

367

Maintenance

Oil change service

PR No.

Type of

service

Service interval

QI1

Fixed

Every 5000 km or after

1 year

QI2

Every 7500 km or after

1 year

QI3

Every

10000 km or after

1 year

QI4

Every

15000 km or after

1 year

QI6 Fle

xible

According to the service in-

erv

al displ

The data are based on normal conditions of use.

Whatever happens first.

Inspection Service

According to the service interval display

The data are based on normal conditions of use.

Bear in mind the inf

ormation about the speci-

fications of the engine oil accor

ding t

o the

VW standard

›››



page 47.

Particular characteristics of the Flexible

Service

Regarding the Flexible Service, the oil

change service only has to be performed

when the vehicle needs it. To calculate when

you have to carry out this service, take into

account the individual conditions of use and

personal driving style. A major component of

the flexible service the use of LongLife oil in-

stead of conventional engine oil.

Bear in mind the information about the speci-

fications of the engine oil according to the

VW standard

›››



page 47.

If you do not want to the flexible service

you can select the fixed service However,

a fixed service may affect service costs

The Service Advisor will gladly advise you.

Service intervals display

At SEAT, the dates of the services are indica-

ted by the service interval display on the in-

strument panel

›››

page 119 or in the Vehi-

cle settings menu of the infotainment sys-

tem

›››



page 35. The service interval dis-

play gives information for service dates that

involve an engine oil change or an inspection.

When the time for the corresponding service

comes, additional work required, such as the

change of brake fluid and the spark plugs,

can be carried out.

Information on the conditions of

use

The service intervals and groups are usually

based on normal conditions of use.

If, on the other hand, the vehicle is under ad-

erse conditions of use

, some of the w

ork

must be carried out before the next service

period or even between service intervals.

Conditions of use adverse include:

●

The use of fuel with a high sulphur content.

●

Frequent short trips.

●

Letting the engine idle for a long period of

time, as in the case of taxis.

●

Using the vehicle in areas with thick dust.

●

Frequent driving with a trailer (depending

on equipment).

●

Using the vehicle mostly in situations with a

lot of traffic and stops (e.g. in a city).

●

Using the vehicle mostly in winter.

This applies especially for the following

parts (depending on equipment):

●

Dust and pollen filter

●

Air Care allergen filter

●

Air filter

●

Toothed chain

●

Particulate filter

●

Engine oil

The Service Advisor of your specialised

workshop will gladly inform you about the

need of performing service work between

368

Service

normal service intervals, always considering

the conditions of use of your v

ehicl

WARNING

If the services are insufficient or not per-

formed and if the service interv

als are not

observed, the vehicle may be immobilised

in traffic and cause accidents and severe

injuries.

●

Have the services conducted at author-

ised SEAT services or specialised work-

shops.

CAUTION

SEAT cannot be held liable for any damage

to the vehicl

e due to insufficient work or of

lack of availability of spare parts.

Sets of services

Sets of services include all the maint

enance

orks

needed to ensure the safety and the

smooth running of the vehicle (depending on

the conditions of use and the features of

the vehicle, such as the engine, gearbox, or

operating fluids). Maintenance services are

divided into inspection and review services.

Consult the details of the jobs required for

your vehicle at:

●

Your SEAT authorised service

●

Your specialised workshop

Due to technical reasons (continuous devel-

opment of components) the sets of services

may vary. Your SEAT authorised service or

specialised workshop is always receiving up-

dates in time.

Additional service offers

Approved spare parts

Original SEAT Spare Parts have been con-

ceiv

ed f

or their v

ehicles and approved by

SEAT, with a special emphasis on safety.

These parts correspond exactly to the manu-

facturer's requirements in terms of design,

accuracy of the measurements and materi-

als. The original SEAT Spare Parts have been

conceived exclusively for your vehicle. For this

reason, we always recommend the use of

Original SEAT Spare Parts. SEAT cannot be

held liable for the safety and suitability of

parts from other manufacturers.

Approved spare parts

Approved spare parts, following the manu-

act

er's requirements, are an additional

service to you, offering the possibility of re-

placing complete sets, such as: light engine,

gearboxes, heads, control units, electrical

components, etc.

These parts are, approved parts, and are the

same as the factory parts, which are also ap-

proved spare parts.

Original accessories

We recommend you only use SEAT Original

Accessories and SEAT approv

ed accessories

for your vehicle. The reliability, safety and

suitability of these accessories have been in-

spected specifically for this type of vehicle.

SEAT cannot be held liable for the safety and

suitability of parts from other manufacturers.

SEAT Service Mobility (SEAT

Service Mobility)

Since the moment you purchase your SEAT

ehicl

e you will be abl

e to enjoy the benefits

and coverage of the SEAT Mobility Service.

For the first two years after the purchase,

your new SEAT vehicle is automatically cov-

ered by the SEAT Mobility Service without ad-

ditional costs.

If you wish to enjoy this service after this peri-

od, you can extend SEAT Mobility as long as

you carry out the recommended Inspection

and Maintenance Services at a SEAT Author-

ised Service.

369

Maintenance

If your SEAT vehicle is immobilised due to a

ault or an accident, our assist

ance services

will help you k

eep moving.

Take into account that the SEAT Mobility

Service differs depending on the country in

which the vehicle was purchased. For further

information ask your SEAT dealership or the

SEAT website in your country.

Warranty

Fault-free operation warranty

SEAT Authorised Services ensure the perfect

condition of ne

w v

ehicl

es. Check the pur-

chase agreement or complementary addi-

tional documentation provided by your Tech-

nical Service to see the conditions and the

terms of the warranty. Consult further infor-

mation in this regard in your SEAT Official

Service.

Vehicle maintenance

Maint

enance and cl

eaning

Basic consider

ations

Regular and careful care helps to maintain

the value of your vehicl

e. In addition, it may

become a prerequisite to demand the war-

ranty in the event of corrosion damage and

deficiencies in the paint coat of the body-

work.

Specialised workshops have the necessary

care products. Please follow the instructions

for application on the packaging.

WARNING

●

Cleaning products and other mat

erials

used for car care can be damaging to your

health if misused.

●

Always keep care products in a safe

place, out of the reach of children. Danger

of poisoning!

For the sake of the environment

●

When purchasing car care pr

oducts,

chose products that are compatible with

the environment.

●

The waste from car-care products should

not be disposed of with ordinary household

waste.

Washing the vehicle

The longer you take to clean the tanks, e.g.

remains of insects, bird e

xcrements, tree resin

or anti frost salt adhered to your vehicle, the

more damage it can cause to the surface.

High temperatures, for instance strong sun-

light, further intensify the damage.

Before washing the car, soften the dirt using

plenty of water.

To remove encrusted dirt such as insects, bird

droppings or tree resin, use a lot of water and

a microfibre cloth.

Have the underside of the vehicle washed af-

ter the end of the anti frost salts in winter.

High pressure cleaners

When washing the vehicle with a high-pres-

sure cleaner, always follow the operating in-

structions for the equipment. This applies

particularly to the operating pressure and the

distance between the spraying water. Do not

aim the jet directly to the side window gas-

kets, doors, covers or the panoramic sun-

roof*; the same applies to tyres, rubber ho-

ses, soundproofing material, sensors* or

camera lenses*. Keep a distance of at least

40 cm.

Do not remove snow and ice with a high-

pressure cleaner.

370

Vehicle maintenance

Do not use a nozzle that sprays the water out

in a dir

ect str

eam or one that has a r

otating

jet for forcing off dirt.

The water temperature must not exceed

60°C.

Automatic car wash tunnels

Spray the vehicle before starting the car

wash.

Make sure that the windows and the panor-

amic sunroof* are closed and the windscreen

wipers are deactivated. Bear in mind the in-

structions of the car wash tunnel operator,

especially if your vehicle has detachable

parts.

Use of car washes without brushes if possible.

Washing by hand

Clean your vehicle from top to bottom with a

soft sponge or with a brush. Only use clean-

ing products that do not contain solvents.

Washing vehicles with a matte paint by

hand

To prevent damage to the vehicle when

washing it, first remove the thicker dust and

dirt. To remove traces of insects, grease and

fingerprints, it is best to use a special cleaner

for matte paint.

Apply the product with a microfibre cloth. To

avoid damaging the surface of the paint, do

not apply too much pressure.

Rinse with plenty of water. Then clean it with

a neutral cleaning product and a soft microfi-

bre cloth.

Rinse the vehicle again with plenty of water

and then leave it to dry. Remove traces of

water with a leather cloth.

WARNING

●

Only wash the vehicl

e with the ignition

switched off or according to the specifica-

tions of the car wash tunnel operator. Risk

of accident!

●

When cleaning the underbody or the in-

side of the wheel arches, protect yourself

from sharp or pointy metal parts. Risk of

cut!

●

After cleaning the brakes could act more

slowly due to moisture or, in winter, the ice

on the brake discs and pads. Risk of acci-

dent! In this case the brakes should be

dried by pressing the brake pedal several

times.

CAUTION

●

Before w

ashing the vehicle in an auto-

matic car wash, please make sure to re-

tract the exterior mirrors to prevent them

from being damaged. Electric exterior rear-

view mirrors must always be folded/de-

ployed electrically!

●

Do not w

ash the vehicle in direct sunlight.

Risk of damaging the paint job!

●

Do not use sponges, abrasive household

sponges or similar to clean insect remains.

Risk of damaging the surface!

●

Vehicle parts with matte paint:

–

Do not use polish or hard wax. Risk of

damaging the surface!

–

Never select washing programs that in-

clude the use of wax. This could dam-

age the appearance of matte paint.

–

Do not put stickers or magnets on parts

with matte paint, as removing them

may damage the paint.

For the sake of the environment

The car should only be washed in special

wash bays. These places ar

e prepared to

prevent oily water from getting into the

public drains.

Cleaning and maintenance instruc-

tions

The cleaning and maintenance of individual

components of the v

ehicl

e can be check

ed in

the following tables. The contents should be

understood merely as a recommendation. Go

to your specialised workshop if you have

371

Maintenance

special questions or parts that are not listed.

e he gener

al considerations into account

›››

in Take special care with... on

page 375.

Exterior cleaning

Windscreen wipers

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft cloth with wipers

Headlights / Tail lights

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft sponge with neutral soap

solution

Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in

1 litr

e of w

Sensors / Camera lenses

Problem Solution

Dirt

Sensors: soft cloth with clean-

ing pr

oduct which does not

contain solvents

Camera lenses - soft cloth with

cleaning product with no alco-

hol content

Snow/ice

Hand brush/Anti frost spray

with no solvents

Wheels

Problem Solution

Anti frost salt Water

Brake abrasion

dust

Acid-free special cleaning

product

End exhausts

Problem Solution

Anti frost salt Water, if a steel cleaning prod-

uct is required

Covers / Trims

Problem Solution

Dirt Neutral soap solution

, if a

steel cleaning pr

oduct is re-

quired

Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in

1 litr

e of w

Paint

Problem Solution

Flaws in the paint

Check the paint's colour code

in an authorised service and re-

stor

e with a touch-up pencil

Spilled fuel Immediately rinse with water

Environmental rust

tank

Apply rust remo

ver and then

apply hard wax. Go you your

specialised w

orkshop if you

have any queries

Problem Solution

Corrosion

Have your specialised work-

shop take car

e of this

The water does

not create dr

op-

lets on the clean

paint

Maintain with hard wax (at

least 2 times a year)

No shine de-

spite sober main-

tenance/paint

reat with suitable wax and ap-

ply paint preservativ

e after-

wards if the wax used does not

contain preservative ingredi-

ents

Tanks, e.g. insect

remains, bird

oppings, tree

sap, road salt

Immediately soften with water

and remove with a microfibre

cloth

Fat-based dirt,

e.g. cosmetic

products or

sunscreen

Delete immediately with a neu-

tral soap solution

and a soft

cloth

Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in

1 litr

e of w

Carbon fibre parts

Problem Solution

Dirt Clean the same way as pain-

ted parts

››

›

page 370

372

Vehicle maintenance

Decoration slides

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft sponge with neutral soap

solution

Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in

1 litre of wat

Interior cleaning

Windows

Problem Solution

Dirt Apply windscreen cleaner and

then dry with a cloth

Covers / Trims

Problem Solution

Dirt Neutral soap solution

Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in

1 litr

e of w

Plastic parts

Problem Solution

Dirt Damp cloth

Encrusted dirt Neutral soap solution

, if pos-

sible solvent-free plastic clean-

Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in

1 litr

e of w

Displays/instrument panel

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft cloth with a liquid crystal

display cleaner

Control panels

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft brush, then soft cloth with

neutral soap solution

Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in

1 litre of wat

Seat belts

Problem Solution

Dirt Neutral soap solution

, al-

wed to dry before retracting

Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in

1 litr

e of w

Fabrics, artificial, Alcantara leather

Problem Solution

Dirt particles ad-

hered to the sur

face

Vacuum cleaner

Water-based dirt,

e.g. coffee

, tea,

blood etc.

Absorbent cloth and neutral

soap solution

Problem Solution

Grease-based

dirt, e.g. oil, mak

up, etc.

Apply a neutral soap solution

Absorb the dissolved grease

and paint particles drying with

an absorbent cloth, in case you

must treat it with water after-

wards

Special dirt, e.g.

pens, nail polish,

dispersion paint,

shoe cream etc.

Special st

ain remove: dry with

an absorbent cloth, if applica-

ble, apply neutral soap solution

afterwards

Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in

1 litr

e of w

Natural leather

Problem Solution

Recent dirt Cotton cloth with neutral soap

solution

Water-based dirt,

e.g. coffee, tea,

blood etc.

Recent stains: absorbent cloth

Dry stains: leather cleaner

Grease-based

dirt, e.g. oil, mak

up, etc.

Recent stains: absorbent cloth

and leather cleaner

Dry stains: grease dissolving

spray

Special dirt, e.g.

pens, nail polish,

dispersion paint,

shoe cream etc.

ain remover suitable for

leather

373

Maintenance

Problem Solution

Care Apply preservative cream regu-

larly to pr

otect from sunlight.

Use a colour preservative if re-

quired

Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in

1 litre of wat

Carbon fibre parts

Problem Solution

Dirt Clean like plastic parts

Take special care with...

Headlights/tail lights

●

Do not clean the headlights/tail lights with

a dry cl

oth or sponge

●

Do not use cl

eaning products that contain

alcohol. Risk of cracks!

Wheels

●

Do not use for paint wax or other abrasive

products.

●

If the protective coating on the paint of the

rim has been damaged due to stone impacts,

scratches, etc., the damage should be re-

paired immediately.

Camera lenses

●

Do not use hot or warm water to remove ice

or snow from the camera lenses. Risk of

cracking the lens!

●

To clean the camera lens, never use abra-

sive cleaning products or products with alco-

hol. Risk of scratches and cracks!

Windows

●

Remove snow and ice from windows and

exterior mirrors with a plastic scraper only. To

avoid scratches, the scraper should only be

pushed in one direction and not moved to

and fro.

●

Never remove snow or ice from windows

and rearview mirrors with warm or hot water.

Risk of cracks on the windows!

●

To prevent damage to the heating of the

rear window, do not put stickers over the

heating elements.

Covers/trims

●

Do not use cleaning products or chrome

based cleaning agents.

Paint

●

The vehicle must be free from dirt and dust

before applying wax or care products. Risk of

scratches!

●

Do not apply wax or care products if the

vehicle is exposed to direct sunlight. Risk of

damaging the paint job!

●

The ambient rust deposits must not be re-

moved through friction. Risk of damaging the

paint job!

●

Remove cosmetic products and sunlight

immediately. Risk of damaging the paint job!

Displays/instrument panel

●

The screens, the instrument panel and the

trim around it must not be cleaned dry. Risk of

scratches!

●

Make sure that the instrument panel is

switched off and cooled down before clean-

ing.

●

Make sure that no liquid leaks between the

instrument panel and the trim. Risk of dam-

age!

Control panels

●

Make sure that no liquid leaks into the con-

trol panels. Risk of damage!

Seat belts

●

Do not remove the seat belts to clean them.

●

Seat belts and their components must nev-

er be cleaned with chemical products, nor

should they be allowed to come into contact

with corrosive liquids, solvents or sharp ob-

jects. Risk of damaging the fabric!

●

If you find any damage to the belt webbing,

belt fittings, the belt retractor or the buckle,

ask your specialised workshop to replace the

belt in question.

374

Vehicle maintenance

Fabrics/artificial leather/Alcantara leath-

●

Do not treat artificial leather/Alcantara

eather with l

eather cl

eaning products, sol-

vents, wax polish, shoe cream, stain removers

or similar products.

●

If the stain is very hard to remove, take the

vehicle to a specialised workshop to have it

removed there. This will prevent damage.

●

Do not use steam cleaners, brushes, hard

sponges, etc. to clean.

●

Do not turn on seat heating* to dry the

seats.

●

Sharp objects on clothing, such as zips, riv-

ets or belts can damage the surface.

●

Open Velcro, e.g. on clothes can damage

the seat upholstery. Make sure that Velcro

fasteners are closed.

Natural leather

●

Never use solvents, wax polish, shoe cream,

spot removers or similar products on leather.

●

Sharp objects on clothing, such as zips, riv-

ets or belts can damage the surface.

●

Do not use steam cleaners, brushes, hard

sponges, etc. to clean.

●

Do not turn on seat heating* to dry the

seats.

●

Avoid exposing leather to direct sunlight for

long periods, otherwise it may tend to lose

some of its colour. If the car is left for a pro-

longed period in the bright sun, it is best to

cover the leather.

WARNING

Do not use water-repellent coatings on the

windscreen. In bad visibility conditions

such as humid w

eather, darkness or when

the sun is in its lowest point, visibility may

be impacted. Risk of accident! Such coat-

ings can also cause the windscreen wiper

blades to make noise.

Note

●

Remains of insects can be remo

ved much

more easily with previously treated paint.

●

Regular car care treatments can prevent

deposits of ambient rust.

Remove the vehicle from traffic

If you want to leave your vehicle stationary

or a l

ong period of time

, contact a qualified

workshop. They will gladly inform you about

the necessary measures, such as anti-corro-

sion protection, Service and storage.

Also take into account instructions regarding

the vehicle's battery

›››

page 354.

375

Information for the user

Inf

ormation f

or the user

ent Data Recorder

Description and operation

Your vehicle has an event data recorder

(EDR).

The EDR’s function is to r

ecord data in the

event of a mild or serious accident. These da-

ta are used to support the analysis of how dif-

ferent vehicle systems behaved.

The EDR records, over a reduced time range

(normally 10 seconds or less), dynamic driv-

ing data and data from the restraint systems,

such as:

●

How different vehicle systems worked.

●

Whether the driver and the occupants were

wearing their seat belts.

●

How har

d the acceleration or brake pedal

was pressed.

●

Vehicle speed.

These data will provide a better understand-

ing of the circumstances of the accident.

Data from the driving assist systems are also

recorded. This includes data such as whether

the systems were inactive or active and if

such action had an impact on the vehicle’s

dynamic behaviour, changing its path in the

aforementioned situations, accelerating or

decelerating the vehicle.

Depending on vehicle equipment, this in-

cludes data from systems such as:

●

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

●

Emergency braking assistance system

(Front Assist).

●

Park Pilot system

●

Parking aid system (Park Assist).

●

Lane Assist

The EDR data are only recorded in specific

accident situations. No data are recorded in

normal driving conditions.

No audio or video data inside or around the

vehicle are recorded. Under no circumstan-

ces are personal data such as name, age, or

gender recorded. Nevertheless, third parties

(such as criminal proceedings authorities)

may relate the contents of the EDR data to

other data sources and create a personal

reference in the context of an accident inves-

tigation.

In order to read the EDR data it is necessary

to access (if legally permitted to do so) the

vehicle's ODB (“On-Board-Diagnose”) inter-

face while the vehicle is switched on.

SEAT will not have access to EDR data unless

the owner (or, in “Leasing” cases, the lessee

or hirer) gives their consent. There may be ex-

ceptions to this, depending on legal or con-

tractual provisions.

Due to legal requirements in safety-related

products, SEAT may use the EDR data for

field research and in order to improve vehicle

system quality. Any data used for the purpo-

ses of research will be treated anonymously

(in other words, no reference will be made to

the vehicle, their owner or the lessee/hirer).

Other important information

Recycling of electrical or electron-

ic devices

All electrical or electronic devices (EED) that

e not permanently fitt

ed in the v

ehicle must

be marked with the following symbol:



This symbol indicates that EED must not be

discarded as home waste but through selec-

tive waste collection.

376

Information for the user

Information about the EU Di-

ectiv

e 2014/53/EU

Simplified EU compliance decl

ara-

tion

Your vehicle has different radioelectrical devi-

ces. The manufactur

ers of these devices de-

clare that they comply with Directive

2014/53/EU when legally required.

The full text of the EU compliance declaration

is available online at the following address:

www.seat.com/generalinfo



Table of correspondences

The table of correspondences will help you to

associat

e the name of the de

vice in the dec-

aration of compliance with the features of

the vehicle and the terminology used in the

on-board documentation.

Features of the

vehicle

Name of the de

vice

according to the dec-

laration of compli-

ance

Radiofrequency re-

mote control (v

ehicle)

FS09, FS12A, FS12P, FS1477,

FS94

Features of the

vehicle

Name of the de

vice

according to the dec-

laration of compli-

ance

Radio frequency re-

mote control (auxili-

ary heat

er)

Sender STH SEAT -

50000914

Telestart

Auxiliary heating 50000864 / D208L VW

Telestart

Bluetooth MIB2 Entry

MIB Standard 2

MIB2 Main-Unit

A580 / A270

Wireless hotspot MIB2 Main-Unit

A580 / A270

Keyless Access Sys-

MQB-B B

Radar sensors f

or as-

sistance systems

ARS4-B

MRRevo14F

BSD3.0

Central control unit 5WK50254

5WK50474

Features of the

vehicle

Name of the de

vice

according to the dec-

laration of compli-

ance

Infotainment system MIB2 Entry

MIB Standard 2

MIB2 Main-Unit

A580 / A270

Wireless charging WCH-183

WCH-185

5G0.980.611

Connection to the ex-

ernal antenna of the

car

UMTS/GSM-MMC

UMTS/GSM-MMC-AG2

Instrument panel eNSF

Immobilizer integrated in

dashboard module

instrument cluster

Antenna FM/AM Antenna Base

Antennas MQB27 Small/Big

family

Antennas KSA Small Fam III

5Q0.035.507 Roof Antenna

GNSS Antenna VAG

720166002

8S7.035.503.B

377

Information for the user

Features of the

vehicle

Name of the de

vice

according to the dec-

laration of compli-

ance

Antenna amplifiers 6F0.035.225

6F9.035.225

3V5.

035.577.A

7N0.035.552.J

7N0.035.552.K

7N0.035.552.Q

5F4.035.225

5F4.035.225.A

5F4.035.225.B

5F9.035.225

5F9.035.225.A

5F9.035.225.B

575.035.225

575.035.225.A

575.035.225.B

Addresses of the manufacturers

According to the Directive 2014/53/EU, all

rele

vant components must include the ad-

dress of the manufacturer.

The address of the manufacturers of compo-

nents that, due to their size or nature, cannot

include a sticker are listed below, as long as it

is legally required:

Radioelectrical

equipment fitted

in the vehicl

Addresses of the

manufacturers

Radiofrequency remote

control key

Hell

a KGaA Hueck & Co.

Rixbecker Straße 75

59552 Lippst

adt,

GERMANY

Radioelectrical

equipment fitted

in the vehicl

Addresses of the

manufacturers

Radio frequency re-

mote control (auxiliary

heat

er)

Digades gmbH

Äußere Weberstr

aße 20

02763 Zittau, GERMANY

Webasto Thermo &

Comfort SE

Friedrichshafener Str

. 9

82205 Gilching, GERMANY

Radar sensors for as-

sistance systems

ADC Aut

omotive Distance

Control Systems GmbH

eter-Dornier-Straße 10

88131 Lindau, GERMANY

Robert Bosch GmbH

Postfach 16 61

1226 Leonberg,

GERMANY

Frequency bands, station power

Radioelectrical equipment

Frequency band Max. station power Valid for models

Radiofrequency remote control (vehicle)

433.05-434.78 MHz 10 mW (ERP)

All SEAT models

433.05-434.79 MHz 10 mW

868.0-868.6 MHz 25 mW

434.42 MHz 32 µW

Radio frequency remote control (auxiliary heater)

868.7-869.2 MHz (869.0 MHz) 0.24 mW, / –6.3 dBm e.r.p. Ateca

868.0-868.6 MHz (868.3 MHz) 3.1 mW, / 4.8 dBm e.r.p. Alhambra

378

Information for the user

Radioelectrical equipment

Frequency band Max. station power Valid for models

Auxiliary heating

868.0-868.6 MHz (868.3 MHz) 23.5 mW, / 13.7 dBm e.r.p. Alhambra

868.7-869.2 MHz (869.0 MHz) 23.5 mW, / 13.7 dBm e.r.p. Ateca

Bluethooth

2402-2480 MHz 6 dBm

All SEAT models

2400-2483.5 MHz 10 dBm

Wireless hotspot 2400-2483.5 MHz 10 dBm Leon and Ateca

Connection to the external antenna of the car

GSM 900: 880-915 MHz 33 dBm

Ibiza, Arona, Leon, Ateca and Alhambra

GSM 1800: 1710-1785 MHz 30 dBm

WCDMA FDD I: 1920-1980 MHz 24 dBm

WCDMA FDD lll: 1710-1785 MHz 24 dBm

Keyless Access 434.42 MHz 32 µW Ibiza, Toledo, Arona, Leon and Ateca

Radar sensors for assistance systems

76 GHz-77 GHz

28.2 dBm Toledo, Leon and Alhambra

35.0 dBm Ibiza, Arona and Ateca

24050-24250 MHz 20 dBm Arona, Ateca and Alhambra

Wireless charging 110-120 kHz 10 W Ibiza, Arona, Leon and Ateca

Instrument panel 125 kHz 40 dBµA/m All SEAT models

The commissioning or authorisation of radioelectrical technology may be restricted in some European countries, forbidden or only allowed with additional requirements.

379

Technical data

echnical specifications

Impor

ant information

Important

The information in the vehicle documentation

always t

akes precedence over the informa-

tion in this Instruction Manual.

All technical specifications provided in this

documentation are valid for the standard

model in Spain.

The figures may be different depending

whether additional equipment is fitted, for dif-

ferent models, for special vehicles and for

other countries.

Abbreviations used in the Technical Speci-

fications section

kW Kilowatt, engine power measurement.

Pferdestärke (horsepower), formerly

used to denote engine po

wer.

rpm, 1/min Revolutions per minute - engine speed.

Nm Newton metres, unit of engine torque.

Cetane number, indication of the die-

sel combustion power

RON

Research octane number, indication of

the knock resistance of petr

ol.

Vehicle identification data

Fig. 312 Chassis number.

VIN in the Easy Connect

●

Select:





button > SETTINGS > Service

> Chassis number.

Chassis number

The VIN is l

ocat

ed in the Easy Connect and

under the windscr

een, on the driver side

›››

Fig. 312. Also the VIN is located in the en-

gine compartment, on the left-hand side in

the direction of travel. The number is en-

graved on the top side rail, and is partially

covered.

Type plate

The type plate is located on the right side

door pillar. Vehicles for certain export coun-

tries do not have a type plate.

Identifying letters

The identifying letters of the engine can be

viewed on the instrument panel when the en-

gine is switched off and the ignition is on.

●

Hold down the button 

on the dash

panel f

or mor

e than 15 seconds.

Inf

ormation on fuel con-

sumption

Fuel consumption

Approved consumption values are derived

om measur

ements perf

ormed or supervised

by certified EU laboratories, according to the

legislation in force at the time (for more

380

Technical specifications

information, see the Publications Office of the

Eur

opean Union on the EUR-L

x website: ©

European Union, http://eur-lex.europa.eu/)

and apply to the specified vehicle character-

istics.

The values relating to fuel consumption and

emissions can be found in the documen-

tation provided to the purchaser of the vehi-

cle at the time of purchase.

Fuel consumption and CO

emissions de-

pend on the equipment/features of each indi-

vidual vehicle, as well as on the driving style,

road conditions, traffic conditions, environ-

mental conditions, load or number of passen-

gers.

Note

In practice, and considering all the factors

mentioned here, consumption v

alues can

differ from those calculated in the current

European regulations.

Weights

Kerb weight refers to the basic model with a

fuel t

ank fill

ed t

o 90% capacity and without

optional extras. The figure quoted includes 75

kg to allow for the weight of the driver.

Special versions, optional equipment fittings

or retro-fitting accessories will increase the

weight of the vehicle

›››

WARNING

●

Please note that the centr

e of gravity

may shift when transporting heavy objects;

this may affect vehicle handling and lead

to an accident. Always adjust your speed

and driving style to suit road conditions

and requirements.

●

Never exceed the gross axle weight rat-

ing or the gross vehicle weight rating. If the

permissible axle load or the permissible to-

tal weight is exceeded, the driving charac-

teristics of the vehicle may change, which

could lead to accidents, injuries and dam-

age to the vehicle.

Trailer mode

ail

er weights

Trailer weight

The tr

ail

er w

eights and drawbar loads ap-

proved are selected in intensive trials accord-

ing to precisely defined criteria. The ap-

proved trailer weights are valid for vehicles in

the EU for maximum speeds of 80 km/h (50

mph) (in certain circumstances up to

100 km/h (62 mph)). The figures may be dif-

ferent in other countries. All data in the official

vehicle documentation takes precedence

over these data at all times

›››

Drawbar loads

The maximum permitt

ed dr

awbar l

oad on the

ball coupling of the towing bracket must not

exceed 88 kg.

In the interest of road safety, we recommend

that you always tow approaching the maxi-

mum drawbar load. The response of the trail-

er on the road will be poor, if the drawbar

load is too small.

If the maximum permissible drawbar load

cannot be met (e.g. with small, empty and

light-weight single axle trailers or tandem

axle trailers with a wheelbase of less than 1

metre), a minimum of 4% of the actual trailer

weight is legally required for the drawbar

load.

WARNING

●

For safet

y reasons, you should not drive

at speeds above 80 km/h (50 mph) when

towing a trailer. This also applies in coun-

tries where higher speeds are permitted.

●

Never exceed the maximum trailer

weights or the drawbar load. If the permis-

sible axle load or the permissible total

weight is exceeded, the driving character-

istics of the vehicle may change, leading to

accidents, injuries and damage to the vehi-

cle.

381

Technical data

Wheels

e pr

essure, snow chains and

wheel bolts

Tyre pressure

The sticker with the tyr

e pressure values can

be found on the back of the left front door

frame. The tyre pressure values given there

are for cold tyres. The slightly raised pres-

sures of warm tyres must not be reduced.

›››

The pressure for wint

er t

es is 0.2 bar

(2.9 psi / 20 kPa) higher than that of summer

tyres.

Snow chains

Snow chains may be fitted only to the front

wheels, and only for the following tyres:

215/60 R16 Chains with links of maximum 15 mm

215/55 R17 Chains with links of maximum 15 mm

215/50 R18 Chains with links of maximum 15 mm

Other dimensions do not allow chains

Wheel bolts

After the wheels hav

e been changed, the

tightening torque of the wheel bolts should

be checked as soon as possible with a torque

wrench

›››

. The tightening torque for steel

and all

oy wheel

s is

140 Nm.

WARNING

●

Check the tyre pr

essure at least once per

month. Checking the tyre pressure is very

important. If the tyre pressure is too high or

too low, there is an increased danger of ac-

cidents - particularly at high speeds.

●

If the tightening torque of the wheel bolts

is too low, they could loosen while the vehi-

cle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the

tightening torque is too high, the wheel

bolts and threads can be damaged.

Note

We recommend that you ask your Techni-

cal Service for information about appr

opri-

ate wheel, tyre and snow chain size.

382

Technical specifications

Engine data

etr

ol engines

1.0 TSI Start-Stop 1.4 EcoTSI Start-Stop

Power output in kW (PS) at 1/min 85 (115)/5,000-5,500 110 (150)/5,000-6,000

Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 200/2,000-3,500 250/1,500-3,500

No. of cylinders/displacement (cm

) 3/999 4/1,395

Fuel Super 95 / Normal 91 (with a slight power loss) ROZ

Gearbox manual DSG DSG 4Drive

Top speed (km/h) 181 (5) 198 (6) 189 (5)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 7.1 6.0 5.9

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 10.7 8.6 8.9

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,850 1,920 2,010

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,313 1,375 1,476

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 940 990 1,010

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 940 980 1,050

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 650 680 730

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,500 1,800 1,950

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,300 1,600 1,900

383

Technical data

Petrol engines

1.5 TSI Start-Stop 2.0 TSI Start-Stop

Power output in kW (PS) at 1/min 110 (150)/5,000-6,000 140 (190)/4,200-6,000

Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 250/1,500-3,500 320/1,450-4,200

No. of cylinders/displacement (cm

) 4/1498 4/1,984

Fuel Super 95 / Normal 91 (with a slight power loss) ROZ

Gearbox manual DSG DSG 4Drive DSG 4Drive

Top speed (km/h) 201 (5) 198 (6) 194 (5) 210 (5)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 5.9 6.0 6.2 4.7

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 8.5 8.6 9.2 7.1

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,900 1,920 2,050 2,080

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,355 1,370 1,502 1,541

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg)

a) a) a)

1,070

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg)

a) a) a)

1,060

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 670 680 750 750

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,850 1,800 1,950 2,000

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,800 1,600 1,900 1,900

Data not available as this edition goes to print.

384

Technical specifications

Diesel engines

1.6 TDI CR Start-Stop 2.0 TDI

Power output in kW (PS) at 1/min 85 (115)/3,250-4,000 105 (143)/3,500-4,000

Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 250/1,500-3,250 320/1,750-3,000

No. of cylinders/displacement (cm

) 4/1,598 4/1,968

Fuel Diesel according to standard EN 590, min. 51 CN

Gearbox manual DSG DSG

Top speed (km/h) 184 (6) 184 (6) 192 (5)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 8.2 8.2 6.4

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 11.5 11.5 9.2

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,970 1,990 1,970

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,428 1,446 1,435

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 1,030 1,030 1,080

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 930 930 940

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 710 720 710

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,700 1,700 1,900

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,500 1,500 1,800

385

Technical data

Diesel engines

2.0 TDI CR Start-Stop

Power output in kW (PS) at 1/min 110 (150)/3,500-4,000 140 (190)/3,500-4,000

Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 340/1,750-3,000 400/1,750-3,250

No. of cylinders/displacement (cm

) 4/1,968 4/1,968

Fuel Diesel according to standard EN 590, min. 51 CN

Gearbox manual manual 4Drive DSG DSG 4Drive

Top speed (km/h) 202 (6) 196 (6) 196 (6) 212 (6)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 6.3 6.0 6.3 4.7

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 8.5 9.0 8.5 7.5

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,990 2,120 2,010 2,150

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,453 1,578 1,483 1,578

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 1,060 1,080 1,090 1,120

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 940 1,070 930 1,060

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 720 750 740 750

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,900 2,100 1,900 2,100

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,900 2,100 1,800 2,100

386

Technical specifications

Vehicle data

Dimensions

Fig. 313

Dimensions.

Fig. 314

Angles and ground clearance

387

Technical data

›››

Fig. 313,

›››

Fig. 314 At

eca Ateca 4Drive

A Front projection (mm) 868 868

B Rear projection (mm) 857 865

C Wheelbase (mm) 2,638 2,630

D Length (mm) 4,363

E Front

ack (mm) 1,576 1,57

F Back

track (mm) 1,541 1,544

G Width (mm) 1,841

H Height at kerb w

eight (mm)

1,601

1,615

1,61

1,625

I Ground clearance between the axles (mm) 176 189

J Front projection angle limited by the bumper maximum 19.4° maximum 20.6°

K Rear projection angle limited by the bumper maximum 27.9° maximum 25.5°

Turning radius (m) 10.8

This data will change depending on the type of wheel rim.

Distance to the roof.

Dimension to the roof bars.

388

Index

Numbers and Symbol

4Driv

e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

267

ABS

see Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

ACC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

radar sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167, 340

Active cylinder management (ACT)

status indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

Adaptive Cruise Control

control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

deactivating temporarily . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

function for preventing overtaking in an in-

side lane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

instructions on the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

radar sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

special driving situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

AdBlue

information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

maximum filling capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

refilling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

Adjust

Vehicle menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Adjusting

front head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

rear head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Adjusting the head restraints

front head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Adjustment

front head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

rear head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Airbag covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 74

activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

deactivation of front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 76

functioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

head-protection airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

knee airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Air conditioning

auxiliary heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42, 176

heated windscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

manual air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

user instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Air outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Air recirculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Alcantara leather: cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

Alternator

warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

AM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Ambient lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Android Auto™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198, 200

Anti-freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

Anti-puncture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53, 85

Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53, 85

check after 10 minutes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Anti-puncture set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Anti-slip regulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

Anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127, 137

trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

vehicle interior monitoring and anti-tow

protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Anti-theft security system . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 127, 135

Anti-theft system

trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

Anti-tow protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Anti-trap function

sun blind (sunroof) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

App

SEAT Media Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Apple CarPlay™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198, 200

Area view system (Top View Camera)

special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324

Aspects to note before setting off . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Assistance systems

ACC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

Adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

Auto Hold function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

blind spot detector (BSD) with parking as-

sistance (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Emergency Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

389

Index

emergency braking assistance (Front As-

sist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

279

enabl

e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

122

fatigue detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Hill Descent Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

parking assistant (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

parking system Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

rear parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Top View Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

traffic jam assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

traffic sign detection system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

tyre monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

tyre monitoring indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

tyre monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

Assisted starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Audible warning signal

control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

unfastened safety belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Auto Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

Auto Hold function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

Auto Lock (central locking) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Automatic car washes

switching the Auto Hold function off . . . . . . . 274

Automatic car wash tunnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371

Automatic dipped beam control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

downhill speed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

emergency program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

kick-down feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

launch control program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

manual release of the selector lever . . . . . . . . 41

safety interlock for ignition key . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

selector lever lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

steering wheel with gear shift paddles . . . . 255

tiptronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252, 255

towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Automatic transmission

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

AUX-IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

external audio source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Auxiliary heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

activating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

electric consumers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

operating instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

remote control range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

special features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

things to note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Average consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

replacement in the remote control (auxili-

ary heater) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Before setting off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Belt tensioners

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Belt tightening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Bench seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Bicycle rack

fitting on the retractable tow hitch . . . . . . . . 333

maximum load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

Biodiesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

Blind spot detector (BSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

driving situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

indication in the external rear view mirror . 299

malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

Bluetooth®

connect audio source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347, 349

opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 347

Boot shelf

store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

store the shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

brake servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

electronic parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

emergency braking function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

new brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Brake system

warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Braking

front assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

BSD

see Blind spot detector (BSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

BSD Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

Camera

cleanliness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

390

Index

Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

AdBlue t

ank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

345

windscr

een washer water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354

CCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

CD-ROM player (navigation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

central locking switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

emergency locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Panoramic sliding/tilting sunroof . . . . . . . . . . 143

remote control key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

selective unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Central wheel trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Centre console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Cetane number (diesel fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

subsequent work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

dipped beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

main beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

number plate light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

rear bulb in the side panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

rear light in the rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

turn signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Changing gear

engaging gears (manual gearbox) . . . . . . . . 251

Changing the blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Changing the wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Charging the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

Checking levels

engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349

Child-proof locking

electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25, 82

Child seats

categorisation into groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25, 81

securing with the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Top Tether system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28, 31

Cleaning

Alcantara leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

carbon fibre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372, 374

control panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

decorative sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

exhaust tail pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

fabrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

headlights / tail lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

high pressure cleaners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370

Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

paint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

plastic parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

sensors/camera lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

special care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374

the radio screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

trims/covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372, 373

washing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370

wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Clocks

analogue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

digital . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

set time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 347

rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

sun blind (sunroof) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Clutch (warning lamp) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Coming Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Coming Home function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Communication between the Infotainment

system and mobile devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Full Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

SEAT Media Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

WLAN point of access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Connectivity Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39, 122

ABS anti-blocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

applying the brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

ASR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248, 250

audible warning signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

blind spot detector (BSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

blocking of the steering column . . . . . . . . . . . 261

brake systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

cruise control system (CCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

391

Index

depress the brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

diesel pr

eheating syst

em . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

265

EDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

electronic parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

emission control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

engine management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248, 250

gear change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Hill Descent Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

parking assistant (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265, 266

refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

remote control (auxiliary heater) . . . . . . . . . . 183

seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

tow hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332

towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

tyre monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

Control lamps

engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Fuel reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

refuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Controls and displays

general instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Controls for the windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 142

Controls on the steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Coolant

checking level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352

Cooling system

checking coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352

topping up coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352

Correct position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Correct sitting position

driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

front passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

rear seat passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40, 274

control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

Cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

Cylinder deactivation

see Active cylinder management (ACT) . . . 108

DAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Dangers in not using the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Data label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380

Data transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Deactivating the front passenger front airbag . 23

Deactivation of front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Defective bulbs

changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Diesel

engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349

particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

preheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

Diesel fuel

particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

Digital instrument

panel (SEAT Digital Cockpit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Digital SEAT Cockpit

navigation map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387

Direction of rotation

tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Display indications

compass indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

driving recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

status of active cylinder management

(ACT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Display of traffic signs on the instrument

panel

activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Disposal

belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Distance control

see Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

Door cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Door handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Door release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Doors

childproof locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Downhill speed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Downhill speed control function . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Drink holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

392

Index

Driver

see Corr

ect sitting position . . . . . . . . .

64, 65, 66

Driv

er-side general instrument panel

left-hand drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

right-hand drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Driving

driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

driving through water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

economical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

safe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Driving abroad

headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Driving data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Driving in winter

trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Driving mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

Driving on flooded roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

Driving profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

DSG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

Duplicate keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Dust and pollen filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

DVD

DVD video mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Dynamic lights range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

E10

see Ethanol (fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

Easy Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Easy Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

things to note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

EDL

see Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

Electrical accessories

see Power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 142

convenience opening and closing . . . . . . . . . 143

Electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

Electronic immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

electronic parking brake

lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Electronic parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Electronic self-locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . 248

Electronic torque management (XDS) . . . . . . . 249

Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

automatic gearbox emergency program . . 259

bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

emergency towing of the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 58

fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

manual unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

puncture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

replacing a blown fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

replacing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Emergency Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

see Emergency Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

Emergency braking assistance system

indications on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

radar sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

switching off temporarily . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

Emergency braking function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Emergency braking warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Emergency operation

front passenger door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Emission control system

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

Engine

assisted starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

noises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

preheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

running in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

starting up (driver messages with the me-

chanical contact) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

switching off (key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

Engine and ignition

automatic ignition switch-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

My Beat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

preheating the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

starting the engine with Press & Drive . . . . . 242

stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Engine breakdown

Control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

393

Index

Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347, 349

batt

ery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

50, 354

ake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 353

coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 352

engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47, 351

opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 347

safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

windscreen washer reservoir . . . . . . . . . . 50, 354

Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

G 12 plus-plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

G 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Engine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383

Engine management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47, 349

changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349, 351

checking oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

inspection service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349

maintenance intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349

specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48, 349

topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351

Engine oil pressure

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

Environment

ecological driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

environmental compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

Environmental tips

filling the tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342

refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167, 340

ESC

electronic stability control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . 248

Multi-collision Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Sport Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Ethanol (fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376

Exhaust purification system for vehicles with

diesel engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

Exiting a parking space with Park Assist . . . . . . 312

Exterior lighting

changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Exterior mirrors

adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Exterior rear-view mirrors

adjusting the exterior rear-view mirrors . . . . 159

exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7, 8

External aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

Fabrics: cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

Fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Fatigue detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Filling the tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Fluid level control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

FM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Fog

lights with cornering light function . . . . . . . . . 151

Fog light bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Fog lights with cornering light function . . . . . . . 151

Folding table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Four-wheel drive

snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

Frequency band

AM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

DAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

FM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 76

Front armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Front Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

indications on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

Front passenger front airbag

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

deactivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Front seats

manual adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47, 343

consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380

diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

Fuel consumption

engine cut-off due to inertia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

Why does fuel consumption increase? . . . . 266

Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Fuel tank cap

opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

394

Index

Fuel tank flap

opening and cl

osing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Full

-LED Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Full Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

pairing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Function buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Function Leaving Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51, 92

fuse box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93, 94

identifying blown fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

identifying by colours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

preparation before replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Gear-change indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

Gearbox DSG

see Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

Gearbox lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Gear change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

manual gear change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Gear engaged . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Gear recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

Gear shift paddles (automatic gearbox) . . . . 255

General

instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

General instrument panel

control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

controls and displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349

Glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Handbrake

see Electronic parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 152

HDC

see Hill Descent Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

Head-on collisions and their laws of physics . . 71

Head-protection airbags

description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Headlights

changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

headlight washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

front head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

rear head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Heated

windscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Heated rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44, 46

Heating and fresh air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Hill Descent Control

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

How to jump start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Identification of the fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

Identifying letters on the engine

show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 239

Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 239

see Starter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

Incorrect position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Indications on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

ACT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Emergency braking assistance system

(Front Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

identifying letters of the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

SEAT Drive Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

traffic signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

tyre monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

warning and information messages . . . . . . . . 112

Indications on the screen

doors, bonnet and rear lid open . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Outside temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

positions of the selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

speed warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Inertia mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Information profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Infotainment knobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Infotainment system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35, 186

CD player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

function buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

general instructions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

general panel of the device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

input mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Jukebox (SSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

395

Index

memory card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

on-scr

een k

eypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

193

safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

text input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

update navigation data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Infotainment System

AUX-IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Bluetooth® audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

changing the volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

general panel of the device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Images main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

infotainment knobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

initial configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Internet access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

memory buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

mute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Radio mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

rotary knobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

scroll knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

scroll (display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

search in lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

sharing a WLAN connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

station logos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

switch on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Telephone mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Vehicle menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

verification boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

WLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

WLAN audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349, 367

Inspection service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105, 106

control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105, 106

display indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

instructions shown on the screen . . . . . . . . . . 110

instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105, 106

service interval indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

structure of the menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

use with the multifunction steering wheel . . 121

use with the windscreen wiper lever . . . . . . . . 121

Instrument panel display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106, 108

Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Interference from a mobile telephone . . . . . . . 190

Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Interior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

ISOFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28, 30

ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28, 30

Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 85

mounting points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Journey data display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Jukebox (SSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Key-operated switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Keyless-Entry

see Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Keyless-Exit

see Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Keyless Access

Easy Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Keyless-Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Keyless-Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Press & Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

unlocking and locking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 131

Keyless Access locking and ignition system

see Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Keys

assign key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

car key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

driver messages (mechanical contact) . . . 239

remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

replacing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

spare key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

synchronising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 129

Kick-down

automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

Knee airbag

safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

Control and warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

Lane Assist system

see Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

Launch control (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . 257

Leaving Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Lifting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Light Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Lighting of the instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

396

Index

Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 147

audibl

e signal

s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

147

AUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

coming home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

cornering light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

daytime running lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

dipped beam headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

leaving home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

light control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

lighting of instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

lighting of the controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

lights range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

main beam lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

main beam lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

main beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

motorway light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

parking lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

reading lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

welcome light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Lights range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Load compartment in the luggage compart-

ment

see Loading the luggage compartment . . . 168

Loading the luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . 168

Loading the vehicle

fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

tailboard for transporting long items . . . . . . . 170

trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

Locking and unlocking

in the door cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Locking the front passenger door manually . . . 16

Luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

automatic locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

electric opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

luggage compartment lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

luggage compartment variable floor . . . . . . 172

manual release mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

net bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

special characteristics of the electric rear

lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Seat Ateca 2018

Product's Documents

User Manual

Specifications

Seat ATECA 2018 Questions and Answers

Related Products

Klarstein 52046250 Lil'Loo removable children's toilet seat

Maxi-Cosi VB024OXPE Oxford Modular Stroller with 180° Rotating Infant Seat for Versatile Travel

Maxi-Cosi VB023OXMI Oxford Modular Stroller with Mico Pro Infant Car Seat in Black

Maxi-Cosi VB022OXAM Oxford Modular Stroller with Ambra Ultra-Lightweight Infant Car Seat for Easy Travel and Convenience

Maxi-Cosi Andi 360° Rotating All-in-One Convertible Car Seat with Vehicle Seat Protector Features Safety and Comfort

Vevor XF8W217 Shop Stool Adjustable Garage Seat 300 lbs Load with Backrest & Wheels